You are on page 1of 3325

05–835

DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

0543F–04

ABS WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP)
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
If the ECU detects trouble, it will prohibit ABS control, turn on the ABS warning light, and store the DTC.
Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–836
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Combination Meter
B–W

22
C11

9
C10
17
C10

W–B (*4)
J16
W–B J/C
(*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B
J/C

18
DA

C A
B–W
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

IGN

2
DH

AM2
1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4)
A

B–R
I13
Ignition SW

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1
1
1A

36
S1 WA

R–Y
J17
J/C

ABS

C A
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

17
IE1

R–Y

1
1
IE4 IP1
(*3) (*4)

B–R
4

AM1

IG1

6

Engine Room J/B No.4
B–G (*1)

1
4A

1
4B

B–G (*1)
W–B (*3 *2)

Engine Room R/B No.3
W–B (*3 *1)
B (*2)

3

3

B (*2)
A
J15
J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
*3: LHD
*4: RHD
F45135

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–837
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS WARNING LIGHT)
Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the ABS warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–
held tester.
OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

2
(a)

INSPECT ABS WARNING LIGHT
See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1.
NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER
ASSEMBLY

OK

3
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTORL ECU – CMBINATION
METER)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–827
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

AlwaysON MALFUNCTION IN ABS ECU

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition
Either of the following 1 or 2 is detected:
1. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the ECU.
2. There is a malfunction in the ECU internal circuit.
3. Malfunction in the circuit of meter or ABS warning light
circuit.

Trouble Area 
Battery 
IC regulator 
ABS warning light circuit 
Power source circuit 
Skid control ECU

HINT:
There is a case that hand–held tester cannot be used when ECU is abnormal.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

0543D–04

05–828
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Driver Side J/B
ECU–IG

18

R–W

D8
IG1 Relay
3

5

1
DN

G

C

J10 J20
(*3) (*4)

J/C

G

C

22
R–W

J10 J20
(*3) (*4)

R–W

IE1

14
S1 IG1

B–L (*2)
B–G (*1)
B–G (*1)

Engine Room J/B No.4
1

B–G (*1)

4B

Engine Room R/B No.3
B (*2)

ALT

1
4A

1

2

3

B (*2)

ALT
3

1

1

W (*2)

3

2

1
4D

ED1

Combination Meter
9
R–Y
C10
22
C11

17
IE1

R–Y

36
S1

WA

J17 J/C

17
C10

W–B (*4)

W–B (*4)
A

A
W–B (*3)

ABS

Driver Side J/B
B–W

C A
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

J/C

C A
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

B–W

18
DA

IG1

AM2
1
1

B–R

2

1
1
IE4 IP1
(*3) (*4)
J16 J/C

W–B
(*3, *1)
IL
Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

B–R
4 AM2

IG2 6

W–B (*3)

W–B (*3, *2)
FL MAIN

B–R

I13
Ignition SW

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1
1
1A

2
DH

A

IO

*3: LHD
*4: RHD

A J15
J/C

A

W–B (*4)
W–B

IK

W–B

10
S1 GND2

W–B

6
S1 GND1

EA

F45140

05–829
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

CHECK DTC FOR ABS
Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–756).
YES

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT
CODE

NO

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR SECURELY CONNECTED
NO

CONNECT CONNECTOR TO ECU

YES

3

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(IG1 TERMINAL)

WITH USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
(a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester.
OK:
”Normal” is displayed.
WITHOUT USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
GND
(a) Disconnect the skid control connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of
the skid control ECU harness side connector.
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V
IG1

OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM

C94397

NG

4

INSPECT BATTERY
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–830
DIAGNOSTICS

5
(a)

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – SKID CONTROL ECU)
Check for a short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the DLC3 and skid control
ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6
(a)

INSPECT ABS WARNING LIGHT
See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1.
NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER
ASSEMBLY

OK

7
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION
METER)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–831
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

AlwaysON MALFUNCTION IN ECU(VSC WARNING
LIGHT)

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the ECU stores DTC, the VSC warning light illuminates on the combination meter.
DTC No.

Always ON

DTC Detecting Condition

Malfunction in skid control ECU

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area 
Battery 
IC regulator 
Power source circuit 
Skid control ECU

0543E–04

05–832
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM

G C
J10 J20
(*3) (*4)

R–W
Combination Meter
B–W

22
C11

J/C

16
C11

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator
22
14
R–W
IE1
S1 IG1

G C
R–W
J10 J20
(*3) (*4)

6
34
W–R
IE1
S1 VSCW

W–R

VSC
Driver Side J/B
J/C

C A
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

C A
B–W
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

IGN

18
DA
18
DB
IG1 Relay

1
DN

B–G (*1)

5
DH

I13
Ignition SW

2
DH

ECU–IG

5

3

1

2

9
DA
AM1

1
DH

G–Y

3 AM1

IG1

1
G–R
B–R
Engine Room R/B No.1 &
Engine Room J/B No.1

IG2 6

4 AM2

B–R
B–L (*2) 1
ED1

W (*2)

1
1
IE4 IP1
(*3) (*4)

AM2
B–R

1

1
1

2

1A

B–G (*1)
B (*2)

Engine Room R/B No.3

Engine Room J/B No.4
3

1
ALT

4A
B–G
(*1)

1
4D

3

1
4B

ALT

3

2

B (*2)

1

1

2

FL MAIN

W–B

B–G (*1)
W–B

Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV

IJ

W–B

10
S1 GND2

W–B

6
S1 GND1

EA

*3: LHD
*4: RHD
F45147

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–833
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

CHECK DTC FOR VSC
Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–756).
YES

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT
CODE

NO

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR SECURELY CONNECTED
NO

CONNECT CONNECTOR TO ECU

YES

3

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(IG1 TERMINAL)

WITH USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
(a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester.
OK:
”Normal” is displayed.
WITHOUT USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
GND
(a) Disconnect the skid control connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of
the skid control ECU harness side connector.
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V
IG1

OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM

C94397

NG

4

INSPECT BATTERY
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–834
DIAGNOSTICS

5
(a)

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – SKID CONTROL ECU)
Check for a short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the DLC3 and skid control
ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

6
(a)

CHECK VSC WARNING LIGHT
See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1.
NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER
ASSEMBLY

OK

7
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION
METER)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–840
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

0543H–04

BRAKE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The Brake warning light comes on when the brake fluid is insufficient, the parking brake is applied or the EBD
is defective.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–841
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Combination Meter
B–W

22
C11

4
C11
17
C10

18
IE1

P

J17
J/C
W–B (*4)

Brake

J16
W–B J/C
(*3)

A

A

A

Driver Side J/B
C A
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

J/C

18
DA

C A
B–W
J8 J26
(*3) (*4)

IGN

2
DH

AM2
1

2

1

B–R

W–B (*4)
A

B–R
I13
Ignition SW

Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.1
1
1A

20
S1 EBDW

P

1
1
IE4 IP1
(*3) (*4)

B–R
4

AM2

IG2

6

Engine Room J/B No.4
B–G (*1)

1
4A

1
4B

B–G (*1)
W–B (*3 *2)

Engine Room R/B No.3
W–B (*3 *1)
B (*2)

3

3

B (*2)
A
J15
J/C

FL MAIN

Battery

IL

IO

IK

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
*3: LHD
*4: RHD
F45135

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–842
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(BRAKE WARNING LIGHT)
Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the Brake warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–
held tester.
OK

Go to step 4

YES

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT
CODE

NG

2
(a)

CHECK DTC FOR ABS
Check the DTC on page 05–756.

NO

3
(a)

INSPECT BRAKE WARNING LIGHT
See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1.
NG

REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER
ASSEMBLY

OK

4

INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSY(See page 71–3)
NG

REPLACE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ASSY

OK

5

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH(See page 71–3)
NG

OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE
BRAKE
MASTER
RESERVOIR SUB–ASSY

CYLINDER

05–843
DIAGNOSTICS

6
(a)

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – PARKING BRAKE
SWITCH)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal PKB of the skid control
ECU and parking brake switch (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

7
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL WARNING SWITCH)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal EBDW of the skid control
ECU and brake fluid level warning switch (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

8
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION
MERTER)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–774
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

DTC

C0200/31 RIGHT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C0205/32 LEFT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C1330/35 RIGHT FRONT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

C1331/36 LEFT FRONT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

0542U–04

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Rotor

The speed sensor detects wheel speed and transmits the appropriate signals to the ECU. These signals are used for control
of the ABS and VSC control systems. Each of the front and rear
rotors has 48 serrations.
When the rotors rotate, the magnetic field generated by the permanent magnet in the speed sensor induces an AC voltage.
Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct proportion to the speed of the rotor, the frequency is used by the ECU
to detect the speed of each wheel.

Speed Sensor
N
S Magnet
Coil

To ECU

Low Speed
High Speed
+V

BR3583
BR3582

–V

F00010

DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

C0200/31
C0205/32

When any of the following 1 to 3 is detected :
1. Vehicle speed is more than 40 km/h (25 mph), pulses
are not input for 0.01 second.
2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle
speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of
0 km/h (0 mph) is detected.
3. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle
speed has reached 18 km/h (11 mph), the front wheel
speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected.

Trouble Area 

Right front and left front speed sensor 
Speed sensor rotor

C1330/35
C1331/36

Detecting abnormality in the resistance value of each speed
sensor. 

Right front and left front speed sensor 
Speed sensor circuit

HINT:
DTC No. C0200/31 and C1330/35 are for the right front speed sensor.
DTC No. C0205/32 and C1331/36 are for the left front speed sensor.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–775
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

A4
ABS Speed Sensor
Front LH

41
S1 FL+

R–L

24
S1 FL–

W

21
S1 FR+

B

22
S1 FR–

2

1

A5
ABS Speed Sensor
Front RH

L–Y

2

1

F40884

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)
(b)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FRONT SPEED SENSOR)
Select the item ”WHEEL SPEED FL (FR)” in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the hand–
held tester.
Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed
on the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle.
OK:
There is almost no difference in the displayed speed value.

HINT:
There is tolerance of 10 % in the speedometer indication.
OK
NG

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Go to step 5

05–776
DIAGNOSTICS

2

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR

2

(a)
(b)
(c)

1

(d)
C93876

Remove the fender liner.
Disconnect the speed sensor connector.
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the
speed sensor connector.
OK:
Resistance: 1.2 to 1.6 k at 20_C (68_F)
Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of
the speed sensor connector and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1 M or higher

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT RH

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK

3
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FRONT SPEED SENSOR–SKID CONTROL
ECU)
Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between each front speed sensor and
the skid control ECU connector (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS
Normal Signal Waveform

GND

2 m/s / Division
1 V / Division

W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE
(a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals FR+ – FR– and
FL+ – FL– of the skid control ECU.
(b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check
the signal waveform.
HINT:
S
As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases,
a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater.
S
When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it.
OK

NG
AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

05–777
DIAGNOSTICS

5

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION
(a)

Check the speed sensor installation.
OK:
The installation bolt is tightened properly and there is
no clearance between the sensor and front steering
knuckle.
Torque: 8.0 Nm (82 kgfcm, 71 in.lbf)

NG

OK

BR3795

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT RH

NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK

6
(a)
(b)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TIP
Remove the front speed sensor (See page 32–59).
Check the sensor tip.
OK:
No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip.
NG

CLEAN OR REPAIR SPEED SENSOR

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK

7

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR
(a)
(b)

Remove the front speed sensor rotor (See page
30–6).
Check the sensor rotor serrations.
OK:
No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects.

HINT:
If a foreign object is attached, remove it and after reassembling,
check the output waveform.
BR3719

NG

CLEAN OR REPAIR SPEED SENSOR ROTOR

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–778
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

DTC

C0210/33 RIGHT REAR SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C0215/34 LEFT REAR SPEED SENSOR

DTC

C1332/38 RIGHT REAR SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

DTC

C1333/39 LEFT REAR SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

0577Z–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Refer to DTC C0200/31, C0205/32, C1330/35, C1331/36 on page 05–774.
DTC No.

C0210/33
C0215/34

C1332/38
C1333/39

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 to 3 is detected :
1. Vehicle speed is more than 40 km/h (25 mph), pulses
are not input for 0.01 second.
2. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle
speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph), the wheel speed of
0 km/h (0 mph) is detected.
3. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle
speed has reached 18 km/h (11 mph), the front wheel
speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. 

Right rear and left rear speed sensor 
Speed sensor rotor

Detecting abnormality in the resistance value of each speed
sensor. 

Right rear and left rear speed sensor 
Speed sensor circuit

HINT:
DTC No. C0210/33, C1332/38 are for the right rear speed sensor.
DTC No. C0215/34, C1333/39 are for the left rear speed sensor.

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

A32
ABS Speed Sensor
Rear LH

2
IB1

R

23
S1 RL+

G

1
IB1

G

40
S1 RL–

1

2

A33
ABS Speed Sensor
Rear RH

R

P

1
IM1

P

10
IE2

P

38
S1 RR+

V

10
IM1

V

11
IE2

V

39
S1 RR–

1

2

F45131

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–779
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)

READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(REAR SPEED SENSOR)
Select the item ”WHEEL SPEED RL (RR)” in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the hand–
held tester.
Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed
on the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle.
OK:
There is almost no difference in the displayed speed value.

(b)

HINT:
There is tolerance of  10 % in the speedometer indication.
OK

Go to step 5

NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR
(a)
(b)

(c)

F41836

Connector 2

2

1

1
Connector 1
2
F10180

Disconnect the skid control sensor connector.
Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the
speed sensor connector.
OK:
Resistance: 2.2 k or less
Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of
the skid control sensor connector and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1 M or higher

Skid control Sensor Sub–Wire Harness:
(a) Disconnect the sub–wire harness connector from the
floor wire harness
(b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector
lock part and connecting part of the connector.
(c) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of the connector
1 and terminal 2 of the connector 2.
OK: 1  or lower
(d) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of the connector
1 and terminal 1 of the connector 2.
OK: 1  or lower
(e) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the
speed sensor connector 1 and body ground.
OK: 10 M or higher
NG

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SENSOR

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK
AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–780
DIAGNOSTICS

3
(a)

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(REAR SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL
ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each skid control sensor and the
skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

4

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS
Normal Signal Waveform

GND

2 m/s / Division
1 V / Division

W04200

(REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE
(a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals RR+ – RR– and
RL+ – RL– of the skid control ECU.
(b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph), and check
the signal waveform.
HINT: 

As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases,
a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. 

When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope, error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches, looseness or foreign matter deposited on it.
OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

5

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR INSTALLATION
(a)

OK

Check the sensor installation.
OK:
There is no clearance between the sensor and rear
axle carrier.

NG
F10178

NG

REPLACE SKID CONTROL SENSOR

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–781
DIAGNOSTICS

6
(a)
(b)

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT SKID CONTROL SENSOR TIP
Remove the skid control sensor (See page 32–61).
Check the sensor tip.
OK:
No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip.
NG

CLEAN OR REPAIR SKID CONTORL SENSOR

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK

7

INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR
(a)

Check the sensor rotor serrations.
OK:
No scratches, missing teeth or foreign objects.

NG

REPLACE REAR AXLE HUB & BEARING ASSY
RH

NG

REPLACE REAR AXLE HUB & BEARING ASSY
LH

W04846

NOTICE:
Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–756).
OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)
NOTICE:
Do not reuse the skid control sensor.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–782
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

DTC

C0226/21 SFR SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C0236/22 SFL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C0246/23 SRR SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C0256/24 SRL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

05780–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure action on the wheel
cylinders to control the braking force.
DTC No.
C0226/21
C0236/22
C0246/23
C0256/24

DTC Detecting Condition

Solenoid valve signal does not match to the check result.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area 

Each solenoid valve

05–783
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Engine Room R/B No.4 & Engine Room J/B No.4
1
4B

B–G (*1)

ALT
1

VSC

4
2
Engine Room R/B No.1 &
Engine Room J/B No.1

21

Engine Room R/B No.3
ALT
3

3
1

R (*1)

W (*2)

VSC

1
1B

5
S1 +BS

R (*2)
1

2

1

B (*2)
B–G (*1)

2
W–B

W–B

FL MAIN

10
S1 GND2
6
S1 GND1

W–B
Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
F45132

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

RECONFIRM DTC
Check if other DTCs are detected (See page 05–756).
YES

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT
CODE

NO
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–784
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05781–02

C0273/13 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ABS MOTOR
RELAY CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor. While the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC are activated, the ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor.
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

C0273/13

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3:
1. After actuation of the motor relay, pump motor voltage is
not supplied within 0.08 second.
2. Pump motor voltage is at high level for 2.5 seconds or
more although motor relay does not actuate .
3. Pump motor voltage keeps low level for longer than 0.04
second and the pump repeats activating for 0.7 seconds 3 times maximum. At the last time of activation,
the pump motor goes dead because of short circuit. 

ABS motor relay 
ABS motor relay circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Engine Room R/B No.4 & Engine Room J/B No.4
1
4B

B–G (*1)

ALT

VSC

1

21

Engine Room R/B No.3
ALT
3

3
1

L (*1)

4

W (*2)

9
S1 +BM

2
Engine Room R/B No.1 &
Engine Room J/B No.1
VSC

1
1B

L (*2)
1

2

1

B (*2)
B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2
W–B

10
S1 GND2

W–B

6
S1 GND1

W–B
Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
F45132

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–785
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)

PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS MOTOR RELAY)
Check the operation sound of the ABS motor individually when operating it with the hand–held tester.
OK:
The operation sound of the ABS motor is heard.
OK

IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER
THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT
CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION

NG

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(+BM TERMINAL VOLTAGE)
(a)
(b)

GND

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.
Measure the voltage between terminals +BM and GND of
the skid control ECU harness side connector.
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V

+BM
C94397

OK

NG

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER
THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT
CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION

05–786
DIAGNOSTICS

3

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT FUSE(VSC FUSE)
(a)

Gasoline Engine:
VSC (50 A)
Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)

Diesel Engine:
Engine Room R/B No.1

Remove the VSC (50 A) fuse from the engine room R/B
No.4 (Gasoline engine) or engine room R/B No.1 (Diesel
engine).
Check continuity of the VSC fuse.
OK:
Continuity

VSC (50 A)

F45087

NG

CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND
COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE

OK

4

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY)
(a)

GND

Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid
control ECU harness side connector and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1  or less

NG
C94397

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND
CONNECTOR(GND
TERMINAL

BODY
GROUND)(See page 01–32)

OK
CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BM TERMINAL)
(See page 01–32)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–787
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05782–02

C0278/11 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUT IN ABS
SOLENOID RELAY

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This relay supplies power to each ABS solenoid. After the ignition switch is turned ON, if the initial check is
OK, the relay goes on.
DTC No.

C0278/11

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3:
1. 3 or more solenoid valves are shown faulty in response
and simultaneously valve supply voltage is detected
faulty.
2. Solenoid valve relay is not turned OFF. 

ABS solenoid relay 
ABS solenoid relay circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU with Actuator

Engine Room R/B and J/B
B

1

ALT

ABS No.2

1A
1

21

2

W–B

W–B
FL MAIN

1

L

5
S1

+BS

6
S1

GND1

10
S1

GND2

W–B
Battery

EA

C95006

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–788
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(+BS TERMINAL VOLTAGE)
(a)
(b)

GND

+BS

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.
Measure the voltage between terminals +BS and GND of
the skid control ECU harness side connector.
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK
C94397

IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER
THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT
CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION

NG

2

INSPECT FUSE(VSC FUSE)
(a)

Gasoline Engine:
Engine Room R/B No.4

(b)

Remove the VSC (25 A) fuse from the engine room R/B
No.4 (Gasoline engine) or engine room R/B No.1 (Diesel
engine).
Check continuity of the VSC fuse.
OK:
Continuity

VSC (25 A)
Diesel Engine:
Engine Room R/B No.1

VSC (25 A)

NG
F45087

OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND
COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE

05–789
DIAGNOSTICS

3

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY)
(a)

GND

Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid
control ECU harness side connector and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1  or less

NG
C94397

CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND
CONNECTOR(GND
TERMINAL

BODY
GROUND)(See page 01–32)

OK
CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BS TERMINAL)
(See page 01–32)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–790
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05C5L–01

C0365/43 MALFUNCTION IN DECELERATION SENSOR

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The lateral acceleration sensor is combined with the yaw rate sensor.
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

C0365/43

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 2:
1. Lateral acceleration difference between sensor signal
and reference value is large.
2. Offset value of sensor signal is higher than the standard
value.
3. Sensor signal is out of range 

Yaw rate sensor 
Yaw rate sensor circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD:
W–B

B
J7

J/C

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

D
J6

(Shielded)

1
IE8

B
J6

B

2
IE8

B

29
S1 SS2

A
J6

W

9
IE8

W

13
S1 SS1

D

B
J7

J6

D
J7

B
J6

B

E
J7

A
J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded)
W
B

Y1
J18
YAW Rate Sensor
J/C
W–G
GND
1 CANL
2 C
UBAT W–L
3 CANH
4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C
W–L
B

16
10
W–G
IE8
S1 YGND
30
3
W–L
IE8
S1

YIGA

S12
Steering Sensor
CAN GND W–G
7 HIGH
5 C
CAN
1 LOW

12V

W–L
6 B

(Shielded)
W–B
A
J15
J/C
IK

F45142

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–791
DIAGNOSTICS

RHD:

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

J19
J/C

13
IO2

(Shielded)
F

12

B

IO2

C

11
IO2

W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B

(Shielded)
B

29
S1 SS2

W

13
S1 SS1

Y1
YAW Rate Sensor

C J/C A
W–G
GND W–G J22
J23
1 CANL
2
C
UBAT
J22
3 CANH
4

11
16
W–G
IO1
S1 YGND

W–L
S12
Steering Sensor

W–G

CAN GND
5
1 LOW

J/C

B
J22

B
W–L
CAN
12V
J23
7 HIGH
6
W–B

F

B
W–L
J22

12
30
W–L
IO1
S1 YIGA

A
J15
J/C
IK

F45143

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–792
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1

READ VALUE OF YAWRATE SENSOR(INCLUDE LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
C95216

Remove the 2 bolts and lateral acceleration sensor with
connector still connected.
Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3
Turn the ignition switch and hand–held tester main switch
ON.
Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester.
Check the lateral acceleration value 0  0.23 G.
Check that the acceleration value displayed on the hand–
held tester is changing: Place the yaw rate sensor vertically to the ground and turn the sensor pivoted on its center.
OK:
Lateral acceleration value is changing.

OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

2
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(YAW RATE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL
ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal SS1, SS2, YIGA
and YGND of the yaw rate sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–793
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05C5N–01

C0371/55 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT IN YAW RATE
SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

C0371/55

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4:
1. The voltage of sensor signal is out of range.
2. The offset value of sensor signal is outside the plausible
range.
3. Sensor signal changes rapidly under normal driving.
4. Yaw rate sensor value is considerably different from the
reference value of yaw rate during cornering. 

Yaw rate sensor 
Yaw rate sensor circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD:
W–B

B
J7

J/C

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

D
J6

(Shielded)

1
IE8

B
J6

B

2
IE8

B

29
S1 SS2

A
J6

W

9
IE8

W

13
S1 SS1

D

B
J7

J6

D
J7

B
J6

B

E
J7

A
J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded)
W
B

Y1
J18
YAW Rate Sensor
J/C
W–G
GND
1 CANL
2 C
UBAT W–L
CANH
3
4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C
W–L
B

16
10
W–G
IE8
S1 YGND
30
3
W–L
IE8
S1

YIGA

S12
Steering Sensor
CAN GND W–G
7 HIGH
5 C
CAN
1 LOW

12V

W–L
6 B

(Shielded)
W–B
A
J15
J/C
IK

F45142

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–794
DIAGNOSTICS

RHD:

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

J19
J/C

13
IO2

(Shielded)
F

12

B

IO2

C

11
IO2

W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B

(Shielded)
B

29
S1 SS2

W

13
S1 SS1

Y1
YAW Rate Sensor

C J/C A
W–G
GND W–G J22
J23
1 CANL
2
C
UBAT
J22
3 CANH
4

11
16
W–G
IO1
S1 YGND

W–L
S12
Steering Sensor

W–G

CAN GND
5
1 LOW

J/C

B
J22

B
W–L
CAN
12V
J23
7 HIGH
6
W–B

F

B
W–L
J22

12
30
W–L
IO1
S1 YIGA

A
J15
J/C
IK

F45143

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–795
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1

READ VALUE OF YAWRATE SENSOR
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
C95217

Remove the 2 bolts and yaw rate sensor with connector
still connected.
Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.
Turn the ignition switch and hand–held tester main switch
ON.
Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester.
Check the yaw rate value 0  5 deg/s.
Check that the yaw rate value of the yaw rate sensor displayed on the hand–held tester is changing: Place the
yaw rate sensor vertically to the ground and turn the sensor pivoted on its center.
OK:
Yaw rate value is changing.

OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

2
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(YAW RATE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL
ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal SS1, SS2, YIGA
and YGND of the yaw rate sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–796
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05C5O–01

C1201/45 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.
C1201/45

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

A trouble signal in the engine control system is input.

Engine control system

HINT:
If trouble occurs in the engine control system, the ECU prohibits TRC and VSC control.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1

CHECK DTC FOR ENGINE
A

Normal Code

B

Malfunction Code

B

A
REPLACE ECM

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR
ENGINE
CONTROL
ACCORDING TO CODE OUTPUT

SYSTEM

05–799
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

0542Z–04

C1203/59 ECM COMMUNICATOIN CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit is used to transmit TRC & VSC control information from the skid control ECU to the ECM (TRC+,
TRC–), and engine control information from the ECM to the skid control ECU (ENG+, ENG–).
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

C1203/59

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected :
1. IG1 voltage is 8.5 V or more, and the condition that data
can not be sent to ECM continues for 1.2 seconds or
more.
2. IG1 voltage is 8.5 V or more, engine speed is 500 r.p.m
or more, vehicle speed is 60 km/h (38 mph) or more,
and the condition that data can not be received from
ECM continues for 1.2 seconds or more.
3. The condition that data can not be transmitted between
the skid control ECU and ECM occurs at least once
within 5 seconds continues 10 consecutive times within
60 sec. 

TRC+ or TRC– circuit 
ENG+ or ENG– circuit 
ECM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

ECM
25
TRC+ E9

G

31
TRC– E9

L
W (*3)
Y (*4)

24
ENG+ E9
30
ENG– E9

B

*1: LHD
*2: RHD

6 13
IE8 IE2
(*1) (*2)
13 3
IE8 IE2
(*1) (*2)
7 15
IE8 IE2
(*1) (*2)
14 14
IE8 IE2
(*1) (*2)

G

18
S1 TRC+

L

19
S1 TRC–

Y

8
S1 ENG+

B

7
S1 ENG–

*3: RHD 1AZ–FSE
*4: Except RHD 1AZ–FSE
F45139

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–800
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – SKID CONTROL ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each of terminals ENG+, ENG–,
TRC+, TRC– of the skid control ECU and the same one of the ECM (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

2
(a)

CHECK OPERATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
Check the MIL.
(1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running.
NG

CHECK AND REPLACE ECM

OK
CHECK AND REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

OR

05–801
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

C1208/54 MALFUNCTION IN STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

C1231/31

Detection of any of conditions 1 through 7:
1. When the condition that ECU terminal IG1 voltage is 9.8
V or more, and does not receive data from steering
angle sensor continues.
2. Sensor internal failure.
3. The offset value is out of range.
4. Sensor signal changes too rapidly.
5. Steering angle value difference between measured and
reference is out of range.
6. Steering sensor is not centered.
7. Steering sensor signal is out of range.
8. Steering sensor is not calibrated.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area 

Steering angle sensor 
Steering angle sensor circuit

05C5R–01

05–802
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD:
W–B

B
J7

J/C

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

D
J6

(Shielded)

1
IE8

B
J6

B

2
IE8

B

29
S1 SS2

A
J6

W

9
IE8

W

13
S1 SS1

D

B
J7

J6

D
J7

B
J6

B

E
J7

A
J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded)
W
B

Y1
J18
YAW Rate Sensor
J/C
GND W–G
1 CANL
2 C
UBAT W–L
3 CANH
4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C
W–L
B

16
10
W–G
IE8
S1 YGND
30
3
W–L
IE8
S1

YIGA

S12
Steering Sensor
CAN GND W–G
7 HIGH
5 C
CAN
1 LOW

12V

W–L
6 B

(Shielded)
W–B
A
J15
J/C
IK

F45142

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–803
DIAGNOSTICS

RHD:

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

J19
J/C

13
IO2

(Shielded)
F

12

B

IO2

C

11
IO2

W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B

(Shielded)
B

29
S1 SS2

W

13
S1 SS1

Y1
YAW Rate Sensor

C J/C A
W–G
GND W–G J22
J23
1 CANL
2
C
UBAT
J22
3 CANH
4

11
16
W–G
IO1
S1 YGND

W–L
S12
Steering Sensor

W–G

CAN GND
5
1 LOW

J/C

B
J22

B
W–L
CAN
12V
J23
7 HIGH
6
W–B

F

B
W–L
J22

12
30
W–L
IO1
S1 YIGA

A
J15
J/C
IK

F45143

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–804
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)
(b)

READ VALUE OF STEERING SENSOR
Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester.
Check that the steering wheel turning angle value of the steering angle position sensor displayed on
the hand–held tester is changing when turning the steering wheel.
OK:
Steering wheel turning angle value is changing.
OK

Go to step 4

NG

2

CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
NG

REPLACE STEERING SENSOR(See page
32–65)

OK

3
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING SENSOR CIRCUIT – SKID
CONTROL ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal SS1, SS2, YIGA
and YGND of the skid control ECU and steering angle sensor (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OK

4

CALIBRATE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR(See page 05–756)
NG

REPLACE STEERING SENSOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

OR

05–797
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05432–04

C1204/44 NE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The skid control ECU receives engine revolution speed signals (NE signals) from the ECM.
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

C1202/44

At vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, when data
received from the ECM is in normal condition, engine revolution signal > 0 rpm continues for 5 seconds or more. 

NEO circuit 
ECM 
Skid control ECU

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

ECM

17
NEO E9

5 13
IE8 IE1
(*1) (*2)

Y–B

Y–B

32
S1

NEO

*1: LHD
*2: RHD
F45138

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – ECM)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal NEO of the skid control
ECU and ECM (See page 01–32).
NG

OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–798
DIAGNOSTICS

2

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT ECM TERMINAL VOLTAGE(NEO TERMINAL)
(a)
(b)
(c)

Gasoline engine:

Remove the ECM with connector still connected.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between terminal NEO of the ECM
and body ground under the engine conditions below.
OK:
Engine condition

Voltage

OFF (IG ON)

3 to 6 V or below 1 V

ON (Idling)

3 to 6 V  below 1 V (Pulse)

NEO
(Reference)
Diesel engine:

3–6V

Below 1 V

F03007

NEO
F45092

NG

REPLACE ECM

OK
IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED, CHECK THE CONTACT
CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–805
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

DTC

C1225/25 SMC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C1226/26 SMC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C1227/27 SRC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

DTC

C1228/28 SRC SOLENOID CIRCUIT

05785–02

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure action on the wheel
cylinders to control the braking force.
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

C1225/25

Open or short in SMC1 circuit. 

Brake actuator 
SMC1 circuit

C1226/26

Open or short in SMC2 circuit. 

Brake actuator 
SMC2 circuit

C1227/27

Open or short in SRC1 circuit. 

Brake actuator 
SRC1 circuit

C1228/28

Open or short in SRC2 circuit. 

Brake actuator 
SRC2 circuit

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–806
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Engine Room R/B No.4 & Engine Room J/B No.4
1
4B

B–G (*1)

VSC

ALT
1

4
2
Engine Room R/B No.1 &
Engine Room J/B No.1

21

Engine Room R/B No.3
ALT
3

3
1

L (*1)

W (*2)

VSC

1
1B

9
S1 +BM

L (*2)
1

2

1

B (*2)
B–G (*1)

FL MAIN

2
W–B

10
S1 GND2

W–B

6
S1 GND1

W–B
Battery

EA

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
F45132

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

RECONFIRM DTC
Check if other DTCs are detected (See page 05–756).
YES

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT
CODE

NO
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–807
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05786–02

C1237/37 TIRES OF DIFFERENT SIZE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

C1237/37

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4:
1. When the ignition switch is ON, the speed difference
between max. and min. wheel speed is 5 % or more for
20 sec. at vehicle speed 20 km/h (12 mph)or more.
2. When the ignition switch is ON, the slip difference be
wheels at either side of vehicle 6 % or more (vehicle
speed: 100 km/h (62 mph) or more).
3. Continuous ABS control for 60 seconds or more.
4. Interference on 1 or more wheels for 20 seconds with
the brake pedal depressed, or for 5 seconds when the
brake pedal is not depressed. 

Speed sensor 
Sensor rotor

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1

INSPECT TIRE SIZE
NG

REPLACE TIRES SO THAT ALL 4 TIRES ARE
SAME IN SIZE

OK

2
(a)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR
Check the speed sensor rotors (See page 05–774 or 05–778).
NG

REPLACE SENSOR ROTOR

OK

3
(a)

INSPECT SPEED SENSOR
Check the speed sensors (See page 05–774 or 05–778).
NG

REPLACE SPEED SENSOR

OK

4
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal of the speed sensor
and skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)
AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–808
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

C1241/41 LOW BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE OR
ABNORMALLY HIGH BATTERY POSITIVE
VOLTAGE

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

C1241/41

DTC Detecting Condition
Low battery voltage is less than 9.8 V at the time of non–
operation of ABS control or less than 9.4 V at the time of
operation of ABS control, or battery voltage is more than
17.4 V.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area 
Battery 
IC regulator 
Power source circuit

05436–04

05–809
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM

R–W

G C
J10 J20
(*3) (*4)

J/C

G C
J10 J20
(*3) (*4)

22
IE1

R–W

R–W

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator
14
S1 IG1

Driver Side J/B

B–G (*1)
B–L (*2)

IG Relay

1
DN

5

5
DH

G–Y

ECU–IG
3

1

2

18
DB

R–W

9
DA

W–B
I13
Ignition SW

AM1

1
G–R
DH
3

G–Y
AM1

1

IG1

G–Y
Engine Room R/B No.3
B–L (*2)

1
ED1

W (*2)

W–B

ALT
3

3
2

B (*2)

1

W–B

Engine Room J/B No.4
1
4D

B–G (*1)

ALT

FL MAIN

W–B

1
4B

10
S1 GND2
6
S1 GND1

W–B
B–G (*1)
B (*2)

Battery

*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
*3: LHD
*4: RHD

IJ

EA

F45133

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–810
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1

INSPECT FUSE(ECU–IG FUSE)
(a)
(b)

Driver Side J/B ECU–IG

Remove the ECU–IG fuse from the driver side J/B.
Check continuity of the ECU–IG fuse.
OK:
Continuity

NG

INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ALL
HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED
TO ECU–IG FUSE

NG

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM

F45090

OK

2

INSPECT BATTERY
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V

OK

3

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(IG1 TERMINAL)

IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
(a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester.
OK:
”Normal” is displayed.
IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
GND
(a) Disconnect the skid control connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of
the skid control ECU harness side connector.
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V
OK

IG1
C94397

NG

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

05–811
DIAGNOSTICS

4

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY)
(a)
(b)

GND

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.
Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid
control ECU harness side connector and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1  or less

NG
C94397

REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR
CONNECTOR(GND
TERMINAL

BODY
GROUND)(See page 01–32)

OK
CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – IG1 TERMINAL)
(See page 01–32)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–812
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05787–02

C1246/53 MALFUNCTION IN MASTER CYLINDER
PRESSURE SENSOR

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

C1246/53

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected:
1. The voltage of sensor signal is out of range (less than
0.3 V, more than 4.7 V).
2. The sensor supply voltage is out of range (above 5.6 V,
below 4.4 V).
3. The sensor signal offset value is out of range.
4. Gradient of sensor signal is not within allowed range. 

Master cylinder pressure sensor 
Master cylinder pressure sensor circuit

WIRING DIAGRAM
Skid Control ECU
with Actuator
12
S1 E2
11

O1
Oil Pressure Sensor
Y–R
1
GR

S1 PMC
27
S1 VCM

2
Y–G
3
Driver Side J/B

S13 Stop Light SW

1
G–W (*4)
IR1

G–W (*4)
2

1

R–W (*3)
11
IE3
R–W (*4)

G–W (*3)

6
IE3

2
DA

2
DL

G–W

1
DM

G–W (*3)

To
Stop
Light

R–W (*3)

2
IR1

STOP

22
DA

R–W (*4)

37
S1 STP

1
DN

B–G (*1)

Engine Room R/B No.3
FL MAIN B (*2)

ALT
3

3
1

1
ED1

W (*2)

B–L (*2)

2
Engine Room J/B No.4

Battery
B–G (*1)
*1: 1AZ–FSE *3: LHD
*2: 1CD–FTV *4: RHD

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

1
4B

ALT
1

1
4D

B–G (*1)

2
F45141

05–813
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
HINT:
Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using
the hand–held tester.

1
(a)
(b)

READ VALUE OF MASTER CYLINDER PRESSURE SENSOR
Select the DATALIST mode on the hand–held tester.
Check that the brake fluid pressure value of the No.1 master cylinder pressure sensor and No.2 master
cylinder pressure sensor displayed on the hand–held tester changes when depressing the brake pedal.
OK:
Brake fluid pressure value is changing.
OK

Go to step 4

NG

2
(a)

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY
Check that the stop light comes on when the brake pedal is depressed and goes off when the brake
pedal is released.
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

3
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASTER CYLINDER PRESSUR SENSOR –
SKID CONTROL ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal of the master cylinder
pressure sensor and skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

OK

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–814
DIAGNOSTICS

4

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(STP TERMINAL)
(a)
(b)

STP
C94397

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.
Measure the voltage between terminal STP of the skid
control ECU harness side connector and body ground
when the brake pedal is depressed.
OK:
Voltage: 8 to 14 V

NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–815
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

C1249/58 STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

DTC Detecting Condition

C1249/58

After the ignition switch is turned ON, the condition that the
STP terminal voltage of ECU is 40 % to 67 % of supplied
voltage, continues for 1 second or more.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area

Stop light switch circuit

05439–04

05–816
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
S13
Stop Light SW
1
IR1

G–W (*4)
2

1
G–W (*3)

2
IR1

R–W (*4)

G–W (*4)

11
IE3

R–W (*3)
FL MAIN

2
DA

6 G–W (*3)
IE3
22
DA

R–W (*4)

C J/C B
J31
J30

W–B

G–W

1
DM

G–W

37
S1 STP

1
DN

Engine Room J/B No.4
1
4B

ALT
1

Engine Room R/B No.3

W–B
(*5)

STOP

2
DL

R–W (*3)

B–G (*1)

B (*2)

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

Driver Side J/B

1
4D
2

B–G (*1)

ALT

3

1
W (*2)
B–L (*2)
3
ED1
H20
J32
1
2
High Mounted Stop Light
J/C
W–B (*5)
W–B (*5)
G–W (*5)
1
2
C
C
J/C C
Rear Combination Light LH
J30
STOP
2
5
4
1
4
6
B
C
G–W
G–W
R13 R13 R13
R13 R13 R13
J31
J30
(*5) (*6) (*7)
(*5) (*6) (*7)

Rear Combination Light RH
6
3 3 STOP 7
4 1
B
C
W–B
G–W
G–W (*6, *7)
R14 R14 R14
R14 R14 R14
J31
J30
(*5) (*6) (*7)
(*5) (*6) (*7) H20 High Mounted
Stop Light
4
1
1
3
L(*6)
L(*7)
G–W
W–B (*7)
G–W (*6)
BG1
BE1
BD1 BF1
2
1
(*6) (*7) (*6, *7)
W–B (*6)
G–W (*7)
W–B (*6)
W–B (*7)

W–B (*6, *7)
Battery

W–B
BS 

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

BT

A J/C A
J33
J34

W–B (*6, *7)

W–B (*7)
2
4
BD1 BF1
(*6) (*7)
*1: 1AZ–FSE
*2: 1CD–FTV
*3: LHD
*4: RHD

W–B (*6)

*5: S/D
*6: L/B
*7: W/G

3
BG1

W–B (*7)

G–W
(*8, *9)

2
W–B (*6)
BE1
BX

1
N8
Noise
Filter
(Stop Light)
F45775

05–817
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY
Check that the stop light comes on when the brake pedal is depressed and goes off when the brake
pedal is released.
NG

Go to step 4

OK

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(STP TERMINAL)
(a)
(b)

STP
C94397

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.
Measure the voltage between terminal STP of the skid
control ECU harness side connector and body ground
when the brake pedal is depressed.
OK:
Voltage: 8 to 14 V

OK

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

NG

3
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LIGHT SWITCH – SKID CONTROL
ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the stop light switch and skid
control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK
PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE

4
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LIGHT CIRCUIT)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector of the stop light circuit (See page 01–32).
OK

REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY

NG
REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–818
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05788–02

C1288/88 ECU VERSION MISS MATCHI

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.
C1288/88

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

When either of the following 1 or 2 is detected:
1. ECM does not match.
2. Steering angle sensor is not calibrated. 

ECM 
Steering angle sensor calibration.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

PERFORM STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ZERO POINT CALIBRATION
Perform the steering angle sensor zero point calibration (See page 05–756).

2
(a)

RECONFIRM DTC
Check if the same DTC is stored in the memory.
NO

END

YES

3
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING ANGLE SENSOR – SKID
CONTROL ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the steering angle sensor and
skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–819
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05789–02

C1300/62 SKID CONTROL ECU MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DTC No.

C1300/62

DTC Detecting Condition

Trouble Area

1. Skid control ECU continuously detects the continuous
operation of ABS at all 4 wheels for max. 1.28 sec.
2. Continuos VSC operation for 10 sec. or more.
3. Internal malfunction in ECU. 

ECU

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1

RECONFIRM DTC
A

DTC C1300/62

B

Except DTC C1300/62

B

REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT
CODE

A

2

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(IG1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE)

WITH USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
(a) Check the voltage condition, which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester.
OK:
”Normal” is displayed.
WITHOUT USING HAND–HELD TESTER:
GND
(a) Disconnect the skid control connector.
(b) Turn the ignition switch ON.
(c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of
the skid control ECU harness side connector.
OK:
Voltage: 10 to 14 V
OK

IG1
C94397

NG

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY
(See page 32–57)

05–820
DIAGNOSTICS

3

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY)
(a)
(b)

GND

C94397

Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.
Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid
control ECU harness side connector and body ground.
OK:
Resistance: 1  or less

NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

05–821
DIAGNOSTICS

DTC

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

05C5U–01

C1301/42 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
This circuit is used to send TRC & VSC control information from the yaw rate sensor and steering angle sensor information to the skid control ECU
DTC No.

C1301/42

DTC Detecting Condition
IG1 voltage is 9.5 V or more, and the condition that data
from steering angle sensor or yaw rate sensor can not be
received continues for 0.1 seconds or more.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

Trouble Area 
Yaw rate sensor 
Steering angle sensor 
Yaw rate sensor circuit 
Steering angle sensor circuit

05–822
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

WIRING DIAGRAM
LHD:
W–B

B
J7

J/C

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

D
J6

(Shielded)

1
IE8

B
J6

B

2
IE8

B

29
S1 SS2

A
J6

W

9
IE8

W

13
S1 SS1

D

B
J7

J6

D
J7

B
J6

B

E
J7

A
J6

W

(Shielded)

(Shielded)
W
B

Y1
J18
YAW Rate Sensor
J/C
GND W–G
1 CANL
2 C
UBAT W–L
3 CANH
4 B

(Shielded)

W–G

C
W–L
B

16
10
W–G
IE8
S1 YGND
30
3
W–L
IE8
S1

YIGA

S12
Steering Sensor
CAN GND W–G
7 HIGH
5 C
CAN
1 LOW

12V

W–L
6 B

(Shielded)
W–B
A
J15
J/C
IK

F45142

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–823
DIAGNOSTICS

RHD:

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

Skid Control ECU
with Actuator

J19
J/C

13
IO2

(Shielded)
F

12

B

IO2

C

11
IO2

W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B
(Shielded)
B
C
W
B

(Shielded)
B

29
S1 SS2

W

13
S1 SS1

Y1
YAW Rate Sensor

C J/C A
W–G
GND W–G J22
J23
1 CANL
2
C
UBAT
J22
3 CANH
4

11
16
W–G
IO1
S1 YGND

W–L
S12
Steering Sensor

W–G

CAN GND
5
1 LOW

J/C

B
J22

B
W–L
CAN
12V
J23
7 HIGH
6
W–B

F

B
W–L
J22

12
30
W–L
IO1
S1 YIGA

A
J15
J/C
IK

F45143

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

05–824
DIAGNOSTICS

ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM

INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(YAW RATE SENSOR – SKID CONTROL
ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the yaw rate sensor and skid
control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

OK

2
(a)

CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING ANGLE SENSOR – SKID
CONTROL ECU)
Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the steering angle sensor and
skid control ECU (See page 01–32).
NG

REPAIR OR
CONNECTOR

OK
REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57)

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)

REPLACE

HARNESS

OR

The pump motor voltage is high level for a certain time after the motor relay has elapsed.08 sec.1 & Engine Room J/B No.3 ALT 3 3 1 W (*2) L (*1) 4 2 Engine Room R/B No.4 1 4B B–G (*1) VSC ALT 1 21 Engine Room R/B No. after actuation starts the motor relay. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C1350/51 When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected. 1.  Brake actuator pump motor  ABS motor relay circuit WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Engine Room R/B No. 2. A high level of motor voltage when actuation does not starts the motor relay for more than 2.5 sec.05–825 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0578A–02 C1350/51 PUMP MOTOR IS LOCKED/OPEN CIRCUIT IN PUMP MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.1 VSC 1 1B 9 S1 +BM L (*2) 1 2 1 B (*2) B–G (*1) FL MAIN 2 W–B 10 S1 GND2 W–B 6 S1 GND1 W–B Battery EA *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV F45132 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 3.4 & Engine Room J/B No. No motor voltage supply within 0.

05–826 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) RECONFIRM DTC Check if other DTCs are detected (See page 05–756). YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE NO REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–754 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542O–04 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ABS & EBD & BA Check Sheet Inspector’s : Name VIN Production Date Customer’s Name / / Licence No. BA does not operate. Date Vehicle Brought In / Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs km miles Odometer Reading / / Continuous / Intermittent ( times a day) ABS does not operate. Symptoms ABS Warning Light Remains ON Does not Light Up Brake Warning Light (PKB released) Remains ON Does not Light Up 1st Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check STOP LIGHT SW ON OFF NO SYS ABS SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data BA FAIL SF #IG ON VEHICLE SPD AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) km/h MPH . EBD does not operate. ABS does not operate efficiently.

Date Vehicle Brought In / / km miles Odometer Reading / Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs Continuous / Intermittent ( times a day) TRAC does not operate.N 2 R 3 D 4 L FAIL STEERING ANG deg YAW RAT deg/s MAS CYL PRESS THROTTLE MAS PRESS GRADE V deg MPa/s G (RIGHT&LEFT) G G (BACK&FORTH) G AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .) TRC OFF Indicator Light Symptoms Check Item Remains ON Does not Light Up VSC Warning Indicator Displays Does not Display SLIP Indicator Light Remains ON Does not Light Up Skid Control Buzzer Sounds Does not Sound ABS Warning Light Normal Malfunction Code (Code ) Malfunction Indicator Light Normal Malfunction Code (Code ) 1st Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check VSC/TRC OFF SW SYSTEM SHIFT POSITION Freeze Frame Data OFF ON VSC/TRC P. (Wheels sideslip at the time of sharp turning.) VSC does not operate. (Wheels spin when starting rapidly.05–755 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM TRC & VSC Check Sheet Inspector’s : Name VIN / Production Date Customer’s Name / Licence No.

 When 2 or more DTCs are detected. refer to the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check.05–766 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542Q–04 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT:    Using SST 09843–18040.” in the DTC chart. (See Page) Detection Item Trouble Area C0200 / 31 (05–774) Right front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor circuit  Right front speed sensor rotor C0205 / 32 (05–774) Left front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor circuit  Left front speed sensor rotor C0210 / 33 (05–778) Right rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor circuit  Right rear speed sensor rotor C0215 / 34 (05–778) Left rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor circuit  Left rear speed sensor rotor C0226 / 21 (05–782) Open or short circuit in brake actuator  Brake actuator  SFRR or SFRH circuit C0236 / 22 (05–782) Open or short circuit in brake actuator  Brake actuator  SFLR or SFLH circuit C0246 / 23 (05–782) Open or short circuit in brake actuator  Brake actuator  SRRR or SRRH circuit C0256 / 24 (05–782) Open or short circuit in brake actuator  Brake actuator  SRLR or SRLH circuit C0273 / 13 (05–784) Open or short circuit in ABS motor relay circuit  ABS motor relay  ABS motor relay circuit C0278 / 11 (05–787) Open or short circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit  ABS solenoid relay  ABS solenoid relay circuit C1237 / 37 (05–807) Wrong tire size  Tire size  Speed sensor rotor C1241 / 41 (05–808) Low battery positive voltage or abnormally high battery positive voltage  Battery  Charging system  Power source circuit C1249 / 58 (05–815) Open circuit in stop light switch circuit  Stop lamp switch  Stop lamp switch circuit C1300 / 62 (05–819) Malfunction in skid control ECU  Battery  Skid control ECU C1330 / 35 (05–774) Open circuit in right front speed sensor circuit  Right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor circuit C1331 / 36 (05–774) Open circuit in left front speed sensor circuit  Left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor circuit C1332 / 38 (05–778) Open circuit in right rear speed sensor circuit  Right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor circuit AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. If malfunction is not found when inspecting parts. For details of each code. inspect the ECU and ground points for poor contact. check the circuit listed for that code. DTC chart of ABS system: DTC No. perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified.

05–767 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM C1333 / 39 (05–778) Open circuit in left rear speed sensor circuit  Left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor circuit Always ON (05–827) Malfunction in skid control ECU Open circuit in ABS warning light circuit  Battery  Charging system  Power source circuit  Skid control ECU DTC chart of VSC system: DTC No. (See Page) Detection Item C0365 / 43 (05–790) Malfunction in lateral acceleration sensor (combined in yaw rate sensor)  Yaw rate sensor  Yaw rate sensor circuit C0371 / 55 (05–793) Malfunction in yaw rate sensor circuit  Yaw rate sensor  Yaw rate sensor circuit C1224 / 44 (05–797) Open or short circuit in NE signal circuit  NEO circuit  ECM  Skid control ECU C1201/45 (05–796) VSC shut down due to ECM failure  ECM C1203 / 59 (05–799) ECM communication circuit malfunction  TRC+ or TRC– circuit  ENG+ or ENG– circuit  ECM C1208 / 54 (05–801) Malfunction in steering angle sensor  Steering angle sensor  Steering angle sensor circuit C1225 / 25 (05–805) Open or short circuit in brake actuator solenoid circuit (SMC1 circuit)  Brake actuator  SMC1 circuit C1226 / 26 (05–805) Open or short circuit in brake actuator solenoid circuit (SMC2 circuit)  Brake actuator  SMC2 circuit C1227 / 27 (05–805) Open or short circuit in brake actuator solenoid circuit (SRC1 circuit)  Brake actuator  SRC1 circuit C1228 / 28 (05–805) Open or short circuit in brake actuator solenoid circuit (SRC2 circuit)  Brake actuator  SRC2 circuit C1246 / 53 (05–812) Malfunction in master cylinder pressure sensor  Master cylinder pressure sensor  Master cylinder pressure sensor circuit C1288 / 88 (05–818) Malfunction in ECM version  Steering angle sensor zero point calibration C1301 / 42 (05–821) Malfunction in CAN communication circuit (steering angle sensor circuit. yaw rate sensor circuit)  Steering angle sensor circuit  Yaw rate sensor circuit C1350 / 51 (05–825) Pump motor is locked Open circuit in pump motor ground  Brake actuator pump motor Always ON (05–831) Malfunction in skid control ECU Open circuit in VSC warning light circuit  Battery  Charging system  Power source circuit  Skid control ECU AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area .

Diagnosis Trouble Area C1271/71 Low output voltage of right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1272/72 Low output voltage of left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1273/73 Low output voltage of right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1274/74 Low output voltage of left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1275/75 Change in output voltage of right front speed sensor Right front sensor rotor C1276/76 Change in output voltage of left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor rotor C1277/77 Change in output voltage of right rear speed sensor Right rear sensor rotor C1278/78 Change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor rotor AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–768 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM DTC of sensor check function : Code No.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–752 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542N–04 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–754) 3 Check and Clear DTCs and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–756) 4 Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 5 Symptom occurs: Go to step 6 5 Symptom Simulation (See page 01–32) 6 DTC Check (See page 05–756) There is no output: Go to step 7 There is output: Go to step 8 7 Problem Symptoms Table (See page 05–772) Check for fluid leakage and Go to step 10 8 DTC Chart (See page 05–766) 9 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–774 – 05–854) HINT: When 2 or more DTCs are detected. perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified.

12: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand–held tester. the VSC warning light and the TRC OFF indicator light come on and the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC operations are prohibited. the ABS warning light. 6. the brake warning light comes on as well and the EBD operation is prohibited. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . In addition to this.05–753 DIAGNOSTICS 10 Identification of Problem 11 Repair 12 Confirmation Test – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM End HINT: Step 3. when the failure that disables the EBD operation occurs. 9. Fail safe function: When a failure occurs in the ABS & BA & TRC & VSC systems.

05–769 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 056T1–03 LOCATION Brake Actuator (Include Skid Control ECU) Skid Control Sensor Combination Meter (ABS Warning Light) (Brake Warning Light) (VSC Warning Light) (TRC OFF Indicator Light) (SLIP Indicator Light) Left Front Speed Sensor Speed Sensor Rotor Steering Angle Sensor ECM Skid Control Buzzer Parking Brake Switch TRC OFF Switch DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Yaw Rate Sensor (Include Lateral Acceleration Sensor) F45086 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

TRC OFF indicator light and SLIP indicator light come on for approx. the ABS warning light . (2) When the ignition switch is turned ON. VSC warning light. VSC warning light and TRC OFF indicator light come on. (1) Using SST. connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. HINT:   TRC OFF Indicator Light  When the parking brake is applied or brake fluid level is low. ABS warning light circuit or VSC warning light circuit. If the indicator check result is not normal. (1) Release the parking brake lever. Trouble Area AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) See page See page Tc terminal circuit 05–852 ABS warning light circuit 05–827 VSC warning light circuit 05–831 . proceed to troubleshooting for the light circuit. check that the ABS warning light. If the ECU stores DTC. Trouble Area F45094 DLC3 ABS warning light circuit 05–827 Brake warning light circuit 05–840 VSC warning light circuit 05–831 TRC OFF indicator light circuit 05–844 SLIP indicator light circuit 05–848 (b) Tc CG C52361 Without using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. the Brake warning light comes on. inspect the diagnostic circuit.05–756 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0577Y–02 ABS Warning Light BRAKE Warning Light PRE–CHECK 1. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light or VSC warning light on the combination meter. Brake warning light. HINT:  If no code appears. 3 seconds. (a) VSC Warning Light SLIP Indicator Light DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Check the warning lights.

25 sec. disconnect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. (5) Remove the SST from the DLC3. If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time. 4 sec. (e) With using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. (2) Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (c) With using the hand–held tester: Check the DTC. SST 09843–18040 HINT: Disconnecting the battery cable during repairs will not erase the DTCs in the ECU. (1) Hook up the hand–held tester to the DLC3. the blinking patterns for the normal code and codes 11 and 21 are shown on the left. ON OFF Code 11 and 21 0. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 0. 1. 0. ON OFF Code 11 Code 21 R01346 (d) BR3890 Without using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs.5 sec. ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM  Normal Code 2 sec. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (4) Check that the ABS warning light and VSC warning light indicates the normal code blinking pattern. and turn off the display. (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page 05–766. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (1) Using SST.5 sec. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON.5 sec.05–757 DIAGNOSTICS As an example. (5) After completing the check. the lowest numbered DTC is displayed first. – 2. (3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. (3) Clear the DTCs stored in the ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 seconds.5 sec. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3.25 sec. 0.

(c) From the display on the tester.: 0 km/h (0 MPH. max.05–758 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 2. max. max.8 V or over TOO LOW : Below 9.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. read the ”DATA LIST”. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min.: –1.1G at Reading changes when vestill condition hicle is bounced NORMAL : 9. sensor. actuator and so on without parts removal.8 V – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – . max.: 0 km/h (0 MPH. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time.: 0 km/h (0 MPH. you can read the value and status of the switch.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Lateral acceleration sensor 1 reading / min. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed on the Hand–held tester.869 G. Item ABS MOT RELAY SOL RELAY VSC / TRC OFF SW Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS motor relay / ON or OFF Solenoid relay / ON or OFF VSC / TRC OFF switch / ON or OFF STOP LIGHT SW Stop light switch / ON or OFF PKB SW Parking brake switch / ON or OFF WHEEL SPD FR WHEEL SPD FL WHEEL SPD RR WHEEL SPD RL DECELERAT SENS1 IG VOLTAGE SFRR SFRH SFLR SFLH SRRR (SRR) SRRH (SRH) Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH.: 1.869 G ECU power supply voltage / NORMAL or TOO LOW ABS solenoid SFRR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFRH / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFLR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SFLH / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRRR (SRR) / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRRH (SRH) / ON or OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note ON : Motor relay ON – ON : Solenoid relay ON – ON : Switch ON OFF : Switch OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released ON : Parking brake applied OFF : Parking brake released – – – Actual wheel speed Speed indicated on speedometer Actual wheel speed Speed indicated on speedometer Actual wheel speed Speed indicated on speedometer Actual wheel speed Speed indicated on speedometer Approximately 0  0. max.

05–759 DIAGNOSTICS Item SRLR SRLH SRCF(SA1) SRCR(SA2) SRMF(SMCF.: 0. Max.: 0.: 6000 rpm Maximum wheel speed sensor reading / min.: –1152 deg.STR) ENGINE SPD VEHICLE SPD Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS solenoid SRLR / ON or OFF ABS solenoid SRLH / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRCF(SA1) / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRCR(SA2) / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRMF(SMCF. max.: 0 rpm.: 26 Reading increases when brake pedal is depressed . max.: –128 deg/s.: –128 deg/s. Max.SA3) SRMR(SMCR.9 V NORMAL : Normal mode TEST : During test mode Min.: 1150.: 5 V Test mode / NORMAL or TEST Number of DTC recorded / min.: 0 V. max.3 – 0.SA3)1 / ON or OFF TRC solenoid SRMR(SMCR.875 deg Master cylinder pressure sensor 1 reading / min.: 255 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – When brake pedal is released : 0. Max.STR) / ON or OFF Engine Speed/ Min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH). max. Max.: 128 deg/s – STEERING ANG MAS CYL PRS1 TEST MODE #CODES Steering sensor/ Min.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM Normal Condition Diagnostic Note ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – ON : Operate – Actual engine speed – Actual vehicle speed Speed indicated on speedometer YAW RATE Yaw rate sensor/ Min.: 128 deg/s – YAW ZERO VALUE Memorized zero value/ Min.

*1: For VSC equipped vehicles only Item Vehicle Condition / Test Details SFRR Turns ABS solenoid SFRR ON / OFF SFRH Turns ABS solenoid SFRH ON / OFF SFLR Turns ABS solenoid SFLR ON / OFF SFLH Turns ABS solenoid SFLH ON / OFF SRRR(SRR) Turns ABS solenoid SRRR(SRR) ON / OFF SRRH(SRH) Turns ABS solenoid SRRH(SRH) ON / OFF SRLR Turns ABS solenoid SRLR ON / OFF SRLH Turns ABS solenoid SRLH ON / OFF SRCF(SA1) Turns TRAC solenoid SRCF (SA1) ON / OFF SRCR(SA2) Turns TRAC solenoid SRCR (SA2) ON / OFF SRMF(SMCF. solenoid. select the ”ACTIVE TEST”. (c) From the display on tester.SA3) Turns TRC solenoid SRMF (SMCF. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the Hand–held tester allows the relay. HINT: IG must be turned ON to proceed Active Test using a hand–held tester.05–760 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 3. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time.SA3) ON / OFF SRMR(SMCR. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST.STR) Turns TRC solenoid SRMR(SMCR.STR) ON / OFF SFRR & SFRH Turns ABS solenoid SFRR & SFRH ON / OFF SFLR & SFLH Turns ABS solenoid SFLR & SFLH ON / OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard .

05–761 DIAGNOSTICS Item – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM Vehicle Condition / Test Details SRH & SRR Turns ABS solenoid SRH & SRR ON / OFF SRLR & SRLH Turns ABS solenoid SRLR & SRLH ON / OFF SFRH & SFLH Turns ABS solenoid SFRH & SFLH ON / OFF SRCF & SRCR Turns ABS solenoid SRCF & SRCR ON / OFF SRMF & SRMR Turns ABS solenoid SRMF & SRMR ON / OFF SOL RELAY Turns ABS solenoid relay ON / OFF ABS MOT RELAY Turns ABS motor relay ON / OFF ABS WARN LIGHT Turns ABS warning light ON / OFF VSC WARN LIGHT Turns VSC warning light ON / OFF VSC / TRC OFF IND Turns VSC / TRC OFF indicator ON / OFF SLIP INDI LIGHT Turns SLIP indicator light ON / OFF BRAKE WRN LIGHT Turns BRAKE warning light ON / OFF VSC WARN BUZ Turns VSC warning buzzer ON / OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of motor can be heard Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Observe combination meter Buzzer can be heard .

A rox. HINT: If the ignition switch ”ON” operation exceeds 31 times. the freeze frame data at the occurrence of the malfunction is stored but the ABS actuation data is deleted.869 to 1.5 V MASS PRESS GRADE Master cylinder pressure sensor changing gradient –30 to 200 MPa/s Operate system ABS operate: ABS BA operate: BA VSC (TRC) operate: VSC (TRC) Yaw rate angle sensor output value –70 to 70 Steering sensor output value Left turn: Increase Right turn: Drop Throttle position sensor output value Release accelerator pedal: edal: Approx. it means the shift lever is at N or P position. (a) (b) – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle (sensor) status memorized during ABS and/or VSC operation or at the time of error code detection can be displayed using the hand–held tester.869 G TRC OFF switch signal TRC OFF SW ON: ON OFF: OFF Shift lever position P: P R: R N: N D: D 2: 2 L: L STOP LIGHT SW # IG ON SYSTEM YAW RATE STEERING ANG THROTTLE G (RIGHT & LEFT) VSC (TRC) OFF SW SHIFT POSITION *: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”Idling”.5 to 4. Hand–held tester display VEHICLE SPD Measurement Item Reference Value* Vehicle speed Speed indication of a meter Stop light switch signal Stop light switch ON: ON. (c) If the diagnosis code malfunction occurs. Only one record of the freeze frame data is stored and the freeze frame data generated during ABS and/or VSC operation are constantly updated.3 to 0. Also.9 V Depress brake pedal: 1. ”31” appears on the display. the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 90 deg Right and left G –1. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–762 DIAGNOSTICS 4. OFF: OFF Numbers of operations of ignition switch ON after memorizing freeze frame data 0 to 31 MAS CYL PRESS Master cylinder pressure sensor output voltage Release brake pedal: 0. 0 deg Depress accelerator pedal: Approx. the number of the operations of the ignition switch ”ON” after the freeze frame data is stored can be memorized up to 31 and it can be displayed.

HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink. DLC3 (d) Tc (e) HINT: S S CG C52361 Using SST.). (4) Turn the ignition switch ON. HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during test mode.05−763 DIAGNOSTICS − ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 5. DLC3 (a) Ts CG C52361 Procedures for test mode: (1) Turn the ignition switch OFF.25 second ON and 0. HINT: The sensor check may not be completed if the wheels spin or the steering wheels are steered during this check. Trouble area See Page Ts terminal circuit 05−854 ABS warning light circuit 05−827 (b) Check the speed sensor signal.25 second OFF is repeated). Without using hand−held tester: ABS SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) NOTICE: After replacing the steering angle sensor and/or ECU. (5) Check that the ABS warning light blinks. If every sensor is normal. . SST 09843−18040 (3) Check that the steering wheel is in the straight− ahead position and shift the shift lever to P range. connect terminal Ts and CG of the DLC3. See the list of DTCs on page 05−766. inspect the ABS warning light circuit or Ts terminal circuit. SST 09843−18040 Read the number of blinks of the ABS warning light. the DTCs will be erased. (c) Stop the vehicle. connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. the normal code is output (A cycle of 0. perform zero point calibration of the steering angle sensor or system decision (When replacing the ECU) (See step 7. (1) Drive the vehicle straight forward at the speed of 45 km/h (28 mph) or over for several seconds and check that the ABS warning light goes off. (2) Using SST.

5 sec. Malfunction Code (Example Code 72 76) 7 2 7 6 ON OFF 1. (d) Press the TRC OFF switch and hold it. disconnect the SST from terminal Ts and CG. Repeat BR3893 (f) 6. make sure to perform steering angle sensor zero point calibration. Engine ECU (M/T) or when adjusting the front wheel alignment or steering wheel center point in accordance with the removing or installing or replacing the suspension. 2.  ABS warning light is blinking.5 sec. (e) Check that the following conditions are satisfied.5 sec.). 0.05–764 DIAGNOSTICS  – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ZERO POINT CALIBRATION NOTICE: When replacing the steering angle sensor with column assembly or ECU. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. Engine and ECT ECU (A/T). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (c) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. the lowest numbered code is displayed first. (f) Depress the brake pedal 3 times or more within 2 seconds.5 sec. the DTCs will be erased. (c) to (d) on the previous page. 0. After the check.5 sec. 4 sec. (a) Using SST. SST 09843–18040 (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and keep the shift lever at P range. HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during test mode. axle or steering parts. perform zero point calibration of the steering angle sensor or system decision (When replacing the ECU) (See step 7. Tc and CG of DLC3 and turn the ignition switch to OFF. (a) Hook up the hand–held tester to the DLC3. SST 09843–19040 With using hand–held tester: ABS SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) NOTICE: After replacing the steering angle sensor and/or ECU. HINT:  Engine warning light comes on. 0. 0. 7. (b) Perform step 5.5 sec. (c) Make sure the steering off center angle is less than ±3° when assembling the steering wheels (Smaller value is desirable). connect terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3.

there is malfunction in the steering angle sensor.  If the skid control buzzer does not sound. perform the sensor calibration again. turn off the TRC OFF switch.  If the skid control buzzer sounds.05–765 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM (g) Check that the skid control buzzer sounds for 3 seconds. HINT:  Press and hold the TRC OFF switch until the skid control buzzer sounds. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . turn off the switch. When it starts sounding.  If the skid control buzzer still will not sound.  When the skid control buzzer starts sounding. the sensor calibration is in normal completion. so check the DTC.

2. 1. Speed sensor circuit 3. Stop light switch circuit 4. 2. Check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. Ts terminal circuit 2. 2. 1. Speed sensor circuit See page 05–756 05–808 05–774 05–778 32–56 05–756 05–774 05–778 05–815 32–56 05–827 – 05–756 05–852 05–854 – 05–756 05–808 – 05–774 05–778 . replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator.. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 4. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. Symptom ABS does not operate BA does not operate EBD does not operate Suspect Area If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. ABS warning light circuit 2. ABS does not operate properly BA does not operate properly EBD does not operate properly If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 2. NOTICE: When replacing the ABS & TRACTION actuator. sensor or etc. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. If there is malfunction. check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. Speed sensor circuit 4. If there is malfunction. ABS warning light malfunction 1. IG power source circuit 3. Check the brake master cylinder with a ABS actuator checker or hand–held tester. IG power source circuit 3. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. ABS & TRACTION actuator If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. ABS & TRACTION actuator DTC of ABS check cannot be performed If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. Tc terminal circuit Sensor signal check cannot be performed TRC does not operate AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 1. 1.05–772 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542T–04 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs. Check the brake master cylinder with a ABS actuator checker or hand–held tester. 1. turn the ignition switch to OFF. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output.

2. VSC warning circuit 05–756 05–844 05–756 05–852 05–756 05–831 . 1. 1. 4. TRC OFF switch circuit VSC does not operate 5. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. Tc terminal circuit If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 2. IG power source circuit 3. Yaw rate sensor and deceleration sensor circuit DTC of VSC check cannot be performed VSC warning light malfunction AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. 2. ABS & TRACTION actuator 05–848 – TRC OFF indicator malfunction If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. SLIP indicator light circuit 2. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator.05–773 DIAGNOSTICS Symptom – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM Suspect Area If the symptoms still occur even after the following circuits in suspect areas are inspected and proved to be normal. Check the DTC again and make sure that the normal code is output. replace the ABS & TRACTION actuator. 1. 1. 2. Speed sensor circuit See page 05–756 6. Steering angle sensor circuit 05–808 – 05–774 05–778 05–790 05–793 05–801 SLIP indicator light malfunction 1. Check the hydraulic circuit for leakage.

05–850 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0543K–04 SKID CONTROL BUZZER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The skid control buzzer sounds during VSC operation.4 FL MAIN B–G (*1) 1 4B ALT 1 2 1 4D B–G (*1) Engine Room R/B No.3 Battery *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV B (*2) ALT 3 1 2 3 W (*2) *3: LHD *4: RHD F45145 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . WIRING DIAGRAM R–W G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4) J/C G C J11 J21 (*3) (*4) Skid Control ECU With Actuator V7 VSC Warning Buzzer B–Y R–W Buzzer 1 2 3 IE1 B–Y 15 S1 BZ Driver Side J/B 18 DB ECU–IG IG1 Relay 1 DN 1 ED1 B–L (*2) W (*2) B–G (*1) Engine Room J/B No.

OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–57) NG 2 INSPECT SKID CONTROL BUZZER ASSY 2 1 (+) (–) (a) (b) Disconnect the skid control buzzer connector.05–851 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. 1 (a) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(SKID CONTROL BUZZER) Check that skid control buzzer sounds ”ON” and ”OFF” with the hand–held tester. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . F02192 NG REPLACE SKID CONTROL BUZZER ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL BUZZER – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal BZ of the skid control ECU and skid control buzzer (See page 01–32). check that the buzzer sounds. Apply battery positive voltage to the terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control buzzer connector.

05–848 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0543J–04 SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The SLIP indicator blinks during TRC & VSC operation.1 & Engine Room J/B No. WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU With Actuator Combination Meter B–W 15 C11 22 C11 8 IE1 LG 4 S1 IND LG Slip I13 Ignition SW Driver Side J/B C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4) J/C C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4) B–W IGN 18 DA 2 DH B–R 6 IG2 AM2 4 Engine Room R/B No.1 1 1A AM2 1 2 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) B–R 1 B–R Engine Room J/B No.3 B (*2) *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV 3 3 FL MAIN Battery B (*2) *3: LHD *4: RHD F45144 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .4 1 4A B–G (*1) 1 4B B–G (*1) Engine Room R/B No.

OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–57) NG 2 (a) INSPECT SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. 1 (a) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the SLIP indicator light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester.05–849 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . NG REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal IND of the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32).

OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V C52361 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 3 . Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 Skid Control ECU with Actuator Driver Side J/B W–L (*2) TC D J/C B 17 W–L (*2) J21 J20 DB 15 DL W–L 6 CA W–B (*2) 17 S1 TC 13 J8 J/C W–L (*1) B W–L (*1) B CG W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1) 4 A Center J/B 3 CB A IP *1: LHD *2: RHD IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV C87490 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 DLC3 INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Tc TERMINAL) (a) (b) Tc CG Turn the ignition switch ON.05–852 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 056T7–03 TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Connecting terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 causes the ECU to display the DTC by flashing the ABS warning light.

05–853 DIAGNOSTICS 2 (a) – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the skid control ECU and DLC3 (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

9 Engine idling. Brake warning light OFF Below 2.3 to 0.0 IG Switch ON. 10) L – W–B PMC (11) – E2 (12) GR – Y–R SS1 (13) – SS2 (29) W–B IG1 (14) – GND (6. (6 10) R Y–W R–Y W–B B IG switch ON. 10) STD Voltage (V) Pulse generation 10 to 14 Below 1.0 P – W–B W B FR+ (21) – FR– (22) W–B IG switch ON. 10) Y–B – W–B VSCW (34) – GND (6.0 Pulse generation IG Switch ON. stop light switch OFF 0.05–770 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0542S–04 TERMINALS OF ECU C94401 Symbols (Terminals No. (6 10) B Y–W B–Y W–B B IG switch ON TRC+ (18) – TRC– (19) EBDW (20) – GND (6. parking brake switch ON Below 1. 10) Y–G – W–B IG switch ON 4. TRAC OFF Light OFF 10 to 14 IG Switch ON. VSC buzzer is not sounded 10 to 14 W–L – W–B IG Switch ON 10 to 14 G–L IG switch ON Pulse generation IG Switch ON. SLIP indicator light OFF 10 to 14 Always 10 to 14 LG B – W LG–B W–B B LG – W W–B B +BS (5) – GND (6. slowly turn right rear wheel AC generation L–Y – R–L IG switch ON. VSC warning light OFF STP (37) – GND (6. 10) R – W–B ENG+ (8) – ENG– (7) Y–B +BM (9) – GND (6. 10) L–W – W–B WA (36) – GND (6.5 to 5. (6 10) Wiring Color Condition IG Switch ON. ABS warning light ON Below 2. TRAC OFF Light ON Below 2.0 IG Switch ON. 10) IND (4) – GND (6. slowly turn left rear wheel AC generation D/G (26) – GND (6. (6 10) Pulse generation Always 10 to 14 IG switch ON. VSC buzzer is sounded Tc (17) – GND (6. 10) W–G – W–B IG switch ON 8 to 12 VCM (27) – GND (6. slowly turn right front wheel AC generation RL+ (23) – RL– (40) R–G IG switch ON. (6 10) W R–W W–R W–B B SP1 (35) – GND (6.5 W – W–B IG switch ON 10 to 14 YIGA (30) – YGND (16) W–L – W–G IG Switch ON 10 to 14 PKB (31) – GND (6 (6. VSC warning light ON IG Switch ON. ABS warning light OFF 10 to 14 Stop light switch OFF Below 1.0  10 to 14 IG switch ON.) WT (2) – GND (6 (6. parking brake switch OFF 10 to 14 Engine idling IG Switch ON.0 IG Switch ON. 10) B W–W B–W W–B B Ts (28) – GND (6. 10) NEO (32) – GND (6. 10) R–W – W–B BZ (15) – GND (6.5 Stop light switch ON 8 to 14 G W–W G–W W–B B P–V IG switch ON. slowly turn left front wheel AC generation AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Brake warning light ON 5 to 9 IG Switch ON. slowly tun steering wheel IG switch ON IG switch ON.5 IG switch ON. SLIP indicator light ON Below 2. (6 10) RR+ (38) – RR– (39) FL+ (41) – FL– (24) Vehicle drives at about 20 km/h (12 mph) Pulse generation 5 to 9 Below 2.

05–771 DIAGNOSTICS CSW (42) – GND (6 (6. 10) – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM IG switch ON.5 IG switch ON. TRC OFF switch released 8 to 14 G Y–W G–Y W–B B AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . TRC OFF switch pressed Below 1.

05–844 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0543I–04 TRC OFF INDICATOR. TRC control goes off and the TRC OFF indicator illuminates. TRC CUT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the TRC control main switch. If the ignition switch is turned off. TRC control surely comes on the next time the ignition switch is turned ON. When the TRC OFF switch is pressed. turn the TRC OFF indicator light to ”ON” when the VSC system is at the fail safe control. Also. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–845 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM 7 CA Skid Control ECU With Actuator Combination Meter Center J/B 6 CD 21 C11 R–W 2 7 LG–B IE1 S1 WT 17 LG–B C11 TRC OFF Driver Side J/B R–W 7 DB IG1 Relay 1 DN 3 5 5 DH GAUGE1 1 9 DA 2 AM1 W–B I13 Ignition SW 1 DH G–R 3 AM1 1 IG1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.3 1 ED1 B–L (*2) B–G (*1) W (*2) ALT 3 2 3 1 B (*2) FL MAIN J16 J/C W–B (*4) A T9 TRC Off SW W–B (*4) A 6 14 IE1 G–Y 9 G–Y 42 S1 CSW Center J/B Battery W–B (*3) IJ 10 C1 6 W–B (*3) CA IL IP *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD F45146 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .4 1 B–G 4D (*1) ALT 2 1 4B 1 Engine Room R/B No.

1 (a) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(TRC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the TRC OFF indicator light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–held tester. Disconnect the TRC OFF switch connector. OK: C94394 NG TRC OFF switch Resistance Pushed in Continuity Released 1M or higher REPLACE TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH OK 4 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – TRC OFF SWITCH) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CSW of the skid control ECU and TRC OFF switch (See page 01–32). OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–57) NG 2 (a) INSPECT TRC OFF INDICATOR LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure resistance between terminals + and E of the TRC OFF switch when the TRC OFF switch is ON and OFF. NG REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY OK 3 INSPECT TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH (a) (b) (c) 4 3 2 10 9 8 7 6 5 + E Remove the TRC OFF switch.05–846 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–847 DIAGNOSTICS 5 (a) – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32).

WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 TS W (*1) 12 D W (*2) CG Skid Control ECU with Actuator J8 J/C J/C B W (*2) J21 W−B (*2) W−B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD W−B (*1) A 28 S1 TS W IE2 D C J20 4 12 W (*1) Center J/B 3 6 CB CA IO W−B (*2) IP IO: 1AZ−FSE IL: 1CD−FTV C87489 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 DLC3 INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) (a) (b) Ts CG Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. Connecting terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3 starts the check. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V C52361 OK NG Go to step 3 .05−854 − DIAGNOSTICS ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 056T8−03 TS TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The sensor check circuit detects troubles in the sensor signal which cannot be detected by the DTC check.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 (a) CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32).05–855 DIAGNOSTICS 2 (a) – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of the DLC3 and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

WIRING DIAGRAM G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4) R–W Combination Meter B–W 22 C11 J/C 16 C11 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 22 14 R–W IE1 S1 IG1 G C R–W J10 J20 (*3) (*4) 6 34 W–R IE1 S1 VSCW W–R VSC Driver Side J/B J/C C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4) C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4) IGN 18 DA 18 DB IG1 Relay 1 DN B–G (*1) 5 DH I13 Ignition SW 2 DH ECU–IG 5 3 1 2 9 DA AM1 1 DH G–Y 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–R B–R Engine Room R/B No.3 Engine Room J/B No.4 3 1 ALT 4A B–G (*1) 1 4D 3 1 4B ALT 3 2 B (*2) 1 1 2 FL MAIN W–B B–G (*1) W–B Battery *1: 1AZ–FSE *2: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) IJ W–B 10 S1 GND2 W–B 6 S1 GND1 EA *3: LHD *4: RHD F45147 .05–838 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM 0543G–04 VSC WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ECU stores DTC.1 IG2 6 4 AM2 B–R B–L (*2) 1 ED1 W (*2) 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) AM2 B–R 1 2 1 1 1A B–G (*1) B (*2) Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No. the VSC warning light illuminates on the combination meter.

1 (a) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(VSC WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the VSC warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand– held tester.05–839 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD & BA & TRC & VSC SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. NG REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINATION METER – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–57) NG 2 (a) INSPECT VSC WARNING LIGHT See combination meter troubleshooting on page 71–1. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ABS & TRACTION ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–57) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

Connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 to make the ABS warning light blink and output the DTC. and store the DTC. turn on ABS warning light. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . it will prohibit ABS control.05–741 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 056SW–09 ABS WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT (DOES NOT LIGHT UP) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECU detects trouble.

4 B–G (*1) 1 4A 1 4B B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2) Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.3 W–B (*3 *1) B (*2) 3 3 B (*2) A J15 J/C FL MAIN Battery IL IO IK *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD F45135 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–742 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Combination Meter B–W 22 C11 9 C10 17 C10 W–B (*4) J16 W–B J/C (*3) A A A Driver Side J/B J/C 18 DA C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4) IGN 2 DH AM2 1 2 1 B–R W–B (*4) A B–R I13 Ignition SW Engine Room R/B No.1 1 1A 22 S2 WA R–Y J17 J/C ABS C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4) 17 IE1 R–Y 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) B–R 4 AM2 IG2 6 Engine Room J/B No.

1 (a) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) Check that ”ON” and ”OFF” of the ABS warning light is shown on the combination meter by the hand–held tester. Check the ABS warning light.05–743 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54) NG 2 (a) (b) (c) INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(ABS WARNING LIGHT) (See page 71–1) Disconnect the connector from the skid control ECU. Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: ABS warning light comes on NG REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(WA CIRCUIT) Check for a short circuit in harness and connector between terminal WA of the skid control ECU and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

Trouble Area  Battery  Charging system  Power source circuit  ABS warning light circuit  Skid control ECU HINT: There is a case that hand–held tester cannot be used when there is a malfunction in the ECU. Always ON DTC Detecting Condition Either of the following 1 or 2 is detected: 1. 2. The ECU connectors are disconnected from the ECU. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . There is a malfunction in the ECU internal circuit.05–737 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 056SV–09 AlwaysON MALFUNCTION IN ABS ECU CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.

1 & Engine Room J/B No.05–738 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4) J/C 22 C A B–W J8 J26 C11 (*3) (*4) 9 R–Y C10 17 C10 17 IE1 W–B (*3) W–B (*4) ABS R–W Driver Side J/B B–W IGN 18 DA IG1 Relay 1 DN 5 DH 5 3 1 2 18 S2 IG1 22 IE1 2 DH B–R 18 G C J/C G C R–W DB J10 J20 J10 J20 (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) 9 W–B DA ECU–IG Skid Control ECU with Actuator 22 R–Y S2 WA R–W I13 Ignition SW AM1 1 DH G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 4 AM2 IG2 6 B–R G–Y Engine Room R/B No.3 Engine Room J/B No.1 B–R 1 ED1 B–L (*2) 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) 1 B–G (*1) 1A AM2 B–R 1 W (*2) 2 B (*2) 1 Engine Room R/B No.4 3 ALT 1 4A B–G (*1) 1 4D ALT 2 3 1 1 2 4B B (*2) J15 J/C FL MAIN B–G (*1) B (*2) J17 J/C W–B (*4) A A A W–B (*3 *1) W–B (*3 *2) Battery IJ *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 3 1 IK IO IL J16 J/C A A W–B W–B 10 S2 GND2 W–B 6 S2 GND1 EA F45148 .

05–739 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs are output (See page 05–699). Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND GND IG1 NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) F45088 OK Go to step 5 . IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE NO 2 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR SECURELY CONNECTED NO CONNECT CONNECTOR TO ECU YES 3 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(IG1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE) IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition. which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector.

Resistance: 1  or less NG GND – GND F45088 REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND)(See page 01–32) OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – IG1 TERMINAL) (See page 01–32) 5 INSPECT COMBINATION METER(ABS WARNING LIGHT) (a) (b) (c) GND GND WA Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. connect terminals WA and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. Using service wire. Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: ABS warning light goes off. F45088 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–740 DIAGNOSTICS 4 ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a) Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground.

the parking brake is applied or the EBD is defective. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–744 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577X–04 BRAKE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The Brake warning light comes on when the brake fluid is insufficient.

1 1 1A 12 S2 EBDW P 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*3) (*4) B–R 4 AM2 IG2 6 Engine Room J/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.05–745 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Combination Meter B–W 22 C11 4 C11 17 C10 18 IE1 P J17 J/C W–B (*4) Brake J16 W–B J/C (*3) A A A Driver Side J/B C A J8 J26 (*3) (*4) J/C 18 DA C A B–W J8 J26 (*3) (*4) IGN 2 DH AM2 1 1 B–R 2 W–B (*4) A B–R I13 Ignition SW Engine Room R/B No.3 W–B (*3 *1) B (*2) 3 3 B (*2) A J15 J/C FL MAIN Battery IL IO IK *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD F45135 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .4 B–G (*1) 1 4A 1 4B B–G (*1) W–B (*3 *2) Engine Room R/B No.

Check for an open or shot circuit in brake fluid level warning switch circuit (See page 01–32).05–746 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTC (See page 05–699). NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY . OK: Normal code NG REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE OK 2 (a) INSPECT PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT Check for an open or short circuit in the parking brake switch circuit (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR REPLACE SWITCH CIRCUIT PARKING BRAKE OK 3 (a) (b) INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT Check the brake fluid level in reservoir. NG REPAIR OR REPLACE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT OK 4 (a) INSPECT VACUUM WARNING SWITCH CIRCUIT Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the vacuum warning switch and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 5 (a) INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY(BRAKE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT) Check for an open or short circuit in the combination meter (See page 01–32).

05–747 DIAGNOSTICS 6 (a) – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BRAKE ACTUATOR – COMBINATION METER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the brake actuator and combination meter (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

C0200/31 and C1330/35 are for the right front speed sensor. the frequency is used by the ECU to detect the speed of each wheel. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C0200/31 C0205/32 When any of the following 1.  Right front and left front speed sensor  Speed sensor rotor C1330/35 C1331/36 Detecting abnormality in the resistance value of each speed sensor. Deviation of 2 wheel speed. when the brake pedal is not applied. Speed Sensor N S Magnet Coil To ECU Low Speed High Speed +V BR3583 BR3582 –V F00010 DTC No. with the brake pedal applied or for 5 sec. When the rotors rotate. is detected : 1. the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. These signals are used for control of the ABS control system. Since the frequency of this AC voltage changes in direct proportion to the speed of the rotor. Each of the front and rear rotors has 48 serrations. Non–plausible high frequent signal. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No.  Right front and left front speed sensor  Speed sensor circuit HINT: DTC No. 2. C0205/32 and C1331/36 are for the left front speed sensor.05–709 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XJ–11 DTC C0200/31 RIGHT FRONT SPEED SENSOR DTC C0205/32 LEFT FRONT SPEED SENSOR DTC C1330/35 RIGHT FRONT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC C1331/36 LEFT FRONT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Rotor The speed sensor detects wheel speed and transmits the appropriate signals to the ECU. 3. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph). high wheel acceleration or high gradient for 20 sec. to 3. the magnetic field generated by the permanent magnet in the speed sensor induces an AC voltage.

OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 5 . HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the speedometer indication. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed value.05–710 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator L–Y A4 ABS Speed Sensor Front LH 2 1 A5 ABS Speed Sensor Front RH 6 R–L S2 FL– W 10 S2 FR+ B 9 S2 FR– 2 1 5 S2 FL+ F40884 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle. 1 (a) (b) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FRONT SPEED SENSOR) Select the item ”WHEEL SPEED FL (FR)” in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the hand– held tester.

6 k at 20_C (68_F) Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector and body ground.2 to 1. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54) . NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 4 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS Normal Signal Waveform GND 2 m/s / Division 1 V / Division W04200 (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminal FR+ – FR– and FL+ – FL– of the skid control ECU. error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches. HINT: S As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases. and check the signal waveform. a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT RH NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). looseness or foreign matter deposited on it. S When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope.05–711 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR (a) (b) (c) 2 1 (d) C93876 Remove the fender liner. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph). OK: Resistance: 1. Disconnect the speed sensor connector. OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FRONT SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each front speed sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector.

OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. Check the sensor tip. OK: No scratches. R00948 NG CLEAN OR REPAIR SPEED SENSOR ROTOR NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). Check the sensor rotor serrations. NG CLEAN OR REPAIR SPEED SENSOR NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). remove it and after reassembling.0 Nm (82 kgfcm. missing teeth or foreign objects. HINT: If a foreign object is attached.lbf) NG OK BR3795 NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT RH NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR FRONT LH NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). check the output waveform. OK: The installation bolt is tightened properly and there is no clearance between the sensor and front steering knuckle. 71 in. Torque: 8. OK 6 (a) (b) INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TIP Remove the front speed sensor (See page 32–59). OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–712 DIAGNOSTICS 5 – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT FRONT SPEED SENSOR INSTALLATION (a) Check the speed sensor installation. OK 7 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR (a) (b) Remove the front speed sensor rotor (See page 30–6).

 Right rear and left rear speed sensor  Speed sensor rotor Detecting abnormality in the resistance value of each speed sensor. with the brake pedal applied or for 5 sec. Non–plausible high frequent signal. C0210/33 C0215/34 C1332/38 C1333/39 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area When any of the following 1 to 3 is detected : 1. high wheel acceleration or high gradient for 20 sec. 2. C0205/32. DTC No. After the initial start or restart and when the vehicle speed has reached 12 km/h (7 mph).05–713 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577U–04 DTC C0210/33 RIGHT REAR SPEED SENSOR DTC C0215/34 LEFT REAR SPEED SENSOR DTC C1332/38 RIGHT REAR SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC C1333/39 LEFT REAR SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC C0200/31. C1331/36 on page 05–709. C0215/34. C1333/39 are for the left rear speed sensor.  Right rear and left rear speed sensor  Speed sensor circuit HINT: DTC No. C1332/38 are for the right rear speed sensor. 3. DTC No. C1330/35. when the brake pedal is not applied. the wheel speed of 0 km/h (0 mph) is detected. Deviation of 2 wheel speed. WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator A32 ABS Speed Sensor Rear LH A33 ABS Speed Sensor Rear RH R 2 IB1 R 7 S2 RL+ G 1 IB1 G 17 S2 RL– 1 2 P 1 IM1 P 10 IE2 P 19 S2 RR+ 1 2 V 10 IM1 V 11 IE2 V 8 S2 RR– F45131 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . C0210/33.

OK: Resistance: 2. (b) Make sure that there is no looseness at the connector lock part and connecting part of the connector. (b) HINT: There is tolerance of  10 % in the speedometer indication. OK: 1  or lower (e) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the speed sensor connector 1 and body ground.05–714 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. OK: Resistance: 1 M or higher F41836 Connector 2 2 1 1 Connector 1 2 F10180 Skid control Sensor Sub–Wire Harness: (a) Disconnect the sub–wire harness connector from floor wire harness. 1 (a) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(REAR SPEED SENSOR) Select the item ”WHEEL SPEED RL (RR)” in the DATA LIST and read the value displayed on the hand– held tester. Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector. Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speed sensor displayed on the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed on the speedometer when driving the vehicle. OK: 1  or lower (d) Measure resistance between terminal 2 of the connector 1 and terminal 1 of the connector 2. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed value. (c) Measure resistance between terminal 1 of the connector 1 and terminal 2 of the connector 2. OK Go to step 5 NG 2 INSPECT REAR SPEED SENSOR (a) (b) (c) Disconnect the skid control sensor connector.2 k or less Measure resistance between each of terminals 1 and 2 of the skid control sensor connector and body ground. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SKID CONTROL SUB–WIRE HARNESS SENSOR OR . OK: 10 M or higher NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699).

a cycle of the waveform becomes shorter and the fluctuation in the output voltage becomes greater.  When noise is identified in the waveform on the oscilloscope.05–715 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for on open or short circuit in harness and connector between each skid control sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32). OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54) NG 5 INSPECT SENSOR INSTALLATION (a) Check the sensor installation. OK NG F10178 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SKID CONTROL SUB–WIRE HARNESS SENSOR OR . and check the signal waveform. HINT:  As the vehicle speed (wheel revolution speed) increases. NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). error signals are generated due to the speed sensor rotor’s scratches. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 4 INSPECT SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR SERRATIONS Normal Signal Waveform GND 2 m/s / Division 1 V / Division W04200 (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals RR+ – RR– and RL+ – RL– of the skid control ECU. (b) Drive the vehicle at about 30 km/h (19 mph). OK: There is no clearance between the sensor and rear axle carrier. looseness or foreign matter deposited on it.

NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699). NOTICE: Check the speed sensor signal last (See page 05–699).05–716 DIAGNOSTICS 6 (a) (b) – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT SPEED SENSOR TIP Remove the skid control sensor (See page 32–61). missing teeth or foreign objects. OK: No scratches or foreign objects on the sensor tip. Check the sensor tip. NG CLEAN OR REPAIR SKID CONTORL SENSOR OK 7 INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR (a) Check the sensor rotor serrations. W04846 NG REPLACE REAR AXLE HUB & BEARING ASSY RH NG REPLACE REAR AXLE HUB & BEARING ASSY LH OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . OK: No scratches.

4 1 4B B–G (*1) ALT 1 ABS 21 Engine Room R/B No. WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Engine Room R/B No.1 ABS 1 1B 3 S2 +BS R (*2) 1 2 1 B (*2) B–G (*1) FL MAIN 2 W–B 1 S2 GND2 W–B 4 S2 GND1 W–B Battery EA *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV F45132 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .4 & Engine Room J/B No. DTC No.05–717 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM DTC C0226/21 SFR SOLENOID CIRCUIT DTC C0236/22 SFL SOLENOID CIRCUIT DTC C0246/23 SRR SOLENOID CIRCUIT DTC C0256/24 SRL SOLENOID CIRCUIT 050XQ–12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This solenoid goes on when receiving signals from the ECU and controls the pressure acting on the wheel cylinders to control the braking force.3 ALT 3 3 1 W (*2) R (*1) 4 2 Engine Room R/B No. C0226/21 C0236/22 C0246/23 C0256/24 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area  Each solenoid circuit Solenoid valve signal does not match to the check result.1 & Engine Room J/B No.

YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE NO REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–718 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) RECONFIRM DTC Check if other DTCs are detected (See page 05–699).

While the ABS is activated. or more at motor relay ON. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C0273/13 Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1.4 & Engine Room J/B No. 3.1 ABS 1 1B L (*2) 1 2 1 B (*2) B–G (*1) 2 1 W–B FL MAIN W–B S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1 W–B Battery EA *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV F45132 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Pump motor voltage is 2.  ABS motor relay  ABS motor relay circuit WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Engine Room R/B No. the ECU switches the motor relay ON and operates the ABS pump motor.1 & Engine Room J/B No. DTC No.0 V) or less for 0.4 1 4B B–G (*1) ALT ABS 1 21 Engine Room R/B No. After the end of the actuation of the motor relay slow down condition of motor does not meet the specification.3 ALT 3 3 1 L (*1) 4 W (*2) 2 S2 +BM 2 Engine Room R/B No. Pump motor voltage is (IG – 4.1 sec.0 V or more for 1 sec. 2. or more at motor relay OFF.05–719 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 056ST–06 C0273/13 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ABS MOTOR RELAY CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ABS motor relay supplies power to the ABS pump motor.

Measure the voltage between terminals +BM and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. CHECK THE CONTACT CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION NG 2 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(+BM TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b) +BM GND GND Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V F45088 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED.05–720 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 if you are using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 if you are not using the hand–held tester. 1 (a) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST BY HAND–HELD TESTER(ABS MOTOR RELAY) Check the operation sound of the ABS motor individually when operating it with the hand–held tester. CHECK THE CONTACT CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION . OK IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED. OK: The operation sound of the ABS motor is heard.

05–721 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT FUSE(ABS FUSE) (a) Gasoline Engine: ABS (40 A) Engine Room R/B No. OK: Continuity ABS (40 A) F45087 NG CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE OK 4 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a) GND GND Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground.1 Remove the ABS (40 A) fuse from the engine room R/B No. Check continuity of the ABS fuse. OK: Resistance: 1  or less F45088 NG CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND)(See page 01–32) OK CHECK AND REPLACE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BM TERMINAL) (See page 01–32) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .4 (b) Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No.1 (Diesel engine).4 (Gasoline engine) or engine room R/B No.

the relay goes on. if the initial check is OK.4 1 4B B–G (*1) ALT 1 ABS 21 Engine Room R/B No.  ABS solenoid relay  ABS solenoid relay circuit WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.4 & Engine Room J/B No. Valve relay voltage is 0. Internal circuit malfunction in ECU.8 x IG or less for 0.1 ABS 1 1B 3 S2 +BS R (*2) 1 2 1 B (*2) B–G (*1) 2 1 W–B FL MAIN W–B S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1 W–B Battery EA *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV F45132 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Valve relay voltage is high level at valve relay OFF.3 ALT 3 3 1 W (*2) R (*1) 4 2 Engine Room R/B No.5 sec.05–722 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 056SS–06 C0278/11 OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUT IN ABS SOLENOID RELAY CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This relay supplies power to each ABS solenoid. 3. After the ignition switch is turned ON. 2. DTC No. C0278/11 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area Detection of any conditions from 1 to 3: 1.

05–723 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(+BS TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b) +BS GND Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. OK: Continuity ABS (25 A) Diesel Engine: Engine Room R/B No. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK GND F45088 IF THE SAME CODE IS STILL OUTPUT AFTER THE DTC IS DELETED. CHECK THE CONTACT CONDITION OF EACH CONNECTION NG 2 INSPECT FUSE(ABS FUSE) (a) Gasoline Engine: Engine Room R/B No.4 (Gasoline engine) or engine room R/B No. Check continuity of the ABS fuse.1 (Diesel engine). Measure the voltage between terminals +BS and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector.4 (b) Remove the ABS (25 A) fuse from the engine room R/B No.1 ABS (25 A) NG F45087 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE .

05–724 DIAGNOSTICS 3 ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a) GND – GND Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1  or less F45088 NG CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND) (See page 01–32) OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – +BS TERMINAL) (See page 01–32) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Wheel sensor signal failure suspicion. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . 2. C1237/37 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area Detection of any of conditions from 1 through 4: 1. Continuous ABS control for 60 sec. or more. 3.  Speed sensor  Sensor rotor INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TIRE SIZE NG REPLACE TIRES SO THAT ALL 4 TIRES ARE SAME IN SIZE OK 2 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR ROTOR NG REPLACE SENSOR ROTOR NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR OK 3 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR OK 4 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between each terminal of speed sensor and the skid control ECU (See page 01–32).05–725 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577V–04 C1237/37 SPEED SENSOR ROTOR FAULTY CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. Wheel speed deviation of unspecified wheel.

9 V. battery voltage is less than 9. DTC No.2 V at the time of operation of ABS control. DTC Detecting Condition C1241/41 With vehicle speed to about 6 km/h (4 mph).4 V at the time of non–operation of ABS control or less than 9. or battery voltage is more than 16.05–726 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XX–09 C1241/41 LOW BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE OR ABNORMALLY HIGH BATTERY POSITIVE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the power source of the ECU. hence the actuators. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Battery  Charging system  Power source circuit .

4 1 4D B–G (*1) ALT FL MAIN W–B 1 4B S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1 W–B B–G (*1) B (*2) Battery *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD IJ EA F45133 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–727 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM R–W G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4) J/C G C J10 J20 (*3) (*4) 22 IE1 R–W R–W Skid Control ECU with Actuator 18 S2 IG1 Driver Side J/B B–G (*1) B–L (*2) IG Relay 1 DN 5 5 DH G–Y ECU–IG 3 1 2 18 DB R–W 9 DA W–B I13 Ignition SW AM1 1 G–R DH 3 G–Y 1 G–Y Engine Room R/B No.3 B–L (*2) 1 ED1 W (*2) W–B ALT 3 3 2 B (*2) 1 1 W–B Engine Room J/B No.

IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND GND IG1 NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OK F45088 REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54) . (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. Check continuity of the ECU–IG fuse.05–728 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT FUSE(ECU–IG FUSE) (a) (b) Driver Side J/B ECU–IG Remove the ECU–IG fuse from the driver side J/B. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. OK: Continuity NG INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO ECU–IG FUSE NG INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM F45090 OK 2 INSPECT BATTERY OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK 3 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(IG1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE) IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition. which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester.

05–729 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a) Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground. (b) OK: Resistance: 1  or less GND GND F45088 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND) (See page 01–32) OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – IG1 TERMINAL) (See page 01–32) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

C1249/58 DTC Detecting Condition Stop light switch circuit is open. and stop light switch voltage is in the level between 40 % and 70 % of the battery voltage.05–730 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XZ–13 C1249/58 STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Stop light switch  Stop light switch circuit .

*7) 2 W–B (*6) BE1 BX 1 N8 Noise Filter (Stop Light) F45775 . *7) W–B (*6) G–W (*7) W–B (*6) W–B (*7) W–B (*6.05–731 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM S13 Stop Light SW 1 IR1 G–W (*4) 2 1 G–W (*3) 2 IR1 R–W (*4) G–W (*4) 11 IE3 R–W (*3) FL MAIN 2 DA 6 G–W (*3) IE3 22 DA R–W (*4) C J/C B J31 J30 W–B G–W 1 DM G–W 20 S2 STP 1 DN Engine Room J/B No. *7) W–B (*7) 2 4 BD1 BF1 (*6) (*7) *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD W–B (*6) *5: S/D *6: L/B *7: W/G 3 BG1 W–B (*7) G–W (*6.3 W–B (*5) STOP 2 DL R–W (*3) B–G (*1) B (*2) Skid Control ECU with Actuator Driver Side J/B 1 4D 2 B–G (*1) ALT 3 1 W (*2) B–L (*2) 3 ED1 H20 J32 1 2 High Mounted Stop Light J/C W–B (*5) W–B (*5) G–W (*5) 1 2 C C J/C C Rear Combination Light LH J30 STOP 2 5 4 1 4 6 B C G–W G–W R13 R13 R13 R13 R13 R13 J31 J30 (*5) (*6) (*7) (*5) (*6) (*7) Rear Combination Light RH 6 3 3 STOP 7 4 1 B C W–B G–W G–W (*6.4 1 4B ALT 1 Engine Room R/B No. *7) Battery W–B BS  AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) BT A J/C A J33 J34 W–B (*6. *7) R14 R14 R14 R14 R14 R14 J31 J30 (*5) (*6) (*7) (*5) (*6) (*7) H20 High Mounted Stop Light 4 1 1 3 L(*6) L(*7) G–W W–B (*7) G–W (*6) BG1 BE1 BD1 BF1 2 1 (*6) (*7) (*6.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–708) 4 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LIGHT CIRCUIT) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector of the stop light circuit (See page 01–32). Measure the voltage between terminal STP and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector when the brake pedal is depressed. NG Go to step 4 OK 2 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU TERMINAL VOLTAGE(STP TERMINAL) (a) (b) Disconnect skid control ECU connector.05–732 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY Check that the stop light comes on when the brake pedal is depressed and goes off when the brake pedal is released. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK GND GND STP REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54) F45088 NG 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LIGHT SWITCH – SKID CONTROL ECU) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the stop light switch and skid control ECU (See page 01–32). OK REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

(c) Measure the voltage between terminals IG1 and GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V GND GND IG1 NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OK F45088 REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY (See page 32–54) .  ECU INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 RECONFIRM DTC A DTC C1300/62 B Except DTC C1300/62 B REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE A 2 INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(IG1 TERMINAL VOLTAGE) IN CASE OF USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Check the voltage condition. which is output from the ECU and displayed on the hand–held tester. OK: ”Normal” is displayed. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. C1300/62 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area Internal control unit of skid control ECU failure. IN CASE OF NOT USING HAND–HELD TESTER: (a) Disconnect the skid control ECU connector.05–733 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577W–04 C1300/62 SKID CONTROL ECU MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.

OK: Resistance: 1  or less NG GND – GND F45088 CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL – BODY GROUND)(See page 01–32) OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BATTERY – IG1 TERMINAL) (See page 01–32) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–734 DIAGNOSTICS 3 ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECT SKID CONTROL ECU CONNECTOR(GND TERMINAL CONTINUITY) (a) Measure resistance between terminal GND of the skid control ECU harness side connector and body ground.

3 ALT 3 3 1 W (*2) L (*1) 4 2 Engine Room R/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No.05–735 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 05C5B–01 C1350/51 PUMP MOTOR IS LOCKED/OPEN CIRCUIT IN PUMP MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.4 1 4B B–G (*1) ALT 1 ABS 21 Engine Room R/B No.1 ABS 1 1B 2 S2 +BM L (*2) 1 2 1 B (*2) B–G (*1) 2 1 W–B FL MAIN W–B S2 GND2 4 S2 GND1 W–B Battery EA *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV F45132 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . A high level of motor voltage when skid control ECU does not start the motor relay. 3. No motor voltage supply after skid control ECU starts the motor relay.4 & Engine Room J/B No. 1. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area When any of the following 1 through 3 is detected. 2. C1350/51 Brake actuator pump motor WIRING DIAGRAM Skid Control ECU with Actuator Engine Room R/B No. The pump motor voltage is high level for a certain time after the motor relay has elapsed.

YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE NO REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–736 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) RECONFIRM DTC Check if other DTCs are detected (See page 05–699).

Date Vehicle Brought In / Date Problem First Occurred Frequency the Problem Occurs km miles Odometer Reading / / Continuously / Intermittently ( times a day) ABS does not operate. ABS does not operate efficiently.05–698 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050X4–14 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ABS Check Sheet Inspector’s : Name VIN Production Date Customer’s Name / / Licence No. Symptoms ABS Warning Light Remains ON Does not Light Up Brake Warning Light Remains ON Does not Light Up 1st Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check STOP LIGHT SW ON OFF NO SYS SYSTEM Freeze Frame Data ABS FAIL SF #IG ON VEHICLE SPD AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) km/h MPH .

check the circuit listed for that code. inspect the ECU and ground points for poor contact. connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. For details of each code. When 2 or more DTCs are detected. refer to the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No. perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check. .” in the DTC chart. If malfunction is not found when inspecting parts.05–704 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XB–14 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT:     Using SST 09843–18040.

      .

  C0200/31 (05–709) Right front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor rotor C0205/32 (05–709) Left front wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor rotor C0210/33 (05–713) Right rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor rotor C0215/34 (05–713) Left rear wheel speed sensor signal malfunction  Left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor rotor C0226/21 (05–717) Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SFR) circuit  SFRR or SFRH circuit C0236/22 (05–717) Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SFL) circuit  SFLR or SFLH circuit C0246/23 (05–717) Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SRR) circuit  SRRR or SRRH circuit C0256/24 (05–717) Open or short circuit in ABS actuator solenoid (SRL) circuit  SRLR or SRLH circuit C0273/13 (05–719) Open or short circuit in ABS motor relay circuit  ABS motor relay  ABS motor relay circuit C0278/11 (05–722) Open or short circuit in ABS solenoid relay circuit  ABS solenoid relay  ABS solenoid relay circuit C1237/37 (05–725) Speed sensor rotor is wrong number of teeth on one of the 4 wheels  Speed sensor  Sensor rotor  Speed sensor circuit C1241/41 (05–726) Low battery voltage or abnormally high battery voltage  Battery  Charging system  Power source circuit C1249/58 (05–730) Open circuit in stop light switch circuit  Stop light switch  Stop light switch circuit C1300/62 (05–733) Malfunction in skid control ECU  Battery  Skid control ECU C1330/35 (05–709) Open circuit in right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor circuit C1331/36 (05–709) Open circuit in left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor circuit C1332/38 (05–713) Open circuit in right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor circuit C1333/39 (05–713) Open circuit in left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor circuit C1350 / 51 (05–735) Pump motor is locked Open circuit in pump motor ground  Brake actuator pump motor Malfunction in ECU  Battery  Charging system  ABS warning light circuit  Power source circuit  Skid control ECU Always ON (05–737) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Diagnosis Trouble Area C1271/71 Low output voltage of right front speed sensor  Right front speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1272/72 Low output voltage of left front speed sensor  Left front speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1273/73 Low output voltage of right rear speed sensor  Right rear speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1274/74 Low output voltage of left rear speed sensor  Left rear speed sensor  Sensor installation  Sensor rotor C1275/75 Abnormal change in output voltage of right front speed sensor Right front speed sensor rotor C1276/76 Abnormal change in output voltage of left front speed sensor Left front speed sensor rotor C1277/77 Abnormal change in output voltage of right rear speed sensor Right rear speed sensor rotor C1278/78 Abnormal change in output voltage of left rear speed sensor Left rear speed sensor rotor AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–705 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM DTC of speed sensor check function: Code No.

05–696 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050YD–14 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–698) 3 Check and Clear DTCs and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–699) 4 Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 5 Symptom occurs: Go to step 6 5 Symptom Simulation (See page 01–32) 6 DTC Check (See page 05–699) There is no output: Go to step 7 There is output: Go to step 8 7 Problem Symptoms Table (See page 05–708) Check for fluid leakage and Go to step 10 8 DTC Chart (See page 05–704) 9 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–709 – 05–750) HINT: When 2 or more DTCs are detected. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . perform circuit inspection one by one until the problem is identified.

9.05–697 DIAGNOSTICS 10 Identification of Problem 11 Repair 12 Confirmation Test – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM End HINT: Step 3. 12: Diagnostic steps permitting the use of the hand–held tester. the ABS warning light comes on and the ABS operation is prohibited. Fail safe function: When a failure occurs in the ABS system. the brake warning light comes on as well and the EBD operation is prohibited. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . In addition to this. when the failure which disables the EBD operation occurs. 6.

05–706 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XD–10 LOCATION Brake Actuator (Include Skid Control ECU) Skid Control Sensor Left Front Speed Sensor Combination Meter (ABS Warning Light) (Brake Warning Light) Speed Sensor Rotor Parking Brake Switch DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch F45085 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

When the ignition switch is turned ON. 1. (3) Read the DTC from the ABS warning light on the combination meter.5 sec. 2. connect the terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. (a) (b) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Release the parking brake lever.05–699 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 0577T–04 PRE–CHECK ABS Warning Light BRAKE Warning Light 1. connect terminal Tc and CG of the DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. the brake warning light comes on. 4 sec. proceed to troubleshooting for the ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737 or 05–741) or brake warning light circuit (See page 05–744). (1) Using SST. the lowest numbered DTC is displayed 1st.25 sec. (4) Codes are explained in the code table on page 05–704. (e) Without using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. When the parking brake is applied or the level of the brake fluid is low.25 sec. inspect the diagnostic circuit or ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737 or 05–744). (5) After completing the check. the blinking patterns for normal code and codes 11 and 21 are shown on the left. ON OFF Code 11 and 21 0. (1) Using SST. HINT:  2 sec. (1) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. 0.5 sec. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. check that the ABS warning light and brake warning light come on for 3 sec. remove the SST from the DLC3. ON OFF Code 11 Code 21 R01346 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Without using hand–held tester: Check the DTC. If the indicator check result is not normal.5 sec. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. 0. If no code appears. . Check the warning lights. SST 09843–18040 (d) With using hand–held tester: Check the DTC.  As an example. HINT:  F45095  (c) Tc CG C52361 Normal Code 0. If 2 or more DTCs are detected at the same time.5 sec.

read the ”DATA LIST”. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. Item ABS MOT RELAY SOL RELAY Measurement Item / Range (Display) ABS motor relay / ON or OFF Solenoid relay / ON or OFF STOP LIGHT SW Stop light switch / ON or OFF PKB SW Parking brake switch / ON or OFF ABS OPERT FR ABS operation (FR) / BEFORE or OPERATE ABS OPERT FL ABS operation (FL) / BEFORE or OPERATE ABS OPERT RR ABS operation (RR) / BEFORE or OPERATE ABS OPERT RL ABS operation (RL) / BEFORE or OPERATE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note ON : Motor relay ON – ON : Solenoid relay ON – ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released ON : Parking brake applied OFF : Parking brake released BEFORE : No ABS operation (FR) OPERATE : During ABS operation (FR) BEFORE : No ABS operation (FL) OPERATE : During ABS operation (FL) BEFORE : No ABS operation (RR) OPERATE : During ABS operation (RR) BEFORE : No ABS operation (RL) OPERATE : During ABS operation (RL) – – – – Speed indicated on speedometer Speed indicated on speedometer . actuator and so on without parts removal. 2. HINT: Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. you can read the value and status of the switch. (c) From the display on the tester. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed on the Hand–held tester. (4) Check that the ABS warning light indicates the normal code blinking pattern. (2) Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. SST 09843–18040 BR3890 HINT: Disconnecting the battery cable during repairs will not erase the DTCs in the ECU.05–700 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM (3) Clear the DTCs stored in ECU by depressing the brake pedal 8 or more times within 5 sec. (f) With using hand–held tester: Clear the DTCs. sensor. (5) Remove the SST from the DLC3. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time.

select the ”ACTIVE TEST”. max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RR) reading / min. (c) From the display on the tester.: 0. max.05–701 DIAGNOSTICS Item WHEEL SPD FR WHEEL SPD FL WHEEL SPD RR WHEEL SPD RL IG VOLTAGE SFRR SFRH SFLR SFLH SRRR (SRR) SRRH (SRH) SRLR SRLH AIR BLD SUPPORT TEST MODE #CODES Measurement Item / Range (Display) Wheel speed sensor (FR) reading / min.: 255 – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM Normal Condition Diagnostic Note Actual wheel speed Speed indicated on speedometer Actual wheel speed Speed indicated on speedometer Actual wheel speed – Actual wheel speed – NORMAL : 9. max.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (FL) reading / min.: 0 km/h (0 MPH. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the labor time. (a) Connect the Hand–held tester to the DLC3. max.: 0 km/h (0 MPH. max.8 V or over TOO LOW : Below 9. max.8 V – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Operate: ON – Not supported – NORMAL : Normal mode TEST : During test mode – Min.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) ECU power supply voltage / NORMAL or TOO LOW ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRRR (SRR)) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRRH (SRH)) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON / OFF ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON / OFF Air bleed support / SUPPORT or NOT SUP Test mode / NORMAL or TEST Number of DTC recorded / min.: 19 – 3. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .: 0.: 0 km/h (0 MPH.: 0 km/h (0 MPH. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the Hand–held tester allows the relay.: 326 km/h (202 MPH) Wheel speed sensor (RL) reading / min. actuator and so on to operate without parts removal.

HINT: If the ignition switch ”ON” operation exceeds 31 times. the freeze frame data at the occurrence of the malfunction is stored but the ABS actuation data is not stored. the number of the operations of the ignition switch ”ON” after the freeze frame data is stored can be memorized up to 31 and it can be displayed. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . ”31” appears on the display. (c) If the diagnosis code malfunction occurs. (a) (b) Diagnostic Note Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of solenoid (clicking sound) can be heard Operation of motor can be heard Observe combination meter Observe combination meter FREEZE FRAME DATA The vehicle (sensor) status memorized during ABS operation or at the time of error code detection can be displayed using the hand–held tester. Only one record of the freeze frame data is stored and the freeze frame data generated during ABS operation are constantly updated. Also.05–702 DIAGNOSTICS Item – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM Vehicle Condition / Test Details SFRR Turns ABS solenoid (SFRR) ON / OFF SFRH Turns ABS solenoid (SFRH) ON / OFF SFLR Turns ABS solenoid (SFLR) ON / OFF SFLH Turns ABS solenoid (SFLH) ON / OFF SRRR Turns ABS solenoid (SRRR) ON / OFF SRRH Turns ABS solenoid (SRRH) ON / OFF SRLR Turns ABS solenoid (SRLR) ON / OFF SRLH Turns ABS solenoid (SRLH) ON / OFF SFRR & SFRH Turns ABS solenoid SFRR & SFRH ON / OFF SFLR & SFLH Turns ABS solenoid SFLR & SFLH ON / OFF SRRR & SRRH Turns ABS solenoid SRRR & SRRH ON / OFF SRLR & SRLH Turns ABS solenoid SRLR & SRLH ON / OFF SFRH & SFLH Turns ABS solenoid SFRH & SFLH ON / OFF ABS MOT RELAY Turns ABS motor relay ON / OFF ABS WARN LIGHT Turns ABS warning light ON / OFF BRAKE WRN LIGHT Turns BRAKE warning light ON / OFF 4.

(2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. . the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. 0.13 sec. HINT:  See the list of DTCs shown on the 05–704. 0. the DTCs of the sensor check function will be erased. connect the terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. it means the shift lever is at N or P position. (6) Stop the vehicle. (1) Start the engine. 5. HINT:  Drive the vehicle faster than 45 km/h (28 mph) for several sec. HINT: If the ABS warning light does not blink.13 sec.  Please refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (5) Drive the vehicle straight forward. ON OFF BR3904 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) (4) Check that the ABS warning light blinks. (a) Check the sensor signal. SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK HINT: If the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or LOCK during the test mode.05–703 DIAGNOSTICS Hand–held tester display VEHICLE SPD – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM Measurement Item Reference Value* Vehicle speed Speed indication of a meter Stop light switch signal Stop light switch ON: ON. (3) Select the TEST MODE.  There is a case that the sensor check is not completed if the vehicle has its wheels spun or its steering wheel steered during this check. (7) Using SST. inspect the ABS warning light circuit (See page 05–737). (b) Read the DTC from the hand–held tester screen. OFF: OFF # IG ON Numbers of operations of ignition switch ON after memorizing freeze frame data 0 to 31 SYSTEM Operate system ABS operate: ABS STOP LIGHT SW *: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”Idling”.

to 4. 5. Check the brake actuator with a hand–held tester.. When the above areas (1. If there is malfunction. If there is malfunction. When the above areas (1. Speed sensor circuit ABS does not operate properly 3. See page 05–699 05–709 05–713 32–53 05–699 05–709 05–713 32–53 ABS warning light malfunction 1. 2. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output.) are all normal but the problem still occurs. Check the brake actuator with a hand–held tester. NOTICE: When replacing Skid Control ECU. Stop light switch circuit 4. IG power source circuit 3. check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. 1. sensor or etc. Tc terminal circuit 3. to 4. Symptom Suspect Area 1. replace the skid control ECU. check the hydraulic circuit for leakage. ABS warning light circuit 2. Skid control ECU 05–737 – DTC check cannot be performed 1. Speed sensor circuit ABS does not operate 4.) are all normal but the problem still occurs. 5. Skid control ECU AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – – . 2. D/G terminal circuit 2. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 05–737 05–748 Speed sensor signal check cannot be performed 1. replace the skid control ECU.) are all normal but the problem still occurs. turn the ignition switch to OFF.05–708 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XH–14 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs. check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. and 2. When the above areas (1. replace the skid control ECU. ABS warning light circuit 2.

WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 Driver Side J/B 13 W–L (*2) J8 J/C W–L (*1) W–L (*1) 4 B B W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1) TC CG Skid Control ECU with Actuator A 17 DB 15 DL W–L 6 CA W–B (*2) 25 S2 TC Center J/B 3 CB A IO IP *1: LHD *2: RHD F45136 Except 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TC Skid Control ECU with Actuator Driver Side J/B W–L (*2) 13 D J/C B 17 W–L (*2) J21 J20 DB 15 DL W–L 6 CA W–B (*2) 25 S2 TC J8 J/C W–L (*1) B CG 4 W–L (*1) B W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1) A Center J/B 3 CB A IP *1: LHD *2: RHD IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV C87490 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–748 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 05C5C–01 TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Connecting terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3 causes the ECU to display the DTC by flashing the ABS warning light.

Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Tc of the skid control ECU and the DLC3 (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32–54) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–749 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Tc TERMINAL) DLC3 (a) (b) Tc CG Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V C52361 OK Go to step 3 NG 2 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32).

4) R – W–B Always 10 to 14 L–Y – R–L IG switch ON Slowly turn left front wheel AC generation RL+ (7) – RL– (17) R–G IG switch ON Slowly turn left rear wheel AC generation FR+ (10) – FR– (9) W–B IG switch ON Slowly turn right front wheel AC generation FL+ (5) – FL– (6) D/G (11) – GND (1.05–707 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 050XF–14 TERMINALS OF ECU F45089 Symbols (Terminals No. 4) EBDW (12) – GND (1 (1. parking brake switch ON Below 2. ABS warning light ON 5 to 9 IG switch ON. BRAKE warning light ON 5 to 9 IG switch ON. (1 4) W–G – W–B IG switch ON.0 G W–W G–W W–B B IG switch ON. parking brake switch OFF 10 to 14 IG switch ON 10 to 14 P – W–B W B B W–W B–W W–B B R–W – W–B P–V IG switch ON Slowly turn right rear wheel AC generation Stop light switch ON 8 to 14 Stop light switch OFF Below 4.0 R Y–W R–Y W–B B SP1 (23) – GND (1. 4) L – W–B Always 10 to 14 +BS (3) – GND (1.0 IG switch ON. BRAKE warning light OFF Below 2.) Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage (V) +BM (2) – GND (1. 4) L–W – W–B Vehicle drive at about 20 km/h (12mph) Tc (25) – GND (1. (1 4) IG1 (18) – GND (1. ABS warning light OFF Below 2. ABS warning light OFF 8 to 12 IG switch ON.0 IG switch ON. 4) PKB (14) – GND (1. 4) RR+ (19) – RR– (8) STP (20) – GND (1 (1. 4) WA (22) – GND (1. 4) W–L – W–B IG switch ON AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Pulse generation 10 to 14 .

05–750 DIAGNOSTICS – ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM 05C5D–01 TS TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The sensor check circuit detects troubles in the sensor signal which cannot be detected by the DTC check. WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TS Skid Control ECU with Actuator J8 J/C W (*1) 12 IE2 W (*1) 12 D D 13 S2 W TS W (*2) Center J/B CG W–B (*2) 4 3 6 CB CA W–B (*2) J16 J/C W–B (*1) W–B (*1) A A IO *1: LHD *2: RHD IP F45137 Except 1AZ–FE: D5 DLC3 TS W (*1) 12 12 IE2 W (*1) D W (*2) CG Skid Control ECU with Actuator J8 J/C D J20 D J/C B W (*2) J21 W–B (*2) 4 13 S2 TS W Center J/B 3 CB 6 W–B (*2) CA J16 J/C W–B (*1) A W–B (*1) A IP *1: LHD *2: RHD IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV C87489 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Connecting terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3 starts the check.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE BRAKE ACTUATOR ASSY(See page 32−54) REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure the voltage between terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. OK: Voltage: 10 to 14 V OK Go to step 3 NG 2 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 − BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of the DLC3 and the skid control ECU (See page 01−32).05−751 DIAGNOSTICS − ABS WITH EBD SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) DLC3 (a) (b) Ts CG C52361 Turn the ignition switch ON. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 (a) CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SKID CONTROL ECU − DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of the DLC3 and body ground (See page 01−32).

DTC No. Sensor G 1 2 22 A16 TR 6 A16 SG–5 I35373 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 11 Detection item Trouble Area Open or short in room temperature sensor circuit  Cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assembly GR A17 A/C Room Temp. sensor)  Harness or connector between cooler thermistor (room temp.05–1102 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 11 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A7M–02 ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature inside the cabin and sends the appreciate signals to the A/C amplifier.

2 V at 25_C (77_F) 1.8 to 2. Standard: 1. Measure the voltage between terminal TR and SG–5 of A/C amplifier connector at each temperature.2 to 1.05–1103 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TR – SG–5) (a) A16 SG–5 A15 (b) (c) TR I36144 Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. the voltage decreases.6 V at 40_C (104_F) HINT: As the temperature increases. Turn the ignition switch to ON. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .

sensor) connector at each temperature. the resistance decreases. Measure the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of cooler thermistor (room temp. SENSOR) THERMISTOR .785  at 25_C (77_F) HINT: As the temperature increases. sensor). I30111 Resistance (k) Temperature (_C) I30156 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR (a) (b) Remove cooler the thermistor (room temp.05–1104 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT COOLER (ROOM TEMP. Standard: 1.615 to 1.

Standard: Normal codes are output.05–1105 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER (ROOM TEMP. SENSOR) THERMISTOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal TR and SG–5 of A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). MG OK SYSTEM OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OR . NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 4 (a) (b) READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Read the DTC at least 8.

sensor)  Harness or connector between thermistor assy (ambient temp. 3ZZ–FE I35374 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Sensor 4 W W IE1 2 1 15 W–R W–R IE1 *1: 1CD–FTV *2: 1AZ–FSE *3: 1AZ–FE. DTC No. sensor) and combination meter  Combination meter  Harness or connector between combination meter and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter 14 C10 13 C10 12 C10 11 C10 I14 Integration Relay P–B 1 IC1 P–B P MPX2MPX1 11 22 A/C Control Assembly 10 IC1 P 20 A15 MPX– Engine and ECT ECU (A/T)Engine ECU (M/T) 10 23 20 18 21 29 29 P P–B A15 MPX+ E9 E9 E10 MPX1MPX2 E9 E10 E9 (*3) (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) (*3) A1 A/C Ambient Temp. 1ZZ–FE.05–1106 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 12 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7L–01 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature outside the cabin and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. 12 Detection item Trouble Area Open or short in ambient temperature sensor circuit  Thermistor assy (ambient temp.

Measure resistance between the terminal C10–11 and C10–12 of the ambient temp. sensor connector at each temperature. Standard: 9. resistance decreases.9 k at 25_C (77_F) HINT: As the temperature increases.05–1107 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY C10–12 C10–11 (a) (b) I37583 Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy.0 to 9.8 k at 0_C (0_F) 2. Resistance (k) Temperature (_C) I30156 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY .7 to 2.

05–1108 DIAGNOSTICS 2 (a) (b) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINATION METER – OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR) Disconnect the connector from ambient temp. sensor. NG REPLACE OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Standard: Normal codes are output. Check continuity between the terminal C10–11 (12) of combination meter assy and the terminal A1–1 (2) of ambient temp. Read the DTC at least 8. Standard: Continuity NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND OK 3 (a) (b) READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. sensor connector.5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON.

sensor))  Harness or connector between cooler thermistor No.1 (evaporator ( temp.  Cooler thermistor No.05–1109 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 13 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TN–10 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the temperature inside the cooling unit and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A/C Control Assembly W–G A19 A/C Thermistor B 1 2 16 A15 SG–4 10 A16 TE I35373 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 13 Detection Item Trouble Area Open or short in evaporator temperature sensor circuit.1 (evaporator temp temp. DTC No.

4 V at 0_C (32_F) 1.05–1110 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TE – SG–4) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) TE SG–4 I36144 NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Standard: 2.8 V at 15_C (59_F) OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE . Measure the voltage between terminal TE and SG–4 of A/C amplifier connector at each temperature. Turn the ignition switch to ON.4 to 1.0 to 2.

1 (evaporator temp. Check the resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of cooler thermistor No.500  at 25_C (77_F) HINT: As the temperature increases.1 (a) (b)   Remove the cooler thermistor No. the resistance decreases. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .1 (evaporator temp.1 OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER THERMISTOR NO. sensor) at each temperature. E50650 Resistance (k) Temperature (_C) I30156 NG REPLACE COOLER THERMISTOR NO.05–1111 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT COOLER THERMISTOR NO. sensor). as shown in the chart.1 – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal TE and SG–4 of A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). Standard: 1.

NG OK SYSTEM OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER .5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON.05–1112 DIAGNOSTICS 4 (a) (b) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Standard: Normal codes are output. Read the DTC at least 8.

)  Automatic light g control sensor ((solar sensor))  Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A18 A/C Solar Sensor A/C Control Assembly L 1 IF1 L 21 A16 TSP LG 2 IF1 LG 9 A16 TSD O 3 IF1 O 15 A16 S5–4 2 3 1 I35375 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .. 21 Detection Item Trouble Area Open or short in solar sensor circuit circuit. ( the checking g is being g performed in a dark place. DTC 21 (If could be displayed. Resistance of photodiode High Low Weak Strong Strength of solar radiation DTC No.05–1113 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 21 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7M–01 SOLAR SENSOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A photo diode in the solar sensor detects solar radiation and sends signals to the A/C amplifier.

Resistance: Approx. (c) Remove the cloth from the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. (1) Measure resistance between terminal 1 and 2 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Cover the sensor with a cloth. (1) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. 10 k (Continuity) HINT: Connect the positive (+) lead to ohmmeter to terminal 2 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. and check the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor resistance.05–1114 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR 2 (a) (b) 1 I33908 Remove cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. NG REPLACE COOLER THERMISTOR (SOLAR SENSOR) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) (a) TSD A16 Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between solar sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). and subject the sensor to the electric light and check the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor resistance. Resistance:   (No continuity) HINT: Connect the ohmmter positive (+) lead to terminal 2 and the ohmmeter negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 131415161718192021222324 TSP S5–4 I37731 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

Read the DTC at least 8. Standard: Normal codes are output NG REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON.05–1115 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) (b) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs.

it outputs signals though the A/C amplifier to switch OFF the compressor relay and turns the magnetic clutch OFF. 23 Detection Item Trouble Area  Open in pressure sensor circuit. below 196 kPa (2.140 kPa (32.0 kgf/cm2.0 kgf/cm2. When the A/C amplifier receives these signals.05–1116 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 23 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 0564B–07 PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The pressure sensor sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier assy when the A/C refrigerant pressure drops too low or rises too high.  Abnormal refrigerant pressure. DTC No. 28 psi) over 3. 455 psi)  A/C tube assy (pressure sensor)  Harness or connector between A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A3 A/C Pressure Sensor VC GND VOUT A/C Control Assembly B–W 3 G–W 1 L–W 2 7 IE2 8 IE2 17 IE2 B–W G–W L–W 16 A16 S5 18 A16 SG 7 A16 PRE I35376 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

The voltage changes following refrigerant pressure change. Standard: Low Pressure Cut Side ON (0V) 225 kPa 196 kPa OFF (4.8 Disconnect the pressure sensor connector. Install the manifold gauge set (See page 55–38). Standard: The voltage varies with on the refrigerant pressure as shown in the chart. Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected.19 MPa NG I35425 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SENSOR AIR CONDITIOER PRESSURE . Turn the ignition switch to ON.5 V) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT AIR CONDITIOER PRESSURE SENSOR (a) (b) (c) 2 (d) 1 3 (+) (V) 4.5 – 5.0 0.9 4. Check the voltage between terminals 2 and 1 of pressure sensor.5 V dry cell batteries to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1. (–) Dry Cell Battery 1.5 – 5.39 3.140 kPa OFF (4.05–1117 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(PRE) A16 (a) (b) A15 (c) (d) SG PRE (e) I36144 Install the manifold gauge set. Check the voltage between terminal PRE and SG of A/C amplifier connector when refrigerant pressure is changed. Connect the positive (+) lead from the three 1.5 0.1 0 0.5 V) OK Reference : High Pressure Cut Side ON (0V) 2. as shown in the diagram below.550 kPa 3.

read DTC. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 4 (a) (b) READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. After turning the ignition switch ON. NG OK SYSTEM OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OR . Standard: Normal codes are output.05–1118 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE SENSOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between pressure sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).

)  Automatic light g control sensor ((solar sensor))  Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A18 A/C Solar Sensor A/C Control Assembly L 1 IF1 L 21 A16 TSP LG 2 IF1 LG 9 A16 TSD O 3 IF1 O 15 A16 S5–4 2 3 1 I35375 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .. (If ( the checking g is being g performed in a dark place. DTC 24 could be displayed. 24 Detection Item Trouble Area Open or short in solar sensor circuit circuit. Resistance of photodiode High Low Weak Strong Strength of solar radiation DTC No.05–1119 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 24 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7N–01 SOLAR SENSOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A photo diode in the solar sensor detects solar radiation and sends signals to the A/C amplifier.

NG REPLACE COOLER THERMISTOR (SOLAR SENSOR) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR – A/C AMPLIFIER) (a) TSD A16 Check for open or short circuit in harness and connector between solor sansor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). (1) Measure resistance between terminals 1 and 3 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Resistance:   (No continuity) HINT: Connect the ohmmter positive (+) lead to terminal 3 and the ohmmeter negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Cover the sensor with a cloth. and subject the sensor to the electric light and check the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor resistance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112 131415161718192021222324 TSP S5–4 I37731 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . (1) Measure resistance between terminal 1 and 3 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor.05–1120 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT COOLER (SOLAR SENSOR) THERMISTOR (a) (b) 1 3 I33908 Remove cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. (c) Remove the cloth from the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. and check the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor resistance. 10 k (Continuity) HINT: Connect the positive (+) lead to ohmmeter to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the cooler (solar sensor) thermistor. Resistance: Approx.

5 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. Read the DTC at least 8. NG REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1121 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) (b) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Standard: Normal codes are output.

TPP terminal voltage (V) 4 1 0 Damper opening angle 100% DTC No. 31 Detection Item Trouble Area Short to ground or power source circuit in air mix damper position sensor circuit.05–1122 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 31 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A7T–02 AIR MIX DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the position of the air mix damper and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. The position sensor is built in the air mix damper servo sub–assy.  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper position sensor)  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A24 Air Mix Control Servo Motor (Front Passenger Side) M MAX 4 (*1) HOT 5 (*2) MAX 5 (*1) COOL 4 (*2) W (*2) Y (*2) PT 3 V (*2) VZ 2 (*1) 1 (*2) GND 1 (*1) 2 (*2) R (*2) P (*2) A/C Control Assembly 5 IQ1 4 IQ1 3 IQ1 1 IQ1 2 IQ1 2 A15 AMPH W (*1) W (*2) Y (*1) Y (*2) V (*1) V (*2) R (*1) R (*2) P (*1) 1 A15 AMPC 20 A16 TPP 1 A16 S5–1 13 A15 SG–1 P (*2) *1: LHD *2: RHD I35377 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

5 to 1.5 V MAX. the voltage decreases gradually without interruption.5 to 4. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .8 V HINT: As the set temperature increases. COOL: 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Standard: MAX.05–1123 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPP – SG–1) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) TPP SG–1 I36144 Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. HOT: 0. Change the set temperature to activate the air mix damper and measure the voltage between terminal TPP and SG–1 of A/C amplifier assy.

measure the resistance between terminal PT and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy. the resistance decreases gradually without interruption.8 k While operating air mix damper servo sub–assy as shown in the procedure on page 05–1133. HOT (c) MAX. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy connector.2 V MAX. RHD Models: MAX. COOL 5 4 3 2 1 PT VZ GND I35383 Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy.8 to 1. Standard: MAX.4 to 6.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX NO.05–1124 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT AIRMIX NO.6 V HINT: As the air mix damper servo sub–assy moves from COOL side to HOT side.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY LHD Models: (a) (b) MAX.2 to 7.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). COOL PT VZ GND NG I36141 REPLACE AIRMIX NO. Resistance: 4. HOT MAX. COOL: 0. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . HOT: 3.

NG REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1125 DIAGNOSTICS 4 (a) (b) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Read the DTC at least 1. Standard: Normal codes are output.0 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON.

33 Detection Item Trouble Area Short to ground or power source circuit in mode damper position sensor circuit.  Mode damper servo sub–assy (mode damper position sensor)  Harness or connector between mode damper servo sub– assy (mode damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A25 Air Vent Mode Control Servo Motor M A/C Control Assembly L–B FACE 5 LG–B DEF 4 GR–R PT 3 BR–W VZ 2 G–W GND 1 4 A15 3 A15 19 A16 14 A16 15 A15 AOF AOD TPM S5–3 SG–3 I35378 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1126 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 33 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A7X–02 AIR OUTLET DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the position of the mode damper and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier. TPM terminal voltage (V) 4 1 0 100% Damper opening angle DTC No. The position sensor is built in the mode damper servo sub–assy.

6 k HINT: As the mode damper servo sub–assy moved from DEF side to FACE side.5 to 4. the voltage decreases gradually with out interruption. Standard: 4.5 V HINT: As the is moved from FACE side to DEF side. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY . measure the resistance between terminal PT and GND of mode damper servo sub– assy. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of mode damper servo sub–assy connector. the resistance decreases gradually with out interruption. Change the set to activate the mode damper sub–assy and measure voltage between terminal TPM and SG–3 of A/C amplifier assy.8 to 1. Standard: FACE: 3.5 V DEF: 0.2 – 7.8 k While operating mode damper servo sub–assy as in the procedure on page 05–1136.4 to 6. OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY (a) (b) FACE (c) DEF 5 4 3 2 1 VZ PT GND I35385 Remove the mode damper servo sub–assy.5 to 1. Standard: DEF: 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON.05–1127 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPM – SG–3) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) SG–3 TPM I36144 Remove the A/C amplifier with being connectors connected.2 k FACE: 0.

Read the DTC at least 1. NG REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR .0 minutes after turnig the ignition switch ON.05–1128 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between mode damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 4 (a) (b) READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Standard: Normal codes are output.

TPI terminal voltage (V) 4 1 0 Damper opening angle 100% DTC No. 36 Detection Item Trouble Area Short to ground or power source circuit in air mix damper position sensor circuit. The position sensor is built in the air mix damper servo sub–assy.05–1129 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 36 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A80–02 AIR MIX DAMPER POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the position of the air mix damper and sends the appropriate signals to the A/C amplifier.  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (Air mix damper position sensor)  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A23 Air Mix Control Servo Motor (Driver Side) M A/C Control Assembly P–L MAX 4 HOT MAX 5 COOL B GR PT 3 Y–B VZ 2 Y–R GND 1 12 A15 11 A15 8 A16 2 A16 14 A15 AMDH AMDC TPD S5–2 SG–2 I35378 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Change the set temperature to activate the air mix damper and measure the voltage between terminal TPD and SG–2 of A/C amplifier. Standard: MAX.8 V HINT: As the set temperature increases. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .5 to 1.5 to 4.5 V MAX HOT: 0. COOL: 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON.05–1130 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(TPD – SG–2) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) TPD SG–2 I36144 Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. the voltage decreases gradually without interruption.

COOL: 0. the resistance decreases gradually without interruption. measure resistance between terminal PT and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy. Resistance: MAX. COOL 5 4 3 2 1 PT VZ GND I35383 Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy.8 to 1. LHD Models: MAX. HOT: 3.6 k HINT: As the air mix damper servo sub–assy moves from COOL side to HOT side.2 k MAX. COOL PT VZ GND I36141 NG REPLACE AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper position sensor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).4 to 6.2 to 7. HOT MAX.05–1131 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY RHD Models: (a) (b) MAX. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Resistance: 4.8 k While operating air mix damper servo sub–assy as shown in the procedure on page 05–1139. HOT (c) MAX. Measure the resistance between terminal VZ and GND of air mix damper servo sub–assy connector.

0 minutes after turning the ignition switch ON. NG REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Read the DTC at least 1.05–1132 DIAGNOSTICS 4 (a) (b) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM READ OUTPUT DTC Clear the DTCs. Standard: Normal codes are output.

05–1133 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 41 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A83–02 AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT(PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This air mix damper servo sub–assy is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air mix damper to the desired position.  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper control)  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper control) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A24 Air Mix Control Servo Motor (Front Passenger Side) M MAX 4 (*1) HOT 5 (*2) MAX 5 (*1) COOL 4 (*2) W (*2) Y (*2) PT 3 V (*2) VZ 2 (*1) 1 (*2) GND 1 (*1) 2 (*2) R (*2) P (*2) A/C Control Assembly 5 IQ1 4 IQ1 3 IQ1 1 IQ1 2 IQ1 2 A15 AMPH W (*1) W (*2) Y (*1) Y (*2) V (*1) V (*2) R (*1) R (*2) P (*1) 1 A15 AMPC 20 A16 TPP 1 A16 S5–1 13 A15 SG–1 P (*2) *1: LHD *2: RHD I35377 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 41 Detection Item Trouble Area Air mix damper position sensor value does not change even if A/C amplifier operated air mix damper control servomotor. DTC No.

05–1134 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Display Code Air Mix Damper Operation 0 COOL side (0% open) 1 COOL side (0% open) 2 COOL side (0% open) 3 COOL side (0% open) 4 COOL/HOT (50% open) 5 COOL/HOT (50% open) 6 HOT side (100% open) 7 HOT side (100% open) 8 HOT side (100% open) 9 HOT side (100% open) OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE . Press the DEF switch (passenger side) and change to step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand.

NG OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . HOT MAX.2 SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix damper control servomotor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal MAX HOT and negative (–) lead to terminal MAX COOL. then check that the lever turns to ”COOL” side smoothly.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER NO.05–1135 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT AIRMIX NO. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal MAX COOL and negative (–) lead to terminal MAX HOT. 5 4 3 2 1 MAX COOL MAX HOT I35383 LHD Models: MAX. COOL MAX HOT MAX COOL I36141 NG REPLACE AIRMIX NO. HOT (c) MAX.2 DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY LHD Models: (a) (b) MAX. then check that the lever turns to ”HOT” side smoothly. COOL Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy.

 Mode damper servo sub–assy (mode damper control)  Harness or connector between mode damper servo sub– assy (mode damper control) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A25 Air Vent Mode Control Servo Motor M A/C Control Assembly L–B FACE 5 LG–B DEF 4 GR–R PT 3 BR–W VZ 2 G–W GND 1 4 A15 3 A15 19 A16 14 A16 15 A15 AOF AOD TPM S5–3 SG–3 I35378 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the A/C amplifier changes the mode automatically between ”FACE”.05–1136 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 43 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A87–02 AIR OUTLET DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit turns the servomotor and changes each mode damper position by the signals from the A/C amplifier assy. When the AUTO switch is on. ”BI–LEVEL”. DTC No. Detection Item Trouble Area 43 Air mode damper position sensor value does not change even if A/C amplifier operated mode damper control servomotor. ”FOOT” and ”FOOT/DEF” according to the temperature setting.

Press the DEF switch and change it to the step operation. Display code Air flow condition 0 FACE 1 FACE 2 FACE 3 FACE 4 FACE1 5 B/L 6 FOOT1 7 FOOT 8 FOOT/DEF 9 DEF OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE . Check the air flow by hand.05–1137 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Warm up engine. Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091).

DEF 5 4 3 2 1 FACE DEF I35385 NG REPLACE MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between mode damper servo sub–assy and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). NG OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–1138 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT MODE DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY (a) (b) FACE (c) Remove the mode damper servo sub–assy. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal DEF and negative (–) lead to terminal FACE then check that the lever turns to ”DEF” position. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal FACE and negative (–) lead to terminal DEF then check that the lever turn to ”FACE” position.

 Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper control )  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper control servomotor) and A/C amplifier  A/C amplifier assy WIRING DIAGRAM A23 Air Mix Control Servo Motor (Driver Side) M A/C Control Assembly P–L MAX 4 HOT MAX 5 COOL B GR PT 3 Y–B VZ 2 Y–R GND 1 12 A15 11 A15 8 A16 2 A16 14 A15 AMDH AMDC TPD S5–2 SG–2 I35378 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No. 46 Detection Item Trouble Area Air mix damper position sensor value does not change even if A/C amplifier operated air mix damper control servomotor.05–1139 DIAGNOSTICS DTC 46 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05A8A–02 AIR MIX DAMPER CONTROL SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The air mix damper servo sub–assy is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air mix damper to the desired position.

05–1140 DIAGNOSTICS 1 (a) (b) (c) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). Press the DEF switch (driver side) and change to the step operation. Display Code Air Mix Damper Operation 0 COOL side (0 % open) 1 COOL side (0 % open) 2 COOL side (0 % open) 3 COOL side (0 % open) 4 COOL/HOT (50% open) 5 COOL/HOT (50% open) 6 HOT side (100% open) 7 HOT side (100% open) 8 HOT side (100% open) 9 HOT side (100% open) NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE . Check the air flow temperature by hand.

05–1141 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY RHD Models: (a) (b) MAX. 5 4 3 2 1 MAX COOL MAX HOT I35383 LHD Models: MAX. HOT MAX. HOT (c) MAX. Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal MAX COOL and negative (–) lead to terminal MAX HOT. then check that the lever turns to ”COOL” side smoothly. COOL Remove the air mix damper servo sub–assy. NG OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal MAX HOT and negative (–) lead to terminal MAX COOL. then check that the lever turns to ”HOT” side smoothly. COOL MAX HOT MAX COOL I36141 NG REPLACE AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(AIRMIX DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – A/C AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between air mix control servomotor and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32).

05–1151 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7P–01 AIR CONDITIONER MAGNETIC VALVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The air conditioner magnetic valve is controlled by A/C amplifier. WIRING DIAGRAM R–W (*2) H J26 J/C F J27 R–W (*2) 2 IK2 R–W A/C Control Assembly R 2 1 3 IK2 R 8 A15 SOL+ R–W (*1) Center J/B 1 R–W CB (*1) C3 Compressor Assembly 9 CJ Driver Side J/B From 6 HTR DC Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35381 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Display Code Blower level 0 ON 1 ON 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF 5 OFF 6 OFF 7 OFF 8 OFF 9 OFF OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONER MAGNETIC VALVE (a) Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Press the DEF switch and change to the step operation. Check the air flow level by hand. NG REPLACE W/PULLEY COMPRESSOR ASSY I36135 OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal SOL+ of A/C amplifier and battery + terminal (See page 01–32). NG OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Standard: 10 to 11  at 25 C (77 F) If the resistance is not as specified.05–1152 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set the actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). replace the compressor assy.

3 B (*2) 3 3 B (*2) Engine Room J/B No.1 & Engine Room J/B No. Power is supplied even when the ignition switch is off and is used for diagnostic trouble code memory etc. WIRING DIAGRAM Fuse Block ECU–B2 6 B–W 1 6 2 A/C Control Assembly Center J/B W–R 10 CC 7 CF W–R 24 A16 +B Engine Room R/B No.1 B–G (*1) DCC 1 4 5 B–W B (*2) IE4 IP1 1 1A 2 1 (*3) (*4) Engine Room R/B No.4 1 4B B–G (*1) 1 4A B–G (*1) Center J/B W–B (*3) 6 CA 3 CG W–B (*3) 13 A16 GND J17 J/C FL MAIN W–B (*4) A A W–B (*4) A J15 J/C Battery IP *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV IK *3: LHD *4: RHD I35395 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1142 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TW–10 BACK–UP POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the back–up power source for the A/C amplifier.

Measure the voltage between terminal +B and GND of A/C amplifier. Check for the continuity of ECU–B2 fuse and DCC fuse. Standard: 10 to 14 V +B GND NG I36144 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . NG REPLACE FUSE OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) A16 (a) (b) A15 Remove the A/C amplifier with being connected.05–1143 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) CHECK FUSE(ECU–B2. DCC FUSE) Remove the ECU–B2 fuse and DCC fuse from the fuse block and engine room J/B.

and then B is the period of non–continuity. For example.3 37.5 100.7 58.9 44.8 51. Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle.7 30.6 65.3 83.4 74. Blower Level (Reference) HI M8 M7 Si duty (%) M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 LO Duty Ratio = A A+B x 100 (%) A OFF 5 V B ON 0 V 1 cycle 26. if A is the period of continuity in one cycle.0 I36148 WIRING DIAGRAM B5 Blower Motor Controller SI +B VM GND A/C Control Assembly L–B 2 B 3 2 IJ2 B–W 1 IJ2 W–B 4 IJ2 4 1 3 IJ2 5 R L–B B4 Blower Motor B L M 2 1 L–B A16 BLW Driver Side J/B From 2 HTR DF RELAY L–B W–B A J15 J/C IK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I36133 . Blower motor speed signals are transmitted by changes in the Duty Ratio.05–1148 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7O–01 BLOWER MOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The blower motor is operated by signals from the A/C amplifier.

Standard: Blower motor operates smoothly. Press the DEF switch and change to step operation. replace the blower motor. Check the air flow level by hand. If operation is not as specified.05–1149 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set to actuator check mode (See page 05–1091). NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Display Code Blower level 0 0 1 1 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 31 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY (a) 1 Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) to terminal 2. 2 NG LHD RHD REPLACE BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY I30151 OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BLOWER W/FAN MOTOR SUB–ASSY – BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between blower w/fan motor sub–assy and blower motor control (See page 01–32).

Measure the waveform between terminal BLW of A/C amplifier and body ground. NG OK REPLACE BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . / Division I31456 NG REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK 6 (a) CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between A/C amplifier and blower motor control (See page 01–32). 2V/ Division GND 500 s sec. 4 GND NG  I37588 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 5 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(BLW) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) (d) BLW Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected.05–1150 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL – BODY GROUND) (a) B5 1 2 3 Check for an open circuit in harness and connector between terminal GND of blower motor control and body ground (See page 01–32). OK: Pulse generation HINT: I36144   The correct waveform is as shown. Turn the ignition switch ON. Blower switch is ON. Waveform varies with blower level.

F C ) Air Flow Control Faulty  Blower motor does not operate  Blower motor speed does not change (Always Hi. Always Mid. Always Lo) Temperature Control Faulty  Cabin temperature does not go down  Cabin temperature does not rise  Response is slow Air Inlet Control Faulty  Cannot change between FRS and REC (Always Fresh or always Recirculating) Vent Control Faulty  Mode will not change  Will not enter the desired mode 1st Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check I30150 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Date vehicle Brought In / / Date of Problem Occurrence / How Often does Problem Occur?  Continuous Weather  Fine Outdoor Temperature  Hot Symptoms km Miles Odometer Reading  Intermittent  Cloudy  Warm / (  Snowy  Cool times a day)  Various / Other  Cold (Approx.05–1090 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TH–09 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name: VIN Customer’s Name Production Date Licence No.

sensor)  Harness or connector between cooler thermistor (room temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (8. or more)  Mode damper servo sub–assy (mode damper position sensor)  Harness or connector between mode damper servo sub– assy (mode damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (1 min.1 (evaporator temp.5 min.5 min. sensor)  Harness or connector between thermistor assy (ambient temp. sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy 23 (05–1116) 24 *3 (05–1119) Memory Room temperature sensor circuit (open/short) 12 *2 (05–1106) 13 (05–1109) Trouble Area Air mix damper control servomotor (Passenger side) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  A/C tube assy (pressure sensor)  Harness or connector between A/C tube assy (pressure sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  Automatic light control sensor (solar sensor)  Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar ( l sensor)) and d A/C amplifier lifi assy  A/C amplifier assy  (8. or more) –  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper position sensor)  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (1 min.5 min.05–1094 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TJ–13 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check (sensor check). DTC No. or more) Evaporator temperature sensor circuit (open/short)  Cooler thermistor No.5 min. or more) Solar sensor circuit (open) (Passenger side)  Automatic light control sensor (solar sensor)  Harness or connector between automatic light control sensor (solar ( l sensor)) and d A/C amplifier lifi assy  A/C amplifier assy Solar sensor circuit (short) (Passenger side) Pressure sensor circuit Solar sensor circuit (open) (Driver side) Solar sensor circuit (short) (Driver side) Air mix damper position sensor circuit (Passenger side) 31 (05–1122) Air outlet damper position sensor circuit 33 (05–1126) Air mix damper position sensor circuit (Driver side) 36 (05–1129) 41 (05–1133) –  Cooler thermistor (room temp. or more)  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper control)  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper control) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (15 sec. or more) Ambient temperature sensor circuit (open/short)  Thermistor assy (ambient temp.) .1 (evaporator temp. or more)  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (Air mix damper position sensor)  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper position sensor) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (1 min. sensor) and combination meter  Combination Combinationmeter meter  Harness or connector between combination meter and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (8. check the circuit listed for the code in the table below (Proceed to the page given for that circuit). sensor)  Harness or connector between cooler thermistor No.5 min. (See Page) 00 11 *1 (05–1102) Detection Item Normal 21 *3 (05–1113) –  (8. or more) – –  (8.

6C (–3.05–1095 DIAGNOSTICS Air outlet damper control servomotor 43 (05–1136) 46 (05–1139) Air mix damper control servomotor (Driver side) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM  Mode damper servo sub–assy (mode damper control)  Harness or connector between mode damper servo sub– assy (mode damper control) and A/C amplifier assy  A/C amplifier assy  (15 sec.)  Air mix damper servo sub–assy (air mix damper control )  Harness or connector between air mix damper servo sub– assy (air mix damper control servomotor) and A/C amplifier  A/C amplifier assy  (15 sec. DTC 11 may be output even though the sys- tem is normal. –18.7F) or lower. is approx. If the ambient temp. is approx. DTC may be output even though the system is normal.4F) or lower. *2: AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . *3: If the check is being performed in a dark place.) HINT:    *1: If the room temp.9C (–61. DTC 21 and 24 (solar sensor circuit abnormal) could be displayed. –52.

1AZ–FE *4: 1ZZ–FE.1 HTR 1 L W (*2) 1 1B 2 1 3 140A ALT 3 2 1 3 B (*2) Engine Room R/B No. 3ZZ–FE I35394 . WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B HTR HTR Relay 1 2 DP L B–G (*1) B–L (*2) 1 DN G–Y 5 DH 5 2 4 3 34 DA 2 DF A/C Control Assembly 17 GR–R L–B A16 HR To Blower Motor W–B 4 DF IG1 Relay 5 3 9 DA 1 W–B I13 Ignition SW 2 AM1 1 DH G–R G–Y 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room R/B No.4 B–G (*1) 1 4C 1 4D 120A ALT (*3) 100A ALT (*4) 1 4B B–G (*1) B (*2) W–B FL MAIN W–B IJ Battery *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) *3: 1AZ–FSE.1 & Engine Room J/B No.3 B–L (*2) 1 ED1 W (*2) Engine Room R/B No. It supplies power to the blower motor.05–1146 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050U2–12 HEATER RELAY CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The heater relay is switched on by signals from the A/C amplifier.

3 k E32993 NG REPLACE HEATER RELAY OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) (a) A16 A15 (b) Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected.0 ON OFF 10 to 14 HR I36144 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . as shown in the chart. NG REPLACE FUSE OK 2 INSPECT HEATER RELAY (a) Check for the continuity between each pair of terminals of cooler relay assy. Check for the continuity of HTR fuse. Standard: Ignition switch position Blower switch position Voltage (V) OFF OFF 0 ON ON Below 1. Standard: Terminal No. 1.05–1147 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) CHECK FUSE(HTR FUSE) Remove the HTR fuse from the driver side J/B and engine room J/B. Specified condition 3–5 Less than 1  (When battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2) No continuity Less than 1  3–4 No continuity (When battery voltage applied to terminals 1 and 2) 1–2 Approx. Measure the voltage between terminal HR of A/C amplifier and body ground when ignition switch is ON and OFF.

Water temperature is 70C (158F) or less.5C (32F) A/C switch OFF Below 8C (46F)   Air mix damper position is MAX HOT. WIRING DIAGRAM R–W (*2) H J/C H R–W J26 J26 (*2) 11 IE1 C4 Condenser Assembly R–W A/C Control Assembly R–B 1 2 18 IE2 R–Y 7 A15 MGV Driver Side J/B 6 DC 5 DB R–W (*1) From HTR Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35380 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1157 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7R–01 HOT GAS HEATER MAGNETIC VALVE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION For the hot gas heater.  Ambient temperature varies according to the following condition. it is necessary to fulfill the following 6 conditions.  Recirculation damper position is FRS.  Blower motor switch is in the position other than OFF.  Hot gas heater switch is ON. A/C switch ON Below –1.

NG OK REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS . NG REPLACE W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK WIRE HARNESS(W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY – AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between w/ receiver condenser assy and A/C amplifier (See page 01–32). Measure the voltage between terminals MGV of the A/C amplifier and body ground.0 Not Operate No Continuity PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT W/RECEIVER CONDENSER ASSY (a) I36136 Apply voltage between terminals and check that the refrigerant passages switch.05–1158 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER (a) A16 A15 (b) Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Standard: MGV I36144 OK Recirculation switch Voltage (V) Operate Below 1.

5C (32F) A/C switch OFF Below 8C (46F)   Air mix damper position is MAX HOT. *1) J27 A R–W (*3) J16 J/C Driver Side J/B A R–W (*2) 6 DC From HTR Fuse W–B (*1) IL *1: 1CD–FTV *2: LHD *3: RHD I35396 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  Hot gas heater switch is ON. Water temperature is 70C (158F) or less.  Blower motor switch is in the position other than OFF. A/C switch ON Below –1.  Recirculation damper position is FRS.  Ambient temperature varies according to the following condition.05–1159 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7S–01 HOT GAS HEATER SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Hot gas heater performs only when its switch turns to ON and fulfill the following 6 conditions. WIRING DIAGRAM P5 Power Heater SW Center J/B 1 R–W (*2) CB 12 CK R–W (*2. *1) 3 IG A/C Control Assembly 11 A16 HOTGASIN G–Y (*1) IN 6 W–B (*1) H J26 J/C E 2 F R–W (*3.

I32395 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Turn the ignition switch to ON. Measure the voltage between terminal HOTGASIN and GND of the A/C amplifier.05–1160 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT HETER SWITCH ASSY (a) Check that the continuity when connecting the positive tester lead (+) and the negative tester lead (–) to the following terminals. Standard: HOTGASIN I36144 NG Heater switch condition Standard value ON 10 to 14 V OFF 0V REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK 3 CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH – BODY GROUND) (a) E Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between heater switch and body ground (See page 01–32). Standard: Heater switch condition Connecting terminals ILL+ E IN ILL– IG I32396 NG Standard value ON IG – IN Continuity OFF IG – IN No continuity ON IG – E Continuity OFF IG – E No continuity ON ILL+ – ILL– Continuity OFF ILL+ – ILL– Continuity REPAIR OR REPLACE HETER SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK WIRE HARNESS(A/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY – BATTERY) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected.

05–1088 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TG–11 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORK SHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (See page 05–1090) 3 CHECK AND CLEAR DTC (See page 05–1091) 4 PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM OCCUR (GO TO STEP 6) SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5) 5 SYMPTOM SIMULATION (See page 01–22) 6 DTC CHECK (See page 05–1091) MALFUNCTION CODE (GO TO STEP 7) NORMAL CODE (GO TO STEP 8) 7 DTC CHART (See page 05–1094) GO TO STEP 10 8 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1100) 9 ACTUATOR CHECK (See page 05–1091) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1089 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 10 CIRCUIT INSPECTION (See page 05–1102 to 05–1159) 11 IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM 12 PARTS INSPECTION 13 REPAIR 14 CONFIRMATION TEST 15 END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

4 120A ALT (*5) 1 100A ALT (*6) 1 4D 4B 2 1 B–G (*1) Center J/B 6 CA Engine Room R/B No.05–1144 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TV–11 IG POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is the power source for the A/C amplifier and servomotor. 1AZ–FE *6: 1ZZ–FE. etc. 3ZZ–FE J15 J/C IJ IP IK I36744 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .3 B–L (*2) 1 ED1 W (*2) W–B (*3) 140A ALT 3 2 1 B (*2) FL MAIN 3 13 W–B CG A16 GND (*3) A 3 W–B (*4) J17 J/C A B–G (*1) W–B (*4) A Battery  *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD *4: RHD *5: 1AZ–FSE. WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B AM1 1 DH IG1 Relay HTR 1 DN 5 DH 5 3 1 2 H J/C H J26 J26 R–W (*4) A/C Control Assembly R–W (*4) Center J/B 6 DC 9 DA R–W (*3) 1 CB 2 R–W CE (*3) 12 A16 IG W–B I13 Ignition SW G–Y G–R 1 IG1 AM1 3 Engine Room R/B No.

Standard: 10 to 14 V GND NG I36144 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . Check for the continuity of HTR fuse. Turn the ignition switch to ON.05–1145 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) CHECK FUSE(HTR FUSE) Remove the HTR fuse from the driver side J/B. Measure the voltage between terminal IG and GND of the A/C amplifier. NG REPLACE FUSE OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(A/C AMPLIFIER – BATTERY) (a) A16 A15 (b) (c) IG Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected.

Sensor) Thermistor I35352 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1096 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7J–01 LOCATION w/ Hot Gas Heater Models: Magnetic Valve Assy w/ Pulley Compressor Assy  Air Conditioner Magnetic Valve Pressure Sensor Pressure Sensor Cooler (Solar Sensor) Thermistor Outer Ambient Temperature Sensor Combination Meter Assy w/ Receiver Condenser Assy Engine and ECT ECU (A/T) Engine ECU (M/T) Air Conditioner Control Assy (Air Conditioning Amplifier) Driver Side J/B DLC3 Heater Switch Cooler (Room Temp.

05–1097 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Recirculation Damper Servo Sub–assy Mode Damper Servo Sub–assy Evaporator Evaporator Temp. Sensor Blower w/ Fan Motor Sub–assy Blower Motor Control Airmix No.2 Damper Servo Sub–assy Airmix Damper Servo Sub–assy I35353 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Date vehicle Brought In / / Date of Problem Occurrence / How Often does Problem Occur?  Continuous Weather  Fine Outdoor Temperature  Hot Symptoms km Miles Odometer Reading  Intermittent  Cloudy  Warm / (  Snowy  Cool times a day)  Various / Other  Cold (Approx.05–1090 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TH–09 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name: VIN Customer’s Name Production Date Licence No. F C ) Air Flow Control Faulty  Blower motor does not operate  Blower motor speed does not change (Always Hi. Always Mid. Always Lo) Temperature Control Faulty  Cabin temperature does not go down  Cabin temperature does not rise  Response is slow Air Inlet Control Faulty  Cannot change between FRS and REC (Always Fresh or always Recirculating) Vent Control Faulty  Mode will not change  Will not enter the desired mode 1st Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check I30150 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting. Drive belt tension 3. Suspect Area 1. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 5. 3. A/C amplifier assy 05–1126 05–1136 05–1098 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Blower motor circuit Heater relay circuit Blower w/fan motor sub–assy A/C amplifier assy 05–1144 05–1098 05–294 05–149 05–5 05–528 05–1148 05–1146 05–1148 05–1098 . cool or Max. 2. 3. sensor circuit 10. check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below. 5. 4. warm) 1. sensor circuit A/C amplifier assy 05–1102 05–1106 05–1113 05–1122 05–1133 05–1109 05–1098 Temperature Control : No temperature control (only Max. sensor circuit Ambient temp. sensor circuit A/C amplifier assy 05–1102 05–1106 05–1113 05–1122 05–1133 05–1109 05–1098 No air inlet control 1. Air mix damper position sensor circuit 8. Volume of refrigerant 2. sensor circuit Solar sensor circuit Air mix damper position sensor circuit Air mix control servomotor circuit Evaporator temp. 7. Blower motor circuit 05–1148 Air Flow Control : Insufficient air out 1. sensor circuit 9.05–1100 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 050TM–13 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If the normal code is displayed during DTC check although the problem still occurs. 3. 1. Air outlet control servomotor circuit 3. Blower motor circuit 3. 2. Engine ECU See page 1AZ–FSE: 1AZ–FE: 1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE: 1CD–FTV: Air Flow Control : No blower operation 1. sensor circuit Room temp. A/C amplifier assy 3. Pressure sensor circuit 6. Air mix control servomotor circuit Air mix damper position sensor circuit Ambient temp. 5. 5. 4. sensor circuit Solar sensor circuit Air mix damper position sensor circuit Air mix control servomotor circuit Evaporator temp. Air mix control servomotor circuit 7. Refrigerant pressure 4. Symptom Whole functions of the A/C system does not operate. sensor circuit A/C amplifier assy Heater radiator 05–1133 05–1122 05–1106 05–1102 05–1098 – Temperature Control : Output air is warmer or cooler than the set temperature or response is slow. 6. sensor circuit Ambient temp. 2. Ambient temp. 2. A/C amplifier assy 05–1148 05–1148 05–1098 Temperature Control : Cool air does not come out 1. 3. Air Flow Control : No blower control 1. Room temp. IG power source circuit 2. 6. 4. 7. Blower w/fan motor sub–assy 2. Room temp. Air outlet damper position sensor circuit 2. 4. A/C amplifier assy 05–1153 05–1098 No air outlet control 1. Room temp.A/C amplifier assy 55–24 55–46 55–24 05–1151 05–1116 05–1133 05–1122 05–1102 05–1106 05–1098 Temperature Control : Warm air does not come out 1. 6. Recirculation damper servomotor circuit 2.

A/C amplifier assy 05–1151 05–1098 Brightness does not change when light control switch it turned. A/C amplifier assy 05–1142 05–1098 Hot gas heater: Symptom Warm wind does not blow out even if the gas heater switch is turned on before the water temperature rises under the condition where the ordinal A/C correctly operates. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 2. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Suspect Area 1. Hot gas heater magnetic valve circuit 2. Illumination light system 2. Engine ECU 1AZ–FSE: 1AZ–FE: 1ZZ–FE/3ZZ–FE: 1CD–FTV: 05–1151 05–1098 05–294 05–149 05–5 05–528 Set temperature value displayed does not much up with operation of temperature control switch. 1. 1. or is continuous – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 1. A/C amplifier assy – 05–1098 Unable to access the diagnosis mode. A/C amplifier assy See page 05–1157 05–1159 05–1098 . Hot gas heater switch circuit 3. 1. Back–up power source circuit 2. Set mode is cleared when IG switch is turned off. A/C amplifier assy 3. 1. A/C amplifier assy 05–1098 DTC is not recorded.05–1101 DIAGNOSTICS Engine idle up does not occur. Air conditioner magnetic valve circut 2.

05–1153 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7Q–01 RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVOMOTOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The recirculation damper servomotor is controlled by the A/C amplifier and moves the air inlet damper to the desired position. WIRING DIAGRAM A21 Air Inlet Control Servo Motor Center J/B R–W (*1) R–W (*2) 1 CB 6 CE H J26 R–W (*2) H J26 3 + R–Y 5 A15 REC P–B 6 A15 FRS 1 R–W (*2) 2 Driver Side J/B 6 R–W (*2) J/C R–W (*1) A/C Control Assembly DC From HTR Fuse *1: LHD *2: RHD I35397 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Press the DEF switch and change to step operation. Check the air flow temperature by hand. Display code Recirculation damper position 0 FRESH 1 FRESH 2 FRESH 3 FRESH 4 RECIRCULATION 5 RECIRCULATION 6 RECIRCULATION 7 RECIRCULATION 8 RECIRCULATION 9 RECIRCULATION NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE .05–1154 DIAGNOSTICS 1 (a) (b) (c) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PERFORM ACTUATOR CHECK Set to actuator check mode (See page 05–1091).

replace the mode damper servomotor. If operattions are not as specified. then check that the arm turns to ”FRS” side smoothly. then check that the arm turns to ”REC” side smoothly. Connect the positive (+) lead to from the battery to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 2. (c) Connect the positive (+) lead to from the battery to terminal 3 and negative (–) lead to terminal 1. I36094 RHD Models: REC FRS I36093 I36094 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY .05–1155 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM INSPECT RECIRCULATION DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY LHD Models: (a) (b) REC FRS I36092 Remove the recirculation damper servo sub–assy.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 4 INSPECT AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER(REC.0 RECIRCULATION 10 to 14 Measure voltage between terminal REC of A/C amplifier and body ground when recirculation switch is operated. as shown in the table.0 REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING AMPLIFIER OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Measure the voltage between terminal FRS of A/C amplifier and body ground when recirculation switch is operated. Standard: REC I36144 (c) Recirculation switch Voltage (V) FRESH Below 1. FRS) A16 (a) (b) A15 FRS Remove A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Standard: NG Recirculation switch Voltage (V) FRESH 10 to 14 RECIRCULATION Below 1.05–1156 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RECIRCULATON DAMPER SERVO SUB–ASSY – BATTERY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between recirculation damper and battery + terminal (See page 01–32). as shown in the table.

0 V A16–17 (HR) – A16–13 (GND) GR–R – W–B IG SW: ON Front blower: OFF  Operate 10 to 14  Below 1. AIR CONDITIONER AMPLIFIER ASSY A16 A15 121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 242322212019181716151413 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20191817161514131211 I36145 Terminal No. HOT Below 1.: MAX HOT  MAX.3 V L – W–B IG SW: ON Solar sensor subject to electric light 0.0 V A15–5 (REC) – A16–13 (GND) R–Y – W–B IG SW: ON R/F SW: FRESH  RECIRCULATION 10 to 14  Below 1. COOL 1.0 V LG – W–B IG SW: ON Solar sensor subject to electric light 0.0  4. HOT Below 1.: MAX. 0 psi)  3. 455 psi) Pulse generation 0.0  4.0 kgf/cm2.138 MPa (32.8 to 3.0  10 to 14 V A15–11 (AMDC) – A16–13 (GND) B – W–B IG SW: Set driver side temp. COOL 1.0 V A15–4 (AOF) – A16–13(GND) L–B – W–B IG SW: ON Mode switch: DEF.0  10 to 14 V A15–1 (AMPC) – A16–13 (GND) Y – W–B IG SW: Set passenger side temp. Below 1.: MAX HOT  MAX.0  10 to 14 V A16–13 (GND) – Body ground W–B – Body ground Always Continuity A16–24 (+B) – A16–13 (GND) W–R – W–B Always 10 to 14 V A16–8 (TPD) – A15–14 (SG–2) GR – Y–R A16–20 TPP – A15–13 (SG–1) V–P A16–9 (TSD) – A16–13 (GND) A16–21 (TSP) – A16–13 (GND) Start engine Refrigerant pressure: 0 kPa (0 kgf/cm2.0  10 to 14 V A16–12 (IG) – A16–13 (GND) R–W – W–B IG SW: LOCK  ON A15–2 (AMPH) – A16–13 (GND) W – W–B IG SW: ON Set passenger side temp.0  10 to 14 V A15–12 (AMDH) – A16–13 (GND) P–L – W–B IG SW: Set driver side temp.0 V IG SW: ON Set passenger side temp.8 V Below 10 to 14 V IG SW: ON Set driver side temp. COOL  MAX.0  10 to 14 V A15–3 (AOD) – A16–13 (GND) LG–B – W–B IG SW: ON Mode switch: FACE  DEF. COOL  MAX.: MAX HOT  MAX. (Symbols) Wiring Color Condition IG SW: ON Front blower: Operate Specification A16–5 (BLW) – A16–13 (GND) R – W–B A16–7 (PRE) – A16–18 (SG) L–W – G–W A15–20 (MPX–) – A16–13 (GND) P – W–B Multiplex communication circuit – A15–10 (MPX+) – A16–13 (GND) P–B – W–B Multiplex communication circuit – A15–6 (FRS) – A16–13 (GND) P–B – W–B IG SW: ON R/F SW: RECIRCULATION  FRESH 10 to 14  Below 1.3 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .: MAX HOT  MAX.: MAX. COOL Below 1.05–1098 DIAGNOSTICS – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 05C7K–01 TERMINALS OF ECU 1.5  4.  FACE Below 1. COOL Below 1.8 to 3.

4 to 1.0  10 to 14 V (*1) (*2) (*3) 2.25 V .2 V A15–17 (CFAN) – A16–13 (GND) W–R – W–B Start engine Condenser fan: operate 10 to 14  Below 1.85 to 1.0 V A15–8 (SOL+) – A16–13 (GND) R – W–B A15–7 (MGV) – A16–13 (GND) (*1) R–Y – W–B Start engine Hot gas heater: Operate A16–11 (HOTGASIN) – A16–13 (GND) (*1) G–Y – W–B IG SW: ON Hot Gas SW: ON 10 to 14 V A16–16 (S5) – A16–18 (SG) B–W – G–W IG SW: LOCK  ON 0  5.7  4.8 to 2.2 to 1. (Symbols) Wiring Color C10–17 (Z1H) – Body ground W–B – Body ground C10–11 (HAY) – C10–12 (HAZ) W–R – W AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Condition Always IG SW: ON Ambient temp. Start engine Compressor: Operate Pulse generation 10 to 14  Below 1.05–1099 DIAGNOSTICS Terminal No.0 V A16–14 (S5–3) – A15–15 (SG–3) BR–W – G–W IG SW: LOCK  ON 0  5.0 to 2. (Symbols) Wiring Color A16–22 (TR) – A16–6 (SG–5) GR – G A16–10 (TE) – A15–16 (SG–4) – AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Condition Specification IG SW: ON Cabin temp.6 V B – W–G Evaporator temp.0 V A16–15 (S5–4) – A16–9 (TSD) O – LG IG SW: LOCK  ON 1.0 V A17–4 (RDEFIN) – A17–13 (GND) (*2) G–W – W–B IG SW: ON RDEF RELAY : OFF  ON Below 1.2  1.0 V A16–19 (PBKIG) – A17–13 (GND) B–W – W–B IG SW: ON PARKING BRAKE SW: OFF  ON 10 to 14  Below 1.8 V A16–23 (ILL+) – A16–13 (GND) G – W–B Light control switch TAIL or HEAD 10 to 14 V A16–19 (TPM) – A15–15 (SG–3) GR–R – G–W IG SW: ON Set air flow setting: DEF.  FACE 1.2 V A16–15 (S5–4) – A16–21 (TSP) O–L IG SW: LOCK  ON 1.: 0C (32F)  15C (59F) 2.0 V Diesel (standard) only Petrol only Except 1AZ–FE COMBINATION METER A9 A10 I35419 Terminal No.0  4.: 25C (77F)  40C (104F) Specification Continuity 1.: 25C (77F)  40C (104F) 1.35 to 1.0 V A16–1 (S5–1) – A15–13 (SG–1) R–P IG SW: LOCK  ON 0  5.75  0.4  1.0 V A17–3 (PBLT) – A17–13 (GND) (*3) L–R – W–B IG SW: ON SEAT BELT SIGNAL: OFF  ON 10 to 14  Below 1.7  4.0 V A16–2 (S5–2) – A15–14 (SG–2) Y–B – Y–R IG SW: LOCK  ON 0  5.

05–1432 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C55–01 A AUDIO SYSTEM CANNOT BE OPERATED WITH STEERING PAD SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM Radio Receiver Assy Steering Pad SW LH 12 AU1 S15 LG 7 R11 SW1 11 AU2 S15 P 8 R11 SW2 10 EAU S15 W–R 6 R11 GND I35619 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

0. 3. 100 k AU1 – EAU SEEK+ switch: push 0 AU1 – EAU SEEK– switch: push Approx. AU2.3 k AU1 – EAU VOL+ switch: push Approx. EAU) (a) (b) AU1 EAU AU2 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Remove the steering pad switch LH.2 k AU1 – EAU Do not switch position Approx. Check continuity between terminals at each condition. 100 k AU1 – EAU MODE switch: push 0 NG I35662 REPLACE STEERING WHEEL ASSY . Standard: Tester connection Condition Specified condition AU1 – EAU Do not switch position Approx.05–1433 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT STEERING WHEEL ASSY(AU1. 1 k AU1 – EAU VOL– switch: push Approx. as shown in the chart.

(1) Check continuity between terminals at each condition. as shown in the chart. as shown in the chart.05–1434 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – AUDIO SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STEERING WHEEL ASSY – RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) (a) Radio Receiver Assy: SW1 Disconnect the connectors from the steering wheel assy and radio receiver assy. Standard: Tester connection Specified condition SW1– – AU1 Continuity SW2 – AU2 Continuity GND – EAU Continuity (2) SW2 GND Steering Wheel Assy: Check for a short between terminals at each condition. Standard: AU1  EAU AU2 Specified condition No continuity SW2 – Body ground No continuity GND – Body ground No continuity I37571 NG OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Tester connection SW1 – Body ground REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR (See page 01–32) OR .

OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY . Standard: Malfunction disappears. (1) Press the cassette tape EJECT switch of the radio receiver assembly for 2 seconds or more and check that the cassette tape is ejected.05–1429 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C54–01 CASSETTE TAPE CANNOT BE EJECTED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) PRESS ”EJECT” AND CHECK OPERATION Press ”EJECT” and check the operation. Standard: No fault on the cassette tape. cassette body deformation or others. NG CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY OK 3 (a) REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY OK 2 (a) CHECK CASSETTE TAPE Check the cassette tape. Standard: The cassette tape is ejected. (1) Check that the ejected cassette tape does not have the label peeled. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again.

(1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. Standard: The function is recovered to be normal. OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY . Standard: Proper cassette tape to which music or voice is recorded. NG REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT OK 2 (a) CHECK CASSETTE TAPE Check the cassette tape. Standard: No foreign objects or defects detected. NG CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY OK 3 (a) REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another one and recheck. (1) Check that the cassette tape is a normal tape to which music or voice is recorded.05–1428 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C53–01 CASSETTE TAPE CANNOT BE INSERTED OR PLAYED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) CHECK FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT Check for any foreign objects. (1) Check that no foreign objects or defects are detected in the cassette tape player of radio receiver assy.

Do not try to remove it by force. OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CD FAULTY . (1) Check that in what conditions the sound skipping occurs. send the vehicle for repair. Reference: If the CD is not ejected. Standard: Installed properly. Standard: CD is ejected. Standard: Driving on the bad road.05–1424 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C52–01 CD CANNOT BE EJECTED INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 PRESS ”EJECT” AND CHECK OPERATION (a) Press ”EJECT”and check the operation. NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY OK 2 (a) CHECK IF A PROPER CD IS INSERTED Check that a proper CD is inserted. NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY OK 3 (a) REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. (1) Press the CD EJECT switch of the radio receiver assembly for 2 seconds or more to see if the CD is ejected. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly.

Standard: Normal audio CD. NG SET DISC CORRECTLY OK 3 DISC CLEANING (a) Disk cleaning (1) If the disk gets dirty. burr and other defects on the CD. clean the disk by wiping the surface from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth. stain. Reference:  Translucent or different–shaped CD cannot be played. E50013 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) DISC DIRTY . Standard: Malfunction disappears. (1) Check whether or not the CD is inserted upside down. Standard: Not upside down. NG CD FAULTY OK 2 (a) CHECK IF A CD IS INSERTED PROPERLY Check that a CD is inserted properly.05–1422 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C51–01 CD CANNOT BE INSERTED OR IS EJECTED RIGHT AFTER INSERTION INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK IF A PROPER CD IS INSERTED (a) Check if a proper CD is inserted.  CD–ROM for the computers (with music recorded in) and recorded CD –R may not be played. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static preservative. and that there is no deformation. flaw. (1) Make sure that the CD is normal audio CD.

(1) Replace the CD with onother normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again.05–1423 DIAGNOSTICS 4 (a) – AUDIO SYSTEM REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CD FAULTY .

OK Go to step 5 NG 4 (a) COMPARE IT WITH ANOTHER CAR OF SAME MODEL Compare it with another vehicle of the same model. E50013 OK DISC DIRTY NG 2 (a) REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. Standard: No difference found. Standard: Malfunction disappears. (1) Check that in what condition (place) noise occurs.05–1426 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 054A0–09 CD SOUND SKIPS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 DISC CLEANING (a) Disk cleaning (1) If the disk gets dirty. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static preservative. (1) Replace the CD with onother normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. OK CD FAULTY NG 3 (a) CHECK WHEN THIS HAPPENS Check when this happens. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) SETTING . Standard: Malfunction disappears. (1) Compare with the vehicle of the same type which does not have a trouble to see if there is any difference in the condition of trouble occurrence. Standard: Driving on the bumpy road. clean the disk by wiping the surface from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth.

OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CONDENSATION DUE TO TEMPERATURE CHANGE (LEAVE IT AS IT IS FOR A WHILE BEFORE USING) .05–1427 DIAGNOSTICS 5 (a) – AUDIO SYSTEM CHECK OF RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Check of radio receiver assembly installation. Reference: The rapid temperature change creates condensation inside the CD player. Standard: Installed properly. NG INSTALL THE RADIO RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PROPERLY OK 6 DID THE TEMPERATURE IN THE CABIN CHANGE RAPIDLY? (a) Did the temperature in the cabin change rapidly? (1) Check whether or not the rapid temperature change occurred in the cabin. which may prevent the CD from being played. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. Standard: The rapid temperature change occurred.

05–1398 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4W–01 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AUDIO SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name: VIN Production Date Customer’s Name Licence No. DTC (2nd time). Brought–in Date / / / Date of First Occurrence Frequency of Problem Occurrence km Mile Odometer Reading  Constant /  Intermittent ( Times a day) Problem Symptom  Radio DTC Check  Switch Parts name  CD  Noise DTC (1st time). Radio receiver assy I30195 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

RADIO WAVE BAND The radio wave bands used in radio broadcasting are as follows: Frequency 30 kHz Designation 300 kHz 3 MHz LF MF AM Radio wave Modulation Amplitude modulation 30 MHz HF 300 MHz VHF FM Frequency modulation LF: Low Frequency MF: Medium Frequency HF: High Frequency VHF: Very High Frequency 2. ”multipath” and ”fade out”. there are some move problems called ”fading”. These radio waves then interfere with the signals that reach the vehicle’s antenna directly from the same transmitter. but it also picks up static and other types of interference (”noise”) easily. This is because AM radio waves bounce off the ionosphere at night. SERVICE AREA There are great differences in the size of the service area for AM and FM broadcasting. AM broadcasts are also susceptible to other types of interference. especially at night. RECEPTION PROBLEMS HINT: Besides the problem of static. Fading (a) Ionosphere BE2819 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Fading Besides electrical interference. This type of interference is called ”fading”.05–1393 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM AUDIO SYSTEM 0549F–10 DESCRIPTION 1. FM stereo has the smaller service area. These problems are caused not by electrical noise but by the nature of the radio waves themselves. . Sometimes FM stereo broadcast cannot be received even through AM can be received very clearly. FM (Stereo) FM (Monaural) AM BE2818 3.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1394 DIAGNOSTICS Multipath – AUDIO SYSTEM (b) Multipath Interference caused by reflection of radio waves against obstructions is called ”Multipath”.7 in. HINT: Never attempt to disassemble or apply oil to any part of the player unit. 5. (c) Fade Out Because FM frequency is higher than that of AM. Use the following table to diagnose the phenomenon. Refer to the description about Multipath and Fading mentioned previously. Multipath occurs when radio signals emitted from the broadcast transmitter antenna are reflected against tall buildings or mountains and interferes with other signals which are to be received directly. BE2820 Fade Out BE2821 4. one of those may be tuned in. Be sure to operate the player correctly as instructed. FM signals often seems to gradually disappear or fade away as the vehicle goes behind those obstructions. etc. Strong possibility of beat from a distant broadcasting. find out the cause based on ”Reception Problems”. (a) NOISE PROBLEMS It is very important for noise troubleshooting to understand a customer’s claim clearly. AM FM Probable cause Noise occurs at a specific place. Radio wave Condition in which noise occurs Strong possibility of foreign noise. (12 cm) and 3. NOTICE: CD players use an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure. Strong possibility of multipath noise and fading noise caused by changes of FM frequency.2 in. Noise occurs when listening to faint broadcasting. HINT: If the condition where the noise occurs does not meet any of the above. Noise occurs at a specific place while driving. 4. (8 cm) discs are available for the CD player. Do not insert any object into the magazine except for a disc. For this reason. The same program may be broadcasted from some local stations. Noise occurs only at night. If the program is the same. This phenomenon is called ”fade out”. FM radio wave tends to be reflected against obstructions such as tall buildings or mountains. COMPACT DISC PLAYER (a) Compact Disc (hereafter called ”CD”) Players use a laser beam pick–up to read the digital signals recorded on the CD and reproduce analog signals of the music.

which is necessary for communication. or three–digit number (in hexadecimal) is set for each component comprising AVC–LAN. Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (Radio receiver function) The master component of AVC–LAN is the radio receiver assy with a resistance (60 – 80 ). (a) (b) (c) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Components in the audio system communicate each other though AVC–LAN. (a) (b) (c) 9. Example : Head Capstan (a) (b) Pinch Roller – AUDIO SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Tape Player / Head Cleaning: Raise the slot cover with your finger. Using a pencil or similar object. When short circuit or open circuit occurs in the AVC–LAN circuit. N17398 7. or two–digit number (in hexadecimal) is set for each function and component unit in each component. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION The audio system has diagnosis function (The diagnosis result is displayed on the LCD of the radio receiver assy). The logical address. NOTICE: Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti–static preservative.05–1395 DIAGNOSTICS 6. pinch rollers and capstans. MAINTENANCE CD Player / Disc Cleaning: If the disc gets dirty. (Radio receiver function) The component code (physical address). push in the guide. clean the disc by wiping the surface from the center to outside in the radial directions with a soft cloth. clean the head surface. BE4331 8. the audio system does not operate normally due to the communication cutoff.

 Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub code.  Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code. DA No Response to ON/OFF Instruction No response is identified when changing mode (audio and visual mode change). Physical address Logical address Two–digit code (shown in hexadecimal) which is given to each function comprising the inner system of the AVC–LAN.) If same sub code is recorded in other component. trouble code may be stored depending on the battery condition or voltage for starting the engine. Transmission Error Transmission to component shown by auxiliary code failed.05–1405 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549J–12 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART Terms Meaning Three–digit code (shown in hexadecimal) which is given to each component comprising the AVC–LAN. Replace radio receiver assy. Component in which this code is recorded was disconnected from system or master component ignition with in ACC or ON.  Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub code.  If error occurs again.  Check harness for power supply system of radio receiver assy. D9 *1 Last Mode Error Audio or visual component operated before engine stop is or was disconnected with ignition switch in ACC or ON.  Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy.) DC *3 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Abnormal condition of RAM is detected.  Check harness for power supply of component shown by sub code. replace component shown by sub code. Corresponding to the function. check harness for power supply and communication system of all components shown by code. (If not.  Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code.  Check harness for power supply system of component shown by sub code. (Detecting this DTC does not necessarily mean actual failure.  *5: When 210 seconds have passed after pulling out the power supply connector of the master component with the ignition switch in ACC or ON. RADIO RECEIVER ASSY (Physical address: 190) HINT:  *1: Even if no failure is detected.  *3: It may be stored when the engine key is turned 1 minuite after the engine starts.  *4: It may be stored when the engine key is turned again after the engine starts. delete DTC and recheck.  Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy.  Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code. . DB *1 Mode Status Error Dual alarm is detected. (a) Logical address: 01 (Communication control) DTC Diagnosis item Description Action to be taken 22 RAM Error D6 *1 Absence of Master D7 *5 Connection check Error D8 *2 No Response to Connection Check Component shown by sub code is or was disconnected from system after engine start. Component in which this code is recorded was disconnected from system or master component with ignition in ACC or ON. 1. this code is stored.  *2: It is stored when 180 seconds have passed after the power supply connector is pulled out after the engine starts. Sound and picture does not change by button operation.  Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code. individual symbols are specified.  Check harness for power supply of radio receiver assy.

it may be detected when no actual failure exists. Replace radio receiver assy. 47 CD High Temp. Since this DTC is provided for engineering purpose.  Check harness for communication system of radio receiver assy. master component was disconnected from system. High temperature is detected in CD player. Inspect CD. Replace radio receiver assy. DE *4 Slave Reset (Momentary Interruption) After the engine was started. Inspect cassette tape. replace radio receiver assy. 41 EJECT Error Malfunction due to mechanical failure. 42 46 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (c) Logical address: 62 (CD player) DTC Diagnosis item Description Action to be taken No Disc Readout Disc cannot be read. component shown by sub code had been disconnected from system. Or cassette tape is cut or entangled. 44 CD player Error Error is detected in CD player.  If this error occurs frequently. E2 ON/OFF Instruction Parameter Error Error occures in ON/OFF controlling command from master component. Replace radio receiver assy. E3 *1 (b) Logical address: 61 (Cassette switch) DTC Diagnosis item Description Action to be taken 40 Mechanical Error of Media Malfunction due to mechanical failure is identified. Replace radio receiver assy. 48 CD Excess Current Excess current is applied CD player. 45 EJECT Error Magazine cannot be ejected. Registration Request command is output from sub–master component. Replace radio receiver assy.  Inspect cassette tape.  Replace radio receiver assy.05–1406 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM DD *4 Master Reset (Momentary Interruption) After the engine was started. it may be detected when no actual failure exists.  Check harness for communication system of component shown by sub code. E0 *1 Registration Completion Instruction Error ”Registration Completion Instruction” command from master cannot be received. Scratched/Reversed Disc Scratches or dirt is found on CD surface or CD is set upside down.  Replace radio receiver assy.  Inspect CD. Since this DTC is provided for engineering purpose. 42 Tape caught in the radio receiver assy Hub lock etc.  Check harness for power supply of component shown by sub code. Replace radio receiver assy Registration Request Transmission Registration Request command is output from component shown by sub code.  Check harness for power supply system of multi–display. Receiving Connection Check Instruction.

05–1396 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549G–09 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (SEE PAGE 05–1398) 3 CHECK AND CLEAR THE DTCS (SEE PAGE 05–1399) 4 PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM OCCURS (GO TO STEP 6) SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5) 5 SYMPTOM SIMULATION (SEE PAGE 05–1398) 6 DTC CHECK (SEE PAGE 05–1399) MALFUNCTION CODE (GO TO STEP 7) NORMAL CODE (GO TO STEP 8) 7 DTC CHART (SEE PAGE 05–1405) GO TO STEP 9 8 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (SEE PAGE 05–1412) 9 CIRCUIT INSPECTION (SEE PAGE 05–1413 – 05–1432) 10 CONFIRMATION TEST AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1397 DIAGNOSTICS END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – AUDIO SYSTEM .

4 (*1) Engine Room R/B No.1 Engine Room J/B No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Speaker Assy Front No.2 Speaker Assy Rear No.3 (*2)  ALT Fuse Radio Receiver Assy Steering Pad Switch LH Engine Room R/B No.05–1407 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4X–01 LOCATION Sedan: Engine Room R/B No.1  DCC Fuse Front No.2 Fuse *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV I35612 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .1 Fuse  AM1 Fuse Fuse Block  RAD No.1 Speaker Assy Driver Side J/B  RAD No.4 (*1) Engine Room J/B No.

05–1408 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM Lift Back: Engine Room R/B No.1 Fuse  AM1 Fuse Fuse Block  RAD No.4 (*1) Engine Room J/B No.3 (*2) ALT Fuse Radio Receiver Assy Steering Pad Switch LH Engine Room R/B No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Speaker Assy Front No.2 Speaker Assy Rear No.1 Engine Room J/B No.2 Fuse *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV I35613 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .1 Speaker Assy Driver Side J/B  RAD No.4 (*1) Engine Room R/B No.1  DCC Fuse Front No.

1  DCC Fuse Front No.4 (*1) Engine Room J/B No.1 Fuse  AM1 Fuse Fuse Block  RAD No.2 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Fuse *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV I35614 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .3 (*2)  ALT Fuse Radio Receiver Assy Steering Pad Switch LH Engine Room R/B No.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.1 Engine Room J/B No.4 (*1) Engine Room R/B No.05–1409 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM Wagon: Engine Room R/B No.2 Speaker Assy Driver Side J/B  RAD No.2 Speaker Assy Front No.

thereby excessively large noise do not occur in the radio. Ignition noise Noise occurs in turn with the blink of the turn signal flash. and stopping the engine erases the noise immediately. check whether or not the earth on the antenna installation part and the proper noise–prevention equipment are all installed. Failing to do so makes the noise occurrence source detection impossible and leads to misunderstanding. and check the noise filter on the related part. HINT: The radio is equipped with the noise prevention system that works against only the excessively large noise. Standard: Malfunction disappears. Washer noise Noise occurs during the engine running. (1) Check that each speaker is securely installed. If large noise occurs. and whether or not the improper wiring is held. Condition in which noise occurs Noise type Depressing the acceleration pedal increases noise. Fuel pump noise Pressing and then releasing the horn switch. Stop light switch noise Others.05–1419 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 054A1–09 NOISE OCCURS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) CHECK OF SPEAKER INSTALLATION Check the speaker installation condition. Wiper noise Noise occurs when the brake pedal is depressed. Make sure first that there is no noise from outside. The noise should be removed in descending order of loudness. and keeping pressing the horn switch makes noise. NG OK IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) INSTALL IT PROPERLY . Blower motor noise Rapid acceleration during the drive on the unpaved road or after the IG switch is turned ON makes noise. Flasher noise Noise occurs during the window washer operation. Static electricity on the vehicle HINT:    Identify the condition under which the noise occurs. Horn noise Stopping the engine erases the small noise that has been heard. Water temperature sensor noise Noise occurs during the wiper operation. and it continues to occur after the engine is stopped. Alternator noise Noise occurs during the A/C or the heater operation.

4.1 1 1A FL MAIN DCC 5 4 IP1 IE4 1 2 (*6) (*3) Engine Room R/B No.1 4 DB 1 DH AM1 1 DN G I12 Ignition Switch 2 ACC F F F J/C F GR J8 J20 J8 J20 (*3) (*6) G–R AM1 3 (*3) (*6) B–G (*1) B–L (*2) Fuse Block L–Y (*3) 7 RAD No. w/o Multi–display *5: RHD.4 B–G (*1) Battery B–G (*1) *1: Gasoline *2: 1CD–FTV *3: LHD 1 ALT 1 4A 1 B–W 1 2 1 4D B–G (*1) IN 4B *4: RHD.2 L–Y (*4) L–Y (*5) 6 2 3 R9 ACC 6 1 R9 B–W GND BR (*3) W–B (*6) Engine Room R/B No.1. Engine Room J/B No.3 B (*2) 3 1 ALT 3 B (*2) 1 W (*2) 3 2 ED1 Engine Room R/B No.05–1413 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4Z–01 POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (RADIO RECEIVER ASSY) WIRING DIAGRAM J24 J/C L–Y (*5) Radio Receiver Assy L–Y (*5) E E 4 R9 +B L–Y (*4) Center J/B 4 CE 8 CB L–Y (*3) Driver Side J/B GR 3 DH RAD No. 1CD–FTV. Except *4 *6: RHD I35615 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Engine Room J/B No.

ACC. as shown in the chart. as shown in the chart. Standard: I35616 Tester connection Condition Specified condition +B – GND Always 10 to 14 V ACC – GND Ignition SW ACC 10 to 14 V NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR (See page 01–32) OR OK 2 (a) CHECK FOR PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Check problem symptoms table (See page 05–1412). Check continuity between terminals at each condition. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specified condition GND – Body ground Always Continuity (c) Check the voltage between terminals at each condition.05–1414 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(BU. GND) ACC +B (a) (b) GND Remove the radio receiver assy. Suspected areas are cleared A Suspected areas still exist B B A REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1412) .

Code No. a ”beep” tone is emitted 3 times and all the elements are lighting in the SW check mode.  When pressing the switch. (1) Reference  In the service check mode.05–1399 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549I–12 1 PRE–CHECK 6 1. (2) Reference:  When the system enters the Diagnosis Mode. the system check and the diagnosis memory check are performed. and the check results are displayed in ascending order of the device codes (physical address. (a) SEEK DOWN SEEK UP DISC I35610 (b) DIAGNOSIS CHECK Starting Diagnosis Mode (All elements are lighting in the SW check mode). While pressing the preset switches ”1” and ”6” at the same time. individual symbol is provided. press ”DISC” 3 times. comfirm a beep tone is emitted. or turn the IG switch OFF. Logical address Two–digit code (In hexadecimal) given to each function and device unit in each device comprising AVC–LAN.  It takes about 40 seconds to complete the check. (physical address) List Code No.  Press ”SEEK TRACK UP” button switches to enter the ”Service Check Screen”.) Terms Meaning Component code (Physical address) Three–digit code (In hexadecimal) given to each device comprising AVC–LAN. Corresponding to its function. (1) Press ”DISC” for 2 seconds or more. (physical address) 190 (c) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Equipment name Radio receiver assy (Audio head unit) Finishing Diagnosis Mode. Service Check Screen.  Turn all the elements in the LCD on. . (1) Turn off the audio system and turn the IG switch to ACC.

and then the check result. one or more DTC for ”Check is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”. Check the power source circuit and the communication circuit of the device indicated by the device code (physical address). Go to the detail information mode to check the trouble area referring to the DTC list. P–––indicates physical address 190–––physical address good–––”The component is normal”. I34696 (2) Display good NCON ECHN CHEC Check Result Display. P–––indicates physical address 360–––physical address CHEC–––”Check needed”. and the device (code 360) requires a check. Go to the detail information mode to check the trouble area referring to the DTC list. – No connection The system recognized the component when it was registered. Original Language Meaning Action to be taken Good (normal) No DTCs are detected in both ”System Check Mode” and ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”. (1) Press the ”SEEK TRACK” switch to see the check result of each device. The device code is displayed first. The check result is displayed in ascending order of device code. Exchange One or more DTC for ”Exchange” is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”.05–1400 DIAGNOSTICS (d) – AUDIO SYSTEM Service Check Mode Result Display (for checking the current and the past system conditions). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . but the component gives no response to the ”Diagnosis Mode ON Request”. : SEEK TRACK UP : SEEK TRACK DOWN The illustration shows the case that the system has 2 devices with codes 190 and 360. Check When no DTCs are detected for ”Exchange”.

press the preset switch ”2” to go to the detailed information mode. NRES (3) (e) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) To perform the Service Check again. . Detailed information Mode (when displaying the troubled device’s DTC) (1) With ”CHEC” or ”ECHN” being displayed. press the preset switch ”1”. – No response The device gives no response to any one of ”System Check Mode ON Request”.05–1401 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM Display Original Language Meaning Action to be taken OLD Old version Old DTC application is identified and DTC is detected in either ”System Check Mode” or ”Diagnosis Memory Mode”. ”System Check Result Request” and ”Diagnosis Memory Request”. Check the power source circuit and the communication circuit of the device indicated by the device code (physical code). (2) Press the ”SEEK TRACK” switch to display ”System Check Result (SYS)” and ”Diagnosis Memory Response (CODE)”.

(*2): As for the DTCs that do not have any sub code. then the diagnosis memory response result. CODE–––diagnosis memory response result 2–––the second code 01–––logical address DC–––DTC P–––indicates physical address 360–––sub code Detail information of the second code is displayed (*2) 6F–––connection check number 05–––the number of times of occurrence (in decimal) Continue to display detailed information when more than one DTC is detected.05–1402 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM Service Check Mode PRESET SWITCH ”3” Detail Information Mode PRESET SWITCH ”2” P–––indicates physical address 190–––physical address *1 SYS–––system check result 1–––the first code 62–––logical address Detail information of the first code is displayed 47–––DTC Continue to display detailed information when more than one DTC is detected. sub code is not displayed. I34695 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . The detailed information mode shows the system check result first. : SEEK TRACK UP : SEEK TRACK DOWN From *1 To *1 The illustration shows the case that the component with code 190 has DTC ”47” and ”dC” as a result of the system check and the diagnosis memory response.

(3) Press the preset switch ”1” to perform the service check again. Logical address DTC Sub code Connection confirmation number The number of times of occurrence CODE (4) (5) (f) Check the trouble area referring to the DTC list.) SYS System check result is displayed. only the component codes (physical address) are displayed. When the DTC memory is cleared.) HINT:   AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Beep sound is given once when the DTC memory is completely cleared. press the preset switch ”1” and perform the service check again. (The order is reversed when the ”SEEK TRACK DOWN” switch is pressed. Clearance of all the DTC memory (when clearing all the memory of the DTC detected in the past) (1) Start the diagnosis mode after repairing the trouble area. To check the DTC. When the DTCs memory for all the device is cleared. only the component code (physical address) is displayed for the target component.05–1403 DIAGNOSTICS – (3) AUDIO SYSTEM Displayed Items in Detailed Information Mode Division Code for DTC display Meaning The order of detailed information displayed when the ”SEEK TRACK UP” switch is pressed. and check that no DTCs are displayed for all the component codes (physical address). Clearing Individual DTC Memory (when clearing the memory of the DTC detected in the past individually) (1) Press the preset switch ”5” for 2 seconds or more while the ”ECHN” is displayed in the service check mode or during the detail information mode. To return to the service check mode. press the preset switch ”3”. (”CLR” is displayed at this time. . Logical address  DTC Diagnosis memory check result is displayed. HINT:    (g) Beep sound is emitted once when the DTC memory is completely cleared. (2) Press the preset switch ”5” for 2 seconds or more.

Condition in which noise occurs Noise Source Depressing the acceleration pedal increases noise. Blower motor Rapid acceleration while driving on the unpaved road or after the IG switch is turned ON makes noise. Stop light switch Others. (a) – AUDIO SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION OF NOISE SOURCE Identify the condition under which the noise occurs.  Setting the radio untuned makes noise noticeable.05–1404 DIAGNOSTICS 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor Noise occurs during the wiper operation.  The noise should be removed in descending order of loudness. Failing to do so makes the noise source detection difficult and leads to misunderstanding. Static electricity stored on the vehicle (b) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Reference:  Make sure first that there is no noise from outside. making the recognition of the phenomenon easier. Flasher Noise occurs during the window washer operation. Horn Stopping the engine erases small noise that has been heard. and it continues after the engine stops. and check the noise filter on the related part. and keeping pressing the horn switch makes unusual noise. Ignition Noise occurs synchronously with the turn signal flash. Wiper Noise occurs when the brake pedal is depressed. and stopping the engine erases the noise immediately. Fuel pump Pressing and then releasing the horn switch. . Generator Noise occurs during the A/C or the heater operation. Washer Noise occurs during the engine running.

Cassette tape cannot be ejected 05–1413 05–1429 Sound quality is bad only when playing tape. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2.05–1412 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549M–11 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY Symptom Suspect Area See page Pressing power switch does not start system. 1. – 05–1430 Tape is tangled due to incorrect tape speed or auto–reverse malfunction. 1. (bad reception) – 05–1420 CD cannot be inserted or is ejected right after insertion. – 05–1431 STEERING PAD SWITCH Symptom A audio system cannot be operated with steering pad switch AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Suspect Area – See page 05–1432 . Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. – 05–1426 Cassette tape cannot be inserted or played. 1. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 05–1413 Sound quality is bad in all modes. Power source circuit (radio receiver assy) 2. 1. 5.(volume is too low) – 05–1425 CD sound skips. CD cannot be inserted or is ejected right after insertion 05–1413 05–1422 CD cannot be ejected. – 05–1419 Radio broadcast cannot be received. Cassette tape cannot be inserted or played 05–1413 05–1428 Cassette tape cannot be ejected. (volume is too low) 1. Sound quality is bad in all modes (volume is too low) 05–1413 05–1415 Noise occurs. CD cannot be ejected 05–1413 05–1424 Sound quality is bad only when CD is played.

Standard: Noise occurs. such as the sunshade film and the telephone antenna.). OK EFFECT FROM OPTIONAL COMPONENT NG 3 (a) CHECK ANTENNA FOR NOISE PRODUCTION Noise Check with Antenna. telephone antenna etc. (1) Check whether or not any optional component is installed. (1) With the ignition switch in ACC. OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY NG 2 (a) CHECK OPTIONAL COMPONENT Check optional component (Sun shade film. Standard: The radio auto–search functions properly.05–1420 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549R–06 RADIO BROADCAST CANNOT BE RECEIVED (BAD RECEPTION) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) CHECK IF RADIO AUTO–SEARCH FUNCTIONS PROPERLY Check if the radio auto–search functions properly. turn on the radio and choose the AM mode. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY . Standard: Optional component is installed. (1) Perform the auto–search of the radio and check that it functions normally. (2) Place a tip of a screwdriver or the antenna of the antenna assembly w/ holder and check that the noise heard from the speaker.

Noise Check (1) With the radio receiver assy connector connected.05–1421 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – AUDIO SYSTEM INSPECT RADIO RECEIVER ASSY(ANTENNA) (a) (b) E50367 Preparation for Check (1) Remove the antenna plug of the radio receiver assy. Standard: Noise occurs. OK NG REPLACE ANTENNA CORD SUB–ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY . turn the ignition switch to ACC. (3) Place a flat–head screwdriver or a metal such as a thin wire on the antenna jack of the radio receiver assy and check that the noise heard from the speaker. (2) Turn on the radio and choose the AM mode.

RHD w/o Multi–display *2: RHD.1 Speaker Assy RH 4 R 1 3 (+) IN 2 1 (–) IN 2 W (–) OUT Y 17 BC1 R 9 IM2 R W 18 IM2 W 7 BA1 B 1 IC2 B 17 BA1 Y 10 IC2 Y 7 BC1 1 R10 RR+ 3 R10 RR– T16 Rear No.2 Speaker Assy RH (+) OUT B R25 Rear No. LHD w/o Multi–display I35617 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .2 Speaker Assy LH (+) OUT R R24 Rear No.05–1415 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C50–01 SOUND QUALITY IS BAD IN ALL MODES (VOLUME IS TOO LOW) WIRING DIAGRAM Radio Receiver Assy T15 Front No.2 Speaker Assy RH (+) OUT P F20 Front No.1 Speaker Assy LH 4 B 1 3 (+) IN 2 1 (–) IN 2 Y (–) OUT W 2 R10 RL+ 6 R10 RL– *1: LHD.1 Speaker Assy LH 1 3 2 1 L P 4 (+) IN V (–) IN 2 (–) OUT T17 Rear No.2 Speaker Assy LH (+) OUT LG F19 Front No.1 Speaker Assy RH 1 3 2 V 1 4 LG 1 IL1 LG (*1) 1 R9 FR+ L 6 IL1 L (*1) 5 R9 FR– 1 IA1 P (*2) 2 R9 FL+ 6 IA1 V (*2) 6 R9 FL– (+) IN (–) IN 2 (–) OUT T14 Front No.

Standard: Malfunction disappears. OK BAD SOUND QUALITY NG 2 (a) COMPARE IT WITH ANOTHER CAR OF SAME MODEL Compare it with another vehicle of the same models.05–1416 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) ADJUST SOUND QUALITY Adjust the sound quality. (1) Compare with the vehicle of the same type which does not have a trouble to see if there is any difference in the condition of trouble occurrence. Standard: No difference found. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) SETTING . (1) Operate the radio receiver assy to adjust the sound quality.

1 speaker assy RH) Continuity RR– – 2 (Rear No.1 Speaker Assy (2) Front No.1 speaker assy RH) Continuity RL+ – 4 (Rear No.1 speaker assy LH) Continuity RR+ – 1 (Rear No. as shown in the chart. RR+ FL– FR– RR– RL+ Front No.2 speaker assy LH) Continuity RL– – 2 (Rear No.1 speaker assy RH) Continuity FR– – 2 (Front No. Tester connection Specified condition FL+ – Body ground No Continuity FL– – Body ground No Continuity FR+ – Body ground No Continuity FR– – Body ground No Continuity RL+ – Body ground No Continuity RL– – Body ground No Continuity RR+ – Body ground No Continuity RR– – Body ground No Continuity REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR(See page 01–32) OR .2 Speaker Assy Rear No.2 Speaker Assy I35618 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Tester connection Specified condition FL+ – 1 (Front No.2 speaker assy LH) Continuity FL– – 2 (Front No.2 speaker assy LH) Continuity RR+ – 4 (Rear No. (1) Check continuity between terminals at each condition.2 speaker assy RH) Continuity Check for a short between terminals at each condition.2 speaker assy RH) Continuity RL+ – 1 (Rear No.2 speaker assy LH) Continuity FR+ – 4 (Front No.2 speaker assy RH) Continuity FR– – 2 (Front No.2 speaker assy RH) Continuity RR– – 2 (Rear No.1 speaker assy LH) Continuity RL– – 2 (Rear No.1 speaker assy LH) Continuity FR+ – 1 (Front No. as shown in the chart.05–1417 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – AUDIO SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(RADIO RECEIVER ASSY – SPEAKER ASSY) (a) FL+ FR+ RL+ Disconnect the connectors from the radio receiver assy and speakers.1 Speaker Assy Rear No.1 speaker assy LH) Continuity FL– – 2 (Front No.1 speaker assy RH) Continuity FL+ – 4 (Front No.

2 SPEAKER ASSY OK 6 INSPECT REAR NO.2 SPEAKER ASSY . HINT: Connect the all connectors of speakers. (1) Check the resistance between the terminals of the speaker.1 SPEAKER ASSY OK 5 (a) INSPECT FRONT NO. Standard value: 4  NG REPLACE FRONT NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY (a) Resistance check.2 SPEAKER ASSY Check that malfunction disappears when a known good speaker is installed. Standard: Malfunction disappears. Standard value: 4  NG REPLACE REAR NO. Standard: Malfunction disappears. HINT: Connect the all connectors of speakers. (1) Check the resistance between the terminals of the speaker. NG REPLACE FRONT NO. NOTICE: The speaker should not be removed for checking.2 SPEAKER ASSY Check that malfunction disappears when a known good speaker is installed.05–1418 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – AUDIO SYSTEM INSPECT FRONT NO. NOTICE: The speaker should not be removed for checking. NG OK REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE REAR NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY OK 7 (a) INSPECT REAR NO.1 SPEAKER ASSY (a) Resistance check.

05–1425 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549Z–09 SOUND QUALITY IS BAD ONLY WHEN CD IS PLAYED (VOLUME IS TOO LOW) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) REPLACE CD WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the CD with another and recheck. Standard: Malfunction disappears. (1) Check the installation condition of the radio receiver assembly. OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CD FAULTY .

using a pencil or similar object. Next.05–1430 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549U–10 SOUND QUALITY IS BAD ONLY WHEN PLAYING TAPE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. Standard: Malfunction disappear. clean the head surface. Standard: No foreign objects or defects detected. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one to see if the same trouble occurs again. push in the guide. NG REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT OK 3 CLEAN HEAD AND CHECK OPERATION (a) Head Pinch Roller Capstan Head cleaning (1) Raise the cassette door with your finger. (2) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner. (3) Check that the same trouble occurs again. Standard: Malfunction disappears. N17398 OK NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) HEAD DIRTY . pinch rollers and capstans. OK CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY NG 2 (a) CHECK FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT Check for foreign objects. (1) Check that no foreign material and troubles are detected in the radio receiver assembly cassette tape player.

(3) Check that the same trouble occurs again. using a pencil or similar object.) Replace the cassette tape with another and recheck. clean the head surface. Standard: No foreign objects or defects detected. (1) Check that no foreign objects or defects are detected in the cassette tape player of radio receiver assy. (1) Replace the cassette tape with another normal one (90min or less) to see if the same trouble occurs again. (2) Using a cleaning pen or cotton applicator soaked in cleaner. OK CASSETTE TAPE FAULTY NG 3 CLEAN HEAD AND CHECK OPERATION (a) Head Pinch Roller Capstan OK N17398 NG REPLACE RADIO RECEIVER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Head cleaning (1) Raise the cassette door with your finger. HEAD DIRTY . pinch rollers and capstans. Standard: Malfunction disappears. push in the guide. Next. Standard: Malfunction disappears. NG REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT OK 2 (a) REPLACE CASSETTE TAPE WITH ANOTHER AND RECHECK(BELOW 90 MIN.05–1431 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 0549V–10 TAPE IS TANGLED DUE TO INCORRECT TAPE SPEED OR AUTO–REVERSE MALFUNCTION INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) CHECK FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECT Check for any foreign objects.

3. 0.0 4 or more Approx.0 Approx. RADIO RECEIVER ASSY R9 R10 R12 R11 I35611 Terminal No. SEEK+ switch push SEEK– switch push VOL+ switch push VOL– switch push Continuity Below 1. 2. 0. (Symbols) Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage (V) R9–1(FR+) – R9–7(GND) LG – BR*1 LG – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R9–2(FL+) – R9–7(GND) P – BR*1 P – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R9–3(ACC) – R9–7(GND) GR – BR*1 GR – W–B*2 Ignition switch to ACC 10 to 14 R9–4(+B) – R9–7(GND) L–Y – BR*1 L–Y – W–B*2 Always 10 to 14 R9–5(FR–) – R9–7(GND) L – BR*1 L – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R9–6(FL–) – R9–7(GND) V – BR*1 V – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R9–7(GND) – Body ground BR*1 – Body ground W–B*2 – Body ground R9–8(ANT) – R9–7(GND) B – BR*1 B – W–B*2 Radio switch ON and AM or FM 10 to 14 R9–10(ILL+) – R9–7(GND) G – BR*1 G – W–B*2 Light control switch TAIL 10 to 14 R10–1(RR+) – R9–7(GND) B – BR*1 R – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R10–2(RL+) – R9–7(GND) B – BR*1 B – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R10–3(RR–) – R9–7(GND) W – BR*1 W – W–B*1 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R10–6(RL–) – R9–7(GND) Y – BR*1 Y – W–B*2 Audio system is playing A waveform synchronized with sounds is output R11–6(GND) – R9–7(GND) W–R – BR*1 W–R – W–B*2 R11–7(SW1) – R9–7(GND) LG – BR*1 LG – W–B*2 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Always Always Steering pad switch not operating.05–1410 DIAGNOSTICS – AUDIO SYSTEM 05C4Y–01 TERMINALS OF ECU 1.5 Approx.9 Approx.4 .

5 R12–9 (TX+) P See ”Service Check Mode” – R12–10 (TX–) LG See ”Service Check Mode” – *1: LHD *2: RHD AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1411 DIAGNOSTICS R11–8(SW2) – R9–7(GND) P – BR*1 P – W–B*2 – AUDIO SYSTEM Steering pad switch is not operating MODE switch push 4 or more  Below 2.

 Cool F ( C)) Gauge  Malfunction in tachometer  Malfunction in water temperature receiver gauge  Malfunction in fuel receiver gauge  Entire combination meter does not operate  Buzzer does not sound Others Problem Symptom /  Constantly  Sometimes ( Times per day. Date of Vehicle Brought In / / Odometer Reading / Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs Weather Conditions When Problem Occurred Weather Outside temperature  Hot  Warm  Cold (Approx.05–1498 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4F–01 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK COMBINATION METER SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name: VIN Customer’s Name Production Date Licence No. month)  Once only  Fine  Cloudy  Rainy  Snowy  Various/Others  Malfunction in speedometer  Seat belt warning lamp for driver’s seat does not come on  Seat belt warning lamp for front passenger’s seat does not come on  The ambient temperature is not displayed AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) km Mile .

1 DCC 1 1 1A B 2 1 1 AM2 2 1 Engine Room R/B No.3 Ignition Switch 1 AM1 IG1 AM2 IG2 B–R 1 1 IP1 IE4 B–R (*2) (*1) FL MAIN 6 W–B (*1) A J15 J/C B 3 W 2 W–B (*2) Battery ALT 3 21 C11 5 C11 W–B G–Y B–R 22 C11 1 IK *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) IJ IP IL 3 I35761 .05–1519 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4L–01 ENTIRE COMBINATION METER DOES NOT OPERATE WIRING DIAGRAM Diesel Engine Type (1CD–FTV): J/C Fuse Block 5 4 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1) DOME 1 6 B–W 2 F 6 F J10 J26 (*1) (*2) W–R Combination Meter Assy H W–R J11 (*1) F 20 J26 C11 W–R (*2) Driver Side J/B B–W IGN 2 DH IG1 Relay B–L 1 ED1 5 3 2 1 GAUGE1 AM1 1 DN J/C A C A C J8 J26 J8 J26 B–W B–W (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) Center J/B 6 7 7 CA CD DB R–W R–W 5 6 6 CA CK DH W–B 9 DA W–B 18 DA 1 DH 3 G–R 4 Engine Room J/B No.1 and R/B No.

1 DCC 1 1 1A B–G B–G 1 4A 1 4D 2 1 B–R 1 AM2 2 1 B–R Engine Room J/B No.1 and R/B No.3 1 1 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1) FL MAIN W–B (*1) A J15 J/C B–G ALT 2 1 1 4B W–B (*2) Battery IK IJ IP IL *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models I35762 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1520 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER Gasoline Engine Type: J/C Combination Meter Assy H W–R J11 (*1) F 20 J26 C11 W–R (*2) Fuse Block 5 4 IP1 IE4 (*2) (*1) DOME 1 6 B–W F 2 6 W–R F J10 J26 (*1) (*2) Driver Side J/B B–W 2 DH IG1 Relay GAUGE1 5 3 2 1 AM1 1 DN J/C A C J8 J26 B–W (*1) (*2) Center J/B 7 7 DB CA R–W 5 6 DH CA 9 DA 18 DA IGN 1 DH A C J8 J26 (*1) (*2) 6 CD 6 CK B–W R–W W–B 22 C11 21 C11 5 C11 W–B W–B G–Y Ignition Switch 3 1 G–R AM1 IG1 4 B–R 6 AM2 IG2 Engine Room J/B No.

22 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. Check the voltage. Standard voltage: 10 – 14 V NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . ECU–B) Check continuity in the GAUGE. Standard: Continuity. Standard voltage: 10 – 14 V (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (1) Check continuity between the terminal C11–5 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. (1) Measure the voltage between the terminal C11–20 of the combination meter connector and the body ground. (3) Measure the voltage between the terminal C11–21. DOME fuse.05–1521 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) INSPECT FUSE(GAUGE2. Check continuity. NG REPLACE FUSE OK 2 CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY(POWER SOURCE AND GROUND CIRCUIT) (a) (b) C11–20 (c) C11–22 C11–5 C11–21 I34628 Remove the combination meter assy.

05–1497 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER COMBINATION METER 056Q7–04 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–1498) 3 Check multiplex communication system (See page 05–1654) (a) Check the DTC output. DTC outputs (Proceed to ”BODY MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM) DTC does not output (Go to step 4) 4 Problem Symptom Confirmation (See page 05–1509) 5 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–1510 – 05–1522) 6 Repair or Replace 7 Confirmation Test 8 End AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

R/B Fuel Sender Gauge Assy Engine Room No.05–1500 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 056QA–03 LOCATION Rear Door Courtesy Switch Back Door Courtesy Switch Front Door Courtesy Switch Front Door Courtesy Switch Engine Room No.4 J/B. R/B Park/Neutral Start Switch I34623 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .1 J/B.

05–1501 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER Combination Meter Assy Accessary Meter Passenger’s Seat belt Warning Lamp Driver Side R/B Center J/B Fuse Block Occupant Detection Sensor Driver Side J/B Front Seat Inner Belt Assy RH Front Seat Inner Belt Assy LH I34624 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1502 DIAGNOSTICS C11 – COMBINATION METER C10 I34625 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1503 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER TAIL IND C11–14 (ILL+) BEAM– C10–6 (BEAM–) C11–12 (BEAM+) TURN–L C10–17 (POWER EARTH) C10–3 (AVC LAN+) C10–4 (AVC LAN–) AVC–LAN I/F TURN–R C11–1 (TURN L) C11–13 (TURN R) DOOR LIGHTS C10–15 (BEAN (SECURITY)) C10–13 (BEAN (EFI)) BEAN I/F C10–14 (BEAN (BODY)) C10–12 (OUTSIDE TEMP–) C10–11 (OUTSIDE TEMP+) OUTSIDE TEMP ODO/TRIP C10–10 (FUEL) C10–5 (FE) S C10–16 (E/G OIL LEVEL)*1 C10–1 (WATER LEVEL)*1 T C11–5 (SIGNAL EARTH) C11–19 (SI) C11–3 (TACHO) CPU F W C11–18 (4P OUT) C10–2 (ACC) A/T SHIFT CLOCK CPU POWER SUPPLY C11–20 (+B) I34626 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

2AZ–FSE. 2: C11–17 (TRC OFF) C10–8 (Rr FOG) C10–7 (Fr FOG) Fr FOG TRC OFF C11–11 (OIL PRESS SW) OIL/P *1: GLOW CRUISE *1: 1CD–FTV. 2: C11–16 (VSC) VSC *1. *3: 1ZZ–FE. 2: C11–15 (SLIP) *3: C11–10 (AUTO LEVELING) SLIP AUTO LVL C10–9 (ABS) ABS ACTIVE CIRCUIT ABS *3: C11–6 (EMPS) C11–22 (IG2+) EMPS ACTIVE CIRCUIT EMPS C11–4 (EBD) BRAKE ACTIVE CIRCUIT C11–2 (BRAKE LVL SW) AIR BAG BRAKE A/B ACTIVE CIRCUIT C11–8 (AIR BAG) E/G OIL LVL FUEL A/T OIL TEMP CHG ECT SNOW D–SEAT BELT Rr FOG *1. *2: 1AZ–FSE.05–1504 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER CPU C11–21 (IG1+) BUZZER WATER LVL C11–9 (CHECK ENGINE) CHECK E/G *1. 3ZZ–FE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I34627 .

1 Fuse 3 Multi Display 4 Multi Display 5 Fuel Sender Gauge 6 GND 7 Front Fog Light Relay 8 Rear Fog Light Relay C10 9 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 10 Fuel Sensor Gauge 11 Ambient Temp. Wire harness side Fuse Filter Warning Switch (*1) 1 2 RAD No.05–1505 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER Terminal No. Sensor 12 Ambient Temp. Sensor 13 Engine ECU 14 Integration Relay 15 Security ECU 16 Engine Oil Level Sensor 17 18 1 2 3 GND – Turn Signal Flasher Relay Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch Engine ECU 4 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 5 GND 6 EMPS ECU 7 – 8 Airbag Sensor Assembly 9 Engine ECU 10 Headlight Beam Level Control ECU C11 11 Oil Pressure Switch 12 H–HI RH Fuse/H–LP RH Fuse 13 Turn Signal Flasher Relay 14 TAIL Fuse 15 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 16 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 17 Skid Control ECU with Actuator 18 4P OUT (Other Parts) 19 20 21 22 Skid Control ECU with Actuator DOME Fuse GAUGE1 Fuse IGN Fuse *1: 1CD–FTV AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

) Resistance () F 88.0  3.0 REPLACE FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY .9 (4.05–1517 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4K–01 MALFUNCTION IN FUEL RECEIVER GAUGE WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy F25 Fuel Sender Gauge 2 15 3 IC1 BR–W BR–W 6 IC1 G–W G–W 5 C10 10 C10 I34419 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY (a) (b)   Remove the fuel sender gauge assy.12) 50. (c) Check that the resistance value changes continuously.5 1/2 6.12) 4.0  1.5  2.4 (0.9 mm E I33111 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Float level Float position mm (in.49)  3 (0. Standard: 1 e–3–1–B E51362 NG F 1/2 11.6 (3. Check that the float position is between E and F and measure resistance between the terminal 2 and 3 of the connector.05)  3 (0.25)  3 (0.12) 110.6 E 102.

Standard: Continuity. Standard: Continuity. Check the continuity between the terminal 3 of the fuel sender gauge and the terminal C10–5 of the combination meter assy. Check continuity between the terminal 2 of the fuel sender gauge and the terminal C10–10 of the combination meter assy.05–1518 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – COMBINATION METER CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN FUEL SENDER GAUGE ASSY AND COMBINATION METER) (a) (b) C10–5 (c) C10–10 I34628 Remove the combination assy and fuel sender gauge. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

05–1510 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4H–01 MALFUNCTION IN SPEEDOMETER WIRING DIAGRAM w/ VSC: Combination Meter Assy Skid Control ECU SP1 35 S1 16 IE1 L–W 19 C11 L–W Center J/B J15 J/C A 6 CA W–B (*1) W–B 6 CK W–B 5 C11 W–B (*2) IK IP IL *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models I35752 w/o VSC: Combination Meter Assy Skid Control ECU SP1 23 S2 16 IE1 L–W 19 C11 L–W Center J/B A 6 CA W–B (*1) W–B J15 J/C 6 CK W–B 5 C11 W–B (*2) IK IP IL *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I35752 .

: 0 km/h. OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY  A05135 NG 3 (a) (b) (c) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN SKID CONTROL ECU AND COMBINATION METER ASSY) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. (1) Remove the combination meter assy. the cycle of the signal waveform becomes shorter. 20 ms/ DIV Vehicle condition Driving at approx. OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK AND REPLACE SKID CONTROL ECU . (4) Check the signal waveform. Max. Standard: Continuity. ALL(ECM): Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note VEHICLE SPEED Vehicle speed / Min.05–1511 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(SKID CONTROL ECU) (a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. (2) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminal C11–19 and C11–5 of the combination meter assy. Disconnect the connector from the skid control ECU. C11–5 C11–19 Item I34628 Contents Tool setting 5 V/ DIV. 20Km/h HINT: As the vehicle speed becomes higher.: 255 km/h Almost same at the meter speed (When driving) – NG GO TO BRAKE SYSTEM OK 2 INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Check the input signal waveform. Check continuity between the terminal S1–35 (SP1)/S2–23 (SP1) of the skid control ECU and the terminal C11–19 of the combination meter connector (See Page 05–770). (3) Start the engine.

05–1512 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Max.05–1513 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4I–01 MALFUNCTION IN TACHOMETER WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy ECM J/C 5 TACH E9 GR–R B A J27 J9 (*2) (*1) D E J26 J8 (*2) (*1) GR–R 3 C11 Center J/B J15 J/C A 6 CA W–B (*1) W–B 6 CK W–B 5 C11 W–B (*2) IK IP IL *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models I35753 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ECM) (a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATE LIST”.: 16. ALL(ECM): Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note ENGINE SPEED Engine speed / Min.383 rpm Almost same at the meter rpm (When engine is running) – NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) GO TO ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .: 0 rpm.

Item Contents Tool setting 5 V/ DIV. (3) Start the engine. Check continuity between the terminal E9–5 (TACH) of ECM and the terminal C11–3 of the combination meter connector (See Page 05–1506). (2) Connect the oscilloscope to the terminals C11–3 and C11–5 of the combination meter connector. Disconnect the connector from the ECM. OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1514 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – COMBINATION METER INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (REFERENCE) INSPECTION USING OSCILLOSCOPE (a) Check the input signal waveform. C11–5 (4) C11–3 Check the signal waveform. (1) Remove the combination meter assy. Standard: Continuity. 10 ms/ DIV Vehicle condition Engine idle speed I34628  A05138 OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY NG 3 (a) (b) (c) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(BETWEEN ECM AND COMBINATION METER ASSY) Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy.

the ECM outputs DTCs. ALL(ECM): Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note COOLANT TEMP Coolant Temperature / Min. 1 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. Perform troubleshooting with the ”Engine system”.: –40C.05–1515 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4J–01 MALFUNCTION IN WATER TEMPERATURE RECEIVER GAUGE WIRING DIAGRAM ECM Combination Meter Assy 18 23 20 MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*1) (*2) (*3) 13 C10 P *1: 1AZ–FE *2: 1AZ–FE. sensor circuit is open or shorted. 3ZZ–FE *3: 1CD–FTV  I35754 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: The ECM sends information on the water temperature sensor to the meter through the Bean. If there is on open or short circuit in the water temperature sensor circuit. Max. 1ZZ–FE.: 140C After warming up: 80 – 95C (176 – 203 If the value is ”–40 C” or ”140 C”. NG GO TO ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OK 2 CHECK THAT MALFUNCTION DISAPPEARS A KNOWN GOOD COMBINATION METER IS INSTALLED NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK AND REPLACE ECM .

05–1516 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

you can read the value of the switch. sensor. According to the display. Max. DATA LIST According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester. HINT:  After entering the buzzer ON/OFF mode. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. actuator and so on without parts removal.05–1499 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 056Q9–02 PRE–CHECK 1. Max. 6s Ignition SW ON OFF ON ODO/TRIP SW OFF Driver’s Seat Belt Unfastened Fastened AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 10s 10s . (d) Turn the ignition switch to ON.: 255 km/h Almost same at the meter speed (When driving) – ENGINE SPEED Engine speed / Min.: 16. the buzzer setting returns to buzzer ON mode.: –40C. the display returns to the normal mode. ALL(ECM): 2. and fasten the driver’s seat belt to enter the buzzer ON/OFF mode. sensor circuit is open or shorted. select the buzzer OFF mode by operating the ODO/TRIP switch. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten work time.: 0 rpm. current buzzer condition is shown on the display.: 140C After warming up: 80 – 95C (176 – 203 If the value is ”–40 C” or ”140 C”. (e) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. Max. HINT: This procedure can be performed when the display shows the ”ODO” mode. depress the ODO/TRIP switch for 10 seconds or more. (a) Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note VEHICLE SPEED Vehicle speed / Min.: 0 km/h. when the ODO/TRIP switch is not operated for 10 seconds or more.383 rpm Almost same at the meter rpm (When engine is running) – COOLANT TEMP Coolant Temperature / Min. (b) When entering the buzzer ON/OFF mode. (a) Warm up the engine.  When the negative (–) terminal cable is disconnected from the battery. SET BUZZER OFF MODE (SEAT BELT) Within 6 seconds after turning ignition switch to the ON position. (b) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

05–1509 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 056QC–04 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Chart No. Symptom See page 1 Malfunction in speedometer 05–1510 2 Malfunction in tachometer 05–1513 3 Malfunction in water temperature receiver gauge 05–1515 4 Malfunction in fuel receiver gauge 05–1517 5 Entire combination meter does not operate 05–1519 6 Seat belt warning lamp for driver’s seat does not operate 05–1522 7 Seat belt warning lamp for front passenger’s seat does not flash 05–1524 8 The ambient temperature does not display 05–1527 9 Warning buzzer does not sound 05–1530 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1522 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4M–01 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP FOR DRIVER’S SEAT DOES NOT OPERATE WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy I14 Body ECU MPX2 BKL 1 IC1 22 P–B 12 IC1 9 L–R B9 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy 3 G–Y 1 W–B L–R P–B Driver Side J/B 14 2 DB DD Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 GSW (*1) A27 14 19 DBEW (*2) A28 A26 LBE+ (*1) (*2) (*1) RBE+ (*2) 3 2 A28 A26 LBE– (*1) (*2) (*1) RBE– (*2) 14 C10 L–R *1: LHD Models *2: RHD Models I35763 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the steps on the display and select ”DATA LIST”. BGW(Body): Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note D SEAT BUCKL SW Driver seat belt buckle switch ON / OFF ON: Fasten the driver seat belt OFF: Unfasten the driver seat belt – OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY .

(1) Disconnect the connector from front seat inner belt assy.05–1523 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – COMBINATION METER CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY (a) Check resistance. Standard: 2 1 4 3 I35973 NG Condition Specified Condition Seat belt is fastened No continuity Seat belt is unfastened Continuity REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(BODY ECU–FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY) Check continuity between the terminal I14–9 of body ECU and the terminal A27–4 of airbag sensor assembly. ( ): LHD Models Standard: Continuity (b) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 4 CHECK THAT MALFUNCTION DISAPPEARS A KNOWN GOOD COMBINATION METER IS INSTALLED NG CHECK AND REPLACE BODY ECU OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . (2) Check resistance between the terminal 3 and 1 of the front seat inner belt assy. Check continuity between the terminal A28–14 (A26–19) / A28–3 (A26–2)of airbag sensor assembly and the terminal B9–3 / B9–1 of front seat inner belt assy.

05–1524 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4N–01 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP FOR FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT DOES NOT FLASH WIRING DIAGRAM RHD Models: I14 Body ECU Combination Meter Assy A/C Control Assembly 20 MPX– A15 (*2) 9 MPX+ A13 (*1) 29 A13 (*1) 10 A15 (*2) 10 IC1 P MPX2 11 P P–B 1 IC1 P–B 14 C10 MPX1 P–B ECM 29 29 E10 E9 24 3 A16 A13 PBLT (*1) (*2) 21 E9 MPX2 (*3) (*4) (*5) F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light B–PBEW 22 18 23 20 MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*3) (*4) (*5) P 13 C10 3 L–R (*6) B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) J22 IG to GAUGE Fuse R–W(*6) J/C 8 C 3 2 1 C PBEW IC3 G–Y (*6) G–Y (*6) W–B(*6) 1 E J/C W–B (*6) B C A J31 J30 J16 W–B (*6) W–B (*6) J/C A 5 W–B (*6) IL BS *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE. 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV Except 1AZ–FE I35764 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 1ZZ–FE.

1ZZ–FE.05–1525 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER LHD Models: I14 Body ECU A/C Control Assembly 20 MPX– A15 (*2) 9 MPX+ A13 (*1) 24 PBLT A13 (*1) 29 A13 (*1) 10 A15 (*2) 3 A16 (*2) 10 IC1 P P–B F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light B–PBEW 6 L–R (*6) IG 4 E P G–Y (*6) 14 IM1 22 P–B 1 IC1 P–B 14 C10 MPX1 ECM 29 29 21 E10 E9 E9 MPX2 18 23 20 (*3) (*4) (*5) MPX1 E10 E9 E9 (*3) (*4) (*5) to GAUGE Fuse R–W(*6) PBEW 7 MPX2 11 Combination Meter Assy P 13 C10 B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) 3 G–Y (*6) 1 W–B(*6) 8 Center J/B W–B(*6) 9 CH 6 CA W–B *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: *6: Except Automatic A/C Automatic A/C 1AZ–FSE 1AZ–FE. 3ZZ–FE 1CD–FTV Except 1AZ–FE IP W–B BU BV I35765 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

(2) Check resistance between the terminal 3 and 1 of the front seat inner belt assy. Standard: E66856 NG Condition Specified Condition Seat belt is fastened No continuity Seat belt is unfastened Continuity REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY OK 2 (a) CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR(A/C CONTROL ASSEMBLY–FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY) Check continuity between the terminal A13–24 / A16–3 of A/C control assembly and the terminal F19–3 (6) of front passenger’s seat belt warning light. (1) Disconnect the connector from front seat inner belt assy. ( ): LHD models Standard: Continuity (b) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 CHECK THAT MALFUNCTION DISAPPEARS A KNOWN GOOD COMBINATION METER IS INSTALLED NG CHECK AND REPLACE AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ASSEMBLY OK CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1526 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY (a) Check resistance. ( ): LHD models Check continuity between the terminal F19–2 (F19–7)of front passenger’s seat belt warning light and the terminal B10–3 of front seat inner belt assy.

05–1506 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4G–01 TERMINALS OF ECU COMBINATION METER ASSY C11 C10 I35933 Terminal No. Engine idle speed Specified condition Below 1 V  10 to 14 V Below 1 V Puls generation (*2) C11–5 – Body ground (SIGNAL EARTH – Body ground) W–B – Body ground Constant C11–6 – Body ground (EMPS – Body ground) B–W – Body ground Ignition switch ON and EMPS Indicator OFF  ON 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C11–8 – Body ground (AIRBAG – Body ground) B–Y – Body ground Ignition switch ON and AIRBAG Indicator OFF  ON 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C11–9 – Body ground (CHECK ENGINE – Body ground) W – Body ground C11–10 – Body ground (AUTO LEVELING – Body ground) LG – Body ground Ignition switch ON and AUTO LEVERING Indicator OFF  ON C11–11 – Body ground (OIL PRESS SW – Body ground) Y–B – Body ground Engine running  Stopped C11–12 – Body ground (BEAM+ – Body ground) R–W (w/HID). R (w/o HID) – Body ground C11–13 – Body ground (TURN R – Body ground) G–Y – Body ground Engine running and CHECK ENGINE indicator OFF Continuity 9 to 14 V 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V No continuity  Continuity Headlight OFF  ON Below 1 V  10 to 14 V Turn signal RH indicator light OFF  ON Below 1 V  10 to 14 V Combination switch OFF  ON Below 1 V  10 to 14 V C11–14 – Body ground (ILL+ – Body ground) G – Body ground C11–15 – Body ground (SLIP – Body ground) LG – Body ground Ignition switch ON and SLIP Indicator OFF  ON 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C11–16 – Body ground (VSC – Body ground) W–R – Body ground Ignition switch ON and VSC Indicator OFF  ON 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Wiring color Condition C11–1 – Body ground (TURN L – Body ground) G–W – Body ground Turn signal LH indicator light OFF  ON C11–2 – Body ground (BRAKE LVL SW – Body ground) R–W – Body ground Brake fluid level warning switch ON C11–3 – Body ground (TACHO – Body ground) GR–R – Body ground Ignition switch OFF  ON.

8 V (43C) Continuity Continuity . Fr fog light indicator ON  OFF 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C10–8 – Body ground (Rr FOG – Body ground) R–W – Body ground Ignition switch ON.0  3.05–1507 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C11–17 – Body ground (TRC OFF – Body ground) LG–B – Body ground Ignition switch ON and TRC OFF Indicator OFF  ON C1–19 – Body ground (SI – Body ground) L–W – Body ground Ignition switch ON and turn the wheel slowly C11–20 – Body ground (+B – Body ground) W–R – Body ground Any Contents C11–21 – Body ground (IG1+ – Body ground) R–W – Body ground Ignition switch OFF  ON Below 1 V  10 to 14 V C11–22 – Body ground (IG2+ – Body ground) B–W – Body ground Ignition switch OFF  ON Below 1 V  10 to 14 V C10–1 – Body ground (WATER LEVEL – Body ground) Y–R – Body ground Fuel filter warning switch ON Below 1 V C10–2 – Body ground (ACC – Body ground) GR – Body ground Ignition switch OFF  ACC Below 1 V  10 to 14 V C10–3 – Body ground (AVC LAN+ – Body ground) G–Y – Body ground Communication circuit – C10–4 – Body ground (AVC LAN– – Body ground) G – Body ground Communication circuit – Puls generation (*1) 10 to 14 V C10–5 – Body ground (FE – Body ground) BR–W – Body ground Constant C10–6 – Body ground (BEAM– – Body ground) W–B (DRL) R–W (w/ HID) R– (w/o HID) – Body ground Headlight ON.31 V (–9C) 0.0   110. Rr fog light indicator ON  OFF 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C10–9 – Body ground (ABS – Body ground) R–Y – Body ground Ignition switch ON and ABS Indicator OFF  ON 10 to 14 V  Below 1 V C10–10 – Body ground (FUEL – Body ground) G–W – Body ground Fuel sender gauge is F position  E position C10–11 – Body ground (OUTSIDE TEMP+ – Body ground) W–R – Body ground Ignition switch ON C10–12 – Body ground (OUTSIDE TEMP– – Body ground) W – Body ground Constant C10–13 – Body ground (BEAN (EFI) – Body ground) P – Body ground Communication circuit – C10–14 – Body ground (BEAN (BODY) – Body ground) P–B – Body ground Communication circuit – C10–15 – Body ground (BEAN (SECURITY) – Body ground) P–L – Body ground Communication circuit – C10–16 – Body ground (E/G OIL LEVEL – Body ground) Y–G – Body ground OIL LEVEL switch ON No continuity C10–17 – Body ground (POWER EARTH – Body ground) W–B – Body ground Constant AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Continuity No continuity  Continuity 4. Hi–beam indicator OFF  ON C10–7 – Body ground (Fr FOG – Body ground) G – Body ground Ignition switch ON.

20 ms/ DIV Vehicle condition Driving at approx. 10 ms/ DIV Vehicle condition Engine idle speed  A05138 ENGINE ECU 1AZ–FSE: E13 E12 E11 E10 TACH E9 I34746 Except 1AZ–FSE: E13 E12 E10 TACH E9 C95801 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 20Km/h  A05135 *2: Reference: Using oscilloscope: Item Contents Tool setting 5 V/ DIV.05–1508 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER *1: Reference: Using oscilloscope: Item Contents Tool setting 5 V/ DIV.

Sensor 2 1 W–R W  AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 15 IE1 4 IE1 W–R W 11 C10 12 C10 I35755 .05–1527 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4O–01 THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DOES NOT DISPLAY WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter Assy A1 Ambient Temp.

7 to 2. Resistance: 9.0 to 9. sensor connector at each temperature. Resistance: Resistance (k) Temperature (C) I30156 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY .8 k: at 0C (0F) 2. resistance decreases.9 k: at 25C (77F) HINT: As the temperature increases.05–1528 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK COMBINATION METER ASSY C10–12 C10–11 (a) (b) I37583 Disconnect the connector from the combination meter assy. Measure resistance between the terminal C10–11 and C10–12 of the ambient temp.

sensor connector. sensor. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE OUTER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . Standard: Continuity. Check continuity between the terminal C10–11 (12) of combination meter assy and the terminal A1–1 (2) of ambient temp.05–1529 DIAGNOSTICS 2 (a) (b) – COMBINATION METER CHECK HARNESS OR CONNECTOR Disconnect the connector from ambient temp.

1ZZ–FE.05–1530 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER 05C4P–01 WARNING BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND WIRING DIAGRAM LHD Models: A/C Control Assembly 20 29 MPX– A15 A13 (*2) (*1) Combination Meter Assy I14 Driver Side J/B (Body ECU) 22 MPX2 P–B 10 IC1 P 11 MPX1 P 9 KSW 8 DA DCTY 13 DB 1 IC1 P–B U1 Unlock Warning SW 2 1 Y BKL 24 3 PBLT A13 A16 (*1) (*2) R B J10 J/C B J10 Driver Side J/B 2 14 DB DD 12 IC1 14 C10 R L–R L–R Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 L–R A27 GSW D9 Door Courtesy SW 19 14 1 A26 LBE+ IC2 G–Y R 2 W–B W–B A26 LBE– W–B (*5) (*7) B9 Buckle Switch 3 1 IL IO F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light 6 B–PBEW L–R (*6) B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) PBEW 7 G–Y (*6) 14 IM1 3 G–Y (*6) 1 W–B (*6) W–B BU BV *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE. 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: Except 1AZ–FE *7: Except (*5) I36641 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

1ZZ–FE. 3ZZ–FE *5: 1CD–FTV *6: Except 1AZ–FE *7: Except (*5) I36642 .05–1531 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER RHD Models: A/C Control Assembly 20 29 MPX– A15 A13 (*2) (*1) Combination Meter Assy I14 Driver Side J/B (Body ECU) 22 MPX2 P–B 10 IC1 P 11 MPX1 P 9 KSW 8 DA DCTY 13 DB 1 IC1 B J10 R J/C B J10 Driver Side J/B 2 14 DB DD 12 IC1 R L–R L–R Airbag Sensor Assembly 4 L–R DBEW A27 D9 Door Courtesy SW 14 14 1 A28 RBE+ IC2 G–Y R 3 W–B W–B A28 RBE– W–B (*5) (*7) B9 Buckle Switch 3 1 IL F19 Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Warning Light 3 B–PBEW L–R (*6) PBEW P–B U1 Unlock Warning SW 2 1 Y BKL 24 3 PBLT A13 A16 (*1) (*2) 14 C10 2 G–Y (*6) B10 Front Seat Inner Belt Assy (Occupant Detection Sensor) 8 IC3 3 G–Y (*6) C J31 W–B (*6) BS AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) IO 1 J/C B J30 W–B (*6) J22 J/C C C W–B (*6) *1: Except Automatic A/C *2: Automatic A/C *3: 1AZ–FSE *4: 1AZ–FE.

Result: NG (Seat belt buzzer does not operate) A NG (Key reminder / Light reminder buzzer does not operate) B OK C AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . A Only seat belt buzzer does not sound. If the seat belt buzzer still does not sound even after the check. proceed to step 2.05–1532 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK BUZZER Buzzer does not sound. Max. Key reminder buzzer: Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note KEY UNLOCK WRN SW Key unlock warning switch OFF / ON Key unlock warning switch ON – D DOOR CTY SW D door courtesy switch OFF / ON D door courtesy switch ON – IG SW Ignition switch OFF / ON Ignition switch OFF – Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note KEY UNLOCK WRN SW Key unlock warning switch OFF / ON Key unlock warning switch ON – D DOOR CTY SW D door courtesy switch OFF / ON D door courtesy switch ON – IG SW Ignition switch OFF / ON Ignition switch OFF – Item Measurement Item/ Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note D SEAT BUCKL SW Driver seat buckle switch is OFF / ON Driver seat buckle switch is OFF position – P SEAT BUCKL SW Passenger seat buckle switch is OFF / ON Passenger seat buckle switch is OFF position – IG SW Ignition switch OFF / ON Ignition switch OFF – VEHICLE SPD Vehicle speed / Min. refer to ”Malfunction in speedometer” (See Page 05–1510).: 255 km/h Vehicle speed 15 km/h Almost same at the meter speed (When driving) Light reminder buzzer: Seat belt buzzer: HINT: When the vehicle speed is not displayed on the hand–held tester.: 0 km/h. B SYSTEM CHECK MODE(SEE PAGE 05–1499) A 2 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Operate the hand–held tester according to the display and select the ”DATA LIST”. B HINT: Perform the buzzer OFF mode check. when only the seat belt buzzer does not sound.

05–1533 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBINATION METER B Go to step 5 C CHECK AND REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY A 3 INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY(D–SEAT)(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG CHECK AND REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY OK 4 INSPECT FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY(P–SEAT)(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG CHECK AND REPLACE FRONT SEAT INNER BELT ASSY OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR 5 INSPECT IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG CHECK AND REPLACE IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH OK 6 INSPECT DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY(SEE PAGE 05–1594) NG CHECK AND REPLACE DOOR COURTESY LAMP SWITCH ASSY OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Date vehicle Brought In / / km Miles Odometer Reading Date of Problem Occurrence / How Often does Problem Occur?  Continuous Weather  Fine Outdoor Temperature  Hot  Intermittent  Cloudy  Warm /  Snowy  Cool ( times a day)  Various / Other  Cold (Approx. F C ) 1st Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check I35990 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1163 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7U–01 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name: VIN Customer’s Name Production Date Licence No.

replace if necessary. if flame sensor above 70 C. etc. Resistance value between 2 and 10 at connector B < 2 M (If short– circuit) 064 Flame sensor break Check connecting leads. etc. replace if necessary. remedy break. 047 Metering pump short–circuit Check the supply lead to metering pump for short–circuit. 054 Flame cutout. temperature sensor and overheating sensor. 032 Combustion air blower motor short–circuit Check combustion air blower motor (burner motor). 048 Metering pump break Check the supply lead to metering pump for continuity. If combustion OK  Check the flame sensor. check flame sensor. High setting 056 Flame cutout. 052 Safety time exceeded When all perm. emergency OFF if DTC No. Check exhaust gas and combustion air ducts. replace if necessary. range. regulator and electrical leads. 021 Glow plug output overload Check glow plug. Blower impeller or burner motor fammed (frozen solid. replace metering pump if necessary. Resistance value between 7 and 14 at connector B > 3. replace if necessary. 012 or 014 not is applicable. 014 Possible overheating detected (Hardware threshold value) Difference of measured values at temperature sensor > 15 C (min. replace if necessary. DTC No. check metering pump. Check exhaust gas combustion air ducts. Check the fuel delivery and fuel supply. . Resistance value between 2 and 10 connector B > 2 M (if break) 061 Temperature control sensor short–circuit Check connecting leads. 70 C water temperature and metering pump in operation). Check supply lead (chafed.). Check water circuit. Description of fault Comment / Remedy 000 No malfunction 010 Overvoltage shutoff 011 Undervoltage shutoff 012 Overheating Check temperature at temperature or overheating sensor > 125 C Check water circuit. Check temperature sensor and overheating sensor. Resistance value between 7 and 14 at connector B > 780  (If short–circuit) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – Voltage between 1 and 5 at connector A > 16 V Voltage between 1 and 5 at connector A < 10. 020 Glow plug break Check glow plug. LOW setting 060 Temperature conrol sensor break Check connecting leads.040  (If break) 065 Flame sensor short–circuit Check connecting leads.. replace burner motor if necessary. replace if necessary.2 V (Voltage values must be present > 20 seconds) Check battery. Check exhaust gas combustion air supply. check the circuit listed for that code in the table below and proceed to the appropriate page. 051 Cold blow time exceeded At start. 017 Overheating detected (Hardware threshold value) Temperature at temperature or overheating sensor > 130 C. replace if necessary.05–1166 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7W–01 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check. Check the fuel delivery and fuel supply. 030 Combustion air blower motor EMF outside perm. start attempts used up. 031 Combustion air blower motor break Check the lead to combustion air motor (burner motor) for continuity. > 240 sec.) Remedy jam. replace if necessary. replace if necessary. dirty.

92 and 93. replace control unit. 097 Internal control unit faults Other faults which cannot lead to DTC No. 90. other sources of interference. Resistance value between 4 and 11 at connector B > 2 MW (If break) 072 Surface sensor short–circuit Check connecting leads. possible causes low batteries. Internal faults detected in microprocessor / memory detected. Replace control unit.05–1167 DIAGNOSTICS DTC No. Description of fault – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM Comment / Remedy 071 Surface sensor break Check connecting leads. Resistance value between 4 and 11 at connector B > 50 W (If short–circuit) 090 092 093 Control unit detective (Internal fault / Reset) Control unit detective (ROM error) Control unit detective (RAM error) Control unit malfunction due to interference voltage from vehicle electrical system. eliminate interference voltages. chargers. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1171 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C80–01 ECU POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This is power source for the power heater ECU and power heater fuel pump.3 B 3 3 B 1 Power Heater ECU PWR HTR 1A 1 1 W 5 P1 + W–B 1 P1 – 2 J2 J/C FL MAIN Battery W–B A A EC I35410 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .1 Engine Room R/B No. Engine Room J/B No.1. WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No.

NG REPAIR OR REPLACE FUSE OK 2 INSPECT POWER HEATER ECU(+) (a) P1 (b) (c) Remove the power heater ECU with connectors being connected. Standard: 10 to 14 V + I36137 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER HEATER ECU – BODY GROUND) (a) P1 – Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between the power heater ECU and body ground (See page 01–32). Measure the voltage between terminal ”+” of the power heater ECU and body ground. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I37732 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Check that the continuity exists of PWR HTR fuse.1. Turn the ignition switch to ON.05–1172 DIAGNOSTICS 1 (a) (b) – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM CHECK FUSE(PWR HTR) Remove the PWR HTR from the engine room J/B or R/B No.

05–1161 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7T–01 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORK SHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (See page 05–1163) 3 CHECK AND CLEAR DTC (See page 05–1164) 4 PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM OCCUR (GO TO STEP 6) SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5) 5 SYMPTOM SIMULATION (See page 01–22) 6 DTC CHECK (See page 05–1164) 7 DTC CHART (See page 05–1166) 8 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1170) 9 CIRCUIT INSPECTION (See page 05–1171 to 05–1179) 10 IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1162 DIAGNOSTICS 11 PARTS INSPECTION 12 REPAIR 13 CONFIRMATION TEST 14 END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM .

05–1168 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7X–01 LOCATION Alternator Assy Heater Pump Assy Heater Assy Center J/B Heater Switch Assy Driver Side J/B  HTR Fuse AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I36096 .

WIRING DIAGRAM A11 Alternator 4 L A11  AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Power Heater ECU Y 3 EE1 Y 8 P1 ALT+L I35971 .05–1179 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C83–01 POWER HEATER ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Turning on the alternator allows current to flow from the alternator to the power heater. As a result. the power heater ECU control the expanded power of the combustion type power heater.

05–1180 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – ALTERNATOR) (a) P1 Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal ALT+L of power heater ECU and terminal L of alternator (See page 01–32). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ALT+L A11 1 2 3 4 L I37735 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK 2 CHECK AND REPLACE GENERATOR W/CLUTCH PULLEY NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE POWER HEATER ECU AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE GENERATOR W/CLUTCH PULLEY .

the fuel pump receives the drive voltage from the power heater ECU.05–1176 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C82–01 POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the power heater switch is turned on. causing the combustion type power heater to operate. WIRING DIAGRAM Power Heater ECU F17 Fuel Pump 2 M 2 P1 F/P L 1 W–B EC I35412 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I37732 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK 2 CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP) (a) F17 Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector betwen terminal 1 of power heater ECU and power heater fuel pump (See page 01–32). 1 2 I37734 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS . 1 2 I37734 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK 3 CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP – BODY GROUND) (a) F17 Check for an open circuit in harness and connector between terminal 2 of power heater fuel pump and body ground (See page 01–32).05–1177 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM CHECK WIRE HARNESS(POWER HEATER ECU – BODY GROUND) (a) P1 F/P Check for short circuit in harness and connector between terminal F/P of power heater ECU and body ground (See page 01–32).

Standard: The pressure is applied to the hose. NG REPAIR OR REPLACE POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1178 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM INSPECT POWER HEATER FUEL PUMP (a) F17 I36139 Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal 1 and negative (–) to terminal 2 with the power heater turned on and check the pressure of the hose by hand.

3 ALT 3 2 1 3 B A FL MAIN Battery J15 J/C IJ IK I36132 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the power heater ECU sends the drive signal to the fuel pump. causing the combustion type power heater to operate.05–1173 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C81–01 POWER HEATER SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the power heter switch is turned on. WIRING DIAGRAM P5 Power Heater SW Center J/B 1 CB 12 CK R–W 3 IG Power Heater ECU G–Y IN 6 12 IE6 G–Y 3 P1 SW W–B R–W E 2 Driver Side J/B 1 DN 5 DH B–L IG1 Relay 5 3 1 2 HTR 6 DC 9 DA 1 DH AM1 W–B I13 Ignition SW G–Y G–R 1 IG1 B–L 1 ED1 W AM1 3 Engine Room R/B No.

05–1174 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM INSPECT HETER SWITCH ASSY (a) P5 ILL+ E Check that the continuity when connecting the positive tester lead (+) and the negative tester lead (–) to the following terminals. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Heater switch condition Connectiong terminals ON IG – IN Continuity OFF IG – IN No Continuity IN ILL– IG I32396 NG Standard Value ON IG – E Continuity OFF IG – E No Continuity ON ILL+ – ILL– Continuity OFF ILL+ – ILL– Continuity REPLACE HETER SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – POWER HEATER ECU) (a) P5 (b) (c) Remove the A/C amplifier with connectors being connected. Measure the voltage between terminal IN of the heater switch and SW of the power heater ECU. Heater switch condition Standard value ON 10 to 14 V OFF 0V IN P1 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I37733 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS .

I32395 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN IN PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1175 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – BATTERY) (a) P5 Check for an open and short circuit in harness and connector between heater switch and battery (See page 01–32). IG I32395 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRE HARNESS OK 4 CHECK WIRE HARNESS(HETER SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) P5 E Check for an open circuit in henees and connector between heater swith and body ground (See page 01–32).

(For other failures. overheating malfunction. short–circuit or breakage of functional components. similarly activated. 1. DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTION (a) Connect the DTC tester between the connector A (Vehicle harness) of DTC check harness and connector B (Power heater harness). (b) Start the engine. so the burner heater does not activate.) and repair methods are shown by connecting the DTC tester and reading the DTC. (c) Pressing the DTC calling button displays a 3–digit number DTC. etc. Connector A Connector B DTC Display In Normal DTC Check Harness In Malfunction Past Record Control Panel Current Display ”Heating” Symbol Memory Clear Button DTC Calling Button    AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) DTC Calling Button I12508 .05–1164 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7V–01 PRE–CHECK NOTICE:  If the glow plug breaks. the ECU detects the breakage and stops the automatic operation.)  The cause of failures (such as voltage malfunction.

the new data is written over F5.Control Sensor Power Heater ECU G L–Y L Y 3 4 L–W 5 1 6 2 7 3 W–R (*1) Y–R (*2) Terminal L of Alternator W–B Metering Pump R–G Fuse (20 A) R–B R–L (*1) R–Y (*2) IG SW Vehicle Side 8 4 Flame Sensor 1 2 *1: TMC Made *2: TMUK Made Connector B I35431 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .) < Button: Scroll down of faulty memory (The past 5 codes can be stored. (a) 3. (a) 4.) FAULTY MEMORY The ECU is able to store upto 5 pieces of faulty memory.05–1165 DIAGNOSTICS 2. – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION OF DISPLAY AND BUTTONS AF: Current Value Malfunction (Blinking at current failure) Diag: DTC (Example: 064 Flame sensor break) Memory Clear button: Deletion of faulty memory (Press both buttons together for longer than 2 sec.) > Button: Scroll up of faulty memory (The past 5 codes can be stored. If it is full. WIRING DIAGRAM Connector A Battery Buner Motor 13 R 14 Glow Plug BR 9 B–R 12 Surface Sensor 5 6 Temp.

and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting. check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below. 3. Symptom The combustion type power heater does not operate AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Suspect Area 1. 2. 4. ECU power source circuit Power heater switch circuit Power heater fuel pump circuit Power heater alternator circuit See page 05–1171 05–1173 05–1176 05–1179 .05–1170 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7Z–01 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If the normal code is displayed during DTC check although the problem still occurs.

POWER HEATER ECU P1 I36138 Terminal No.05–1169 DIAGNOSTICS – COMBUSTION TYPE POWER HEATER SYSTEM 05C7Y–01 TERMINALS OF ECU 1. (Symbols) Wiring Color P1–1 (–) – Body ground W–B – Body ground Always Continuity P1–2 (F/P) – Body ground L – Body ground Always Continuity P1–3 (SW) – Body ground G–Y – Body ground P1–5 (+) – Body ground W – Body ground Always P1–8 (ALT +L ) – Body ground Y – Body ground Alternator: Operate AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Condition IG SW: ON Power heater SW: ON Specification 10 to 14 Continuity Pulse generation .

05–1718 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05C4T–01 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This circuit carries the SET/COAST. RES/ACC and CANCEL signals (each voltage) to the ECM. WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE C14 Combination SW ECU Cruise Control Main Switch Assy W CCS 2 CANCEL SET/COAST RES/ACC 24 E11 CCS CRUISE 3 ECC J/C E BR J13 BR E J13 D J13 E J12 BR EE I35711 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1719 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 1CD–FTV C14 Combination SW ECU Cruise Control Main Switch Assy W CCS 2 CANCEL SET/COAST RES/ACC 24 E11 CCS CRUISE 3 ECC J/C E BR J13 BR E J13 D J13 E J12 BR E1 I35711 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1720 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: In case of using the hand–held tester. start the inspection from step 1. Select the item ”CCS READY” in the DATA LIST and read its prompts displayed on the hand–held tester. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. start from step 2. and in case of not using the hand–held tester. and turn the hand–held tester main switch ON. ”1” NG Go to step 2 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . ”1” CCS READY S Cruise control system standby condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in. Item Measurement Item / Display (Range) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note CCS READY M Cruise control system standby condition (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in.

NG REPLACE STEERING WHEEL ASSY OK 3 (a) (b) (c) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH.380 to 1.05–1721 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) (c) (d) I35702 Remove the horn button assy. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification CCS (S14 – 2) – CCS (E11 – 24) Always 1  or less Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Switch condition Tester connection Specification OFF 2–3 10 k or higher ON 2–3 1  or less HINT: When malfunction is found with the cruise control main switch assy. Disconnect the cruise control main switch connector. replace the steering wheel assy. BODY GROUND – ECM) Disconnect the cruise control switch connector and ECM connector. Standard: Switch condition Tester connection Resistance() Neutral 2–3  (No continuity) 210 to 270 RES/ACC 2–3 SET/COAST 2–3 560 to 700 CANCEL 2–3 1. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification CCS (E11 – 24) – Body ground Always 10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.700 Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

05–1722 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05C4U–01 CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the cruise control main switch is turned off. WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE (M/T) R–W (*1) R–W (*2) 9 IE2 5 IR1 R–W (*1) C9 Clutch Start SW Assy LG–B (*1) 1 2 LG–B (*2) R–W (*2) 15 IE2 6 IR1 Combination Meter Assy LG–B (*1) C LG–B (*2) J19 J/C D 10 E11 D LG–B (*1) C LG–B (*2) D Center J/B 21 C11 CPU ECM J14 J/C CRUISE 6 CD 6 W–B CK R–W 8 CE 6 W–B CA 5 C11 *1: LHD *2: RHD IP I35709 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the cruise control does not operate.

05–1723 DIAGNOSTICS 1AZ–FSE (A/T) N1 Park/neutral Position SW 10 1 R–W LG–B IK1 IK2 3 RB DL 7 – ECM D D J/C C C LG–B J14 J19 J14 J19 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) Driver Side J/B GAUGE2 GAUGE1 7 R–W D DB LG–B Center J/B R–W 8 CA 1 CD R–W CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 27 DA Combination Meter Assy 10 E11 D Center J/B CRUISE 21 C11 6 CD 6 CK R–W W–B 7 CA 6 W–B CA CPU 5 C11 IP *1: LHD *2: RHD I35708 C9 Clutch Start SW Assy 1CD–FTV R–W (*1) R–W (*2) 9 IE2 5 IR1 R–W (*1) ECM LG–B 2 (*1) 1 R–W (*2) LG–B (*2) Combination Meter Assy 6 IR1 10 E11 D LG–B (*1) LG–B (*2) Center J/B 21 C11 CPU 15 IE2 CRUISE 6 CD 6 W–B CK R–W 8 CE 6 W–B CA 5 C11 *1: LHD *2: RHD IP I35710 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

start from step 2. NG PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) OK 2 INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (a) Disconnect the C11connector from combination meter assy. CCS READY S Cruise control system standby condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON  OFF: Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in. Standard: (b) Tester Connection Specified Condition Terminal 21 (C11) – Body ground 10 to 14 V Result: I36055 A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OK A NG (M/T) B NG (A/T) C B Go to step 4 C Go to step 7 . and turn the hand–held tester main switch ON.05–1724 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: In case of using the hand–held tester. and in case of not using the hand–held tester. Item Measurement Item / Display (Range) Normal Condition CCS READY M Cruise control system standby condition (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON  OFF: Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in. Measure voltage according to the value(s) in the table below. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”CCS READY” in the DATA LIST and read its prompts displayed on the hand–held tester. start the inspection from step 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

Standard: INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY .05–1725 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY (a) (b) I36055 Disconnect the C11 connector from the combination meter. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection Specified Condition Terminal 5 (C11) – Body ground 10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK REPAIR OR REPLACE COMBINATION METER ASSY 4 INSPECT CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) 2 Free 1 Push in AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Switch condition Tester connection Specification Switch pin free 1–2 10 k or higher Switch pin pushed in 1–2 1  or less NG E67361 OK Disconnect the clutch start switch assy connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification D (E11–10) – Body ground Always 10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification Combination meter (C11–21) – Clutch start switch (C9–1) Always 1  or less (c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.05–1726 DIAGNOSTICS 5 (a) (b) – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINAITION METER ASSY – CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter connector and clutch start switch connector. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification Clutch start switch (C9–2) – D (E11–10) Always 1  or less (c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification Clutch start switch (C9–1) – Body ground Always 10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 6 (a) (b) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CLUTCH START SWITCH ASSY – ECM) Disconnect the clutch start switch connector and ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

Check continuity between terminal 3 and terminal 7. Shift the shift lever to the D range.  NG C53270 REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY OK 8 (a) (b) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(COMBINAITION METER ASSY – PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY) Disconnect the combination meter connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Standard: There is continuity.05–1727 DIAGNOSTICS 7 – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) (c)        Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification Combination meter (C11–21) – Body ground Always 10 k or higher NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification Park/neutral start switch (N1–3) – Combination meter (C11–21) Always 1  or less (c) Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.05–1728 DIAGNOSTICS 9 (a) (b) (c) – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY – ECM) Disconnect the ECM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification Park/neutral start switch (N1–7) – D (E11–10) Always 1  or less Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester connection Condition Specification D (E11–10) – Body ground Always 10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR .

05–1699 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADJ–04 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s name: VIN Production Date Customer’s Name Licence No. did the driver activate cruise control again?  Yes  No  Cancel does not occur  With brake ON  Clutch pedal depressed (M/T)  Except D range shift (A/T)  When control SW turns to CANCEL position  Cruise control malfunction  Slip to acceleration side  Slip to deceleration side  Hunting occurs  O/D cut off does not occur (A/T)  O/D does not return (A/T)  Switch malfunction  SET  ’ACCEL’  ’COAST’  RESUME  CANCEL  CRUISE MAIN indicator light  Remains ON  Does not light up 1st Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time  Normal Code  Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  Blinks . Date of Vehicle Brought in / / Date of Problem Occurrence Condition of Frequency Problem Occurrence Problem Occurs? /  Continuous Vehicle Speed when Problem Occurred Symptoms km Mile Odometer Reading /  Intermittent ( Times a day) km Mile  Auto cancel occurs  Driving condition  City driving  Freeway  Up hill  Down hill  After cancel occurred.

05–1729 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05C4V–01 DIAGNOSIS CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Making short circuit between terminal TC and CG of DLC3 will output DTC from the DLC3. WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE D5 DLC3 W–L (*2) TC 13 D J21 J/B (*2) W–L (*1) B B J8 J20 (*1) (*2) B J8 (*1) W–L 17 DB 3 DC W–L 20 E12 TC Center J/B 3 CB W–B (*2) CG ECM Driver Side J/B 6 CA W–B (*2) 4 W–B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD A W–B IO IP I35707 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Measure the voltage according to the value(s) in the table below.05–1730 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 1CD–FTV D5 DLC3 W–L (*2) TC D J21 J/B (*2) 13 W–L (*1) B B J8 J20 (*1) (*2) B J8 (*1) W–L 17 DB 3 DC W–L 11 E12 TC Center J/B 3 CB W–B (*2) CG ECM Driver Side J/B 6 CA W–B (*2) 4 W–B (*1) A J16 J/C *1: LHD *2: RHD A W–B IL IP I35707 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 D5 DLC3 INSPECT DLC3(TC TERMINAL VOLTAGE) (a) (b) TC CG C52361 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Standard: Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (D5 – 13) – CG (D5 – 4) 10 to 14 V NG Go to step 3 .

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection Specified Condition CG (D5 – 4) – Body ground 10 k or higher C52361 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Standard: 1AZ–FSE TC Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 20) 1  or less 1CD–FTV C52361 (c) Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 11) 1  or less Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (E12 – 20) – Body ground 10 k or higher TC (E12 – 11) – Body ground 10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32) 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) D5 DLC3 CG Disconnect the ECM connector.05–1731 DIAGNOSTICS 2 D5 DLC3 – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – ECM) (a) (b) Disconnect the ECM connector.

05–1732 DIAGNOSTICS 4 D5 DLC3 – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – ECM) (a) (b) Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below. Standard: Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (E12 – 20) – Body ground 10 k or higher TC (E12 – 11) – Body ground 10 k or higher NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Standard: 1AZ–FSE TC Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 20) 1  or less 1CD–FTV C52361 (c) Tester Connection Specified Condition TC (D5 – 13) – TC (E12 – 11) 1  or less Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.

(b) Check the DLC3. Use the hand–held tester or SST to check and solve the problem. If CRUISE MAIN indicator light does not come on after the DTC check. (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description ECM controls of the cruise control the function on a vehicle. DLC3 C52361 Terminal No. inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. The vehicle’s ECM uses ISO 9141–2(Euro–OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) for communication protocol. there is a problem either with the vehicle or with the tool.05–1700 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 056HG–05 PRE–CHECK 1. there is a malfunction of the cruise control. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the problem is probably in the tool itself. Connection/SpecifiedCondition Condition 4 Chassis Ground  Body Ground / 1  or less Always 7 Bus  Line / Pulse Generation During Communication 16 Battery Positive – Body Ground / 9 to 14 V Always HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” after connecting the hand–held tester to the DLC3 and turning the ignition ON. Consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual. Data stored in the cruise control memory and on the DTC can be read from the DLC3 on the vehicle. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2 / ISO 14230 format.  If communication is normal when connecting the tool to another vehicle.  If communication is still not possible when connecting the tool to another vehicle.

2.5 sec. 0. C52361 HINT: If the DTC is not output. 1. (2) Check that the CRUISE MAIN indicator light comes on when the main switch is ON. inspect the cruise main indicator light circuit (See page 05–1722). HINT: If a malfunction occurs in the vehicle speed sensors or stop lamp switch assy. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. the normal blinking pattern and the blinking pattern for code 52 are shown in the illustration. 0. For example. data of the malfunction is stored as a diagnostic trouble code. Indicator Light 0. connect terminals TC and CG of DLC3. inspect the cruise main indicator light circuit (See page 05–1722) and diagnosis circuit (See page 05–1729). the ECU actuates AUTO CANCEL of the cruise control and then the CRUISE MAIN indicator light will start to blink. (3) Read the DTC on the CRUISE MAIN indicator light.5 sec. HINT: If there is a problem with the indicator. Normal Code 0.05–1701 DIAGNOSTICS (c) – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check the indicator. At the same time. ON OFF Code 52 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I03610 .5 sec. during cruise control driving. 1. I34749 (d) Check the DTC.5 sec. etc.5 sec. ON OFF Code 52 0. and that the indicator light goes off when the main switch is OFF. ON OFF BE4034 (e) TC DLC3 CG Output of the DTC using diagnosis check wire. informing the driver of a malfunction.5 sec.25 sec. (1) Using SST. or DTC.25 sec.

3.: 36 km/h (22 mph). (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. USING HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (b) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. DATA LIST HINT: From the DATA LIST displayed by the the hand–held tester. max. ”1” CCS READY S Cruise control system standby condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in.: 200 km/h (124 mph) Actual stored vehicle speed – THROTTLE Required throttle opening angle / min.: 0 km/h (0 mph). max. Item Measurement Item / Display (Range) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note VEHICLE SPD Vehicle speed / min. Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.05–1702 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 2. HINT: Hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. read the ”DATA LIST”.: 255 km/h (158 mph) Actual vehicle speed – MEMORY SPD Stored vehicle speed / min.: 0_. (b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen. the sensor and so on without removing parts. ”1” CCS INDICATOR M Cruise indicator signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : ”CCS READY” ON OFF : ”CCS READY” OFF ”2” CCS INDICATOR S Cruise indicator signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : ”CCS READY” ON OFF : ”CCS READY” OFF ”2” CANCEL SW CANCEL SW signal / ON or OFF ON : CANCEL SW ON OFF : CANCEL SW OFF – SET/COAST SW COAST/SET SW signal / ON or OFF ON : COAST/SET SW ON OFF : COAST/SET SW OFF – RES/ACC SW ACCEL/RES SW signal / ON or OFF ON : ACCEL/RES SW ON OFF : ACCEL/RES SW OFF – STP LIGHT SW2 M Stop lamp SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – STP LIGHT SW2 S Stop lamp SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . you can read the value of the switch.: 125_ Actual required throttle opening – CRUISE CONTROL Cruise control system active condition / ON or OFF ON : Cruise control activated OFF : Cruise control inactivated – MAIN SW (MAIN) Main SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Main SW ON (Pushed in) OFF: Main SW OFF (Pushed out) ”3” MAIN SW (SUB) Main SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Main SW ON (Pushed in) OFF: Main SW OFF (Pushed out) ”3” CCS READY M Cruise control system standby condition (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in. (c) According to the display on the tester. max. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step to troubleshooting is one way to shorten labor time.

(2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher).05–1703 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM STP LIGHT SW1 S Stop light SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – SHIFT D POS PNP SW signal (D position) / ON or OFF ON : Shift D position OFF : Except shift D position – HINT: ”3” is OK but ”1” is NG  ECM failure ”1” is OK but ”2” is NG  DTC output or ECM failure ”3” is OK but cruise indicator does not turn on  CRUISE MAIN indicator or wire harness or ECM failure 4. Check that the vehicle speed increases by about 1. (4) After releasing the switch. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (3) Check that the vehicle speed increases when the control switch is pushed up to RES/ACC. (c) Check that the normal code is displayed after connecting the fuse. (b) After completing repairs. (4) Push the control switch to RES/ACC. and then immediately release it. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (3) Push down the control switch to the SET/COAST position. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (b) Inspect the ’ACC’ switch. the DTC retained in the memory can be cleared by removing the EFI No.1 fuse can also erase the codes (1AZ–FSE).1 fuse for 1 minute or more with the ignition switch to the OFF position. Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI the fuse (1CD–FTV).6 km/h (Tap–up function). (1) (3) I35838 (3) (1) I35839 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (1) The hand–held tester can be used to erase the codes. check that the vehicle cruises at the desired speed. 5. DTC CLEAR (a) The following methods will erase the DTCs and freeze frame data. and that the vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is released. (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI No. (a) PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION (ROAD TEST) Inspect the SET switch.

 Pulling the control switch to CANCEL. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) I35838 (1) (3) I35840 (1) I35839 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (c) (1) (3) – .6 km/h (Tap–down function). (4) Push the control switch to SET/COAST. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (4) After the control switch is press towards RES/ACC at the driving speed of more than 40 km/h (25 mph). Check that the vehicle speed decreases by about 1. check that the vehicle resumes the same speed maintained before the cancellation. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (3) After doing one of the following.  Depressing the brake pedal.05–1704 DIAGNOSTICS Inspect the ’COAST’ switch. check that the cruise control system is cancelled and that the normal driving mode is resumed. and the vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is released. check that the cruise control system is cancelled and that the normal driving mode is resumed.  Shifting to any gear besides D (A/T). (1) Push the main switch button to ON. and then immediately release it.  Depressing the clutch pedal (M/T). (3) Check that the vehicle speed decreases while the control switch is pushed down to SET/COAST. (e) Inspect the RESUME switch. (d) Inspect the CANCEL switch.  Shift to any gear besides D (A/T). (3) After doing one of the following. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher).  Pushing the main switch button to OFF.  Depressing the brake pedal.  Pulling the control switch to CANCEL.  Depressing the clutch pedal (M/T).

05–1697 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADI–04 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORK SHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (See page 05–1699) 3 CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS (See page 05–1700) 4 PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR (GO TO STEP 5) SYMPTOM OCCURS (GO TO STEP 6) 5 SYMPTOM SIMULATION (See page 01–22) 6 DTC CHECK (See page 05–1700) MALFUNCTION CODE (GO TO STEP 7) NORMAL CODE (GO TO STEP 8) 7 DTC CHART (See page 05–1705) GO TO STEP 9 8 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1709) 9 CIRCUIT INSPECTION (See page 05–453) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

9. 6. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 13: Diagnostic steps permit the use of the hand–held tester.05–1698 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 10 TERMINAL OF ECM (See page 05–1707) 11 INDEMNIFICATION OF PROBLEM 12 REPAIR OR REPLACE 13 CONFIRMATION TEST END HINT: Step 3.

4 Engine Room R/B Park/neutral Position Switch (A/T) LHD: Combination Meter Assy Driver Side J/B ECM DLC3 RHD: Combination Meter Assy Cruise Control Main Switch Assy ECM DLC3 Driver Side J/B Clutch Start Switch Assy (M/T) Stop Lamp Switch Assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I35700 .05–1706 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADK–04 LOCATION Engine Room J/B No.

(1CD–FTV) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. P0503/23 Momentary interruption and noise malfunction codes are output when a rapid change of vehicle speed occurs while cruise control is in operation. DTC Detection Condition P0500/21 The malfunction code is output when the vehicle speed signal from the vehicle speed sensor is cut for 0. or more while cruise control is in operation. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640. (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE See page 05–453.14 sec. (1AZ–FSE) See page 05–640.05–1710 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05C4Q–01 DTC P0500/21 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A” DTC P0503/23 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A” INTERMITTENT/ERRATIC/HIGH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION See page 05–453. Trouble Area  Combination meter  Vehicle sspeed eed sensor  Vehicle speed sensor  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–453. (1CD–FTV) DTC No.

05–1711 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05C4R–01 P0571/52 BRAKE SWITCH ”A” CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the brake pedal is depressed. When the following conditions are realized. or more.5 sec. or more. even if there is a malfunction in the stop lamp signal circuit.5 sec. A fail–safe function is provided so that it functions normally. The cancel condition occurs when battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal STP.  The STP terminal voltage is less than 1 V. the stop lamp switch assy sends a signal to the ECM. When the ECM receives this signal. a malfunction is detected. DTC No. DTC Detection Condition P0571/52 The malfunction code is output when the voltage of the STP terminal and that of the ST1 terminal on the ECM are less than 1 V for 0. it cancels the cruise control. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Stop lamp switch assy  Stop lamp switch assy circuit  ECM .  The ST1 terminal voltage is less than 1 V. terminal STP will have battery positive voltage and the cruise control will be turned OFF. If the harness connected to terminal STP has an open circuit. and the ECM turns the cruise control OFF. When the brake is on. battery positive voltage is normally applied through the STOP fuse and the stop lamp switch assy to terminal STP of the ECM.  For more than 0.

05–1712 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM 1AZ–FSE 10 DC A J26 (*2) B–W B–G G–W S13 6 11 R–W G–W G–W Stop Lamp R–W Driver Side J/B IE3 IE3 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Switch Assy 2 1 2 R–W G–W G–W R–W IR1 DA IR1 (*2) (*2) 1 (*2) 2 (*2) 20 14 G–W G–W B–W B–W IE1 IE2 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) J/C C E C 3 4 G–W B–W B–W G–W J8 J27 J9 IR1 IR1 (*2) (*2) 3 (*2) 4 (*2) (*2) (*1) (*1) I13 Driver Side J/B Ignition SW IGN 1 1 18 2 B–R B–R DA DH IE4 IP1 6 IG2 AM2 4 (*1) (*2) Engine Room R/B Engine Room J/B No.4 1 4B 1 4A 1 4D ALT 1 B–G AM2 1 1A 1 1 2 B–G 1 DN ECM 19 E11 STP 12 E11 ST1– B–R 2 Driver Side J/B STOP 22 DA FL MAIN Battery *1: LHD *2: RHD I35714 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

4 Engine Room R/B 1 AM2 B B–R 1 3 1A 1 2 ALT W B 3 Driver Side J/B 3 1 2 1 STOP 22 1 ED1 B–L DN DA ECM 19 E11 STP 12 E11 ST1– FL MAIN Battery *1: LHD *2: RHD I35713 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1713 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 1CD–FTV G–W S13 6 11 R–W G–W G–W Stop Lamp R–W Driver Side J/B IE3 IE3 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) Switch Assy 10 2 1 2 G–W G–W R–W IR1 R–W DC DA IR1 (*2) (*2) 1 (*2) 2 (*2) 20 14 B–W B–W G–W G–W IE1 IE2 (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) A C J/C E C 3 4 G–W B–W B–W G–W J26 J8 J27 J9 IR1 IR1 (*2) (*2) 3 (*2) 4 (*2) (*2) (*1) (*2) (*1) I13 Driver Side J/B Ignition SW IGN 1 1 18 2 B–R B–R B–W DA DH IE4 IP1 6 IG2 AM2 4 (*1) (*2) Engine Room J/B No.

05–1714 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: In case of using the hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and turn the hand–held tester main switch ON. Item Measurement Item / Display (Range) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note STP LIGHT SW2 M Stop lamp SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – STP LIGHT SW2 S Stop lamp SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – Standard: Brake pedal depressed: OK Brake pedal released: OFF NG Go to step 2 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE 2 (a) INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH OPERATION Check that the stop lamp lights up when brake pedal is depressed. and in case of not using the hand–held tester. start from step 2. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”STOP LIGHT SW” in the DATA LIST and read the displayed value. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT . and goes off when the brake pedal is released. start the inspection from step1.

Measure the resistance according to the value(s) in the table below.05–1715 DIAGNOSTICS 3 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) 2 4 Free – 1 3 Pushed in E67360 Disconnect the stop lamp switch assy connector. Standard: Switch condition Tester connection Switch pin free 1–2 1  or less Switch pin free 3–4 10 k or higher Switch pin pushed in 1–2 10 k or higher Switch pin pushed in 3–4 1  or less NG Specification REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY OK 4 INSPECT ECM (a) (b) (c) 1AZ–FSE: STP 1CD–FTV: STP I35703 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Remove the ECM with connectors. Standard: Pedal condition Tester connection Specification Depressed STP (E11–19) – Body ground 10 to 14 V Released STP (E11–19) – Body ground 1 V or less . Measure the voltage between terminal STP of ECM connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

05–1716 DIAGNOSTICS (d) 1AZ–FSE: ST– – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Measure the voltage between terminal ST1– of ECM connector and body ground when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Standard: Pedal condition Tester connection Specification Depressed ST– (E11–12) – Body ground 1 V or less Released ST– (E11–12) – Body ground 10 to 14 V 1CD–FTV: ST– I35932 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32) OK REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

the fail safe must be kept on until the ignition switch is turned off. HINT:  When a malfunction code is detected.05–1717 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05C4S–01 P0607/54 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC indicates the internal abnormalities of ECM. Detection Item P0607/54 The ECM has a supervisory CPU and control ECU inside.4 sec. When each input STP signal is different for 0. DTC No. the malfunction code is output. have passed from the time the cruise cancel input signal (STP input) is input into the ECM. or more. The malfunction code is output after 0.15 sec. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 REPLACE ECM (See page 01–32) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  ECM .

If CRUISE MAIN indicator light does not come on after the DTC check. there is a problem either with the vehicle or with the tool. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . there is a malfunction of the cruise control. Data stored in the cruise control memory and on the DTC can be read from the DLC3 on the vehicle.05–1700 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 056HG–05 PRE–CHECK 1. Connection/SpecifiedCondition Condition 4 Chassis Ground  Body Ground / 1  or less Always 7 Bus  Line / Pulse Generation During Communication 16 Battery Positive – Body Ground / 9 to 14 V Always HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” after connecting the hand–held tester to the DLC3 and turning the ignition ON. Consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual. inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle.  If communication is still not possible when connecting the tool to another vehicle. The vehicle’s ECM uses ISO 9141–2(Euro–OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) for communication protocol. the problem is probably in the tool itself. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2 / ISO 14230 format. Use the hand–held tester or SST to check and solve the problem.  If communication is normal when connecting the tool to another vehicle. (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description ECM controls of the cruise control the function on a vehicle. DLC3 C52361 Terminal No. (b) Check the DLC3.

For example. the ECU actuates AUTO CANCEL of the cruise control and then the CRUISE MAIN indicator light will start to blink.5 sec.25 sec.5 sec. inspect the cruise main indicator light circuit (See page 05–1722). 1. I34749 (d) Check the DTC.5 sec.05–1701 DIAGNOSTICS (c) – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM Check the indicator. ON OFF Code 52 0. and that the indicator light goes off when the main switch is OFF. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 0. during cruise control driving. inspect the cruise main indicator light circuit (See page 05–1722) and diagnosis circuit (See page 05–1729). ON OFF BE4034 (e) TC DLC3 CG Output of the DTC using diagnosis check wire. data of the malfunction is stored as a diagnostic trouble code. (2) Check that the CRUISE MAIN indicator light comes on when the main switch is ON. (1) Using SST. or DTC. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (3) Read the DTC on the CRUISE MAIN indicator light.5 sec. connect terminals TC and CG of DLC3.25 sec. the normal blinking pattern and the blinking pattern for code 52 are shown in the illustration. etc. C52361 HINT: If the DTC is not output.5 sec. 0. ON OFF Code 52 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) I03610 . 1. Indicator Light 0.5 sec. Normal Code 0. HINT: If a malfunction occurs in the vehicle speed sensors or stop lamp switch assy. informing the driver of a malfunction. 2. At the same time. HINT: If there is a problem with the indicator.

Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. Item Measurement Item / Display (Range) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note VEHICLE SPD Vehicle speed / min.: 0 km/h (0 mph).: 0_.: 125_ Actual required throttle opening – CRUISE CONTROL Cruise control system active condition / ON or OFF ON : Cruise control activated OFF : Cruise control inactivated – MAIN SW (MAIN) Main SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Main SW ON (Pushed in) OFF: Main SW OFF (Pushed out) ”3” MAIN SW (SUB) Main SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Main SW ON (Pushed in) OFF: Main SW OFF (Pushed out) ”3” CCS READY M Cruise control system standby condition (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. DATA LIST HINT: From the DATA LIST displayed by the the hand–held tester. you can read the value of the switch. 3. max.: 200 km/h (124 mph) Actual stored vehicle speed – THROTTLE Required throttle opening angle / min. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step to troubleshooting is one way to shorten labor time. the sensor and so on without removing parts.: 36 km/h (22 mph). (c) According to the display on the tester. max. (b) Monitor the ECU data by following the prompts on the tester screen.: 255 km/h (158 mph) Actual vehicle speed – MEMORY SPD Stored vehicle speed / min. read the ”DATA LIST”. HINT: Hand–held tester has a ”Snapshot” function which records the monitored data. ”1” CCS INDICATOR M Cruise indicator signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : ”CCS READY” ON OFF : ”CCS READY” OFF ”2” CCS INDICATOR S Cruise indicator signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : ”CCS READY” ON OFF : ”CCS READY” OFF ”2” CANCEL SW CANCEL SW signal / ON or OFF ON : CANCEL SW ON OFF : CANCEL SW OFF – SET/COAST SW COAST/SET SW signal / ON or OFF ON : COAST/SET SW ON OFF : COAST/SET SW OFF – RES/ACC SW ACCEL/RES SW signal / ON or OFF ON : ACCEL/RES SW ON OFF : ACCEL/RES SW OFF – STP LIGHT SW2 M Stop lamp SW signal (Main CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – STP LIGHT SW2 S Stop lamp SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . USING HAND–HELD TESTER (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. max.05–1702 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 2. ”1” CCS READY S Cruise control system standby condition (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON – OFF : Change ON/OFF each time Main SW is pushed in. (b) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

(2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI No. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (1) The hand–held tester can be used to erase the codes. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (3) Check that the vehicle speed increases when the control switch is pushed up to RES/ACC. (4) Push the control switch to RES/ACC.05–1703 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM STP LIGHT SW1 S Stop light SW signal (Sub CPU) / ON or OFF ON : Brake pedal depressed OFF : Brake pedal released – SHIFT D POS PNP SW signal (D position) / ON or OFF ON : Shift D position OFF : Except shift D position – HINT: ”3” is OK but ”1” is NG  ECM failure ”1” is OK but ”2” is NG  DTC output or ECM failure ”3” is OK but cruise indicator does not turn on  CRUISE MAIN indicator or wire harness or ECM failure 4. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (c) Check that the normal code is displayed after connecting the fuse. Disconnecting the battery terminals or EFI the fuse (1CD–FTV).1 fuse for 1 minute or more with the ignition switch to the OFF position. the DTC retained in the memory can be cleared by removing the EFI No.1 fuse can also erase the codes (1AZ–FSE). (b) Inspect the ’ACC’ switch. check that the vehicle cruises at the desired speed. and that the vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is released. DTC CLEAR (a) The following methods will erase the DTCs and freeze frame data. 5. (1) (3) I35838 (3) (1) I35839 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (3) Push down the control switch to the SET/COAST position. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). Check that the vehicle speed increases by about 1. (b) After completing repairs. (a) PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION (ROAD TEST) Inspect the SET switch.6 km/h (Tap–up function). and then immediately release it. (4) After releasing the switch.

(3) Check that the vehicle speed decreases while the control switch is pushed down to SET/COAST. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). (3) I35838 (1) (3) I35840 (1) I35839 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (c) (1) (3) – . (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (3) After doing one of the following.  Pushing the main switch button to OFF. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher).6 km/h (Tap–down function).  Depressing the brake pedal. (2) Drive at a desired speed (40 km/h (25 mph) or higher). Check that the vehicle speed decreases by about 1.05–1704 DIAGNOSTICS Inspect the ’COAST’ switch.  Shift to any gear besides D (A/T). check that the cruise control system is cancelled and that the normal driving mode is resumed.  Pulling the control switch to CANCEL.  Depressing the clutch pedal (M/T). (d) Inspect the CANCEL switch. (4) Push the control switch to SET/COAST. (3) After doing one of the following.  Depressing the brake pedal. check that the vehicle resumes the same speed maintained before the cancellation. and the vehicle cruises at the set speed when the switch is released. (1) Push the main switch button to ON. (4) After the control switch is press towards RES/ACC at the driving speed of more than 40 km/h (25 mph).  Depressing the clutch pedal (M/T). check that the cruise control system is cancelled and that the normal driving mode is resumed. (e) Inspect the RESUME switch. and then immediately release it.  Pulling the control switch to CANCEL.  Shifting to any gear besides D (A/T). (1) Push the main switch button to ON.

the set control is canceled. 5. 4. 2. 3. 4. Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2.) 1. ECM 05–1729 05–1722 01–32 CRUISE MAIN indicator light does not light up.05–1709 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 056HK–05 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs. CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit 3. Cruise control switch circuit 2.) 1.) 1. CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit 3. ECM 05–1718 05–1722 01–32 DTC is not output. (Indicator light in combination meter is lit when the main switch is turned ON and they remain ON while setting. they go off when vehicle speed is set. check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the related troubleshooting page. Diagnosis circuit 2. Cruise control switch circuit Vehicle speed sensor circuit Stop lamp switch circuit CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit ECM 05–1718 05–1710 05–1711 05–1722 01–32 Hunting (Speed is not constant. 05–1718 05–1722 01–32 71–1 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Cruise control switch circuit CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit ECM Combination meter . (Although indicator light in combination meter is lit when the main switch is turned ON. Resume. Cruise control switch circuit 2. (Indicator light and CRUISE remain ON. (When Coast. 4.) 1. ECM 05–1710 01–32 Setting cannot be cancelled. Symptom Suspect Area See page Main switch cannot be turned ON. or is output when should not be. 3. 2. Cruise control switch circuit Stop lamp switch circuit Combination meter system ECM 05–1718 05–1711 71–1 01–32 While the vehicle is driving with cruise control. 1. 3. Set speed change and Control switch are operated. Acceleration.) 1. ECM 05–1718 01–32 Setting cannot be done. ECM 05–1718 05–1722 01–32 Setting of vehicle speed cannot be done. 1. Cruise control switch circuit 2. 2. (Cruise indicator light in combination meter is not lit. CRUISE MAIN indicator light circuit 3.) 1.

05–1707 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 05ADL–02 TERMINALS OF ECM 1AZ–FSE: E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 I34746 Symbols (Terminals No.1 V Ignition switch ON RES/ACC switch hold ON 2.1 to 4 V Ignition switch ON MAIN switch hold ON Below 1 V .1 V Ignition switch ON SET/COAST switch hold ON 4 to 7.) TC – E1 (E12–20 – E10–1) STP – E1 (E11–19 – E10–1) IGSW – E1 ((E12–9 – E10–1)) ST1 – E1 ST1– (E11–12 – E10–1) CCS – E1 (E11 24 – E10–1) (E11–24 E10 1) Wiring Color W–L – BR Condition STD Voltage Ignition switch ON 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON Connect terminals TC and CG of DLC3 Below 2 V Ignition switch ON Depress brake pedal 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON Release brake pedal Below 1 V G W – BR G–W Ignition switch ON Cruise control main switch ON 0 to 3 V Ignition switch ON Cruise control main switch OFF 9 to 14 V Ignition switch ON Depress brake pedal Below 1 V Ignition switch ON Release brake pedal 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON 9 to 14 V B W – BR B–W G W – BR G–W W – BR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Ignition switch ON CANCEL switch hold ON 6 to 10.

) STP – E1 (E11–19 – E9–7) ST1 – E1 ST1– (E11–12 – E9–7) CCS – E1 (E11 24 – E9 (E11–24 E9–7) 7) Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage Ignition switch ON Depress brake pedal 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON Release brake pedal Below 1 V Ignition switch ON Depress brake pedal Below 1 V Ignition switch ON Release brake pedal 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON 9 to 14 V G W – BR G–W G W – BR G–W W – BR M/T: D – E1 (E11–10 – E9–7) LG B – BR LG–B TC – E1 (E12–11 – E9–7) W–L – BR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Ignition switch ON CANCEL switch hold ON 6 to 10.1 V Ignition switch ON SET/COAST switch hold ON 4 to 7.05–1708 DIAGNOSTICS – CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 1CD–FTV: E9 E8 E11 E12 I34747 Symbols (Terminals No.1 V Ignition switch ON RES/ACC switch hold ON 2.1 to 4 V Ignition switch ON MAIN switch hold ON Below 1 V Ignition switch ON Depress clutch pedal Below 1 V Ignition switch ON Release clutch pedal 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON 10 to 14 V Ignition switch ON Connect terminals TC and CG of DLC3 Below 2 V .

WIRING DIAGRAM B–R 1 1 B–R IE4 IP1 (LHD) (RHD) ECM 4 Engine AM2 Room R/B No.05–694 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05B62–03 CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the ECM detects a trouble. the CHK ENG is illuminated. CHK ENG remains on Start inspection from step 1 CHK ENG is not illuminated Start inspection from step 3 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the ECM records the DTC in its memory. 1 2 1 IG2 AM2 1 W I13 Ignition Switch DH 2 1A 1 B Engine Room R/B No. At this time. 3 3 3 9 6 B–R IGN 12 E9 W C11 Combination Meter Assy Check Engine Warning Light Driver Side J/B DA 18 22 B FL MAIN B–W B–W C J8 Battery A J26 J/C (LHD) (RHD) C J8 A J26 (LHD) (RHD) A81015 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Troubleshoot each trouble symptom in accordance with the chart below .

Turn the ignition switch ON. Standard: CHK ENG is illuminated OK SYSTEM OK NG 4 (a) INSPECT COMBINATION METER ASSY(CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT) See the combination meter troubleshooting on page 05–1509. Check that the CHK ENG is not illuminated. Read the DTC (See page 05–528). Check that the CHK ENG is not illuminated.05–695 DIAGNOSTICS 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CLEAR DTC Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Standard: CHK ENG is not illuminated OK REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE (See page 05–544) NG 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) (b) (c) E9 ECM Connector A65748 Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Standard: CHK ENG is not illuminated OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) NG CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR 3 (a) CHECK ENGINE WARNING LIGHT CONDITION Check that the CHK ENG is illuminated when the ignition switch is turned ON. Clear the DTC (See page 05–528). NG REPAIR OR REPLACE BULB OR COMBINATION METER ASSEMBLY OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (COMBINATION METER – ECM) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Odometer Reading Problem Symptoms Customer’s Name Engine does not Start Engine does not crank Difficult to Start Engine cranks slowly Other Poor Idling Incorrect first idle Idling rpm is abnormal Rough idling Other Poor Driveability Hesitation Knocking Engine Stall Soon after starting After accelerator pedal depressed After accelerator pedal released During A/C operation Shifting from N to D Other km miles No initial combustion Back fire Other No complete combustion High ( rpm) Low ( Muffler explosion (after–fire) Surging Others Data Problem Occurred Condition When Problem Occurs Problem Frequency Constant Other Sometimes ( times per Weather Fine Cloudy Rainy Outdoor Temperature Hot Warm Cool Place Highway Rough road Engine Temp. min. Inner City After Warming up Once only Uphill Any temp. License No. Cold Engine Operation Just after starting ( Starting Driving Constant speed A/C switch ON/OFF Other Condition of check engine warning light (CHK ENG) Normal mode (Pre–check) Suburbs Other Warming up day/month) Snowy Various/Other C/ Cold (approx.) Idling Acceleration F) Downhill Other Racing Deceleration Remains on Sometimes lights up Does not light up Normal Malfunction code(s) (code Freeze frame data ( ) Malfunction code(s) (code Freeze frame data ( ) ) DTC Inspection Check Mode AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Normal ) rpm) .05–527 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JC–04 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s Name VIN Driver’s Name Production Date Date Vehicle Brought in Licence No.

It performs ”pilot–injection” as subsidiary fuel injection prior to the main fuel injection to make combustion soft. COMMON RAIL SYSTEM The common rail system stores high–pressure fuel supplied from the supply pump in the common rail and injects it using the injector. this system uses the injector that opens and closes its fuel passage with the Two–Way–Valve (TWV) therefore both the fuel injection time and volume are precisely regulated by the ECM.835 kgf/cm2. The ECM monitors internal fuel pressure of the common rail with the fuel pressure sensor and commands the supply pump to supply fuel to obtain a target internal pressure (approximately 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1.106 psi)). and this helps to reduce engine vibration and noise. it provides an electric current to the solenoid valve of the injector with the EDU to regulate them. even if a driving speed is low. In addition. The ECM opens and closed the pressure discharge valve to improve controllability for the common rail internal fuel pressure. Fuel injection timing and fuel injection volume are regulated by the ECM. Common Rail System Diagram (1CD–FTV Fuel System) : High–pressure Area Sensors ECM EDU Common Rail Pressure Discharge Valve Fuel Pressure Sensor Injector Fuel Filter Supply Pump Assy Fuel Tank Suction Control Valve A81021 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 4. this system can always offer stable fuel injection pressure regardless of the engine speed and engine load. This system has two divisional fuel injections. By storing high–pressure fuel produced in the supply pump in the common rail.05–517 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CP9–01 DESCRIPTION 1.351 to 26.

and supply high–pressure fuel to the common rail Injector Inject fuel to the combustion room based on signals from the ECM Fuel pressure sensor Monitor internal fuel pressure of the common rail and send signals to the ECM Pressure discharge valve Based on signals from the ECM. adjust fuel volume supplied to the common rail and regulate the internal fuel pressure 2.05–518 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) COMMON RAIL SYSTEM COMPONENTS: Component Description Common rail Store high–pressure fuel produced by the supply pump Supply pump Operated by the crankshaft. Sensor Injector Manifold Absolute Sensor Glow Plug Vacuum Pump Crankshaft Position Sensor Glow Relay A81477 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . or when the ignition switch is OFF to prevent the fuel pressure from being too high Suction control valve Based on signals from the ECM. Sensor Turbo Charger VRV for Turbo Charger Intake Shatter EGR Valve EGR Cooler Camshaft Position Sensor Engine Coolant Temp. open the valve when sudden deceleration is occurred. ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Engine Control System Diagram Fuel Tank Suction Control Valve Supply Pump Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Generator Ignition Switch Signal Starter Signal Vehicle Speed Signal DLC3 Battery Voltage Pressure Discharge Valve Common Rail ECM Fuel Pressure Sensor Other Signal EDU Relay (INJF) (INJT PRD) EDU Inter Cooler Mass Air Flow Meter Atmospheric Temp. Sensor Intake Air Temp.

and determines injection pressure by controlling the Suction Control Valve located on the supply pump. Injection Control Diagram Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor EDU TWV Camshaft Position Sensor Common Rail Crankshaft Position Sensor (NE Signal) Fuel Pressure Sensor ECM Suction Control Valve Orifice Orifice Control Chamber Check Valve Piston Plunger Other Sensor Feed Pump Eccentric Cam Nozzle Needle Fuel Tank Injector A81479 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–519 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 3. The feed pump is used to pump fuel from the fuel tank into the supply pump. The ECM determines the fuel injection volume and injection timing by controlling duration and timing of the energizing to the solenoid valve of the injector. INJECTION CONTROL SYSTEM The ECM controls the fuel injection system using the injector and the supply pump.

05–520 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 4. SUPPLY PUMP OPERATION SYSTEM The rotation of the eccentric cam causes the ring cam pushes plunger A upward as illustrated below. plunger B draws fuel in. and plunger A pumps fuel at the same time. The spring force pulls plunger B (which is located on opposite of plunger A) upward. As a result. Supply Pump Operation Diagram Check Valve Plunger A Suction Control Valve Eccentric Cam To Common Rail Ring Cam Plunger B From Feed Pump Plunger A: Pumping End Plunger B: Suction End Plunger A: Pumping Start Plunger B: Suction Start Plunger A: Suction Start Plunger B: Pumping Start Plunger A: Suction End Plunger B: Pumping End A81480 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

the difference of the volume between the geometry volume and the suction volume is in vacuum condition. (a) Suction control valve opening small: (1) When the opening of the suction control valve is small.05–521 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 5. (2) If the plunger strokes fully. Therefore. (3) Pumping will start at the time when the fuel pressure has become higher than the common rail pressure. Suction Control Valve Opening Large Operation Diagram Pumping : Fuel Pumping Volume Starting Point Cam Stroke (1) Suction Control Valve Large Suction Area (2) (3) (1) (2) (3) A81484 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . SUCTION CONTROL VALVE OPERATION SYSTEM HINT: The ECM controls the suction control valve operation to regulate the fuel volume that is pumped by the supply pump to the common rail. the suction volume will increase because the suction area is large. Consequently. Suction Control Valve Opening Small Operation Diagram Plunger Plunger Pumping Top–Dead Center Bottom–Dead Center Starting Point : Fuel Pumping Volume Cam Stroke Suction Control Valve (1) Check Valve Small Suction Area (1) (2) (3) (3) (2) A81483 (b) Suction control valve opening large: (1) When the opening of the suction control valve is large. therefore the transferble fuel volume is decreased. the fuel suction area is kept small. the fuel pressure in the common rail is controlled to the target injection pressure. despite the plunger stroke is full. therefore the transferble fuel volume is increased. (2) The suction volume becomes small due to the small suction area. the fuel suction area is kept large. (3) Pumping will start at the time when the fuel pressure has become higher than the common rail pressure.

Description P0087 Fuel pressure sensor output status at fixed value P0088 Internal fuel pressure too high (200 MPa (2. 29.007 psi) or more) P0093 Fuel leaks in high–pressure area P0190 Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (Low or high output) P0191 Fuel pressure sensor out of range (Low output) P0192 Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (High output) P0193 Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit (Sensor 1 and/or 2 relation) P0200 Open or short in EDU or injector circuit P0627 Open or short in suction control valve circuit P1229 Fuel over fed P1238 Injection malfunction.039 kgf/cm2. A B C E D () () P0088 (See page 05–563) ()  P0190 (See page 05–557)  P0191 (See page 05–603)   P0192 (See page 05–557)    ()     P1272 (See page 05–663) Trouble area Malfunction Suction control valve  A Stuck open B Stuck close C Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit or pressure sensor output fixed D Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit E Stuck open F Stuck close G Open or short in suction control valve circuit H Stuck open I Stuck close J EDU Faulty EDU K Common rail system (Fuel system) Fuel leaks in high–pressure area L 7.05–522 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 6. DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLE CODE MATRIX FOR FUEL SYSTEM HINT: This matrix indicates typical DTC codes combinations for each malfunction occurrence. DIAGNOSTICS TROUBLE CODE DESCRIPTION DTC No. exclude open or short in injector circuit P1271 Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit P1272 Closed malfunction of the pressure discharge valve AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) ()  () () () Refer to Open or short in injector circuit Pressure discharge g valve L   P1271 (See page 05–663) Fuel pressure sensor K ()  P1229 (See page 05–563) Injector j J I () () () P0627 (See page 05–655) P1238 (See page 05–658) H ): Potential DTC codes  P0193 (See page 05–557) P0200 (See page 05–604) G  P0087 (See page 05–557) P0093 (See page 05–570) F . ( DTC No.

check the circuit for the codes listed in the table below.05–544 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JD–04 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT: Parameters listed in the chart may not be exactly the same as your readings due to the type of instrument or other factors. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check in the check mode.’’ in the DTC chart. refer to the ’’See page ’’ under the respective ’’DTC No.    . For details of each code.

   P0045 (05–554) Turbo/Super Charger Boost Control Solenoid Circuit / Open P0087 (05–557) *1 CHK ENG   VRV  Open or short in VRV circuit  ECM   Fuel Rail/System Pressure – Too Low  Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit  Fuel pressure sensor  ECM   Fuel Rail/System Pressure – Too High  Supply pump  Pressure discharge valve  Short in Supply pump (suction control valve)circuit  Open pressure discharge valve circuit  ECM   P0093 (05–570) Fuel System Leak Detected – Large Leak  Fuel line between supply pump and common rail  Fuel line between common rail and injector  Supply pump  Common rail  Injector (P1238 is set simultaneously)  Pressure discharge valve  Open or short in EDU circuit (P0200 is set simultaneously)  Open or short in injector circuit (P0200 and P1238 are set simultaneously)  EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously)  ECM   P0095 (05–573) Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit   P0097 (05–573) Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low   P0098 (05–573) Intake Air Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High   P0100 (05–577) Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit  Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit  Mass air flow meter  ECM   P0101 (05–583) Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem  Mass air flow meter   P0102 (05–577) Mass or Volume Air Flow Meter Circuit Low Input   P0103 (05–577) Mass or Volume Air Flow Meter Circuit High Input  Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit  Mass air flow meter  ECM       P0088 (05–563)    Open O or short h t iin di diesell tturbo b iinlet l t air i ttemp. sensor circuit i it  Diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor  ECM P0105 (05–584) Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit  Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit  Manifold absolute pressure sensor  Turbocharger assy  EGR valve assy  ECM P0106 (05–588) Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/PerformanceProblem  Manifold absolute pressure sensor AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

temp sensor  ECM      Fuel temperature sensor          Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit  Fuel pressure sensor  ECM    Fuel pressure sensor    Open or short in fuel pressure sensor  Fuel pressure sensor  ECM                  Open O or short h t in i intake i t k air i ttemperature t sensor circuit i it  Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter)  ECM  Open or short in fuel temp. Circuit High Input P0168 (05–598) Fuel Temperature Too High P0180 (05–599) Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit P0182 (05–599) Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit Low Input P0183 (05–599) Fuel Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit High Input P0190 (05–557) Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit P0191 (05–603) Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Range/Performance P0192 (05–557) Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Input P0193 (05–557) Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Circuit High Input P0200 (05–604) Injector Circuit / Open P0234 (05–612) Turbo/Super Charger Overboost Condition P0299 (05–612) Turbo/Super Charger Underboost P0335 (05–616) Crankshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit P0339 (05–616) Crankshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit Intermittent P0340 (05–620) Camshaft Position Sensor ”A” Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV)  Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit  Manifold absolute pressure sensor  Turbocharger assy  EGR valve assy  ECM            Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit  Engine coolant temp.05–545 DIAGNOSTICS P0107 (05–584) Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input P0108 (05–584) Manifold Absolute Pressure/ Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input P0110 (05–589) Intake Air Temperature Circuit P0112 (05–589) Intake Air Temperature Circuit Low Input P0113 (05–589) Intake Air Temperature Circuit High Input P0115 (05–593) Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit P0116 (05–597) Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Range/Performance Problem P0117 (05–593) Engine Coolant Temp. Circuit Low Input P0118 (05–593) Engine Coolant Temp. sensor  ECM    Cooling system  Engine coolant temperature sensor  Thermostat    Open or short in engine coolant temp. temp sensor circuit  Fuel temperature sensor  ECM  Open or short in EDU circuit  Injector  EDU  ECM  VRV  Open or short in VRV circuit  Turbocharger g  EGR valve  Vacuum hose  ECM  Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit  Crankshaft position osition sensor  Signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley)  ECM  Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit  Camshaft position sensor  Camshaft timing pulley  ECM . sensor circuit  Engine coolant temp.

05–546 DIAGNOSTICS P0380 (05–622) Glow Plug/Heater Circuit ”A” P0400 (05–629) Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow P0403 (05–629) Exhaust Gas Recirculation Control Circuit P0488 (05–633) Exhaust Gas Recirculation Throttle Position Control Range/ Performance P0500 (05–640) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV)  Open or short in glow plug circuit  Glow fuse  Glow relay  Glow plug  ECM        Open or short in intake shutter circuit  Open or short in fully opened switch circuit  Intake shutter  ECM   Vehicle Speed Sensor ”A”  Open or short in speed sensor circuit  Speed sensor  Combination meter  ECM  Skid control ECU   P0504 (05–643) Brake Switch ”A”/”B” Correlation  Short in stop lamp switch signal circuit  Stop lamp switch  ECM   P0560 (05–647) System Voltage  Open in back–up power source circuit  ECM   P0606 (05–650) ECM/PCM Processor   P0607 (05–650) Control Module Performance   P0622 (05–651) Generator Field ”F” Terminal Circuit  Open in generator circuit  Generator  Drive belt  ECM   P0627 (05–655) Fuel Pump Control Circuit / Open  Open or shot in suction control valve circuit  Suction control valve  ECM   P1229 (05–563) Fuel Pump System  Short in supply pump (suction control valve) circuit  Suction control valve  ECM   Injector Malfunction  Injector  EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously)  Open or short in engine wire (P0200 is set simultaneously)  Connector connection (P0200 is set simultaneously)  Compression pressure  Valve clearance  Valve timing  ECM   P1251 (05–612) Turbo/Super Charger Overboost Condition (Too High)  VRV  Open or short in VRV circuit  Turbocharger  EGR valve  Vacuum hose  ECM   P1271 (05–663) Fuel Regulator Circuit Malfunction (EDU Drive)  Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit  Open or short in pressure discharge valve it self  EDU  ECM   Fuel Pressure Regulator Malfunction  Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit (P1271 is set simultaneously)  Pressure discharge valve  Supply pump  ECM   P1238 (05–658) P1272 (05–663)  EGR valve assy  EGR passage assage  Open or short in EGR circuit  ECM  ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–547 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) P1601 (05–673) Injector Correction Circuit Malfunction (EEPROM)  Injector compensation code  ECM   P1611 (05–650) IC Circuit Malfunction  ECM   P2120 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit  Open or short in accelerator pedal position sensor circuit  Accelerator pedal position sensor  ECM   P2121 (05–681) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit Range/Performance  Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit  Accelerator pedal position sensor  ECM   P2122 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit Low Input   P2123 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D” Circuit High Input   P2125 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”E” Circuit   P2127 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”E” Circuit Low Input   P2128 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”E” Circuit High Input   P2138 (05–674) Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ Switch ”D”/”E” Voltage Correlation   P2226 (05–684) Barometric Pressure Circuit   P2227 (05–685) Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/Performance   P2228 (05–685) Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input   P2229 (05–685) Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input   B2799 (05–1625) Engine Immobiliser System Malfunction   O Open en or short in accelerator pedal edal position osition sensor circuit  Accelerator pedal position sensor  ECM  ECM  Immobiliser system *1: Check engine warning light (CHK ENG) is illuminated AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

battery positive voltage is applied to terminal IGSW of the ECM and the EFI MAIN relay (Marked: EFI MAIN) control circuit in the ECM sends a signal to terminal MREL of the ECM switching on the EFI MAIN relay. 3 B–W B–W W–B 3 B FL MAIN 10 EE1 BR Battery EC EI A81013 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–686 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05B5V–03 ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the ignition switch is turned ON. WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch B–R 1 1 4 AM2 IG2 IE4 (LHD) IP1 (RHD) A B–W J26 (RHD) Driver Side J/B 2 B–R DH 6 18 DA IGN B–Y B–W (LHD) C GR 1 2 1 2 AM2 EFI 1 1 1A C B–W (RHD) B–W (LHD) GR ECM 9 E9 IGSW 8 E9 MREL 1 E9 +B 1 5 1 3 2 B–W EFI MAIN Relay 1 B E J27 J8 J/C 2 IE1 B–R 1 J/C 1 BR 7 E12 E1 1 8 Engine Room R/B No. closing the contacts of the EFI MAIN relay and supplying power to terminal +B of the ECM. 1 IK1 3 Engine Room R/B No. the ECM continues to switch on the EFI MAIN relay for a maximum of 2 seconds for the initial setting of the throttle valve. This signal causes current to flow to the coil. If the ignition switch is turned off.

Standard (Check for open): NG ECM Connector Symbols (Terminal No. Standard: OK A18294 Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7) 9 to 14 V IGSW (+) ECM Connecter NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A18294 OK Go to step 6 .) Specified condition E1 (E12–7) – Body ground Continuity REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR A65745 OK 3 INSPECT ECM(IGSW VOLTAGE) E12 E1 (–) (a) (b) E9 Turn the ignition switch ON. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connectors.05–687 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT ECM(+B VOLTAGE) (a) (b) E9 E12 E1 (–) +B (+) ECM Connecter Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) Specified condition +B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7) 9 to 14 V PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–551) NG 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) E12 E1 Disconnect the E12 ECM connector.

1–3. 5–6 Continuity START 4–5. 5–6. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E12 ECM connectors. IGNITION SWITCH – ECM) 6 INSPECT ECM(MREL VOLTAGE) E9 E12 E1 (–) (a) (b) MREL (+) ECM Connecter OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A18294 Turn the ignition switch ON. NG Ignition Switch B50489 Switch Terminal No. 2–3. Check for continuity in the IGN fuse. 4–6. Standard: Continuity IGN Fuse NG A79096 CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESSES AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE OK 5 INSPECT IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY (a) I13 Measure the for continuity between the connector terminals shown in the chart below.) Specified condition MREL (E9–8) – E1 (E12–7) 9 to 14 V NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) .05–688 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK FUSE(IGN FUSE) (a) (b) Driver Side J/B Remove the IGN fuse from the driver side J/B. Resisitance LOCK All Terminals No continuity ACC 1–3 Continuity ON 1–2. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. 1–2 Continuity REPLACE IGNITION OR STARTER SWITCH ASSY OK CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (BATTERY – IGNITION SWITCH.

Standard: Continuity NG EFI Fuse A66054 CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESSES AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE OK 8 INSPECT EFI MAIN RELAY (a) (b) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No. Specified condition 1–2 Continuity No Continuity 3–5 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Continuity (Apply battery voltage terminals 1 and 2) REPLACE EFI MAIN RELAY .1.1. Standard: Terminal No. Inspect the EFI MAIN relay. Check for continuity in the EFI fuse. Condition 1–2 Constant Continuity Usually No Continuity Apply B+ between Terminals 1 and 2 Continuity 3–5 B16200 Specified condition Terminal No.05–689 DIAGNOSTICS 7 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK FUSE(EFI FUSE) (a) (b) Engine Room R/B No.1 Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.

1.) Specified condition EFI MAIN relay (1) – MREL (E9–8) Continuity Standard (Check for short): E9 (b) MREL ECM Connector A65748 Symbols (Terminal No.1 EFI MAIN Relay Check the harness and connector between the EFI MAIN relay and ECM connector. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No. EFI MAIN RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a) Engine Room R/B No. Standard (Check for open): OK Symbols (Terminal No. (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No.) Specified condition EFI MAIN relay (2) – Body ground Continuity REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR NG CHECK AND REPAIR HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (TERMINAL +B OF ECM – BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) Specified condition EFI MAIN relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground No continuity Check the harness and connector between the EFI MAIN relay and body ground. (2) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector and body ground. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Standard (Check for open): A66056 Symbols (Terminal No.05–690 DIAGNOSTICS 9 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI MAIN RELAY – ECM.1.

4 CHECK DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (See page 05–528) HINT: Record or print DTC and freeze frame data. perform steps 10 and 12 first. if needed. inspect DLC3. 5 CLEAR DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (See page 05–528) 6 VISUAL INSPECTION 7 SETTING THE CHECK (TEST) MODE DIAGNOSIS (See page 05–528) 8 PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION HINT: If the engine does not start. B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A Malfunction does not occur B Malfunction occurs GO TO STEP 10 .05–523 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JB–04 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (See page 05–527) 3 CONNECT THE HAND–HELD TESTER TO DLC3 HINT: If the display indicates a communication fault in the tool.

05–524 DIAGNOSTICS 9 10 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) SYMPTOM SIMULATION DTC CHECK (See page 05–528) B A Malfunction code B No code GO TO STEP 12 A 11 DTC CHART (See page 05–544) GO TO STEP 14 12 BASIC INSPECTION (See page 05–528) B A Wrong parts not confirmed B Wrong parts confirmed GO TO STEP 17 A 13 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–551) B A Wrong circuit confirmed B Wrong parts confirmed GO TO STEP 17 A 14 CHECK ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–686) 15 CIRCUIT INSPECTION B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A Malfunction not confirmed B Malfunction confirmed GO TO STEP 18 .

05–525 DIAGNOSTICS 16 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) GO TO STEP 18 17 PARTS INSPECTION 18 IDENTIFICATION OF PROBLEM 19 ADJUSTMENT. REPAIR 20 CONFIRMATION TEST END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–548 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JE–04 LOCATION ECM Injector Common Rail Assy (Pressure Discharge Valve Assy) Camshaft Position Sensor Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temperature Sensor Glow Plug Assy EGR Valve Assy Common Rail Assy (Fuel Pressure Sensor Assy) Mass Air Flow Meter Engine Room R/B No.3 EDU Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor DLC3 Supply Pump Intake Shutter Assy Accelerator Pedal Assy (Accel Position Sensor) Engine Room J/B Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor VRV Crankshaft Position Sensor Suction Control Valve Fuel Temperature Sensor A80993 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

/ Division OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A82974 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) .05–554 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0045 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPC–01 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT / OPEN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  VRV  Open or short in VRV circuit  ECM Open or short in VRV circuit for 0. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. 1 INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY (See page 12–16) NG REPLACE VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY OK 2 INSPECT ECM(VN VOLTAGE) E13 (a) (b) E12 VN(+) Inspect using the oscilloscope.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic) P0045 WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0234 on page 05–612. check the waveform between terminals E12 and E13 of the ECM connectors. During idling.) Specified condition VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7) Correct waveform is as shown E1(–) ECM Connector A66060 VRV Signal Waveforms 5V/ Division GND 1 msec. When troubleshooting. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. the engine was warmed up or not. etc. at the time of the malfunction. INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     .

) Specified condition VN (E13–10) or (V4–2) – Body ground No continuity E13 VN ECM Connector OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A80456 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .) Specified condition VN (E13–10) – (V4–2) Continuity Standard (Check for short): VRV Connector A56869 Symbols (Terminal No. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector.05–555 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(VRV – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side V4 Disconnect the V4 VRV connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.

1. (2) Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.) Specified condition EFI main relay (1) – MREL (E9–8) Continuity Standard (Check for short): E9 Symbols (Terminal No. Standard (Check for open): A66056 Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition EFI main relay (1) or MREL (E9–8) – Body ground No continuity MREL ECM Connector A81091 OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . (1) Remove the EFI MAIN relay from the engine room R/B No. 1 EFI MAIN Relay Check the harness and connector between the EFI main relay and ECM connector. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.05–556 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(VRV – EFI MAIN RELAY) (a) Engine Room R/B No.

If P0087. use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system. see page 05–517.05–557 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC P0087 FUEL RAIL/SYSTEM PRESSURE – TOO LOW DTC P0190 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC P0192 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0193 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT 05CPD–01 HINT:   For more information on the fuel pressure sensor and the common rail system. P0192 and/or P0193 are present. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . see page 05–517. P0190.

55 V or less. The sensor has been designed as a duplicate circuit. Even if either sensor is failed. and its main (PR) circuit is used under normal condition.55 VCS PR2 E2S 0 190 Fuel Pressure (MPa) A81476 DTC No.835 kgf/cm2.5 sec.85 0. This sensor outputs voltage in proportion to the internal fuel pressure.9 V or more”. P0190. Trouble Area  Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit  Fuel F l pressure sensor  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0087. 4.55 V or less” or ”4. P0193 Condition (a) continues for 0. use the hand–held tester to confirm internal the fuel pressure of the common rail from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Detect P0193 Internal Structure of the Pressure Sensor (Duplicate System) Property of Output Voltage Output Voltage (V) VC 4.9 V or more. DTC Detection Condition P0087 Fuel pressure sensor output stays at fixed value.: (a) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is 0.5 sec.89 Main PR E2 PR (Main) Detect P0192 Sub PR2 (Sub) 1.5 sec. P0190 Condition (a) continues for 0.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx. The pressure sensor is a semiconductor pressure sensor that varies electric resistance when applying pressure to its silicon.05–558 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM monitors internal fuel pressure of common rail using the fuel pressure sensor and controls the suction control valve to regulate the internal pressure to the target pressure(approx. another normal sensor will be used to monitor the internal fuel pressure.44 3.90 4. P0192 Condition (a) continues for 0.: (a) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is 4. 50 to 100 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx.351 to 26. 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2.40 0.: (c) Fuel pressure sensor output voltage is ”0. P0192 and P0193”. 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1.106 psi)).

The DTCs stand for open or short malfunction of the sensor circuit.351 to 5.801 psi) at idling.5 sec. 4. This DTC code is set if there is no fluctuation at the internal fuel pressure. 7.5 sec. 1 driving cycle P0192: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 0.503 psi) when running the engine at 2.251 to 14. 1 driving cycle . The internal fuel pressure is approximately 30 to 40 MPa (306 to 408 kgf/cm2. P0190. 145 to 290 psi) even if the driving condition is constant. P0192 and P0193 (Open or short in fuel pressure sensor circuit): These DTCs are set if the fuel pressure sensor output voltage is out of the standard range. If these DTCs are present. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. 1 driving cycle P0190: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 0.020 kgf/cm2.05–559 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0087 (Fuel pressure sensor output stays at fixed value): Under normal condition. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. internal fuel pressure of the common rail usually fluctuates 1 to 2 MPa (10 to 20 kgf/cm2. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. and it increases to approx. 50 to 100 MPa (510 to 1. If this DTC is present.500 rpm. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. P0087 Malfunction Detection Normal Fuel Pressure Abnormal Engine Speed A82882 MONITOR STRATEGY P0087: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 sec.

55 V or more than 4. P0192 and P0193) is malfunction TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P0087: Detection Criteria Changing value of fuel pressure Threshold Virtually no fluctuation P0190: Detection Criteria Fuel pressure sensor output voltage Threshold Less than 0.55 V P0193: Detection Criteria Fuel pressure sensor output voltage AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Threshold More than 4.9 V P0192: Detection Criteria Fuel pressure sensor output voltage Threshold Less than 0.05–560 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) P0193: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 0. CHK ENG operation 1 driving cycle TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P0087: Specification Item Minimum Maximum Engine speed 500 rpm – Battery voltage 8V – 5 mm3/st – Fuel quantify The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor circuit (P0190.9 V .5 sec.

Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. Reference: Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx. If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously. Start the engine. at the time of the malfunction. terminal E2 may be open.05–561 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM F16 Fuel Pressure Sensor PR PR2 VCS VC E2S E2 ECM 5 P 5 EB1 P 26 E13 PCR1 2 P–B 2 EB1 P–B 33 E13 PCR2 1 R–W 1 EB1 R–W 2 E12 VCS 6 R–W 6 EB1 R–W 18 E13 VC 3 BR 3 EB1 BR 1 E12 E2S 4 BR 4 EB1 BR 28 E13 E2 A80998 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:   After completing repair. 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2. confirm P0087 is not set again. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx. When troubleshooting. the engine was warmed up or not. 50 to 100 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 3 . etc. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.  1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Check that internal fuel pressure of the common rail is within specification below.

Clear the DTCs.) E2S Specified condition PCR1 (E13–26) – PR (F16–5) PCR2 E2 PCR2 (E13–33) – PR2 (F16–2) ECM Connector VCS (E12–2) – VCS (F16–1) A80452 Continuity VC (E13–18) – VC (F16–6) E2 (E13–28) – E2 (F16–4) Wire Harness Side PR2 F16 VCS E2S (E12–1) – E2S (F16–3) Standard (Check for short): E2S Symbols (Terminal No. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to DTC ”P0087. Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. P0192 and/or P0193” are output. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. P0190.) Specified condition PCR1 (E13–26) or PR (F16–5) – Body ground PCR2 (E13–33) or PR2 (F16–2) – Body ground VCS (E12–2) or VCS (F16–1) – Body ground E2 VC PR Fuel Pressure Sensor Connector No continuity VC (E13–18) or VC (F16–6) – Body ground E2 (E13–28) or E2 (F16–4) – Body ground A80453 E2S (E12–1) or E2S (F16–3) – Body ground NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (See page 11–78) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . P0192 and/or P0193” are not output. A DTC ”P0087. Let the engine idle for 60 seconds and perform quick acceleration to 2. P0190. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.05–562 DIAGNOSTICS 2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ OUTPUT DTC(FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR DTCS ARE OUTPUT AGAIN) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. B B CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) A REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR – ECM) E13 PCR1 (a) (b) (c) E12 VC VCS Disconnect the F16 fuel pressure sensor connector.500 rpm for 30 seconds. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Read the DTCs.

 Supply pump (Suction control valve)  Pressure discharge valve  Short in supply pump (Suction control valve) circuit  Open in pressure discharge valve circuit  ECM P1229 Fuel over fed. use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system.  Short in supply pump (Suction control valve) circuit  Supply pump (Suction control valve)  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0088 and P1229”. This DTC code represents that the suction control valve may be stuck open. P1229 (Fuel over fed): The ECM will set this DTC if the actual fuel pressure inside the common rail stays higher than the target fuel pressure. or there may be open in its circuit. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to description on page 05–517. This DTC indicates that the suction control valve may be stuck open. or there may be short in its circuit. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0088 Internal fuel pressure of the common rail is too high. the pressure discharge valve will operate quite often.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx.039 kgf/cm2. If P0088 and/or P1229 are present. 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . and the pressure discharge valve may be stuck close. despite the ECM closing the suction control valve. If this DTC is present. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power.05–563 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPE–01 DTC P0088 FUEL RAIL/SYSTEM PRESSURE – TOO HIGH DTC P1229 FUEL PUMP SYSTEM HINT:   For more information on the supply pump (suction control valve) and the common rail system.039 kgf/cm2. 50 to 100 MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0088 (Internal fuel pressure too high): The ECM will set this DTC if the fuel pressure inside the common rail is beyond 200 MPa (2. see page 05–517. Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx. If this DTC is present. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel rail pressure from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. see page 05–517. Internal fuel pressure is beyond the target fuel pressure despite the ECM closing the suction control valve. or there may be short in its circuit. The fuel pressure exceeds 200 MPa (2.007 psi). DTC No. Under this condition.007 psi). 29. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. 29.

and also the pressure discharge valve is frequently operating AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . or suction control valve circuit.007 psi) or more Fuel pressure sensor P1229: Threshold Internal fuel pressure of the common rail stays higher than the target fuel pressure. or suction control valve circuit. 29.05–564 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) MONITOR STRATEGY P0088: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 sec. CHK ENG operation 1 driving cycle TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P0088: Specification The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor.039 kgf/cm2. or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning P1229: Item Specification Target fuel pressure variation is small – The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor. despite the ECM closing the suction control valve. CHK ENG operation 1 driving cycle P1229: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 min. or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P0088: Detection Criteria Threshold 200 MPa (2.

the engine was warmed up or not. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.05–565 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM S6 Suction Control Valve EDU PRD 4 E5 1 LG–R 2 LG ECM 2 E13 PCV+ 1 E13 PCV– R–L 32 E13 PRD R–L P3 Pressure Discharge Valve (Shielded) PRV 8 E5 W 1 EA1 W COM3 7 E4 B 2 EA1 B (Shielded) BR D J12 BR E J12 2 1 J/C E J13 BR D J13 EI A82347 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. When troubleshooting. at the time of the malfunction. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. etc. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. (g) Read the DTCs. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to ”Only DTC P0088” or ”DTC P0088 and P1229” are output A Only DTC P1229 is output B DTC ”P0190. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (c) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. P0193 and/or P1271” are output C Only DTC P1272 is output D B Go to step 4 C GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) D Go to step 3 A 2 READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P1272 OUTPUT) (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF. Wait for 10 seconds and then restart the engine and turn the ignition switch OFF again. P0191. P0192. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. (d) Read the DTCs.05–566 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0088 AND/OR P1229) (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to DTC P1272 is output A DTC P1272 is not output B B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 4 . Clear the DTCs.

05–567 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) (b) (c) (d) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Result: (e) Pressure Displayed (MPa) Proceed to Approx. Resistance: 1. 5 or more B B REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 14–286) PROCEED TO STEP 4 AFTER REPLACEMENT A 4 CHECK INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY(SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) Suction Control Valve (a) Check the suction control valve for resistance. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Start the engine.9 to 2. Check that the internal fuel pressure of the common rail drops below approximately 5 MPa within approximately 1 second as the ignition switch is turned OFF at the engine in an idle. 5 or less A Approx. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.3  at 20_C (68_F) NG A75346 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY (SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) (See page 11–69) . (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals.

) PCV+ (S6–1) or PCV+ (E13–2) – Body ground PCV– (S6–2) or PCV– (E13–1) – Body ground Specified condition No continuity E13 PCV+ PCV– NG ECM Connector A81089 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .) PCV+ (S6–1) – PCV+ (E13–2) PCV– Suction Control Valve Connector A81460 PCV– (S6–2) – PCV– (E13–1) Specified condition Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No. HINT: If the engine does not start. Wait for 1 minute. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CLEAR CODES”. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to DTC P1229 is not output A DTC P1229 is output B B REPLACE INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY (SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) (See page 11–69) A 6 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SUCTION CONTROL VALVE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side S6 PCV+ Disconnect the S6 suction control valve connector. (b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Therefore proceed to step 6. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. (e) Clear the DTCs.05–568 DIAGNOSTICS 5 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P1229 OUTPUT) (a) Disconnect the suction control valve connector and then start the engine. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. (g) Read the DTCs. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. the suction control valve is normal. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”.

Standard : Symbols (Terminal No. check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector. and then confirm P0088 and/or P1229 is not set again. drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) for 5 minutes. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .) Specified condition PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1) Correct waveform is as shown PCV– ECM Connector A66060 10V/ Division 500mV/ Division PCV+ PCV– 5 msec. During cranking or idling./Division A82559 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0088 AND/OR P1229 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC.05–569 DIAGNOSTICS 7 ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(PCV VOLTAGE) (a) (b) E13 PCV+ – Inspect using the oscilloscope.

4. DTC No.835 kgf/cm2. see page 05–517.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx. common rail. 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2. If this DTC is present.106 psi)) is always applied to the high–pressure area including the supply pump. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and permits driving the vehicle for extra 1 minute before stopping both the fuel injection and supply pump operation. high–pressure fuel (approx. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to description on page 05–517. In the common rail system. use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel rail pressure from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. HINT: After confirming DTC P0093. then stops the engine.351 to 26. use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system. and the ECM then will set this DTC if the decreasing rate of the internal fuel pressure is large when injecting the fuel. DTC Detection Condition P0093 Trouble Area  Fuel line between supply pump and common rail  Fuel line between common rail and injector  Supply pump  Common rail  Injector (P1238 is set simultaneously)  Pressure discharge valve  Open or short in EDU circuit (P0200 is set simultaneously  Open or short in injector circuit (P0200 and P1238 are set simultaneously)  EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously  ECM Fuel leaks in high–pressure area. see page 05–517. The ECM constantly monitors the internal fuel pressure of the common rail after the engine is started. The ECM adjusts the suction control valve opening angle to obtain the target internal fuel pressure. 30 to 180 MPa (306 to 1.05–570 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0093 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPF–01 FUEL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED – LARGE LEAK HINT:   For more information on the common rail system. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. If P0093 is present. 50 to 100 MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0093 (Fuel leaks in high–pressure area): This DTC stands for fuel leaks is existing in high–pressure area in the common rail system. MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Fuel pressure sensor Continuous 1 sec. injector and piping. or pressure discharge valve is malfunctioning AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx. 1 driving cycle TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item Engine speed Specification Minimum Maximum 600 rpm – The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor. or suction control valve circuit.

Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. perform the same on the fuel line between the common rail and the injector (See page 11–69. B Go to step 3 C GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A 2 (a) CHECK FUEL LEAKAGE(INSPECT HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL PARTS AND AREA FOR FUEL LEAKS) Visually check the supply pump. Also. Read the DTCs. at the time of the malfunction. the engine was warmed up or not.05–571 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold Drop rate in the internal fuel pressure is large when injecting fuel INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE . injector and fuel line located between the supply pump and the common rail for fuel leaks or fuel pressure leaks. etc) may result. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. etc. When troubleshooting. 11–60). Result: Display (DTC output besides DTC P0093) Proceed to Only DTC P0093 is output A DTC P1238 is output B DTC ”P0200 and/or P1271” are output C HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0093” are output. 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0093) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. HINT: Fuel leaks inside the components (Supply pump.

Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Internal fuel pressure of the common rail must be stable under each driving condition.9 to 4. At the same time. 50 to 100 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .9 mm3/st NG REPLACE INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–60) OK 4 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL LEAK TEST) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.05–572 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) (b) (c) (d) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Start the engine.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4. use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside the common rail from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. let the engine idle for 1 minute and then run it at 2. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / FUEL LEAK TEST”. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0093 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT:   After clearing the DTC.500 rpm for 30 seconds. 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2. Start the engine. Check for fuel leaks in high–pressure area.

Temp. 1). A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the inlet air temperature. the greater the thermistor resistance value. The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the inlet air temperature sensor from terminal THIA via a resistor R. sensor circuit  Diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0095. When the resistance value of the inlet air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the inlet air temperature. (1 trip detection logic) P0095 Trouble Area  Open or short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. (1 trip detection logic) P0098 Step 2 Open in diesel turbo inlet air temp.5 sec. and the higher the inlet air temperature. C (F) A56991 DTC No.5 sec. Temperature Displayed Malfunction –40C (–40 Open circuit 140C (284   Short circuit AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the lower the thermistor resistance value (See Fig. sensor circuit for 0.5 0. 1) 30 20 Resistance k 10 5 Acceptable 3 2 1 0. The inlet air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM.2 0. use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS”. P0097 or P0098”. sensor circuit for 0. the potential at the terminal THIA also changes. Based on this signal.05–573 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC P0095 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT DTC P0097 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT LOW DTC P0098 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT HIGH 05CPG–01 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Fig. The lower the inlet air temperature. sensor circuit for 0. (1 trip detection logic) P0097 Step 4 Short in diesel turbo inlet air temp.1 – 20 (– 4) 0 32 20 68 40 104 60 140 80 176 100 212 The inlet air temperature sensor is built into the intake air connector and senses the inlet air temperature. That is the resistor R and the inlet air temperature sensor are connected in series.5 sec. Proceed to DTC Detection Condition Step 1 Open or short in diesel turbo inlet air temp. the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability with a cold engine.3 0.

Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. the hand–held tester indicates –40°C (–40°F). the engine was warmed up or not. A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) B Go to step 4 C CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) . it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. If there is a short circuit. etc. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.  1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INLET AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. When troubleshooting. Temperature: Same value as the actual diesel turbo inlet air temperature. Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. the hand–held tester indicates 140°C (284°F) or more. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. at the time of the malfunction. terminal E2 may be open. Result: Temperature Displayed Proceed to –40°C (–40°F) A 140°C (284°F) or more B OK (Same as present temperature) C HINT:   If there is an open circuit.05–574 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM I9 Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temperature Sensor ECM 5V 2 GR 1 BR 20 E13 R THIA 28 E13 E2 E1 A76568 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously.

Sensor ECM (b) A75742 Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector. REPLACE DIESEL TURBO INLET AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NG 3 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM) (a) Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp. do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Sensor Connector A56868 OK CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect terminals THIA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector. Temperature: 1405C (2845F) or more Wire Harness Side I9 E2 THIA Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect terminals THIA and E2 of the diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor wire harness side connector. HINT: Before checking. Temperature: 1405C (2845F) or more E13 THIA E2 OK ECM Connector A80455 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . IF OK. IF OK. Sensor ECM (b) (c) (d) A75743 Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector.05–575 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp.

Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Sensor (a) (b) (c) ECM Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Turn the ignition switch ON. Temperature: –405C (–405F) OK A76591 REPLACE DIESEL TURBO TENPERATURE SENSOR INLET AIR NG 5 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM) Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp. Temperature: –405C (–405F) A75744 E13 THIA E2 OK ECM Connector A80456 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / AMBI TEMP SENS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Sensor ECM (b) (c) Disconnect the I9 diesel turbo inlet air temperature sensor connector.05–576 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) Diesel Turbo Inlet Air Temp.

05–577 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPH–01 DTC P0100 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The mass air flow meter uses a platinum hot wire.000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic)  Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit  Mass air flow meter  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0100.000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic) P0102 Open in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. use the hand–held tester to confirm the mass air flow ratio from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF”. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0100 Open or short in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. with engine speed 4.0 174. The hot wire is maintained at the set temperature by controlling the current flow through the hot wire. 0. with the power transistor controlled so that the potential of A and B remains equal to maintain the set temperature. The hot wire mass air flow meter works on the principle that the hot wire and temperature sensor located in the intake air bypass of the housing detect any changes in the intake air temperature. The hot wire mass air flow meter consists of a platinum hot wire. P0102 or P0103”. a temperature sensor and a control circuit installed in a plastic housing. The circuit is constructed so that the platinum hot wire and temperature sensor provide a bridge circuit. B+ Temperature sensor Power Transistor Platinum Hot Wire (Heater) B A Output Voltage Temperature sensor Platinum Hot Wire (Heater)    A53295 DTC No.000 rpm or less (1 trip detection logic) P0103 Short in mass air flow meter circuit for more than 3 sec. This current flow is then measured as the output voltage of the mass air flow meter. Air Flow Value (gm/s) Approx. with engine speed 4. with engine speed 4.0 or more AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Malfunction  Mass air flow meter power source circuit open  VG circuit open or short  EVG circuit open .

Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Result: Air flow rate (gm/s) Proceed to 0. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. When troubleshooting.05–578 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM A6 Mass Air Flow Meter VG 5 B–W 3 ECM G 24 VG E12 L–Y 32 EVG E12 +B From EFI MAIN Relay E2G 4 A76970 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. at the time of the malfunction. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON. 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) B Go to step 6 C CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) . the engine was warmed up or not. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.0 or more (*1) C *1: The value must be changed when the throttle valve is opened or closed. etc.0 or more B 1  Mass Air Flow Rate  173.0 A 174.

4 V A66060 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) .5 to 3. HINT: The A/C switch should be turned OFF. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E12 ECM connector. Measure the voltage between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and the body ground.05–579 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT MASS AIR FLOW METER(POWER SOURCE) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side +B (+) A6 Turn the ignition switch ON. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.) Condition Specified condition ECM Connector VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32) Engine is idling 0. Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Standard: EVG (–) Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition +B (A6–3) – Body ground 9 to 14 V Mass Air Flow Meter Connector NG Go to step 5 A54396 OK 3 INSPECT ECM(VG VOLTAGE) E12 (a) (b) VG (+) Start the engine.

Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) VG VG (A6–5) – VG (E12–24) E2G E2G (A6–4) – EVG (E12–32) A54396 Specified condition Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition VG (A6–5) or VG (E12–24) – Body ground No continuity E12 VG EVG ECM Connector A80454 OK REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–580 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A6 Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector.

05–581 DIAGNOSTICS 5 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – EFI MAIN RELAY) (a) (b) Wire Harness Side +B (+) A6 (c) Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Standard (Check for open): Mass Air Flow Meter Connector Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition +B (A6–3) – EFI main relay (3) Continuity Standard (Check for short): A54396 Engine Room R/B No. 1 EFI Main Relay NG A66056 Symbols (Terminal No. Remove the EFI main relay from the engine room R/B No. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) Specified condition EVG (E12–32) – Body ground Continuity EVG ECM Connector A66060 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) . Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition +B (A6–3) or EFI main relay (3) – Body ground No continuity REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK CHECK FOR ECM POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (See page 05–686) 6 INSPECT ECM(SENSOR GROUND) (a) E12 Check for continuity between the terminal of the E12 ECM connector and body ground. 1.

Disconnect the E12 ECM connector.) Specified condition VG (A6–5) or VG (E12–24) – Body ground No continuity E12 VG EVG ECM Connector A80454 OK REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) VG VG (A6–5) – VG (E12–24) E2G E2G (A6–4) – EVG (E12–32) A54396 Specified condition Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.05–582 DIAGNOSTICS 7 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MASS AIR FLOW METER – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A6 Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector.

2 V P0101 Conditions (a) and (b) continue for more than 6 sec.05–583 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0101 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPI–01 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0100 on page 05–577. When troubleshooting. 1 (a) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0101) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. at the time of the malfunction. perform the troubleshoot for those DTCs first. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.25 V  Mass air flow meter INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . B REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER A GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . condition (a) continues for more than 10 sec. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. DTC No. at idling: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Mass air flow meter output greater than 2. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area After engine is warmed up. the engine was warmed up or not. with engine speed 2000 rpm or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) VTA greater than 0. etc. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to P0101 and other DTCs are output A Only P0101 is output B HINT: If any other codes besides P0101 are output.1 V (b) Mass air flow meter output less than 0.

05–584 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPJ–01 DTC P0105 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION V 4.5 1 kPa 13.Hg) Air Pressure By a built–in sensor unit. P0107 or P0108”. Intake Manifold Pressure (kPa) Approx. the manifold absolute pressure sensor detects the intake manifold pressure as a voltage. A06532 DTC No. The ECM then determines the basic injection duration and basic ignition advance angle based on this voltage. or more (1 trip detection logic)  Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit  Manifold absolute pressure sensor  Turbocharger assy  EGR valve assy  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0105.3 253. use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / PIM”. but senses the absolute pressure inside the intake manifold (the pressure in proportion to the preset absolute vacuum 0). This permits it to control the air fuel ratio at the proper level under all conditions.900 100 (3.8) (in. Since the manifold absolute pressure sensor does not use the atmospheric pressure as a criterion.9) (74. 0 250 or more AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Malfunction  PIM circuit short  VC circuit open or short  PIM circuit open  E2 circuit open .5 sec. it is not influenced by fluctuations in the atmospheric pressure due to high altitude and other factors. P0105 P0107 P0108 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Open or short in manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit for 0.3 mmHg 1.

Read freeze frame data using . terminal E2 may be open.05–585 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM T5 Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor 3 VC PIM E2 ECM 5V R–W 18 VC E13 2 W–R 28 PIM E12 1 BR 28 E2 E13 A81002 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously.

   .

 .

NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) . When troubleshooting. Pressure: Same value as the actual atmospheric pressure. at the time of the malfunction. etc. the engine was warmed up or not. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / PIM” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester.  Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.  1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.

8 V PIM (E12 – 28) – E2 (E13–28) Same as atmosphere 1. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No. 10.Hg) 0.) Condition Specified condition PIM (E12–28) – E2 (E13–28) Applied negative pressure of 40kPa (300 mmHg.8 in.) Specified condition VC (E13–18) – E2 (E13–28) 4. 11.05–586 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(VC VOLTAGE) E13 (a) (b) VC (+) Turn the ignition switch ON.5 V E2 (–) ECM Connector NG A66060 REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK 3 INSPECT ECM(PIM VOLTAGE) E13 (a) (b) E12 E2 (–) PIM (+) ECM Connector A66060 Turn the ignition switch ON.8 V NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) . Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector..5 to 5.3 to 1.2 to 0.2 to 3.7 kg/cm3.9 V PIM (E12 – 28) – E2 (E13–28) Applied positive pressure of 69kPa (0.0 psi 3. Measure the voltage between the terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors.

) Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Connector Specified condition PIM (T5–2) – PIM (E12–28) VC (T5–3) – VC (E13–18) A56992 Continuity y E2 (T5–1) – E2 (E13–28) Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) E12 E13 Specified condition PIM (T5–2) or PIM (E12–28) – Body ground VC (T5–3) or VC (E13–18) – Body ground VC No continuityy E2 (T5–1) or E2 (E13–28) – Body ground PIM E2 ECM Connector NG A81088 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 5 CHECK TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–7) NG REPLACE TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–11) OK 6 CHECK EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 12–18) NG REPLACE EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 14–286) OK REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . Disconnect the E12 and E13 ECM connectors.05–587 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR – ECM) (a) Wire Harness Side PIM T5 (b) (c) VC E2 Disconnect the T5 manifold absolute pressure sensor connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.

DTC No. manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit may be open or short. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. P0107 or P0108” first. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. etc.  1 (a) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0106) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. the engine was warmed up or not. P0106 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Voltage output of the manifold absolute pressure sensor is out of the standard range. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to Only P0106 are output A P0106 and other DTCs are output B HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0106” are output. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0105. P0107. and P0108” are output simultaneously. Read freeze frame data using     . When troubleshooting. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first.05–588 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0106 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPK–01 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/ BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/ PERFORMANCE PROBLEM CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0105 on page 05–584. B GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A REPLACE MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (2 trip detection logic)  Manifold absolute pressure sensor INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If DTCs ”P0105. at the time of the malfunction.

Proceed to DTC Detection Condition P0110 Step 1 Open or short in intake air temp. Temperature Displayed Malfunction –40C (–40 Open circuit 140C (284   Short circuit AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . P0112 or P0113.1) 30 20 Resistance K 10 Acceptable 5 3 2 1 0. C (F) The intake air temperature sensor is built in the mass air flow meter and senses the intake air temperature. (1 trip detection logic) P0113 Step 2 Open in intake air temp.5 sec. sensor circuit for 0. and the higher the intake air temperature is. Based on this signal. use the hand–held tester to confirm the intake air temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. the potential at terminal THA (THAR) also changes. A67628 DTC No.1 – 20 (– 4) 0 32 20 68 40 104 60 140 80 176 100 212 Temp. 1). (1 trip detection logic) Trouble Area  Open or short in intake air temperature sensor circuit  Intake air temperature sensor (built in mass air flow meter)  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0110. A thermistor built in the sensor changes the resistance value according to the intake air temperature.3 0.5 sec. The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the intake air temperature sensor from terminal THA (THAR) via resistor R. sensor circuit for 0. The resistor R and the intake air temperature sensor are connected in series. The lower the intake air temperature is. (1 trip detection logic) P0112 Step 4 Short in intake air temp. the lower the thermistor resistance value becomes (See Fig. the greater the thermistor resistance value becomes.2 0.05–589 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPL–01 DTC P0110 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION (Fig. The intake air temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below ). sensor circuit for 0.5 sec.5 0. the ECM increases the fuel injection volume to improve the driveability with a cold engine. When the resistance value of the intake air temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the intake air temperature.

Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual intake air temperature. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.05–590 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM A6 Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Built in Mass Air Flow Meter) 5V G–R THA 2 E13 28 E2 BR E13 1 R 31 THA E2 A72925 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously. When troubleshooting. If there is a short circuit. A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) B Go to step 4 C CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) .  1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. the engine was warmed up or not. the hand–held tester indicates –40°C (–40°F). at the time of the malfunction. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. the hand–held tester indicates 140°C (284°F) or more. etc. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. terminal E2 may be open. Result: Temperature Displayed Proceed to –40°C (–40°F) A 140°C (284°F) or more B OK (Same as present temperature) C HINT:   If there is an open circuit.

Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester.05–591 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) Mass Air Flow Meter Connector (a) (b) ECM (c) (d) Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER NG 3 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM) Mass Air Flow Meter Connector (a) (b) ECM A75742 Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. IF OK. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more E13 THA E2 ECM Connector OK A80455 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more A75743 Wire Harness Side Mass Air Flow Meter Connector A6 E2 OK THA A54396 CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . IF OK. HINT: Before checking. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the mass air flow meter wire harness side connector. Connect terminals THA and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

Temperature: –40C (–40F) A75744 E13 THA OK ECM Connector A80456 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INTAKE AIR” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester.05–592 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) Mass Air Flow Meter (a) (b) (c) ECM A75766 Disconnect the A6 mass air flow meter connector. Temperature: –40C (–40F) OK REPLACE MASS AIR FLOW METER NG 5 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM) (a) (b) (c) ECM Mass Air Flow Meter Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON.

(1 trip detection logic) P0117 Step 4 Short in engine coolant temp. (1 trip detection logic) P0118 Step 2 Open in engine coolant temp. P0117 or P0118”.05–593 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPM–01 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION A thermistor is built in the engine coolant temperature sensor and changes the resistance value according to the engine coolant temperature.5 sec. sensor circuit  Engine coolant temp.5 sec. Proceed to DTC Detection Condition Step 1 Open or short in engine coolant temp. HINT: If the ECM detects DTC ”P0115. P0117 or P0118” it enters the fail–safe mode in which the engine coolant temperature is assumed to be 80 C (176 F).5 sec. sensor  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0115. use the hand–held tester to confirm the engine coolant temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL”. Temperature Displayed Malfunction –40 C (–40 F) Open circuit 140  (284    Short circuit AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . The structure of the sensor and connection to the ECM is the same as those of the intake air temperature sensor. (1 trip detection logic) P0115 Trouble Area  Open or short in engine coolant temp. sensor circuit for 0. DTC No. sensor circuit for 0. sensor circuit for 0.

terminal E2 may be open. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. If there is a short circuit. the hand–held tester indicates –40°C (–40°F).05–594 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E2 Engine Coolant Temp. Result: Temperature Displayed Proceed to –40°C (–40°F) A 140°C (284°F) or more B OK (Same as present temperature) C HINT:   If there is an open circuit. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.  1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Sensor 5V 2 W 2 EC1 B–W 19 THW E13 1 L 1 EC1 BR 28 E2 E13 R A81000 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously. the hand–held tester indicates 140°C (284°F) or more. at the time of the malfunction. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. When troubleshooting. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. etc. the engine was warmed up or not. Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. Temperature: Same value as the actual intake air temperature. A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) B Go to step 4 C CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) .

REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR . Sensor ECM (b) A75742 THW Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector.05–595 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) Engine Coolant Temp. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. SENSOR NG 3 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM) (a) Engine Coolant Temp. HINT: Before checking. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the engine coolant temperature sensor wire harness side connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. IF OK. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more Wire Harness Side E2 OK Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Connector A76786 CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. Sensor ECM (b) (c) (d) A75743 Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMP. IF OK. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more E2 E13 OK ECM Connector A80457 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. Connect terminals THW and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.

Temperature: –40C (–40F) A75744 E13 THW OK ECM Connector A80458 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Turn the ignition switch ON. Temperature: –40C (–40F) OK A75766 REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR NG 5 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM) Engine Coolant Temp. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Sensor ECM (b) (c) Disconnect the E2 engine coolant temperature sensor connector.05–596 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) (a) Engine Coolant Temp. Turn the ignition switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COOLANT TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Sensor (a) (b) (c) ECM Disconnect the E13 ECM connector.

DTC No.05–597 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0116 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPN–01 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE PROBLEM CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0115 on page 05–593. P0116 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area When THW greater than –40.

C (–40.

F) and less than 60.

C (140.

and THA greater than –6.F).7.

C (20.

F). and when starting engine. conditions (a) and (b) continue (2 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THW change is lower than 3.

C (5.4.

F) after engine was started.  Cooling system  Engine coolant temperature sensor  Thermostat In case that reading value of engine coolant temp. sensor will not change more than 1.

C (1.8.

F) even after repeating 6 trips (detection logic) of adjusting speed pattern with THW more than 90.

C (194.

When troubleshooting. the engine was warmed up or not. the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich. engine coolant temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. at the time of the malfunction. etc. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to Only P0116 are output A P0116 and other DTCs are output B HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0116” are output. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If DTCs ”P0115.  1 (a) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0116) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester.F) after engine was started. B GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A 2 INSPECT THERMOSTAT (See page 16–39) NG REPLACE THERMOSTAT (See page 16–50) OK REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. P0117 and P0118” are output simultaneously. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. P0117 or P0118” first. Read freeze frame data using     . Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0115. P0116.

DTC No.05–598 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0168 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPO–01 FUEL TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P0180 on page 05–599. P0168 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area When THF greater than 35.

C (95.

F) and less than 60.

C (140.

and THF  –6.7.F).

C (20.

F). conditions (a) and (b) continue (1 trip detection logic): (a) Vehicle speed is changing (Not stable) (b) THF change is lower than 3. and when starting engine.

C (5.4.

F) after the engine was started.  Fuel temperature sensor In case that reading value of fuel temp. sensor will not change more than 1.

C (1.8.

F) even after repeating 6 trips (detection logic) of adjusting speed pattern with THF more than 60.

C (140.

INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If DTCs ”P0180. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to Only P0168 are output A P0168 and other DTCs are output B HINT: If any other codes besides ”P0168” are output. P0182 or P0183” first. When troubleshooting.  1 (a) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0168) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester.F) after the engine was started. P0182 and P0183” are output simultaneously. at the time of the malfunction. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0180. etc. fuel temperature sensor circuit may be open or short. Read freeze frame data using     . the engine was warmed up or not. B A REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.

A thermistor built into the sensor changes the resistance value according to the fuel temperature. (1 trip detection logic) Trouble Area  Open or short in fuel temp. (1 trip detection logic) P0183 Step 2 Open in fuel temp.5 0. 1). Based on this signal. (Fig.5 sec. Temperature Displayed Malfunction –40C (–40 Open circuit 140C (284   Short circuit AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . and the higher the fuel temperature is.05–599 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC P0180 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT 05CPP–01 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The fuel temperature sensor senses the fuel temperature. use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel temperature from the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP”. sensor circuit for 0.1 – 20 (– 4) 0 32 20 68 40 104 60 140 80 176 100 212 Temp. The resistor R and the fuel temperature sensor are connected in series. When the resistance value of the fuel temperature sensor changes in accordance with changes in the fuel temperature. (1 trip detection logic) P0182 Step 4 Short in fuel temp. the lower the thermistor resistance becomes (See Fig. The lower the fuel temperature is.2 0.3 0. sensor circuit for 0. The 5 V power source voltage in the ECM is applied to the fuel temperature sensor from terminal THF via a resistor R.5 sec. the potential at terminal THF also changes. sensor circuit for 0. The fuel temperature sensor is connected to the ECM (See below). sensor circuit  Fuel temperature sensor  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P0180. Proceed to DTC Detection Condition P0180 Step 1 Open or short in fuel temp. C (F) A67628 DTC No. the greater the thermistor resistance becames.1) 30 20 Resistance K 10 Acceptable 5 3 2 1 0. P0182 or P0183”.5 sec. the ECM performs the pressure control compensation of the supply pump and error detection compensation of the highly pressurized fuel system.

Temperature: Same value as the actual fuel temperature. at the time of the malfunction. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester.05–600 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM F18 Fuel Temp. terminal E2 may be open. Result: Temperature Displayed Proceed to –40°C (–40°F) A 140°C (284°F) or more B OK (Same as present temperature) C HINT:   If there is an open circuit. When troubleshooting. etc. the hand–held tester indicates 140°C (284°F) or more. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. the hand–held tester indicates –40°C (–40°F). Sensor 5V 2 L 1 BR 29 THF E13 28 E13 R E2 E1 A10940 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Read freeze frame data using the hand-held tester. the engine was warmed up or not. A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) B Go to step 4 C CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) . If there is a short circuit. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.  1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(FUEL TEMPARATURE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.

Temperature: 140C (284F) or more A75743 Wire Harness Side F18 Fuel Temp. REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR NG 3 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN ECM) Fuel Temp. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. IF OK. do a visual and contact pressure check for the ECM connector. CHECK AND REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) HARNESS OR . Sensor (a) (b) ECM A75742 Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector. Connect terminals 1 and 2 of the fuel temperature sensor wire harness side connector. IF OK. Turn the ignition switch ON. (d) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. (c) Turn the ignition switch ON. Connect terminals THF and E2 of the E13 ECM connector.05–601 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR OPEN IN WIRE HARNESS) Fuel Temp. Temperature: 140C (284F) or more E13 THF E2 OK ECM Connector A80450 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE NG CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT ECM. Sensor Connector OK A66104 CONFIRM GOOD CONNECTION AT SENSOR. HINT: Before checking. Sensor (a) (b) ECM (c) (d) Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector.

Sensor (a) (b) (c) ECM Disconnect the F18 fuel temperature sensor connector.05–602 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN WIRE HARNESS) Fuel Temp. Turn the ignition switch ON. Temperature: –40C (–40F) A76591 OK REPLACE FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR NG 5 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(CHECK FOR SHORT IN ECM) Fuel Temp. Sensor (a) (b) (c) ECM Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / FUEL TEMP” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch ON. Temperature: –40C (–40F) A75744 E13 THF ECM Connector OK A80456 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. P0192. perform the troubleshoot for those DTCs first. When troubleshooting. at the time of the malfunction. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. P0190. P0190.  DTC No. P0192. and P0193” first. manifold absolute pressure sensor circuit may be open or short. and P0193” are output simultaneously.05–603 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0191 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPQ–01 FUEL RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTCs P0087 on page 05–557. P0191 1 (a) DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Voltage output of the fuel pressure sensor for the common rail is out of the standard range. the engine was warmed up or not. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. (1 trip detection logic)  Fuel pressure sensor CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0191) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. etc. B GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR) (See page 11–78) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Perform the troubleshooting of DTC ”P0087. INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If DTCs ”P0087. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to Only P0191 is output A P0191 and other DTCs are output B HINT: If any other codes besides P0191 are output.

the EDU responds to the command with injector injection confirmation signal (IJF) when the current is applied to the injector. K. I. see page 05–517. M. Soon after the EDU receives an injection command signal (IJT) from the ECM. Use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system. EDU Wiring Diagram Maximum 150 V COM3 COM2 BATTERY DC/DC Converter Maximum 150 V Command Pulse COM1 Injector ECM IJT#1 INJ#1 IJT#4 INJ#4 IJT#2 INJ#2 Control Circuit IJT#3 INJ#3 PRD Pressure Discharge Valve PRV IJF Confirmation Pulse GND EDU Connector E5 E4 Warning: Terminal J. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The EDU has been adopted to drive the injector at high speeds. quick–charging system. see page 05–517. L. The EDU has realized high–speed driving under high fuel pressure conditions using the DC/DC converter that provides a high–voltage. H.05–604 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0200 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPR–01 INJECTOR CIRCUIT / OPEN HINT:   For more information on the EDU. N and S are high voltage A81481 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . If P0200 are present.

P0200 refers to malfunction of injector drive circuit or injector circuit. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. there is no injection confirmation signal (IJF) from EDU to ECM. After engine is started. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0200 Open or short in EDU or injector circuit. 1 driving cycle TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item Specification Minimum Maximum Engine speed 500 rpm – Battery voltage 11 V Ignition switch AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – ON . This DTC will be set if the ECM judged that the number of IJT signals and IJF signals are inconsistent.05–605 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC No. If this DTC is present. and then it indicates that there is the current in the injector. The EDU monitors a drive current supplied to the injector and interprets the IJF signal as low if the current exceeds the specified level. despite the ECM sending injection command signal (IJT) to the EDU. Malfunction Detection Command Signal (IJT) ECM Confirmation Signal (IJF) EDU ON Injection Command Signal OFF IJT Abnormal Injection Confirmation Signal IJF Normal A81495 MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation IJF signal from EDU Continuous 10 sec.  Open or short in EDU circuit  Injector  EDU  ECM MONITOR DESCRIPTION P0200 (Open or short in EDU or injector circuit): The ECM always monitors both the injection command signal (IJT) and injection confirmation signal (IJF).

3 3 BR BR B W–B Battery E J13 EC AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 22 E13 #3 21 E13 #4 W B–R 1 J/C BR 3 E4 2 5 COM1 E4 COM3 2 INJ#2 E4 I8 Injector No. 4 B 1 INJ#3 E4 6 COM2 E4 D J13 1 GND E5 B–R 1 B–R 2 I6 Injector No. 1 4 8 INJ#1 E4 E5 PRV W 2 E10 BATT B–W EDU 1 1 B–Y 2 I7 Injector No. 3 V L 1 2 L W–B EI A81001 . *: Injection missing counter increments when no IJF signal from the EDU despite the ECM sending the IJT signal. 1 1 1 3 EFI MAIN Relay 5 EDU Relay 2 1 5 1 2 (Shielded) R–B W–B 7 EE1 B–Y 1 E9 +B GR 2 IE1 GR 8 E9 Y 4 IE2 Y 10 E9 IREL 5 IJT#4 E5 BATTERY R–L R–B G–W W–R R–W W–L (Shielded) 1 2 EFI 1 8 E4 G B–W 6 IJT#1 E5 3 IJT#2 E5 2 IJT#3 E5 1 B–Y 8 IK1 4 PRD E5 7 IJF E5 1 Engine Room R/B No. 2 Y L 1 BR D J12 D J12 E J12 FL MAIN 32 E13 PRD 25 E13 INJF 24 E13 #1 23 E13 #2 P3 Pressure 1 1A MREL I5 Injector No.05–606 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold If injection missing counter* is accumulated a specified number of times successively. 1 W 1 EA1 1 Discharge INJ#4 Valve B 2 2 EA1 B 3 7 E4 B Engine Room R/B No. or if injection missing counter for either one of the cylinders is accumulated a specified number of times successively (Approximately 1 second or more). WIRING DIAGRAM ECM (LHD) (RHD) 7 7 B–Y IE3 IO1 10 EE1 B–W GR B–W 1 B–W 1 3 Engine Room R/B No.

(P1271 is set simultaneously) (a) Signal Waveform #1 5 V/ Division #3 #4 #2 20 msec. B and C are normal)  Open or short in ”IJF (EDU)” – ”INJF (ECM)” circuit./Division AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A09438 Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left.  Injector  EDU D (if A. C (if A and B are normal)  Open or short in ”INJ#1 to #4 (EDU)” – ”COM1 and/or COM2” (EDU) circuit. Malfunction point Trouble area A  ECM B (if A is normal)  Open or short in ”#1 to #4 (ECM)” – ”IJT#1 to #4 (EDU)” harness or connector. Warning: Terminal COM1. Inspection Points Specified Condition A and B Correct waveform is as shown . COM2.05–607 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) PULSE GENERATION INSPECTION HINT: Problem area can be identified by inspecting waveform at the following inspection points. and INJ#1 to 4 are high–voltage ECM High–voltage Area EDU INJF D COM2 C IJF Injector COM1 IJT#1 INJ#1 IJT#4 INJ#4 #2 IJT#2 INJ#2 #3 IJT#3 INJ#3 #1 #4 B A A81508 HINT: Inspect the following inspection points ”A and D” or ” B and C” at the same time.

Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to DTC P0200 and P1238 are output A Only DTC P0200 is output B B Go to step 3 A 2 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4. there is open in the INJF wire harness between the EDU and ECM. use the following flowchart to inspect and repair the cylinder./Division A81511 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If P0200 and P1271 are present simultaneously. at the time of the malfunction. Read the DTCs. Start the engine. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. When troubleshooting. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. 5 V/ Division INJF – Inspection Points Specified Condition C and D Correct waveform is as shown 20 msec. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Read freeze frame data using     . The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left.  1 (a) (b) (c) (d) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0200) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.9 mm3/st The cylinder that has a misspecification compensation value is a faulty cylinder. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. or there is open in the wire harness for both of the injector the pressure discharge valve. etc. GO AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–608 DIAGNOSTICS (b) Signal Waveform ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. the engine was warmed up or not. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.9 to 4.

(3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): I8 Symbols (Terminal No.05  at 20_C (68_F) 2 1 Injector Assy NG A81503 REPLACE INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–60) OK 4 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – INJECTOR ASSY) (a) Wire Harness Side Injector Connector 1 2 I5 I6 I7 Check the harness and connector between the injector and EDU (INJ# terminal). I7. I6. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. or I8 injector connector.) COM2 INJ#3 EDU Connector Specified condition Injector (I5–1) or INJ#1 (E4–4) – Body ground A56874 Injector (I6–1) or INJ#2 (E4–2) – Body ground Injector (I7–1) or INJ#3 (E4–1) – Body ground Injector (I8–1) or INJ#4 (E4–3) – Body ground Injector (I5–2) or COM1 (E4–5) – Body ground No continuity Injector (I6–2) or COM2 (E4–6) – Body ground Injector (I7–2) or COM2 (E4–6) – Body ground Injector (I8–2) or COM1 (E4–5) – Body ground NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . (2) Disconnect the E4 EDU connector.) Specified condition Injector (I5–1) – INJ#1 (E4–4) A80992 Injector (I6–1) – INJ#2 (E4–2) Wire Harness Side INJ#2 INJ#4 INJ#1 Injector (I7–1) – INJ#3 (E4–1) Injector (I8–1) – INJ#4 (E4–3) COM1 Injector (I5–2) – COM1 (E4–5) E4 Continuity Injector (I6–2) – COM2 (E4–6) Injector (I7–2) – COM2 (E4–6) Injector (I8–2) – COM1 (E4–5) Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No. (1) Disconnect the I5. Resistance: 0.85 to 1.05–609 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT INJECTOR ASSY (a) Check the injector for resistance.

Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.05–610 DIAGNOSTICS 5 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – ECM) Wire Harness Side IJF E5 (a) (b) (c) Disconnect the E5 EDU connector.) IJT#3 IJT#2 IJT#4 EDU Connector Specified condition IJT#1 (E5–6) – #1 (E13–24) IJT#2 (E5–3) – #2 (E13–23) IJT#1 IJT#3 (E5–2) – #3 (E13–22) A80994 Continuity y IJT#4 (E5–5) – #4 (E13–21) IJF (E5–7) – INJF (E13–25) Standard (Check for short): E13 Symbols (Terminal No. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition BATTERY (E4–8) – GND (E5–1) 9 to 14 V A56874 Wire Harness Side E5 GND (–) EDU Connector OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A80994 NG CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (BATTERY – EDU) . Check for continuity between the terminals of the wire harness side connector.) Specified condition #1 (E13–24) or IJT#1 (E5–6) – Body ground #2 #2 (E13–23) or IJT#2 (E5–3) – Body ground INJF #3 (E13–22) or IJT#3 (E5–2) – Body ground #4 #3 #1 No continuityy #4 (E13–21) or IJT#4 (E5–5) – Body ground INJF (E13–25) or IJF (E5–7) – Body ground ECM Connector A80456 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 6 INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER(BATTERY VOLTAGE) Wire Harness Side BATTERY (+) E4 EDU Connector (a) (b) (c) Disconnect the E4 and E5 EDU connectors. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch ON. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the EDU connector.

05–611 DIAGNOSTICS 7 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(INJECTOR VOLTAGE) E13 (a) (b) E12 Inspect using the oscilloscope. start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds./Division A09438 NG REPLACE ECM(See page 10–65) OK 8 REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0200 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC. During idling.) Specified condition #1 (E13–24) – E1 (E12–7) #2 (E13–23) – E1 (E12–7) #1 #2 #3 #4 E1 ECM Connector #3 (E13–22) – E1 (E12–7) Correct waveform is as shown #4 (E13–21) – E1 (E12–7) A66060 Signal Waveform #1 5 V/ Division #3 #4 #2 20 msec. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. and then confirm P0200 is not set again. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors.

1 EE1 10 1 B–W B 1 B 1 1A EFI MAIN Relay 1 2 3 5 1 1 B–Y EFI 1 2 1 W–B FL MAIN 3 Battery 3 Engine Room R/B No.9 psi) or more from the simulated target pressure based on the engine speed and fue injection volume for 60 seconds. or more.05–612 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPS–01 DTC P0234 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION DTC P0299 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER UNDERBOOST DTC P1251 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER OVERBOOST CONDITION (TOO HIGH) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. (1 trip detection logic) Actual turbocharger pressure is deviated 20 kPa (0. P0234 P0299 P1251 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area When the condition that the turbocharger pressure exceeds the standard value for 0.5 sec. 2.  VRV  Open or short in VRV circuit  Turbocharger  Vacuum hose  EGR valve  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM V4 VRV B–W 1 ECM 2 2 IE1 GR W 10 E13 VN GR 8 E9 MREL Engine Room R/B No. 3 EC A81003 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .2 kgf/cm2.

at the time of the malfunction. P0299 AND/OR P1251) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. etc. connect a vacuum gauge to the hose between the E–VRV and turbocharger. (b) Warm up the engine to above 80. P0299 and/or P1251 and other DTCs are output B B GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A 2 CHECK CONNECTION OF VACUUM HOSE NG REPAIR OR REPLACE VACUUM HOSE OK 3 CHECK VACUUM HOSE(CHECK VACUUM BETWEEN TURBOCHARGER – VRV FOR INTAKE PRESURE CHANGE AT 900 RPM) (a) Using a 3–way connector. When troubleshooting. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to ”P0234.05–613 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . 1 (a) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P0234. P0299 and/or P1251” are output A ”P0234. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. the engine was warmed up or not.

C (176.

8 in. (c) Check the vacuum at 900 rpm.Hg) B Above 50 kPa (375 mmHg.Hg) B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 8 . 14. 0 in.8 in.F). 14.Hg) to 50 kPa (375 mmHg. Result: Proceed to Vacuum A 0 kPa (0 mmHg.

/ Division A05967 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK 5 INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY(OPERATION) VRV: ON (a) (b) (c) VRV: OFF Air Filter F E E Air Air A15518 Disconnect the vacuum hoses from the VRV. check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors.) Specified condition VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7) Correct waveform is as shown E1 ECM Connector A66060 E–VRV Signal Waveforms 5V/ Division GND 1 msec. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.05–614 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(VN VOLTAGE) (a) (b) E12 E13 VN Inspect using the oscilloscope. VRV OFF: Air from port E flows out through air filter. Check for operation of the E–VRV when it is operated by the hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch ON. VRV ON: Air from port E flows out through port F. During idling. NG REPLACE VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY OK 6 INSPECT VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY(RESISTANCE) (See page 12–16) NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE VACUUM REGULATING VALVE ASSY .

) VN (E13–10) or (V4–2) – Body ground E2 (E13–28) or (V4–1) – Body ground Specified condition No continuity E13 VN E2 NG ECM Connector A80456 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 8 INSPECT TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–7) NG REPLACE TURBOCHARGER SUB–ASSY (See page 13–11) OK 9 INSPECT EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 12–18) NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 14–286) AND .) VN (E13–10) – (V4–2) E2 (E13–28) – (V4–1) VRV Connector A56869 Specified condition Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector.05–615 DIAGNOSTICS 7 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(VRV – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side V4 Disconnect the V4 VRV connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. Check the continuity between the wire harness side connector.

DTC No. (b) and (c). G and NE Signal Waveforms 5 V/ Division NE G 20 msec. (1 trip detection logic) (a) Engine revolution 1.05 sec. P0335 P0339 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking (2 trip detection logic) No crankshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 650 rpm or more (2 trip detection logic) In conditions (a). iron core and pickup coil. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. when no crankshaft position sensor (NE) signal is input for 0. The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is installed the crankshaft timing pulley. or more has lapsed after STA signal is switched from ON to OFF. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals of every engine revolution.000 rpm or more (b) STA signal is OFF (c) 3 sec.) Specified condition NE+ (E13–27) – NE– (E13–34) Correct waveform is as shown .05–616 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05B5I–03 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DTC P0339 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Crankshaft position sensor (NE signal) consists of a magnet. and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal./Division (Idling) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A81512  Open or short in crankshaft position sensor circuit  Crankshaft position sensor  Signal plate (crankshaft timing pulley)  ECM Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope. Symbols (Terminal No. The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal. or more.

it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. troubleshoot the engine mechanical systems. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. at the time of the malfunction. the engine was warmed up or not. etc. Read freeze frame data using     . When troubleshooting. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–617 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM C1 Camshaft Position Sensor (Shielded) 1 P 23 G1 E12 2 L 31 G– E12 1 G 27 NE+ E13 2 R 34 NE– E13 C6 Crankshaft Position Sensor (Shielded) E1 E J12 J/C BR E E EI A81004 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:   Perform troubleshooting of DTC P0335 first. If no trouble is found.

”Cold” is from –10_C (14_F) to 50 _C (122 _F) and ”Hot” is from 50 _C (122 _F) to 100 _C (212 _F).740  at cold 2. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.225  at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition Crankshaft position sensor (C6–1) or NE+ (E13–27) – Body ground Crankshaft position sensor (C6–2) or NE– (E13–34) – Body ground E13 No continuity NE+ NE– ECM Connector A80459 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 3 CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) TIGHTEN SENSOR OR . Disconnect the E13 ECM connector.) Specified condition Crankshaft position sensor (C6–1) – NE+ (E13–27) Crankshaft Position Sensor Connector A76790 Continuity Crankshaft position sensor (C6–2) – NE– (E13–34) Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.05–618 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(RESISTANCE) (a) Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.630 to 2. Crankshaft Position Sensor A78431 NG REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (See page 10–64) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side C6 Disconnect the C6 crankshaft position sensor connector.065 to 3. Resistance: 1.

05–619 DIAGNOSTICS 4 (a) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE(TEETH OF SENSOR PLATE(CRANKSHAFT TIMING PULLEY)) Check the teeth of the sensor plate. NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PLATE (CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY) .

The ECM detects the standard crankshaft angle based on the G signal and the actual crankshaft angle and the engine speed by the NE signal.225  at hot NOTICE: ”Cold” and ”Hot” shown above mean the temperature of the coils themselves. When troubleshooting. When the camshafts rotate. Resistance: 1. at the time of the malfunction. 1 INSPECT CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (a) Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 2.630 to 2. ”Cold” is from –10C (14F) to 50 C (122 F) and ”Hot” is from 50 C (122 F) to 100 C (212 F).740  at cold 2. Camshaft Position Sensor A64984 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPLACE CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (See page 10–63) . The G signal plate has one tooth on its outer circumference and is installed on the camshaft timing pulley. iron core and pickup coil. the protrusion on the signal plate and the air gap on the pickup coil change. The NE signal plate has 34 teeth and is mounted on the crankshaft timing pulley. DTC No. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.065 to 3. etc.05–620 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0340 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05B5J–03 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Camshaft position sensor (G signal) consists of a magnet. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. The NE signal sensor generates 34 signals at every engine revolution. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. P0340 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM during cranking ((2 trip detection logic) g )  No camshaft position sensor signal to ECM with engine speed 650 rpm or more (1 trip detection logic) G and NE Signal Waveforms 5 V/ Division NE  Open or short in camshaft position sensor circuit  Camshaft position sensor  Camshaft timing pulley  ECM Reference: Inspection using the oscilloscope./Division (Idling) A81512 WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0335 on page 05–616. the engine was warmed up or not. INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     .) Specified condition G1 (E12–23) – G– (E12–31) Correct waveform is as shown G 20 msec. Symbols (Terminal No. causing fluctuations in the magnetic field and generating an electromotive force in the pickup coil.

05–621 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side C1 Disconnect the C1 camshaft position sensor connector.) Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) or G1 (E12–23) – Body ground Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) or G– (E12–31) – Body ground E12 Specified condition Specified condition No continuity G1 G– ECM Connector A81087 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 3 CHECK SENSOR INSTALLATION(CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR) NG TIGHTEN SENSOR OK 4 (a) CHECK CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY(TEETH OF PLATE) Check the teeth of the signal plate. NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE CAMSHAFT TIMING PULLEY OR . Disconnect the E12 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Camshaft position sensor (C1–1) – G1 (E12–23) Camshaft Position Sensor Connector A54385 Camshaft position sensor (C1–2) – G– (E12–31) Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.

After glow reduces a diesel engine knocking. To ensure efficient engine starting with a cold engine. and etc with a cold engine.05–622 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0380 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPT–01 GLOW PLUG/HEATER CIRCUIT ”A” CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The glow plug is mounted inside the engine combustion room. Battery ECM GLOW Relay Glow Plug Generator A81017 The ECM performs the after glow for a certain period of time depending on the engine coolant temperature after the engine has been started. The ECM then turns on the glow relay and permits the current to flow into the glow plug. a white smoke. The glow plug is then heated and enhances fuel combustion with the cold engine. the ECM calculates time the current needs to flow into the glow plug depending on the engine coolant temperature after the ignition switch is turned ON.) 120 1 0 40 20 (C) 104 68 (F) Engine Coolant Temperature ON Ignition Switch OFF ON Glow Plug OFF OFF Engine Speed After Glow Time Starting Engine A81018 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . This DTC will be set if there is open in glow plug itself or its circuit. After Glow System After Glow Time (sec.

therefore the battery voltage then varies and also terminal M output (duty ratio) of the generator varies. As the supplying current to the glow plug is terminated. despite turning the glow plug from ON to OFF. Any switches that vary electrical load have not been being operated – – The monitor will not run if the generator circuit is malfunctioning TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold When the battery voltage. or vice–versa. the ECM realizes that the current has not been supplied to the glow plug. conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied: (a) Battery voltage dos not change (b) Duty signal from terminal M of the generator does not change P0380 S Open or short in glow plug circuit S Glow fuse S Glow relay S Glow plug S ECM MONITOR DESCRIPTION When starting a cold engine. or vice–versa AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 2 driving cycles TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item Specification Minimum Maximum Battery voltage 11 V – Engine speed 700 rpm 2. the large current is suddenly cut off. or terminal M output (duty ratio) of the generator does not change.05–623 DIAGNOSTICS DTC No. and interprets this as open malfunction of the glow plug or glow plug circuit. the ECM supplies the current to the glow plug for a certain period of time. If these variations are not occurred when the glow plug is turned from ON to OFF.000 rpm – 40_C (104_F) Engine coolant temperature Engine speed is stable Time after engine start – 8 sec. or vice–versa. – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area When the glow plug is turned from ON to OFF. MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Glow plug circuit Twice per driving cycle 3 min.

3 B 1 B 1 B 7 7 G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD) BR G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD) R–W IE3 (LHD) IO1 (RHD) 1 1 2 ALT–S EFI 1 1 1 IJ BR 2 G1 Glow Plug Battery 7 E12 E1 B–Y J/C FL MAIN 2 E10 BATT B–Y B 1A Engine Room R/B No.05–624 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM AM1 IG1 3 8 E13 ALT 1 I13 Ignition Switch G–R 9 E12 RL G–Y B–L B DH 1 Driver Side J/B A12 1 B 5 A11 3 M A11 4 L 1 Generator IG1 Relay 3 B W B Y 1 DN 5 DH AM1 ED1 1 B–L 2 IG S A11 2 A11 1 ECU–IG R–W 14 E9 B GREL R IK2 1 EE1 5 3 3 IK1 10 18 DB 9 DA 3 R R 2 2 ALT 2 4 GLOW 1 1 G2 GLOW Relay R–W B W–B 3 3 3 Engine Room R/B No. 1 BR EI A81005 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

confirm P0380 is not set again. Read freeze frame data using .05–625 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: S S After completing repair.

   .

 .

(b) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to Only P0380 are output A P0380 and P0622 are output B B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) . Glow System Wiring Diagram From Battery GREL GLOW Relay ECM Glow Plug A81506 1 CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDS DTC P0380) (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. etc. the engine was warmed up or not. (c) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. When troubleshooting. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. (d) Read the DTCs.  Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. at the time of the malfunction.

S Avoid getting oil and fuel on the glow plug when cleaning. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE GLOW PLUG ASSY (See page 19–33) .1  at 20_C (68_F) NOTICE: S Be careful not to damage the glow plug pipes as it could cause an open circuit or shorten life of the glow plugs.05–626 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY ASSY (a) Check the glow plug relay for continuity. Result: Continuity NG A80987 CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE OK 4 INSPECT GLOW PLUG ASSY (a) Ohmmeter Continuity B08263 Check the glow plug for resistance. 1. Standard resistance: Approx. (1) Check that there is continuity between and terminal. 3. S Do not apply more than 11 V to the glow plug as it could cause an open circuit. Specified condition: Between terminal Specified condition No continuity A33913 NG 1–2 Continuity (Apply battery voltage terminals 3 and 4) 3–4 Continuity REPLACE GLOW PLUG RELAY ASSY OK 3 CHECK FUSE(GLOW FUSE) (a) Engine Room R/B No. be sure to wipe off any oil of the terminal and bakelite washer with a dry cloth. S During inspection. Check for continuity in the GLOW fuse. 3 (b) GLOW Fuse Remove the GLOW fuse from the engine room R/B No. (1) Check that there is resistance between the glow plug terminal and ground.

Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. AND GLOW PLUG RELAY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) (c) E9 Disconnect the E9 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness. AND GLOW PLUG RELAY – BATTERY) (a) (b) (c) L Remove the glow plug relay. Disconnect the glow plug wire. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition GREL (E9–14) – Body ground No Continuity REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR +S A80991 OK 7 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GLOW PLUG RELAY – GLOW PLUG.05–627 DIAGNOSTICS 5 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT GLOW PLUG ASSY(INSTALLATION) NG TIGHTEN GLOW PLUG OK 6 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GLOW PLUG RELAY – ECM.) GREL Specified condition +S (Glow plug relay terminal 3) – GREL (E9–14) Continuity –S (Glow plug relay terminal 4) – Body ground ECM Connector Standard (Check for short): A81091 NG –S Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition L (Glow plug relay terminal 2) – Glow plug wire B B (Glow plug relay terminal 1) – Positive terminal of the battery A80991 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE Continuity HARNESS OR . Remove the glow plug relay.

) Condition Specified Condition GREL (E9–14) – E2 (E13–28) Engine coolant temp. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.05–628 DIAGNOSTICS 8 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(GREL VOLTAGE) E13 (a) (b) E9 Turn the ignition switch START. is 40C (104F) or less 9 to 14 V GREL E2 ECM Connector NG A66060 REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK 9 INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) E1 (–) E12 (a) BATT (+) Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E12 ECM connectors. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 and E13 ECM connectors. Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified Condition BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7) 9 to 14 V E10 ECM Connector A80463 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS CONNECTOR (BATTERY – ECM) OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) OR .

05–629 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPU–01 DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW DTC P0403 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION CONTROL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0400 Mass air flow rate is not changed when turning on EGR valve P0403 EGR valve assy motor malfunction  EGR valve assy O Open en or short in EGR circuit  EGR passage  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM B–W From EFI MAIN Relay E3 EGR Valve Assy 6 5 B–W 2 B–W ECM G 6 E12 EG+A 4 Y–G 5 E12 EG–A 3 R–L 4 E12 EG+B 1 G–B 3 E12 EG–B A81006 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using .

   .

 .

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting. at the time of the malfunction. etc. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. the engine was warmed up or not.

Result: MAF greater than 4 g/s but less than 16 g/s Force the EGR valve to operate with a hand–held tester.4  +B2 – EGR4 19. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first.6  1.4  +B2 – EGR3 19. Start the engine. Result: MAF greater than 10 g/s but less than 16 g/s (e) (f) (g) NG REPLACE EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 14–286) OK 3 INSPECT EGR VALVE ASSY EGR3 +B2 (a) EGR4 EGR2 EGR1 Check the EGR valve for resistance.6  1. Check that the MAF reading during idling. B GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A 2 (a) (b) (c) (d) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(MASS AIR FLOW RATE) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON.4  +B1 – EGR2 19. Resistance: +B1 A82939 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Terminal No. Warm up the engine. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed P0400 and/or P0403 are output A P0400 and/or P0403 and other DTCs are output B HINT: If any other codes besides P0400 and/or P0403 are output.05–630 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES P0400 AND/OR P0403) (a) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. the engine coolant temperature should be above 75_C (167_F) and bellow 90_C (194_F). (1) Measure the resistance between the specified terminals.4  REPLACE EGR VALVE ASSY (See page 14–286) . Specified condition +B1 – EGR1 19.6  1.6  1. make the valve opening 0. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / MAF”. and check that the AFM reading during idling.

) S1 S3 EGR Valve Connector Specified condition EG+A (E12–6) – S3 (E3–6) EG–A (E12–5) – S1 (E3–4) Continuity EG+B (E12–4) – S4 (E3–3) A56871 EG–B (E12–3) – S2 (E3–1) Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No. During idling. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition EG+A (E12–6) – E1 (E12–7) EG–A (E12–5) – E1 (E12–7) EG+A EG–A EG+B ECM Connector EG+B (E12–4) – E1 (E12–7) A66060 Correct waveform is as shown EG–B (E12–3) – E1 (E12–7) Signal Waveform 10 V/ Division GND 0. check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 ECM connector./Division OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A09818 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) .05–631 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EGR VALVE ASSY – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side E3 S4 S2 Disconnect the E2 EGR valve connector.5 msec.) E12 Specified condition EG+A (E12–6) or S3 (E3–6) – Body ground EG–A (E12–5) or S1 (E3–4) – Body ground No continuity EG+B (E12–4) or S4 (E3–3) – Body ground EG–B (E12–3) or S2 (E3–1) – Body ground EG–B EG+A NG EG+B EG–A ECM Connector REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR A81087 OK 5 INSPECT ECM(EGR VALVE ASSY VOLTAGE) E1 E12 (a) (b) EG–B Inspect using the oscilloscope. Disconnect the E12 ECM connector.

05–632 DIAGNOSTICS 6 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK DEPOSIT(EGR VALVE ASSY) NG REMOVE FOREIGN OBJECT AND CLEAN EGR VALVE OK 7 CHECK DEPOSIT(EGR PASSAGE) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE OK 8 CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAKS NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE POINT .

Also. the exhaust gas recirculation volume is properly controlled. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Open or short in intake shutter circuit  Open or short in fully opened switch circuit  Intake shutter  ECM . Upon opening and closing the valve. despite forcing the intake shutter valve to fully open.05–633 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0488 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPV–01 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION THROTTLE POSITION CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM opens and closes the intake shutter valve using the step motor. The ECM detects fully opened of the intake shutter valve with the intake shutter valve fully opened switch Intake Shutter Internal Structure Intake Shutter Control Motor Intake Shutter Valve Reduction Gear CLOSE OPEN Intake Shutter Valve Fully Opened Switch OFF ON A81482 DTC No. the engine vibration and noise will be reduced by closing the valve when the engine is stopped. P0488 DTC Detection Condition Intake shutter valve fully opened switch is not turned on.

the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. the ECM sets this DTC if the switch is not turned on. The ECM forces the valve to fully open within 2 to 3 seconds as the ignition switch is turned ON. Malfunction Detection ECM Commanding Fully Open Abnormal CLOSE Actual Intake Shutter Valve Opening Angle Normal OPEN Normal ON Fully Opened Switch Status OFF Abnormal Intake Shutter Valve Control Motor Step Counter CLOSE OPEN Time A81510 MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Intake shutter valve fully opened switch Continuous 3 sec. 1 driving cycle TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Specification Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . and then checks if the intake shutter valve fully opened switch is turned on. In addition. If the DTC is present. the ECM also forces the valve to fully open when accelerating the engine (high engine load) and checks if the switch is turned ON. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. When starting and/or accelerating the engine.05–634 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) MONITOR DESCRIPTION This DTC will be set if the actual opening angle of the intake shutter valve varies from the target opening angle.

despite the ECM commanding the intake shutter valve to open fully WIRING DIAGRAM B–W From EFI MAIN Relay ECM D1 Intake Shutter B–W B–W 5 2 6 B 15 E13 LU+A 4 G 14 E13 LU–A 3 Y 13 E13 LU+B 1 L 12 E13 LU–B W–B 2 1 11 E13 THOP P–L T3 Intake Shutter Fully Opened Switch EI A81906 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using .05–635 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold Intake shutter valve fully opened switch is not turned ON.

   .

 .

When troubleshooting. 1 (a) CHECK INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY Visually check that the intake shutter valve moves within approximately 2 to 3 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON. etc. at the time of the malfunction.  Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Intake shutter Proceed to Does not move A Smoothly move to full–open position B B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 6 . the engine was warmed up or not.

RHD Resistance: Terminals Temperature Resistance at 20_C (68_F) 18 to 22  Temperature Resistance at 20_C (68_F) 18 to 22  1–2 1–3 4–5 4–6 Intake Shutter Assy A31135 LHD Resistance: Terminals 1–3 2–3 4–6 5–6 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY (See page 10–61) . (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals. Intake shutter Proceed to Smoothly moved A Difficult to move smoothly B B REPLACE INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY (See page 10–61) A 3 INSPECT INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY (a) Check the intake shutter for resistance.05–636 DIAGNOSTICS 2 (a) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY Check if the intake shutter valve moves as the lever is rotated by hand.

) E13 Specified condition LU+A (E13–15) or Intake shutter (D1–6) – Body ground LU–A (E13–14) or Intake shutter (D1–4) – Body ground LU+B LU+B (E13–13) or Intake shutter (D1–3) – Body ground LU+A No continuity LU–B (E13–12) or Intake shutter (D1–1) – Body ground LU–A LU–B ECM Connector A80456 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . During idling.05–637 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(LU VOLTAGE) (a) (b) LU–B E13 E12 Inspect using the oscilloscope./Division A56892 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK 5 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(INTAKE SHUTTER ASSY – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side D1 Disconnect the D1 intake shutter connector. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition LU+A (E13–15) – Intake shutter (D1–6) LU–A (E13–14) – Intake shutter (D1–4) Intake shutter Connector LU+B (E13–13) – Intake shutter (D1–3) A56871 Continuity LU–B (E13–12) – Intake shutter (D1–1) Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition LU+A (E13–15) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A (E13–14) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A LU+B E1 LU+A ECM Connector Correct waveform is as shown LU+B (E13–13) – E1 (E12–7) LU–B (E13–12) – E1 (E12–7) A66060 Signal Waveform 20 V/ Division LU+A LU+B LU–A LU–B 10 msec. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.

) Specified condition THOP (E13–11) or Intake shutter (T3–1) – Body ground No continuity NG E13 Symbols (Terminal No. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / ACCEL OPEN SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester.05–638 DIAGNOSTICS 6 (a) (b) (c) (d) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. then confirm P0488 is not set again. A 7 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(FULLY OPENED SWITCH – ECM) (a) Wire Harness Side (b) (c) T3 Disconnect T3 the intake shutter fully opened switch connector. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Fully open the intake shutter valve by hand. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Result: Switch Condition Displayed Proceed to OFF A ON B B CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0488 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC. start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Standard (Check for open): Intake Shutter Fully Opened Switch Connector A81491 THOP ECM Connector OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A80456 Specified condition THOP (E13–11) – Intake shutter (T3–1) Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

05–639 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0488 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC. then confirm P0488 is not set again. start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds and accelerate the vehicle speed to 60 km/h (37 mph) with the accelerator pedal opened more than the half angle. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–640 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0500 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05B5L–03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The speed sensor for skid control ECU detects the wheel speed and sends the appropriate signals to the skid control ECU. The ECM determines the vehicle speed based on the frequency of these pulse signals.000 rpm but less than 3. it is then transmitted to the ECM.500 rpm AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Open or short in speed sensor circuit  Speed sensor  Combination meter  ECM  Skid control ECU . After this signal is converted into a more precise rectangular waveform by the waveform shaping circuit inside the combination meter. The skid control ECU converts these signals into a 4–pulse signal and outputs it to the combination meter. 4–Pulse From Speed Sensor Skid Control ECU 4–Pulse Combination Meter ECM A79413 DTC No. DTC Detection Condition P0500 Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 7 sec. or more (2 trip detection logic): (a) THW less than 70C (158F) (b) Engine speed is greater than 2.

the engine was warmed up or not. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. 1 CHECK OPERATION OF SPEEDOMETER (a) Drive the vehicle and check if the operation of the speedometer in the combination meter is normal. etc. at the time of the malfunction. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK SPEEDOMETER CIRCUIT (See page 05–1510) . When troubleshooting.05–641 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM C11 Combination Meter Assy ECM 18 V–W H H J10 J20 (LHD) (RHD) J/C H H J10 J20 V–W 17 SP1 E10 (LHD) (RHD) A81008 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. HINT: The vehicle speed sensor is operating normally if the speedometer display is normal.

5V 0V – Turn Wheel A62954 OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .5 to 5. 4. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E13 ECM connectors as the wheel is turned slowly. Turn the ignition switch ON.) Specified condition SP1 (E10–17) – E2 (E13–28) Generatedintermittently HINT: The output voltage should fluctuate ups and downs similarly to the diagram on the left when the wheel is turned slowly.05–642 DIAGNOSTICS 2 ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(SP1 VOLTAGE) E13 E2 (a) (b) (c) (d) E10 SP1 ECM Connector A80462 Shift the transmission to the neutral position. Jack up the vehicle. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.

HINT: Normal condition is as shown in the table. (b) and (c) continue for 0. DTC No. P0504 Signal Brake pedal released In transition Brake pedal depressed STP OFF ON ON ST1– ON ON OFF DTC Detection Condition Conditions (a).05–643 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0504 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPW–01 BRAKE SWITCH ”A”/”B” CORRELATION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION In this system.5 sec. or more (1 trip detection logic): (a) Ignition switch ON (b) Brake pedal released (c) STP signal is OFF when the ST1– signal is OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Short in stop lamp switch signal circuit  Stop lamp switch  ECM . the signal of the stop lamp switch is used to judge whether the acceleration system is abnormal or not. The stop lamp switch has a duplex system (signals STP and ST1–) to memorize the abnormality when the signals of depressing and releasing the brake pedal are detected simultaneously.

at the time of the malfunction. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. 3 R–W (LHD) 3 11 1 2 3 R–W (RHD) B–W (RHD) IE3 2 IR1 B–W (LHD) 20 3 IR1 IE1 ALT 2 R–W (RHD) R–W (LHD) B–W (RHD) B–W (LHD) 3 3 B DA 22 W FL MAIN STOP C J9 (LHD) E J27 (RHD) Driver Side J/B J/C C J8 (LHD) A J26 (RHD) DN 1 Battery 1 ED1 B–L B–W A81009 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . 1 G–W (RHD) G–W (LHD) IGN 6 IE3 2 ECM 10 19 G–W DC E10 STP 2 DA 1 IR1 G–W (LHD) G–W (RHD) G–W (RHD) 1 4 B–W G–W (LHD) S13 Stop Lamp Switch 1 1A B 14 IE2 4 IR1 Engine Room R/B No. the engine was warmed up or not.05–644 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B I13 Ignition Switch 6 B–R 4 AM2 B–R IG2 12 E10 ST1– DH 2 1 IE4 (LHD) 1 IP1 (RHD) G–W (RHD) G–W (LHD) Driver Side J/B B–R DA 18 1 AM2 1 Engine Room R/B No. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . When troubleshooting. etc.

NG REPAIR OR REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT OK 2 INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY (a) Free Pushed in 2 1 Check for continuity between each pair of the terminals. Standard: Brake Pedal Specified condition Depressed STP Signal ON Released STP Signal OFF Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E12 ECM connectors.) Brake pedal Specified condition ST1– (E10 ST1 (E10–12) 12) – E1 (E12–7) Depressed Below 1.5 V Released 7. Specified condition 1–2 Continuity 3–4 No continuity 1–2 No continuity 3–4 Continuity Stop Lamp Switch 4 3 A72924 NG REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY OK 3 READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STP SIGNAL AND ST1– VOLTAGE) Brake Pedal Depressed (a) (b) Brake Pedal Released (c) E12 E1 (–) E10 Turn the ignition switch ON. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.05–645 DIAGNOSTICS 1 (a) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK OPERATION OF STOP LIGHT Check if the stop lights go on and off normally when the brake pedal is depressed and released. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STOP LIGHT SW” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Standard: Switch position Switch pin free Switch pin pushed in Terminals No.5 to 14 V ST1– (+) ECM Connector A80995 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) .

05–646 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side S13 Disconnect the S13 stop lamp switch connector.) Specified condition Stop lamp switch (S13–1) or STP (E10–19) – Body ground Stop lamp switch (S13–4) or ST1– (E10–12) – Body ground No continuity E10 ST1– STP ECM Connector A81090 OK REPLACE ECM(See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition Stop lamp switch (S13–1) – STP (E10–19) Stop Lamp Switch Connector Continuity Stop lamp switch (S13–4) – ST1– (E10–12) A56986 Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.

1 Engine Room R/B No. etc. WIRING DIAGRAM ECM Engine Room R/B No. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. etc. DTC Detection Condition P0560 Trouble Area Open in back–up power source circuit (1 trip detection logic). Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 3 3 B 1 1A EFI 1 2 1 B–Y 7 7 IE3 IO1 (LHD) (RHD) B–Y 2 BATT E10 3 B FL MAIN Battery A81010 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . at the time of the malfunction. DTC No. the battery positive voltage is supplied to terminal BATT of the ECM for the DTCs memory and air–fuel ratio adaptive control value memory. the ECM does not store other DTC. When troubleshooting.05–647 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0560 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPX–01 SYSTEM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the ignition switch is OFF. the engine was warmed up or not.  Open in back–up power source circuit  ECM HINT: If DTC P0560 appears.

Standard: Continuity EFI fuse NG A66058 CHECK FOR SHORT IN ALL HARNESSES AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED FUSE OK 2 INSPECT ECM(BATT VOLTAGE) E1 (–) E12 (a) BATT (+) Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E10 and E12 ECM connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. Check for continuity in the EFI fuse.05–648 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK FUSE(EFI FUSE) (a) (b) Engine Room R/B No.) Specified condition BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7) 9 to 14 V E10 ECM Connector A80463 OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) . 1 Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. 1.

EFI FUSE – BATTERY) (a) Engine Room R/B No. Standard (Check for open): A80988 Symbols (Terminal No. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) Specified condition Battery positive terminal – EFI fuse (1) Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition EFI fuse (2) – BATT (E10–2) Continuity Standard (Check for short): E10 (b) BATT ECM Connector A80464 Symbols (Terminal No. (3) Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No. (2) Disconnect the battery positive terminal. 1. 1. (2) Disconnect the E10 ECM connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition EFI fuse (2) or BATT (E10–2) – Body ground No continuity Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and battery. 1 EFI Fuse Check the harness and connector between the EFI fuse and ECM.05–649 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EFI FUSE – ECM. (1) Remove the EFI fuse from the engine room R/B No.) Specified condition Battery positive terminal or EFI fuse (1) – Body ground No continuity NG OK REPLACE JUNCTION BLOCK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

. P0606 P0607 P1611 DTC Detection Condition ECM inside error (1 trip detection logic) Trouble Area  ECM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     .05–650 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPY–01 DTC P0606 ECM/PCM PROCESSOR DTC P0607 CONTROL MODULE PERFORMANCE DTC P1611 IC CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . When troubleshooting. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. the engine was warmed up or not. at the time of the malfunction. etc. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.

The duty signal is used for detecting the open malfunction of the generator circuit and DTC P0380. MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Generator circuit Continuous 10 sec.000 rpm TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold There is no signal output from terminal M of the generator AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 1 driving cycle TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Item Specification Minimum Maximum Battery voltage 11 V – Engine speed 700 rpm 2. P0622  Open in generator circuit  Generator  Driver belt  ECM MONITOR DESCRIPTION The ECM will detect a generator failure or an open malfunction of the circuit. the duty signal is sent from terminal M of the generator to the ECM terminal ALT.05–651 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0622 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ7–01 GENERATOR FIELD ”F” TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION While the generator is generating the current. Battery ECM GLOW Relay Glow Plug Generator A81017 DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Generator terminal M duty signal is not output while engine is running. if the duty signal is not output from terminal M of the generator despite the engine running.

1 BR EI A81011 A81005 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–652 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM AM1 IG1 3 8 E13 ALT 1 I13 Ignition Switch G–R 9 E12 RL G–Y B–L B DH 1 ED1 1 Driver Side J/B W B A12 1 B 1 DN 5 DH AM1 5 A11 3 M Y A11 4 L Generator 1 IG A11 2 IG1 Relay 3 S A11 1 R–W 2 ECU–IG 3 B–L IK2 1 B EE1 5 3 18 DB 9 DA 2 Engine Room R/B No. 3 ALT 1 3 R–W W–B BR G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD) 3 B 7 E12 E1 B J/C B 1 G J10 (LHD) C J20 (RHD) 2 ALT–S FL MAIN R–W 1 1 W–B Battery IJ B 1A Engine Room R/B No.

the engine was warmed up or not. terminal E2 may be open. YES Go to step 3 NO 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(GENERATOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E13 ALT Disconnect the E13 ECM connector.000 rpm. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. Read freeze frame data using     .) Specified condition ALT (E13–8) – M (A11–3) Continuity Standard (Check for short): ECM Connector A80456 Symbols (Terminal No. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.) Specified condition ALT (E13–8) or M (A11–3) – Body ground No continuity Wire Harness Side A11 Generator Connector A81490 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK 3 INSPECT DRIVE BELT (See page 14–266) NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE DRIVE BELT (See page 14–269) OR .  1 CHECK IF CHARGE LAMP IS ILLUMINATED HINT: Run the engine at 2.05–653 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:  If different DTCs related to different systems that have terminal E2 as the ground terminal are output simultaneously. and check if the charge lamp located in the combination meter is OFF. Disconnect the A11 generator connector. at the time of the malfunction. etc. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. When troubleshooting.

05–654 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM (See page 19–26) GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P0622 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC. and then confirm P0622 is not set again. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . start the engine and let it idle for 10 seconds.

When troubleshooting. (1 trip detection logic). Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. at the time of the malfunction. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.05–655 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0627 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPZ–01 FUEL PUMP CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. the engine was warmed up or not. etc.5 sec. P0627 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Open or short in suction control valve circuit for more than 0.  Open or short in suction control valve circuit  Suction control valve  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM S6 Suction Control Valve 1 LG–R 2 E13 PCV+ 2 LG 1 E13 PCV– A80997 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

9 to 2.) PCV+ (S6–1) – PCV+ (E13–2) PCV– SCV Connector PCV– (S6–2) – PCV– (E13–1) A81460 Specified condition Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No.) PCV+ (S6–1) or PCV+ (E13–2) – Body ground PCV– (S6–2) or PCV– (E13–1) – Body ground Specified condition No continuity E13 PCV+ PCV– ECM Connector A81089 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .3  at 20_C (68_F) NG A75346 REPLACE INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY (SUCTION CONTROL VALVE) (See page 11–69) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SUCTION CONTROL VALVE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side S6 PCV+ Disconnect the S6 suction control valve connector.05–656 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK INJECTION OR SUPPLY PUMP ASSY Suction Control Valve (a) Check the suction control valve for resistance. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector. Resistance: 1. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals.

05–657 DIAGNOSTICS 3 ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(PCV VOLTAGE) (a) (b) E13 PCV+ – Inspect using the oscilloscope. During cranking or idling. check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E13 ECM connector.) Specified condition PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1) Correct waveform is as shown PCV– ECM Connector A66060 10V/ Division 500mV/ Division PCV+ PCV– 5 msec./Division A82559 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Standard : Symbols (Terminal No.

05–658 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P1238 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ0–01 INJECTOR MALFUNCTION HINT:   For more information on the injector and the common rail system. see page 05–517. use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system. CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM detects combustion deterioration for specific cylinder. probably the injector is mechanical malfunction or insufficient compression (valve clearance.  If only DTC P1238 (Injector malfunction) is present.  Solenoid valve of the injector is the same type of the pressure discharge valve.  If DTC P0200 (Open or short in EDU or injector circuit) is present simultaneously. leakage malfunction of the cylinder probably be occurred. Injector Cross Section Diagram Solenoid Valve Piston Nozzle Needle A81504 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . see page 05–517. EDU and injector circuit. not an open or short malfunction of the ECM. there probably be faulty circuit located between the ECM and the injector including the EDU. HINT:  The cylinder that has compensation learned value for INJ VOL varies from other cylinders may be malfunctioning.  If DTC P0093 (Fuel leaks in high–pressure area) is present simultaneously. If P1238 is present. etc) has occurred.

The ECM monitors changes in the crankshaft rotation speed using the crankshaft position sensor for detecting poor combustion. either one of the cylinders has very poor combustion (Rough idle). Therefore. it identifies faulty cylinder using the camshaft position sensor.05–659 DIAGNOSTICS DTC No. the ECM sets this DTC. 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2. The fluctuation counter increments when irregular crankshaft rotation speed variation exceeds the threshold at idling. 50 to 100 MONITOR DESCRIPTION P1238 (Injection malfunction. WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P0200 on page 05–604. P1238 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC Detection Condition Main Trouble Area S Injector S EDU (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Open or short in engine wire (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Connector connection (P0200 is set simultaneously) S Compression pressure S Valve clearance Engine speed variation is large when idling. exclude open or short in injector circuit): This DTC will be set if the engine speed variations between each cylinder is large. MONITOR STRATEGY Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation Crankshaft position sensor Continuous 10 min. 2 driving cycles TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS Specification Item Minimum Engine Engine speed Engine coolant temperature Maximum At idling 500 rpm – 20_C (68_F) TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS Threshold The number of irregular changes in the crankshaft rotation speed HINT: The number of irregular changes in the crankshaft rotation speed indicates the insufficient combustion cylinder. Related Trouble Area S Valve timing S ECM HINT: After confirming DTC P1238. use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside the common rail in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”. Also. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx.

Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to Only P1238 is output A P1238 and other DTCs are output B HINT: If any other codes besides P1238 are output. Read the DTCs. etc. When troubleshooting. at the time of the malfunction. Read freeze frame data using     . first perform the troubleshooting for them. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) A 2 CHECK WIRE HARNESS AND CONNECTOR IN ENGINE ROOM HINT: Check the wire harness and connector connections.05–660 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:   If DTCs other than P1238 are present simultaneously. 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P1238) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. the engine was warmed up or not. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE . it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.

Result: STD – 3 to 3 mm3/st Maximum – 4.9 to 4. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST / INJECTOR CUT #1. Push the hand–held tester main switch ON.9 mm3/st Cylinders that have a compensation value which is outside of the specification range are considered to be faulty cylinders. #3 and #4”. the cylinder is malfunctioning). GO 5 CHECK CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE OF MALFUNCTION CYLINDER (See page 14–266) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE OK 6 CHECK VALVE CLEARANCE OF MALFUNCTION CYLINDER (See page 14–266) NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) ADJUST VALVE CLEARANCE (See page 14–270) . Start the engine. Use the following flowchart to inspect and repair the cylinder. Result: (d) Result Proceed to Faulty cylinder can not identified A Faulty cylinder can be identified B B Go to step 5 A 4 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) PERFORM ACTIVE TEST USING HAND–HELD TESTER(INJECTION CUT FOR MALFUNCTION CYLINDER) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / INJ VOLUME FB” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Check for the 4 cylinders in the sequence and then performs the power balance inspection to identify faulty cylinder (If there is no changes in the engine speed even though the fuel injection is cut off during idling. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. #2.05–661 DIAGNOSTICS 3 (a) (b) (c) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(COMPENSATION OF INJECTION QUANTIFY BETWEEN CYLINDERS FOR MALFUNCTION CYLINDER) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.

and confirm P1238 is not set again.05–662 DIAGNOSTICS 7 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ OUTPUT DTC (DTC P1238 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . let the engine idle for 10 minutes after it was warmed up. let the engine idle for 10 minutes after it was warmed up. and confirm P1238 is not set again. OK CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS (See page 05–528) NG 8 REPLACE INJECTOR ASSY (See page 11–60) GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1238 OUTPUT AGAIN) HINT: After clearing the DTC.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ECM controls the internal fuel pressure of the common rail by opening and closing the pressure discharge valve. Also. the pressure discharge valve opens when the ignition switch is turned OFF. see page 05–517. For more information on the EDU. If P1271 and/or P1272 are present. use the diagnostic trouble code matrix for fuel system. Pressure Discharge Valve Operation Under Sudden Deceleration Accelerator Pedal Opening Angle Open Close Open Pressure Discharge Valve Close w/o Pressure Discharge Valve Fuel Pressure w/ Pressure Discharge Valve Target Fuel Pressure Long Time Time A81485 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–663 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ1–01 DTC P1271 FUEL REGULATOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (EDU DRIVE) DTC P1272 FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR MALFUNCTION HINT:    For more information on the pressure discharge valve and the common rail system. therefore the ECM will open the valve temporarily to discharge the pressure inside the common rail. When sudden deceleration is occurred. see page 05–604. and the internal pressure is then promptly discharged. the internal fuel pressure will temporarily become higher than usual and combustion noise may result. see page 05–517.

Actual pressure decreasing rate deviates from the simulated pressure drop rate by the ECM after the ignition switch is turned OFF (2 trip detection).05–664 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) HINT: The solenoid valve of the pressure discharge valve is the same type of the injector solenoid valve. use the hand–held tester to confirm the fuel pressure inside common rail in the ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS”.  Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit  Open or short in pressure discharge valve itself  EDU  ECM P1272 Pressure discharge valve closed malfunction. DTC Detection condition Trouble Area P1271 Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit. 50 to 100 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit (P1271 is set simultaneously)  Pressure discharge valve  Supply pump  ECM HINT: After confirming DTC ”P1271 and/or P1272”. Pressure Discharge Valve Cross Section Diagram To Fuel Tank (Low Pressure) Valve Solenoid From Common Rail (High Pressure) A81505 DTC No. There is no valve opening confirmation signal (IJF) from EDU to ECM. despite the ECM sending valve opening command signal (PRD) after the engine has been started (1 trip detection). 30 to 40 Running the engine at 2.500 rpm (No engine load) Approx. Engine Speed Fuel Pressure (MPa) Idling Approx.

despite the ECM commanding the pressure discharge valve to open with the EDU. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. and the EDU interprets the IJF signal is low if the current exceeds the specified level. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. If the ECM judges the actual dropping rate is smaller than the simulation. therefore the malfunction that the valve is stuck open or closed can be excluded. the ECM compares the actual dropping rate of the internal fuel pressure and the simulated dropping rate. If this DTC is present. The fail–safe mode will continue until the ignition switch is turned OFF. This DTC refers to open or short malfunction of the pressure discharge valve circuit. the ECM enters fail–safe mode and limits the engine power. In this event.05–665 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) MONITOR DESCRIPTION P1271 (Open or short in pressure discharge valve circuit): This DTC will be set if there is no valve opening confirmation signal (IJF) from the EDU to the ECM. The EDU monitors the current supplied to the pressure discharge valve. P1271 Malfunction Detection Command Signal (PRD) ECM Confirmation Signal (IJF) EDU ON Pressure Discharge Valve PRD Command Signal OFF Abnormal Pressure Discharge Valve Confirmation Signal IJF Normal A81500 P1272 (Closed malfunction of the pressure discharge valve): The pressure discharge valve will open and discharge the internal fuel pressure of the common rail to the fuel tank when the ignition switch is turned OFF. the ECM then interprets this as the valve has stuck closed and set this DTC. and the EDU indicates that there is the current in the pressure discharge valve. This DTC detection will be activated if the internal fuel pressure does not drop below the specified level after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. 1 driving cycles . MONITOR STRATEGY P1271: Required sensors Frequency of operation Duration CHK ENG operation AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) EDU Continuous 3 sec. If this DTC is present.

despite the ECM sending the command signals regularly during decelerating P1272: Threshold If the internal pressure stays beyond the specified level after the ignition switch was turned OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . or fuel temp. 2 driving cycles TYPICAL ENABLING CONDITIONS P1271: Specification Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h with the 3 rd transmission gear and then decelerate it by completly releasing the accelerator pedal P1272: Item Specification Minimum Maximum 30 MPa (306 kgf/cm2.351 psi) – Fuel temperature 0_C – Battery voltage 11 V – Fuel pressure The monitor will not run if the fuel pressure sensor.05–666 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) P1272: Required sensors Fuel pressure sensor Frequency of operation Once per driving cycle Duration CHK ENG operation 1 sec. sensor is malfunctioning TYPICAL MALFUNCTION THRESHOLDS P1271: Threshold If the confirmation signals from the EDU is not present. or pressure discharge valve circuit. 4.

05–667 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM EDU 4 E5 PRD R–L ECM 32 E13 PRD R–L P3 Pressure Discharge Valve (Shielded) PRV 8 E5 W 1 EA1 W COM3 7 E4 B 2 EA1 B (Shielded) BR D J12 BR E J12 2 1 J/C E J13 BR D J13 EI A80999 PULSE GENERATION INSPECTION HINT: Problem area can be identified by inspecting waveform at the following inspection points. (P0200 is set simultaneously) .  Pressure discharge valve  EDU D (If A. Warning: Terminals COM3 and PRD are high–voltage EDU High–voltage Area PRD A B PRD PRV Pressure Discharge Valve ECM C IJF INJF D COM3 A81507 HINT: Inspect the following inspection points ”A and D” or ”B and C” at the same time. C (If A and B are normal)  Open or short in ”PRV (EDU)” – ”COM3 (EDU)” circuit. B and C are normal) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  Open or short in ”IJF (EDU)” – ”INJF (ECM)” circuit. Malfunction point A Trouble area  ECM B (If A is normal)  Open or short in ”PRD (ECM)” – ”PRD (EDU)” circuit.

confirm P1271 and/or P1272 is not set again. there is open in the INJF wire harness between the EDU and ECM. etc. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to ”Only DTC P1271” or ”P1271 and P1272” are output A Only DTC P1272 is output B B A AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 8 . Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. at the time of the malfunction. 5 V/ Division PRD – Inspection point Specified condition A and B Correct waveform is as shown 20 msec. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DTC INFO / CURRENT CODES”.  1 (a) (b) (c) (d) READ OUTPUT DTC(DTC P1271 AND/OR P1272) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Read the DTCs. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left.05–668 DIAGNOSTICS (a) Signal Waveform ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. or there is open in the wire harness for both of the injector the pressure discharge valve. If P0200 and P1271 are present simultaneously. The correct waveform is as shown in the diagram on the left. When troubleshooting./Division A81513 (b) Signal Waveform Reference: Inspect using the oscilloscope. 5 V/ Division INJF Inspection point Specified condition C and D Correct waveform is as shown 20 msec./Division A82882 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT:   After completing repair. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. the engine was warmed up or not.

85 to 1. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.05  at 20_C (68_F) NG A82883 REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 14–286) OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE – EDU) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side E4 Disconnect the E4 and E5 EDU connectors.) COM3 (E4–7) – COMG (P3–2) COM3 EDU Connector PRV (E5–8) – #G (P3–1) A81461 Continuity Standard (Check for short): Symbols (Terminal No. (1) Measure the resistance between the terminals.) COM3 (E4–7) or COMG (P3–2) – Body ground Wire Harness Side PRV (E5–8) or #G (P3–1) – Body ground E5 PRV EDU Connector Specified condition Specified condition No continuity A81462 Wire Harness Side P3 #G COMG Pressure Discharge valve Connector OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG A81694 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Disconnect the P3 pressure discharge valve connector.05–669 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT COMMON RAIL ASSY (PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (a) Pressure Discharge Valve Check the pressure discharge valve for resistance. Resistance: 0. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector.

Voltage: Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition PRD (E5–4) – PRD–(E13–32) Continuity Standard (Check for short): A81462 Symbols (Terminal No. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the EDU connector. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition PRD (E5–4) or PRD (E13–32) – Body ground No continuity E13 PRD ECM Connector A81089 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 5 INSPECT INJECTOR DRIVER(BATTERY VOLTAGE) Wire Harness Side BATTERY (+) E4 EDU Connector (a) (b) (c) Disconnect the E4 and E5 EDU connectors. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connector. Disconnect the E13 ECM connector.) Specified condition BATTERY (E4–8) – GND (E5–1) 9 to 14 V A56874 Wire Harness Side E5 GND (–) EDU Connector OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A80994 NG CHECK INJECTOR DRIVER POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT (EDU – BATTERY) .05–670 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(EDU – ECM) (a) (b) (c) Wire Harness Side E5 PRD EDU Connector Disconnect the E5 EDU connector. Turn the ignition switch ON.

500 rpm for 10 seconds and then decrease to idle speed with accelerator pedal completely released. and then confirm P1272 is not set again. 5 V/ Division PRD 20 msec. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Standard: Symbols (Terminal No./Division A81513 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK 7 REPLACE INJECTOR DRIVER GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1271 AND/OR P1272) HINT: P1271: After clearing the DTC. then confirm P1271 is not set again. and check the waveform between the specified terminals of the E12 and E13 ECM connectors.) Specified condition PRD (E13–4) – E1 (E12–7) Correct waveform is as shown HINT: It may be that the following method is the alternative inspection: Run the engine at 2. drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal. and restart the engine and then turn the ignition switch OFF.05–671 DIAGNOSTICS 6 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(PRD VOLTAGE) E13 PRD (a) (b) E12 E1 ECM Connector A66060 Signal Waveform Inspect using the oscilloscope. turn the ignition switch OFF after the engine was started. P1272: After clearing the DTC. Drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal.

then confirm P1271 is not set again. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. and restart the engine and then turn the ignition switch OFF. drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal. Start the engine. turn the ignition switch OFF after the engine was started. P1272: After clearing the DTC. drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 mph) with the 3rd transmission gear and then decelerate by releasing the accelerator pedal. then confirm P1271 is not set again. P1272: After clearing the DTC. Check if the internal fuel pressure of the common rail drops below approximately 5 MPa within approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned OFF at idling.05–672 DIAGNOSTICS 8 (a) (b) (c) (d) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. and then confirm P1272 is not set again. and restart the engine and then turn the ignition switch OFF. A 9 REPLACE COMMON RAIL ASSY(PRESSURE DISCHARGE VALVE) (See page 11–78) GO CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1271 AND/OR P1272) HINT: P1271: After clearing the DTC. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / COMN RAIL PRESS” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . and then confirm P1272 is not set again. Result: (e) Pressure Displayed Proceed to 5 MPa or more A 5 MPa or less B B CHECK DTC OUTPUT RECUR (DTC P1271 AND/ OR P1272) HINT: P1271: After clearing the DTC. turn the ignition switch OFF after the engine was started.

P1601 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  Injector compensation value is not registered (1 trip detection logic)  Wrong injector compensation value is registered (1 trip detection logic)  Injector compensation code  ECM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . etc.05–673 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P1601 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ2–01 INJECTOR CORRECTION CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (EEPROM) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. When troubleshooting. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. the engine was warmed up or not. at the time of the malfunction. 1 CHECK INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE (See page 05–528) NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) SET INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE (See page 05–528) .

05–674 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ3–01 DTC P2120 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT DTC P2125 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”E” CIRCUIT DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”E” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”E” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D”/”E” VOLTAGE CORRELATION HINT: This is procedure of accelerator pedal position sensor. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Movable Range Movable Range Usable Range *1: Accelerator pedal released (15) Usable Range *1 *2: Accelerator pedal depressed (about 100) Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Output Voltage (V) *2 *1 5 VPA2 *2 0.05–675 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: This electrical throttle system does not use a throttle cable. The ECM judges the current accelerator pedal opening angle with the signals from terminals VPA1 and VPA2. In the accelerator pedal position sensor. the voltage applied to pedal terminals VPA1 and VPA2 of the ECM changes between 0 V and 5 V in proportion to the opening angle of the accelerator pedal. The accelerator pedal position sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal bracket and it has the 2 sensors to detect the accelerator position and a malfunction of the accelerator position sensor. The VPA1 is a signal to indicate the actual accelerator pedal opening angle which is used for the engine control.8 VPA1 0 EP2 VPA1 VPA2 VCP2 VCP1 *1 105 125 Usable Range *2 EP1 Accelerator Pedal Opening Angle (deg) A71015 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . and the ECM controls the throttle motor based on these signals. and the VPA2 is a signal to indicate the information about the opening angle which is used for detecting a malfunction.

1 V 0V 2.5 to 1.45 V P2127 Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 0.5 sec.8 V P2125 Condition (a) continues for 0.6 V 0V EP circuit open 5V 5V 5V 5V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .5 V (b) VPA greater than 0.5 to 2.5 V VPA2 circuit open or ground short 0. or more: (a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 less than 0.2 V but les than 3. Trouble Area P2120 Condition (a) continues for 0.8 V (b) VPA greater than 0. Accelerator pedal position expressed as voltage output Trouble area Accelerator pedal released ACCEL POS #1 Accelerator pedal depressed ACCEL POS #2 ACCEL POS #1 ACCEL POS #2 VC circuit open 0V 0V 0V 0V VPA circuit open or ground short 0V 1. P2123.0 sec. or more: (a) VPA greater than 4. P2127. or VPA2 greater than 4. use the hand–held tester to confirm the accelerator pedal position sensor output voltage.0 sec. or more: (a) VPA less than 0. or VPA greater than 4.5 sec.5 to 4. or more: (a) VPA2 greater than 4.97 deg P2128 Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 2.5 sec.05–676 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) DTC Detecting Condition DTC No.97 deg.2 V (b) VPA2 greater than 0.45 V P2138  Open or short in accelerator pedal position sensor circuit  Accelerator pedal position sensor  ECM Condition (a) or (b) continues for 2.8 V and VPA greater than 0. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.5 V HINT: After confirming ”DTC P2120.0 sec.9 V 0V 3. or more: (a) VPA2 less than 0.97 deg P2123 Condition (a) continues for 2.2 V and VPA2 less than 0. or more: (a) VPA less than 0.8 V P2122 Conditions (a) and (b) continue for 0. P2128 and P2138”.2 V but less than 3.5 sec.02 V (b) VPA less than 0. P2122.5 V and VPA greater than 0.2 V and VPA2 greater than 0.97 deg.5 to 5. P2125.

Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. the engine was warmed up or not. etc.05–677 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) WIRING DIAGRAM A20 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 6 (LHD) VCP1 4 (RHD) 5 (LHD) VPA1 5 (RHD) 3 (LHD) EP1 1 (RHD) 4 (LHD) VCP2 6 (RHD) 2 (LHD) VPA2 2 (RHD) 1 (LHD) EP2 3 (RHD) ECM B (LHD) B (RHD) G (LHD) G (RHD) Y (LHD) Y (RHD) B (LHD) B (RHD) W (LHD) W (RHD) Y (LHD) 5 IG2 6 IG2 1 IG2 7 IG2 2 IG2 3 IG2 B (LHD) G (LHD) Y (LHD) B (LHD) W (LHD) Y (LHD) 26 VCPA E9 22 VPA E9 28 E9 EPA 27 VCP2 E9 23 VPA2 E9 29 E9 EPA2 Y (RHD) A76878 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. at the time of the malfunction. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . When troubleshooting.

5 to 2.5 to 1.) RHD Resistance EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4) Accelerator Pedal Assy 2 25 to 4.1 V 1.6 V 3.5 V Released FI7052 OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) NG 2 INSPECT ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY(ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR) LHD EP2 VCP2 Accelerator Pedal Assy (a) 3 2 1 6 5 4 (b) Disconnect the accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Turn the ignition switch ON.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6) VCP2 EP2 3 6 2 1 5 4 VCP1 EP1 A82236 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY (See page 10–66) . Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ETCS / ACCEL POS #1 and ACCEL POS #2” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester.25 4 75 k at 20_C (68_F) EP2 (1) – VCP2 (4) Standard (RHD): EP1 VCP1 Symbols (Terminal No. Standard (LHD): Symbols (Terminal No.9 V Depressed 2.5 to 4.5 to 5.) Resistance EP1 (3) – VCP1 (6) 2 25 to 4. Standard: Accelerator pedal ACCEL POS #1 ACCEL POS #2 Released 0.05–678 DIAGNOSTICS 1 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(ACCEL POS #1 AND ACCEL POS #2) (a) (b) (c) Depressed Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.75 2. Measure the resistance between each terminal.75 2.

5 to 2.5 to 5.05–679 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(VCPA AND VCP2 VOLTAGE) VCPA (+) EPA2 (–) E9 (a) (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.5 V EPA (–) ECM Connector NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) A66060 OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) .) Symbols (Terminal No.9 V Depressed 2.5 4.6 V 3. Symbols (Terminal No. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 ECM connector.5 55V EPA (–) VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (+) ECM Connector A66060 NG REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) OK 4 INSPECT ECM(VPA AND VPA2 VOLTAGE) VPA2 (+) VPA (+) E9 EPA2 (–) (a) (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.5 to 1.5 to 4.) Specified condition VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28) 4 5 to 5. Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 ECM connector.1 V 1.) Accelerator pedal position VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28) VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29) Released 0.

Standard (LHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.) A20 VCP1 VPA1 VCP2 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Connector Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) or VPA (E9–22) – Body ground EP1 (A20–3) or EPA (E9–28) – Body ground A54384 VCP1 (A20–6) or VCPA (E9–26) – Body ground VPA2 (A20–2) or VPA2 (E9–23) – Body ground No continuity EP2 (A20–1) or EPA2 (E9–29) – Body ground VCP2 (A20–4) or VCP2 (E9–27) – Body ground E9 VPA Standard (RHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No. Disconnect E9 the ECM connector.) VCPA VPA2 EP1 (A20–1) – EPA (E9–28) VCP1 (A20–4) – VCPA (E9–26) ECM Connector Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) EPA2 EPA VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) VCP2 A81091 Continuity EP2 (A20–3) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–6) – VCP2 (E9–27) (Check for Short) Symbols (Terminal No. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) or VPA (E9–22) – Body ground EP1 (A20–1) or EPA (E9–28) – Body ground VCP1 (A20–4) or VCPA (E9–26) – Body ground VPA2 (A20–2) or VPA2 (E9–23) – Body ground No continuity EP2 (A20–3) or EPA2 (E9–29) – Body ground VCP2 (A20–6) or VCP2 (E9–27) – Body ground NG OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–680 DIAGNOSTICS 5 ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR – ECM) Wire Harness Side EP2 VPA2 LHD A20 – (a) EP1 (b) (c) VCP2 VPA1 VCP1 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Connector Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector.) Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) A54384 EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28) Wire Harness Side EP1 VPA2 RHD VCP1 (A20–6) – VCPA (E9–26) VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) EP2 Continuity EP2 (A20–1) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–4) – VCP2 (E9–27) (Check for Short) Symbols (Terminal No.

75 2.75 2. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Conditions (a) and (B) continue for 0. DTC No. INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using the hand–held tester. 1 INSPECT ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY(ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR) LHD EP2 VCP2 Accelerator Pedal Assy (a) 3 2 1 6 5 4 (b) Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.) RHD Resistance EP1 (1) – VCP1 (4) Accelerator Pedal Assy 2 25 to 4.5 sec.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (1) – VCP2 (4) Standard (RHD): EP1 VCP1 Symbols (Terminal No. Standard (LHD): Symbols (Terminal No.: (a) Difference between VPA and VPA2 exceeds the threshold (b) IDL is OFF P2121  Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit  Accelerator pedal position sensor  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM Refer to DTC P2120 on page 05–492.) Resistance EP1 (3) – VCP1 (6) 2 25 to 4. at the time of the malfunction.25 4 75 k at 20C (68F) EP2 (3) – VCP2 (6) VCP2 EP2 3 2 1 6 5 4 VCP1 EP1 A82236 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY (See page 10–66) . etc. the engine was warmed up or not. Measure the resistance between each terminal. When troubleshooting.05–681 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P2121 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ4–01 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH ”D” CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Refer to DTC P2120 on page 05–492. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. the air–fuel ratio was lean or rich.

Measure the voltage between the specified terminals of the E9 ECM connector.1 V 1.9 V Depressed 2.) A20 VCP1 VPA1 VCP2 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Connector Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) or VPA (E9–22) – Body ground EP1 (A20–3) or EPA (E9–28) – Body ground A54384 VCP1 (A20–6) or VCPA (E9–26) – Body ground VPA2 (A20–2) or VPA2 (E9–23) – Body ground No continuity EP2 (A20–1) or EPA2 (E9–29) – Body ground E9 VCP2 (A20–4) or VCP2 (E9–27) – Body ground VPA2 VPA Standard (RHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No.6 V 3. Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.) EPA2 VCPA VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) EP1 (A20–1) – EPA (E9–28) VCP1 (A20–4) – VCPA (E9–26) ECM Connector EPA VCP2 A81091 VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) EP2 (A20–3) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–6) – VCP2 (E9–27) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Specified condition Continuity .) Symbols (Terminal No. Standard (LHD): (Check for open) Symbols (Terminal No. Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.) A54384 Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) – VPA (E9–22) EP1 (A20–3) – EPA (E9–28) Wire Harness Side EP1 VPA2 RHD VCP1 (A20–6) – VCPA (E9–26) VPA2 (A20–2) – VPA2 (E9–23) EP2 Continuity EP2 (A20–1) – EPA2 (E9–29) VCP2 (A20–4) – VCP2 (E9–27) (Check for Short) Symbols (Terminal No.05–682 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT ECM(VPA AND VPA2 VOLTAGE) VPA (+) VPA2 (+) E9 EPA2 (–) EPA (–) ECM Connector A66060 (a) (b) Turn the ignition switch ON.5 to 4.5 to 5.5 to 1.5 V OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) NG 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR – ECM) Wire Harness Side EP2 VPA2 LHD A20 (a) EP1 (b) (c) VCP2 VPA1 VCP1 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Connector Disconnect the A20 accelerator pedal position sensor connector. Symbols (Terminal No.5 to 2.) Accelerator pedal position VPA (E9–22) – EPA (E9–28) VPA2 (E9–23) – EPA2 (E9–29) Released 0.

) Specified condition VPA1 (A20–5) or VPA (E9–22) – Body ground EP1 (A20–1) or EPA (E9–28) – Body ground VCP1 (A20–4) or VCPA (E9–26) – Body ground VPA2 (A20–2) or VPA2 (E9–23) – Body ground No continuity EP2 (A20–3) or EPA2 (E9–29) – Body ground VCP2 (A20–6) or VCP2 (E9–27) – Body ground NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSY (See page 10–66) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–683 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (Check for Short) Symbols (Terminal No.

When troubleshooting. correct the injection timing. DTC No. the injection volume and the amount of common rail internal fuel pressure and then they create optimum combustion. P2226 P2228 P2229 DTC Detection Condition ECM malfunction (1 trip detection logic) Trouble Area  ECM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. etc. Followed by the atmospheric pressure. REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the engine was warmed up or not. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected. at the time of the malfunction.05–684 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ5–01 DTC P2226 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Detect the atmospheric pressure using the atmospheric pressure sensor.

DTC No. When troubleshooting. Followed by the atmospheric pressure. 1 (a) CHECK OTHER DTC OUTPUT(BESIDES DTC P2227) Read the DTC using the hand–held tester. the injection volume and the amount of common rail internal fuel pressure and then they create optimum combustion. Freeze frame data records the engine conditions when a malfunction is detected.05–685 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P2227 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CQ6–01 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Detect the atmospheric pressure using the atmospheric pressure sensor. at the time of the malfunction. the engine was warmed up or not. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped. Result: Display (DTC output) Proceed to P2227 and other DTCs are output A Only P2227 is output B HINT: If any other codes besides P2227 are output. perform the troubleshooting for those DTCs first. B REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) A GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–544) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . P2227 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction (2 trip detection logic)  ECM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Read freeze frame data using     . etc. correct the injection timing.

while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–544). It also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. The OBD scan tool or hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check the freeze frame data and various forms of engine data. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic* to prevent erroneous detection.05–528 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPB–01 PRE–CHECK 1. the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO 15031–4 are recorded in the ECM memory (See page 05–544). By switching the ECM to the check mode using hand– held tester when troubleshooting. In addition to an illumination of the CHK ENG when a malfunction is detected. and to ensure a thorough malfunction detection. a technician can cause the CHK ENG to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand– held tester only) (See step 3). . The diagnosis system operates in the normal mode during normal vehicle use. and read the various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect an OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or a hand–held tester to the vehicle. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO.  Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the check engine warning light (CHK ENG) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system / components or in the power train control components which affect vehicle emissions. If the malfunction does not reoccur in 3 consecutive trips.) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. or a malfunction in the computer. (For operating instructions. connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle.   DLC3 A76859  AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) To check the DTCs. see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book. the CHK ENG goes off automatically but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. (a) FI2547 Hand–held Tester DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD  When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles.

the engine was warmed up or not. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle. it is useful for determining whether the vehicle was running or stopped.) when the malfunction is detected. Check the DLC3. etc. this second detection causes the CHK ENG to illuminate (2nd trip) (However.  Priorities for troubleshooting: If troubleshooting priorities for multiple DTCs are given in the applicable DTC chart.  Freeze frame data: The freeze frame data records the engine conditions (fuel system. the pending fault code is stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–03 and matches the ISO 9141–2 format. there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. When troubleshooting. inspect the DLC3 on the original vehicle. the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and 2nd trip).05–529 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV)  (b) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 * 2 trip detection logic When a logic malfunction is first detected. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2(Euro–OBD) communication protocol. calculator load. engine coolant temperature. DLC3 A04550 Terminal No. the problem is probably in the tool itself. If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test. vehicle speed. turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand–held tester.  If communication is still impossible when the tool is connected to another vehicle. these should be followed. engine speed. at the time of the malfunction. so consult the Service Deparment listed in the tool’s instruction manual. Connection / Voltage or Residence Condition 7 Bus + Line / Pulse generation+ During transmission 4 Chassis Ground – Body Ground / 1  or less Always 16 Battery Positive – Body Ground / 9 to 14 V Always HINT: If the display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3. etc.

(1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. and then write them down. the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. If the lamp remains on. (3) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and freeze frame data and then write them down. (d) Check the CHK ENG. recharge the battery before proceeding. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions. the CHK ENG should go off. it means that the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. (4) See page 05–544 to confirm the details of the DTCs. Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. 2.) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and ETCS fuses from the engine room R/B for more than 60 seconds. always check the DTCs and freeze frame data. (2) When the engine is started. . HINT: If the CHK ENG is not illuminate. Battery voltage: 11 to 14 V If voltage is below 11V. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes. Hand–held Tester (a) DLC3 A76859 (b) (c) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. If you need help with the hand–held tester. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. (1) The CHK ENG lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. refer to the hand–held tester’s instruction book). it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in the normal mode.05–530 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (c) Inspect the battery voltage. troubleshoot the combination meter. DTC CHECK (Normal Mode): NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from the normal mode to the check mode. So before switching modes.

(6) Start the engine. (5) 0.) .  Transmission in the ”N” position.05–531 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 3.13 Sec A76900 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Switch the hand–held tester from the normal mode to the check mode. the DTCs and freeze frame data will be erased. DTC CHECK (Check Mode): HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode. (4) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester main switch ON. HINT: Be sure not to turn the ignition switch OFF. (The CHK ENG goes off after the engine start. use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTC. the check mode has more sensing ability to detect malfunctions. etc. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa. (8) After simulating the malfunction conditions. inspect the applicable circuit.13 Sec ON OFF 0. (9) After checking the DTC. Furthermore.13 sec intervals as shown in the illustration. because the diagnosis system is changed from the check mode to the normal mode and will result in all of the DTCs and freeze frame data being erased.  A/C switched OFF. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester: (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode. The CHK ENG blinks in 0. (a) Procedure for Check Mode using the hand–held tester. (1) Check the initial conditions. (3) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. the same diagnostic items which are detected in the normal mode can also be detected in the check mode. etc.  Battery positive voltage 11V or more. (3) When operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes.) (7) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.  Throttle valve fully closed. (See the hand–held tester’s instruction book for operating instructions.

sensor operates normal and intake air temp. sensor is substituted When fuel temp. is fixed at 145_C (293_F) Return to normal condition P0105 P0107 P0108 Turbo pressure is set at fixed value Return to normal condition P0115 P0117 P0118 When fuel temp. CHECK FOR INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS Hand–held tester only: By putting the vehicle’s ECM in the check mode. value of fuel temp. FAIL–SAFE CHART If any of the following codes are recorded. Fail–Safe Operation Fail–Safe Deactivation Conditions P0087 VTA is fixed at 10 % Ignition switch OFF P0088 VTA is fixed at 10 % Ignition switch OFF P0093 After fail safe driving control is performed for 1 minute. 4. engine stalls Ignition switch OFF P0095 P0097 P0098 Intake air temp. DTC No. value is fixed at 120_C (248_F) When the fuel temp. (a) Clear the DTCs (See step 2). is more than 20_C (68_F). (b) Set the check mode (See step 3). is less than 15_C (59_F). and the sensitivity to detect faults is increased. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . sensor is abnormal.05–532 DIAGNOSTICS (c) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Clearing the DTCs not using the hand–held tester: (1) Disconnect the battery terminal or remove the EFI and ETCS fuses from the engine room R/B for more than 60 seconds. sensor operates normal and intake air temp. the 1 trip detection logic is possible instead of the 2 trip detection logic. the ECM enters the fail–safe mode. is fixed at 40_C (104_F) Return to normal condition P0190 P0191 P0192 P0193 VTA is fixed at 10 % Ignition switch OFF P0200 VTA is fixed at 25 % Ignition switch OFF P0335 Output limit Return to normal condition P0488 VTA is fixed at 25 % Ignition switch OFF P0500 Vehicle speed is fixed at 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle speed less than 10 km/h (6 mph) P1229 VTA is fixed at 10 % Ignition switch OFF P1271 VTA is fixed at 25 % Ignition switch OFF P1272 VTA is fixed at 25 % Ignition switch OFF P2120 P2122 P2123 P2125 P2127 P2128 P2138 Output limit Ignition switch OFF 5. This makes it easier to detect intermittent problems. value is fixed at 40_C (104_F) Return to normal condition P0168 Output limit Return to normal condition P0180 P0182 P0183 Fuel temp.

: 0 rpm.: 0 km/h.9 gm/s PIM Absolute pressure inside intake manifold/ Min. COMN RAIL PRESS Common rail pressure status/ Min.: 255 km/h Actual vehicle speed Speed indicated on speedometer THROTTLE POS Throttle step position status/ Min.0 gm/s: S Mass air flow meter power source circuit open S VG circuit open or short If the valve is 160 gm/s or more: S E2G circuit open MAF Air flow rate from MAF sensor status/ Min.: 255 MPa Idling: 30 to 40 MPa ACCEL POSITION AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”.: 0_CA.1 to 18. Max. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester.: 1 step. (e) Wiggle the harness and connector (See page 01–32). VEHICLE SPD Vehicle speed/ Min. read the ”DATA LIST”.75 rpm Idling: 750 to  rpm  If the value is Approximately 0. (d) Check the connector and terminal (See page 01–32). (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF.: 655. (g) According to the display on tester. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester.: 215 _C Equivalent to Ambient Temp.: 255 kPa Idling: 85 to 110 kPa COOLANT TEMP Coolant temperature/ Min. Hand–held Tester Display INJ VOLUME INJ TIMING ENGINE SPD MeasurementItem/Range (Display) Normal Condition * Diagnostic Note Injection volume/ Min. actuators and so on without parts removal.: 1279.: –40 _C. you can read the value of the switches.500 rpm): 13.: –40 _C. A vehicle may still be normal even if its value differs from those listed here.98 mm3 Idling: 3 to 10 mm3  Injection timing/ Min. Max. Max. sensors.05–533 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (c) Perform a simulation test (See page 01–22).: 100 % S Accelerator pedal released: 10 to 22 % S Accelerator pedal depressed: 52 to 90 % Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine). Max. Do not solely depend on the ”Normal Condition” here when deciding whether a part is faulty or not. Max.: 16383.: 215 _C Actual fuel temp. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.: 255 step S Throttle fully closed: 1 step S Throttle fully open: 255 step Read the value with ignition switch ON (Do not start engine).7 gm/s S Running without load (2. Max.: 0 MPa.: 0 mm3.: –40 _C. (a) Warm up the engine.: 215 _C After warming up: 80 to 95C (176 to 203 INTAKE AIR Intake air temperature/ Min.: 0 %.: 0 gm/s. Max. Max. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST”. Max.2 to 4. sensor circuit is open or shorted shorted. Max. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON.: 0 kPa.  . FUEL TEMP Fuel temperature status/ Min.: 51_CA Idling: –1 to 5CA  Engine speed/ Min.35 gm/s S Idling: 3. 6. Reading the DATA LIST as a first step of troubleshooting is one method to shorten diagnostic time. Max. Max. NOTICE: The values given below for ”Normal Condition” are representative values. Accel position status/ Min.

: –10 mm3.0 to 3. VSV. Max.: –10 mm3.535 us Idling: 0 us  PILOT–INJ Pilot–Injection/ Min. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Max.: –10 mm3. Max. 7. Max. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON.: 65. actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. Max.: 40 mm3 Idling: –3. sensor circuit is open or shorted. (f) Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / ACTIVE TEST” AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Max.092 mm3 Idling: –4.: 255 _CA Idling: 70 to 90CA  M–INJ/PILOT ON M–INJ/PILOT ON/ Min.535 us Idling: 400 to 700 us  Injection volume feedback learning value/ Min.: 40 mm3 Idling: –3.: 40 mm3 Idling: –3.: –40 _C.535 us Idling: 600 to 1. (e) Push the ”ON” button of the hand–held tester.0 to 3.0 mm3  Stop light switch/ ON or OFF S Brake pedal depressed: ON S Brake pedal released: OFF  STARTER SIG Starter signal/ ON or OFF Cranking: ON  AMBI TEMP SENS INJ FB VALUE STOP LIGHT SW A/C CUT SIG A/C cut signal/ ON or OFF A/C ON: OFF  EGR SYSTEM EGR system status/ ON or OFF Idling: ON  ACCEL OPEN SW Accel open switch/ ON or OFF Accelerator pedal fully opened: ON  CHECK MODE Check mode/ ON or OFF Check mode ON: ON  EGR STEP POS EGR step position status/ Min: 0 step.200 us  M–INJ/PILOT OFF M–INJ/PILOT OFF/ Min.: 40 mm3 Idling: –3.: –10 mm3. Max.: 9.: 65.: 0 us.0 mm3  INJ VOL FB #3 Revised injection volume of the cylinder 3/ Min.05–534 DIAGNOSTICS Hand–held Tester Display MeasurementItem/Range (Display) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Normal Condition * Diagnostic Note If the value is ”–40 _C” or ”140 _C”.: 215 _C Actual atmosphere INJ VOL FB #1 Revised injection volume of the cylinder 1/ Min.: 0 us. it means the A/C switch is OFF and all accessory switches are OFF. (a) Warm up the engine.: 0 us.: 0 _CA.0 mm3  INJ VOL FB #2 Revised injection volume of the cylinder 2/ Min.0 mm3  PUMP VCM ANGLE Pump vacuum angle status/ Min. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay. Max. Ambient temperature sensor status/ Min. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. Max.0 to 3.0 mm3  INJ VOL FB #4 Revised injection volume of the cylinder 4/ Min.: 65. Max. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF.0 to 4.0 to 3. Max: 125 step Idling: 0 to 125 step  *: If no conditions are specifically stated for ”ldling”. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as a first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten diagnostic time.: –10 mm3.

Max: 125 step  [Test Details] Connect the TC and TE1 ON or OFF  FUEL LEAK TEST [Test Details] Fuel leak test ON or OFF  INJECTOR CUT #1 [Test Details] Injector cut #1 ON or OFF  INJECTOR CUT #2 [Test Details] Injector cut #2 ON or OFF  INJECTOR CUT #3 [Test Details] Injector cut #3 ON or OFF  INJECTOR CUT #4 [Test Details] Injector cut #4 ON or OFF  EGR STEP POS TC/TE1 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Hand–held Tester Display Test Details Diagnostic Note [Test Details] Change step of EGR motor Min: 0 step. perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”.05–535 DIAGNOSTICS (g) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) According to the display on tester.

(c) Turn the main switch of the hand–held tester ON. NOTICE: Do not start the engine in this operation. Reading flowchart: Are you read the injector A81230 (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC 3. READ INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE HINT: This operation is useful when confirming the compensation code of each injector or when DTC P1601 is present. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–536 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 8.

(g) Select ”READ COMP VALUE” and press the ”ENTER” button. (j) Wait until the next screen comes up.05–537 DIAGNOSTICS (d) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (e) Enter ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” and select the item ”INJECTOR COMP. A80985 A66061 A66063 A66064 A66065 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .” Press the ”ENTER” button on the hand–held tester. Press the ”ENTER” button. (h) (i) Select a cylinder number which you want to read the compensation code. (f) Press the ”ENTER” button again.

HINT: The code shown in the illustration is an example.05–538 DIAGNOSTICS (k) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Confirm the 30–digit–alphanumeric code which is displayed on the hand–held tester.”  By pressing the ”NO” button. This is the injection compensation code for the cylinder. A66066 (m) Press the ”NO” button to complete the confirmation. A66067 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . HINT:  If you want to read other compensation codes for other cylinders. the hand–held tester returns to the ”DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” screen. (l) Press the ”ENTER” button to exit this screen. press the ”YES” button instead of ”NO.

05–539 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 9. (c) Turn the main switch of the hand–held tester ON. Setting flowchart: Register the injector compensation code other cylinders? (Set the injector compensation code) A81231 (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC 3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. NOTICE: Do not start the engine in this operation. SET INJECTOR COMPENSATION CODE HINT: This operation must be done when replacing the ECM or the injectors. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–540 DIAGNOSTICS (d) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (e) Enter ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” and select the item ”INJECTOR COMP. (g) Select ”SET COMP VALUE” and press the ”ENTER” button. A80985 A66061 A66062 A66068 (j) A66069 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .” Press the ”ENTER” button on the hand–held tester. (f) Press the ”Enter” button again. (h) Press the ”ENTER” button. Press the ”ENTER” button. (i) Select a cylinder number which you want to register the compensation code.

select the ”NO” button to correct the error (Back to step (g)). it may be a cause of the engine failure or short–life.05–541 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (k) A66070 Input the 30–digit–alphanumeric code with the hand– held tester to register the compensation code to the ECM. If a wrong code was set to the ECM. The compensation code which stored in the ECM must be consistent with the compensation code of the injector assembly. A66071 (n) A66072 HINT: The code shown in the illustration is an example. (p) A66073 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Confirm the injection compensation code which is displayed on the hand–held tester. .  If a wrong compensation code was entered on the hand–held tester. press the ”ENTER” button. Wait until the next screen comes up. rough idling or engine rattling may result. NOTICE: Be careful not to register a wrong compensation code to the ECM. (l) After inputting. In addition. (m) Press the ”ENTER” button again. NOTICE:  Make sure the correct compensation code is entered on the hand–held tester before pressing YES button. (o) Press the ”YES” button to set the code to the ECM.

NG Inside A66289 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CLEAN OR REPLACE . by carrying out the basic engine check shown in the following flow chart. then blow from the outside of the filter. NOTICE: If necessary. HINT:  If you want to register other compensation code for other cylinders. 1 CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE NOTICE: Carry out this check with the engine stopped and ignition switch OFF. clean the filter with compressed air. In many cases. press the ”YES” button instead of ”NO.05–542 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) (q) Press the ”NO” button to complete the registration. troubleshooting should be carried out in all the possible circuits considered as causes of the problem. using this check is essential in the engine troubleshooting. Therefore. the location causing the problem can be found quickly and efficiently.”  By pressing the ”NO” button. A66074 BASIC INSPECTION When the malfunction is not confirmed in the DTC check. First blow from the inside thoroughly. the hand–held tester returns to the ”DIAGNOSTIC MENU ECD” screen. Voltage NG OK NG 11 V or more Less than 11 V CHARGE OR REPLACE BATTERY OK 2 CHECK IF ENGINE WILL CRANK NG PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE 05–551 OK 3 CHECK AIR FILTER (a) Visually check that the air filter is not excessively dirty or oily.

05–543 DIAGNOSTICS 4 (a) (b) – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) CHECK FUEL QUALITY Check that only diesel fuel is used Check that the fuel does not contain any impurity. NG REPLACE FUEL OK 5 CHECK ENGINE OIL (See page 17–20) NG ADD OR REPLACE OK 6 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT (See page 16–37) NG REPLACE ENGINE COOLANT (See page 16–44) OK 7 CHECK IDLE SPEED AND MAXIMUM SPEED (See page 14–266) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE INJECTION PUMP (See page 11–69) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE NG REPAIR OR REPLACE VACUUM PUMP OK 8 CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT OK 9 CHECK VACUUM PUMP OK PROCEED TO PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE ON PAGE (See page 05–551) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

the ECM compensates such behavior by adjusting an injection time for each injector to optimize the fuel injection volume. The injection compensation code will be required to register to the ECM when replacing the injectors or the ECM. which has converted into a 30–digit–alphanumeric value. has been imprinted on a head potion of the injector as the injection compensation code. 3. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 2. Compensating data for the optimum injection volume. it may be a cause of the engine failure or short–life. If an incorrect injection compensation value was registered to the ECM.05–526 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05CPA–01 PRECAUTION 1. Since each injector has a characteristic fuel injecting behavior. the engine assembly may rattle or the engine idling may be rough. In addition.

5. EC power source circuit Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 05–686 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Incorrect first idle (Poor idling) 1. 6. STA signal circuit Injector Fuel filter Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle Glow plug system 05–691 11–56 11–82 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Difficult to start with a warm engine 1. 5. 4. Engine coolant temperature sensor 19–22 19–22 10–56 Difficult to start with a cold engine 1. 2. 4. Starter 3. STA signal circuit Injector Fuel filter Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 05–691 11–56 11–82 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Engine stalls soon after starting 1. Fuel filter Injector EC power source circuit EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 11–82 11–56 05–686 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Engine stalls (Other than conditions listed abobe) 1. Fuel filter Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor 11–82 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 High engine idle speed (Poor idling) 1. 3. 7. 3. Starter relay 4. 2. 6. 7. 3. 3. 4. 2. 2. 2. 8. 5. 3. 8. Symptom Suspect Area See page Does not crank (Difficult to start) 2.05–551 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054JF–04 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE When the malfunction code is not confirmed the DTC check and the problem still can not be confirmed in the basic inspection. 5. A/C signal circuit Injector STA signal circuit EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor 55–3 11–56 05–691 10–56 10–56 10–56 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 6. 6. 4. 2. 4. then proceed to this step and perform troubleshooting according to the numbered order given in the table below. 5. 6. 7. 3. 9. 5. 4.

3. Fuel pressure sensor 10. 3.05–552 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Lower engine idle speed (Poor idling) 1. 5. Injector Fuel filter EGR system Compression EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 11–56 11–82 12–16 14–266 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Knocking (Poor driveability) 1. 4. Injector 3. 5. 4. 2. Injector EC power source circuit Compression Fuel line (Air bleed) Valve clearance EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 11–56 05–686 14–266 – 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Hunting at cold engine (Poor idling) 1. Injector EGR system EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor 11–56 12–16 10–56 10–56 10–56 Black smoke (Poor driveability) 1.Diesel throttle 55–3 11–56 12–16 14–266 14–270 – 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Rough idling (Poor idling) 1. 8. 3. 6. Injector EC power source circuit Compression Fuel line (Air bleed) Valve clearance EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 11–56 05–686 14–266 – 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Hesitation/ Poor acceleration (Poor driveability) 1. 5. 5. 9. EC 8. 4. 7. 4. 8. 5. 3. 8. 2. 4. 7. 2. Valve clearance 6. 2. Compression 5. A/C signal circuit 2. 7. 7. 8. Fuel line (Air bleed) 7. Injector EGR system EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 11–56 12–16 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 2. 3. 5. Injector Fuel line (Air bleed) EGR system Compression Valve clearance EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 11–56 – 12–16 14–266 14–270 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Hunting at hot engine (Poor idling) 1. 4. 9. EGR system 4. 6. 9. 6. Supply pump 9. 2. 6. 6. 3.

2. 5. 3.05–553 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) White smoke (Poor driveability) 1. 6. 3. 4. 2. 7. 4. EGR system Injector Fuel filter EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor Diesel throttle 12–16 11–56 11–82 10–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 Surging/ Hunting (Poor driveability) 1. Injector EC Supply pump Fuel pressure sensor 11–56 10–56 10–56 10–56 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

3 B J13 7 3 W–B C J13 IK1 B B J12 FL MAIN B–R 1 S5 1 S4 9 DA J13 J/C 2 DJ B C Driver Side J/B A J12 B–Y Starter W–B Battery IJ A81016 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–691 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 05B5Y–02 STARTER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION HINT: While the engine is being cranked. 1 ST2 B–Y 5 5 STA 5 B–Y 5 AM2 7 E9 B–Y 4 AM2 1 2 ECM 6 1 Fuse Block ST Relay 1 ST 2 1A 6 2 3 Driver Side R/B B 5 5 B–Y B–W B–Y 3 B Engine Room R/B No. current flows from terminal ST2 of the ignition switch to the ST relay coil and also current flows to terminal STA of the ECM (STA signal). WIRING DIAGRAM I13 Ignition Switch B–R 1 1 IE4 IP1 (LHD) (RHD) B–R B–R B–R 1 1 Engine Room R/B No.

Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item ”DIAGNOSIS / OBD/MOBD / DATA LIST / ALL / STARTER SIG” and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. proceed to the problem symptoms table on page 05–551. Standard: Ignition Switch Position ON START STARTER SIG OFF ON OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–551) . If the engine is not cranked. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER(STA SIGNAL) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.05–692 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: This chart is on the premise that the engine is cranked normally.

) Specified condition ST relay (1) – STA (E9–7) Continuity Standard (Check for short): A65748 Symbols (Terminal No. Remove the ST relay from the driver side R/B. Standard (Check for open): Symbols (Terminal No.) Specified condition ST relay (1) or STA (E9–7) – Body ground No continuity Driver Side R/B LHD Starter Relay A79097 Driver Side R/B RHD Starter Relay A79098 OK REPLACE ECM (See page 10–65) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Check for continuity between the wire harness side connectors.05–693 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) INSPECT HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – ST RELAY) (a) (b) (c) E9 STA ECM Connector Disconnect the E9 ECM connector.

5 VG (E12–24) – EVG (E12–32) G – L–Y Idling 0.5 Brake pedal is released 7.0 or more IG switch on.5 Brake pedal is depressed 0 to 1. accelerator pedal fully released 0. at 80C (176F) 0.5 to 1.5 to 3. engine coolant temp.5 to 14 IG switch on. accelerator pedal fully depressed 3. accelerator pedal fully depressed 3.05–549 DIAGNOSTICS – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) 054KK–04 TERMINALS OF ECM E13 E12 E10 E9 A66714 Symbols (Terminal No.5 to 5.3 IG switch ON.5 to 3.5 to 14 IG switch ON 9 to 14 Idling 9 to 14 IG switch ON 0 to 3 SP1 (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7) V–W – BR IG switch ON.5 IG switch ON 4.0 STA (E9–7) – E1 (E12–7) B–Y – BR Cranking #1 (E13–24) – E1 (E12–7) #2 (E13 (E13–23) 23) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) #3 (E13–22) – E1 (E12–7) #4 (E13–21) – E1 (E12–7) G–W – BR W–R W R – BR R–W – BR W–L – BR Idling Pulse generation (See page 05–604) G1 (E12–23) – G– (E12–31) P–L Idling Pulse generation (See page 05–616) NE+ (E13–27) – NE– (E13–34) G–R Idling Pulse generation (See page 05–616) STP (E10–19) (E10 19) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) G W – BR G–W ST1 (E10–12) ST1– (E10 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) G W – BR G–W TC (E9–11) (E9 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) W L – BR W–L W (E9–12) (E9 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) W – BR 6.0 to 4.5 to 5. intake air temp. accelerator pedal fully released 0.5 VCP2 (E9–27) – EPA2 (E9–29) B–Y IG switch ON 4.4 THA (E13–31) – E2 (E13–28) G–R – BR Idling. brake pedal is released 0 to 1. brake pedal is depressed 7.0 VPA2 (E9–23) (E9 23) – EPA2 (E9 (E9–29) 29) W–Y VCPA (E9–26) – EPA (E9–28) B–Y IG switch ON 4.) Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage (V) BATT (E10–2) – E1 (E12–7) B–Y – BR Always 9 to 14 IGSW (E9–9) – E1 (E12–7) B–W – BR IG switch ON 9 to 14 +B (E9–1) – E1 (E12–7) B–W – BR IG switch ON 9 to 14 IG switch ON 9 to 14 MREL (E9–8) (E9 8) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) GR – BR VC (E13–18) – E1 (E12–7) R–W – BR VPA (E9–22) (E9 22) – EPA (E9–28) (E9 28) G–Y IG switch OFF 0 to 1. rotate driving wheel slowly Pulse generation (See page 05–640) SIL (E9–18) – E1 (E12–7) W–G – BR Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 Pulse generation AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .1 IG switch ON.5 IG switch ON.4 to 5.2 to 1.4 THW (E13–19) – E2 (E13–28) B–W – BR Idling.6 IG switch ON. at 20 C (68 F) 0.9 to 2.5 to 5.

3 to 1.4 PCR1 (E13–26) – E2 (E13–28) P – BR Idling 1.5 Idling Pulse generation IG switch ON 4.8 in.9 Applied positive pressure of 69kPa (0.5 to 3.0 psi) 3.5 ALT (E13–8) – E1 (E12–7) B–L – BR Idling Pulse generation RL (E12–9) (E12 9) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) Y – BR Idling 9 to 14 PCV+ (E13–2) – PCV– (E13–1) LG–R – LG IG switch ON Idling 0 to 3 Pulse generation (See page 05–563) PRD (E13–32) – E1 (E12–7) R–L – BR IG switch OFF INJF (E13–25) – E1 (E12–7) R–B – BR Idling Pulse generation (See page 05–604) EG+A (E12–6) – E1 (E12–7) EG–A EG A (E12 (E12–5) 5) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) EG+B (E12–4) ( ) – E1 (E12–7) ( ) EG–B (E12–3) – E1 (E12–7) G – BR Y G – BR Y–G R–L – BR G–B – BR Idling Pulse generation ((See page g 05–629)) LU+A (E13–15) – E1 (E12–7) LU–A LU A (E13 (E13–14) 14) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) LU+B ((E13–13)) – E1 ((E12–7)) LU–B (E13–12) – E1 (E12–7) B – BR G – BR Y – BR L – BR Racing Pulse generation ((See page g 05–633)) THOP (E13–11) (E13 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) P L – BR P–L VN (E13–10) – E1 (E12–7) W – BR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 4 to 6.8 IG switch OFF 9 to 14 Idling 0 to 1.1 PCR2 (E13–33) – E2 (E13–28) P–B – BR Idling 1. 11.8 Same as atmosphere 1.5 Cranking 9 to 14 Idling 0 to 1.2 to 1. intake air temp.5 to 5. at 80 C (176 F) 0.5 Idling 9 to 14 IG switch ON 0 to 3 IG switch ON Pulse generation (See page 05–554) .8 to 2.7 kg/cm3.2 to 3.4 THF (E13–29) – E2 (E13–28) L – BR IG switch ON 0. 10.5 Idling.5 Fan OFF 9 to 14 Fan ON 0 to 1. hg) 0.05–550 DIAGNOSTICS PIM (E12–28) ( ) – E2 (E13–28) ( ) W–R – BR IREL (E9 (E9–10) 10) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) Y – BR TACH (E9–5) – E1 (E12–7) GR–R – BR VCS (E12–2) – E1 (E12–7) R–W – BR GREL (E9–14) (E9 14) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) R – BR FAN (E9–3) (E9 3) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) W – BR THIA (E13–20) – E2 (E13–28) GR – BR – ECD SYSTEM (1CD–FTV) Applied negative pressure of 40 kPa (300 mmHg.5 to 3.2 to 0.

05–862 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567O–10 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK Transmission Control System Check Sheet Inspector’s Name : Registration No. Customer’s Name Registration Year / / Frame No. Date Vehicle Brought In / Date Problem Occurred How Often Does Problem Occur? / km mile Odometer Reading /  Continuous /  Intermittent (  Vehicle does not move (  Any range  No up–shift (  1st  2nd  No down–shift (  O/D  3rd times a day)  Particular range)  2nd  3rd  3rd  O/D )  3rd  2nd  2nd  1st )  No up–shift (S range)  No down–shift (S range) Symptoms  Lock–up malfunction  Shift point too high or too low  Harsh engagement (  N  D  Lock–up  Any drive range)  Slip or shudder  No kick–down  Others Check Item MIL Normal Remains ON 1st Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC ) 2nd Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC ) DTC Check AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the page given.05–876 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567Q–08 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check... *1 : – . MIL light up DTC No. (See Page) Detection Item Trouble Area  Combination meter  Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit  Vehicle speed sensor  ECM MIL * Memory         P0500/42 (05–240) Vehicle Speed Sensor ”A” P0710/38 (05–882) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit P0712/38 (05–882) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit Low Input P0713/38 (05–882) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit High Input P0717/37 (05–884) Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal  Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit  Speed sensor (NT)  ECM  Automatic transaxle assembly   P0748/62 (05–886) Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL1  ECM   P0778/63 (05–886) Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL2  ECM   P0793/67 (05–892) Intermediate Shaft Speed Sensor ”A”  Open or short in speed sensor (NC) circuit  Speed sensor (NC)  ECM   P0982/65 (05–886) Shift Solenoid ”D” Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)   P0983/65 (05–886) Shift Solenoid ”D” Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)   P2716/77 (05–894) Pressure Contorl Solenoid ”D” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT) –  P2769/64 (05–897) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL) –  P2770/64 (05–897) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL) –  AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit  ATF temperature sensor  ECM  Open or short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit  Shift solenoid l id valve l S4  ECM  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit  Shift solenoid valve SLT  ECM  Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit  Shift solenoid l id valve l DSL  ECM ... MIL does not light / .

make sure to check that there is no trouble in the multiplex communication system. When using hand–held tester. 1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–862) 3 Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 4 Check and Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–863) 5 Visual Inspection 6 Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis (See page 05–863) 7 Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 8 Symptom occur: Go to step 9 8 Symptom Simulation (See page 01–22) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Therefore.05–856 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 0567N–11 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: The ECM of this system is connected to the multiplex communication system. troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. before starting troubleshooting.

DIAGNOSTICS 9 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) DTC Check (See page 05–863) DTC is not output: Go to step 10 DTC is output: Go to step 17 10 Basic Inspection (See page 40–2. 40–8 and 40–69) NG Go to step 19 OK 11 Mechanical System Test (See page 05–863) NG Go to step 16 OK 12 Manual Shifting Test (See page 05–863) NG Go to step 14 OK 13 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 1 (See page 05–879) NG Go to step 18 OK 14 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 2 (See page 05–879) NG Go to step 16 OK 15 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 3 (See page 05–879) NG 16 Part Inspection Go to step 19 17 DTC Chart (See page 05–876) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05–857 .

1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–862) 3 Check and Clear DTCs (See page 05–863) 4 Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 5 Symptom occur: Go to step 6 5 Symptom Simulation (See page 01–22) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . troubleshoot in accordance with the procedure on the following pages.05–858 DIAGNOSTICS – 18 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–882) 19 Identification of Problem 20 Repair 21 Confirmation Test ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) End When not using hand–held tester.

40–8 and 40–69) NG Go to step 16 OK 8 Mechanical System Test (See page 05–863) NG Go to step 13 OK 9 Manual Shifting Test (See page 05–863) NG Go to step 11 OK 10 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 1 (See page 05–879) NG Go to step 15 OK 11 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 2 (See page 05–879) NG Go to step 13 OK 12 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 3 (See page 05–879) NG 13 Part Inspection Go to step 16 14 DTC Chart (See page 05–876) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05–859 .DIAGNOSTICS 6 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) DTC Check (See page 05–863) DTC is not output: Go to step 7 DTC is output: Go to step 14 7 Basic Inspection (See page 40–2.

05–860 DIAGNOSTICS – 15 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–882) 16 Identification of Problem 17 Repair 18 Confirmation Test End AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) .

the ECM disregards the kick–down signals and controls shifting at the normal shift points. WIRING DIAGRAM Center J/B 6 CA 6 CJ W–B 1 IG1 K2 Kick Down SW W–B 1 W 2 ECM 2 IG1 W 27 E9 KD *1 W–B IP *1: Europe spec G25416 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–908 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C92–01 KICK DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The kick–down switch is turned ON when the accelerator pedal is depressed to the full throttle and sends signals to ECM. If a short circuit develops in the kick–down switch. When the kick–down switch is turned ON. the ECM controls gear shifting according to the programmed shift diagrams.

OK: Kick–down switch Continuity ON Continuity OFF No continuity NG REPLACE KICK DOWN SWITCH OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND . Measure the voltage between terminal KD of ECM and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or not. Measure the continuity between terminals of the kick– down switch connector when kick–down switch is ON and OFF.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–909 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (a) (b) Turn the ignition switch to ON. OK: Accelerator pedal Voltage Fully depressed (Kick–down switch is ON) Below 1 V Released (Kick–down switch is OFF) 10 to 14 V KD H42584 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT KICK DOWN SWITCH (a) (b) D02350 Disconnect the kick–down switch connector.

DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–877 0567R–11 LOCATION Combination Meter (MIL) ECM DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Assy Europe spec: Kick–down Switch Shift Lock Control Unit (Transmission Control Switch) Shift Solenoid Valve SLT Speed Sensor (NT) Speed Sensor (NC) Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 Park/neutral Position Switch Assy Shift Solenoid Valve S4 Shift Solenoid Valve SL2 Shift Solenoid Valve DSL Transmission Wire (ATF Temperature Sensor) D30682 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–882 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) DTC P0710/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DTC P0712/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0713/38 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT 05C8T–01 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM.5 sec. when neither P0712 or P0713 is not detected (1–trip detection logic) (a) ATF temperature sensor resistance is less than 79  (b) ATF temperature sensor resistance is more than 156 k HINT: Wthin 0. the malfunction switches from (a) to (b) or from (b) to (a) P0712/38 ATF temperature sensor resistance is less than 79  for 0. DTC Detection Condition P0710/38 (a) and (b) is detected momentary within 0. or more (1–trip detection logic) P0713/38 DTC is detected for 0.5 sec. DTC No.5 sec.5 sec. or more (1–trip detection logic) ATF temperature sensor resistance is more than 156 k after started engine for 15 minutes or more Trouble Area  Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit  ATF temperature sensor  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM E1 ECT Solenoid ECM BR O E2 6 O V THO 28 E13 E2 1 30 E13 THO D26545 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 79  to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–883 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO (a) (b) (c) E2 C54864 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) THO E2 C95813 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: Resistance: 79  to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors.

the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NT < 300 rpm  Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit  Speed sensor (NT)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM T4 Turbine Speed Sensor 1 B–O 27 E12 NT+ B 35 E12 NT– 2 D26540 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (b).05–884 DTC DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8U–01 P0717/37 TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT) with the counter gear speed sensor signal (NC). DTC No. (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0717/37 ECM detects conditions (a).

Measure the resistance between terminals NT+ and NT–. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that NT+ as well as NT– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NT) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) NT+ (d) NT– C95812 Connect the speed sensor connector.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–885 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NT) (a) (b) C58536 Disconnect the speed sensor connector from the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

duty ratio is less than 3%  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL1  ECM P0778/63 ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valves SL2 (1–trip detection logic) (a) When solenoid is energized. duty ratio exceeds 75% (b) When solenoid is not energized.05–886 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8V–01 DTC P0748/62 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1) DTC P0778/63 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2) DTC P0982/65 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4) DTC P0983/65 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shifting from 1st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF operation of the shift solenoid valves SL1 and SL2 which are controlled by the ECM. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0748/62 ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valves SL1 (1–trip detection logic) (a) When solenoid is energized. duty ratio is less than 3%  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL2  ECM P0982/65 ECM detects short in solenoid valve S4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve S4 is operated (1–trip detection logic)  Short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S4  ECM P0983/65 ECM detects open in solenoid valve S4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve S4 is not operated (1–trip detection logic)  Open in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S4  ECM HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0748/62 is output. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the shift solenoid valves. duty ratio exceeds 75% (b) When solenoid is not energized. the ECM controls the remaining normal shift solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No. check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTC P0778/63 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0982/65 and P0983/65 is output.

Manual shifting as shown in the following table must be done (In case of a short circuit. and so it must be done manually. SL2 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 X X X 3rd 3rd X X X 3rd X 3rd X X X 3rd X 3rd X X X 3rd . The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF at the same time. SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 MALFUNCTIONING NORMAL Solenoid Valve Gear Solenoid Valve SL1 SL2 S4 ON ON OFF 1st X ON OFF 2nd OFF ON OFF 2nd X ON OFF 2nd OFF X OFF OFF OFF OFF 3rd X 3rd OFF X 3rd OFF X SL1 SL2 S4 Gear SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 ON OFF 3rd X OFF OFF OFF ON O/D X ON ON ON SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND SL2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 X 1st 3rd OFF ON X 2nd OFF 3rd OFF OFF X 3rd ON O/D OFF OFF X 3rd SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 ON X 3rd X OFF X OFF 3rd X ON X 2nd X X OFF 3rd X ON X 2nd OFF X X X X OFF 3rd X X 2nd OFF X X 2nd OFF X ON OFF X X ON O/D X ON AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Gear ON X OFF Solenoid Valve SL1 SL2 S4 ON OFF OFF ON OFF SHIFT SOLENOID S4 MALFUNCTIONING SHIFT SOLENOID SL1. hydraulic control cannot be performed electronically.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–887 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) Fail safe function: If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short. the ECM stops sending the current to the short circuit solenoid). the ECM turns the other shift solenoid ON and OFF in order to shift into the gear positions shown in the table below. If both solenoids malfunction.

05–888 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) WIRING DIAGRAM E1 ECT Solenoid ECM Y R 17 E12 SL2+ R–B 16 E12 SL2– Y 19 E12 SL1+ Y–B 18 E12 SL1– SL2+ 4 BR SL2– 9 W SL1+ 5 B SL1– 10 L R S4 8 13 E12 S4 D26538 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) NG OK Go to step 3 Go to step 5 .5  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SL2+ as well as SL2– of the transmission wire connector.0 to 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG (d) (e) Measure the resistance between terminals SL2+ and SL2–. OK: Resistance: 5. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT1+ and SL1– of the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG (f) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 4 Measure the resistance between terminal S4 of the transmission wire connector and body ground.6  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SL1+ as well as SL1– of the transmission wire connector.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–889 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SL1/SL2/S4) (a) SL1+ SL2+ (b) (c) SL1– SL2– S4 D25234 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle.1 to 5.

05–890 2 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 SL1+ SL1– S4 SL2+ SL2– C95812 (d) Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM 3 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1.6  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. Disconnect the connector from the ECM.0 to 5. SL1–. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SL1. (+) D25466 NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1) . OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5. SL2+ and SL2– of the ECM connector and body ground.5  at 20_C (68_F) S4 – E1: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals SL1+. then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.6  at 20_C (68_F) SL2+ – SL2–: 5. OK: Resistance: SL1+ – SL1–: 5. Measure the resistance between terminals.0 to 5.

1 to 5. then check the movement of the solenoid valve.5  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SL2. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) .DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–891 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL2) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2. OK: Resistance: 5. (+) D25466 NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL2) OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE 5 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) (+) (a) (b) (–) (c) D25467 Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body.

DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0793/67 ECM detects conditions (a). By comparing the counter gear speed signal (NC) with the direct clutch speed sensor signal (NT). (b). or more: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd. 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NC < 300 rpm  Open or short in speed sensor (NC) circuit  Speed sensor (NC)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM C3 Counter Gear Speed Sensor 1 LG 26 E12 NC+ LG–B 34 E12 NC– 2 D26541 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions.05–892 DTC DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8W–01 P0793/67 INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the counter gear.

OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Disconnect the ECM connector.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–893 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NC) (a) (b) Disconnect the speed sensor (NC) connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC– of the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) C58536 NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NC) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM) 3 (a) (b) (c) NC+ NC– C95812 (d) Connect the speed sensor (NC) connector. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that NC+ as well as NC– of the ECM connector.

if A is the period of continuity in one cycle. the ECM controls the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve. under electronic control. For example. (*): Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. modulating the line pressure and generating throttle pressure.05–894 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8X–01 P2716/77 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”D” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID SLT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Line Pressure Control Pressure Current Flow to Solenoid D02290 ON OFF 1 cycle The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator valve (which modulates the line pressure) causes the solenoid valve SLT. and B is the period of non–continuity. P2716/77 DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. then Duty Ratio=A/(A+B) x 100 (%) BE4056 DTC No. to precisely and minutely modulate and generate the line pressure according to the extent of the accelerator pedal depressed or the output of engine power. Upon receiving a signal of the throttle valve opening angle. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (a) SLT– terminal: 0V (b) SLT– terminal: 12V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit  Shift solenoid valve SLT  ECM . This controls the line pressure and provides smooth shifting.

DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–895 WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid O P–L 17 E13 SLT+ P 16 E13 SLT– SLT+ 2 G SLT– 7 D26542 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SLT) (a) SLT+ (b) (c) SLT– D25234 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle.6  at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SLT+ as well as SLT– of the transmission wire connector. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the transmission wire connector.0 to 5. OK: Resistance: 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 3 .

OK: Resistance: 5. (+) D25466 NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT) .0 to 5.6  at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that SLT+ as well as SLT– of the ECM connector. then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.05–896 2 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) SLT+ SLT– C95813 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SLT.6  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector.0 to 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM 3 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT. OK: Resistance: 5. Disconnect the ECM connector.

DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–897 05C8Y–01 DTC P2769/64 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL) DTC P2770/64 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The shift solenoid valve DSL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM in order to control the hydraulic pressure operation the lock–up relay valve. DTC No. WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid L–B G DSL 3 11 E12 DSL D26539 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P2769/64 ECM detects short in solenoid valve DSL circuit 4 times when solenoid valve DSL is operated (2 trip detection logic)  Short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit  Shift solenoid valve DSL  ECM P2770/64 ECM detects open in solenoid valve DSL circuit 4 times when solenoid valve DSL is not operated (2 trip detection logic)  Open in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit  Shift solenoid valve DSL  ECM Fail safe function: If the ECM detects a malfunction. it turns the shift solenoid valve DSL OFF. which then the controls operation of the lock–up clutch.

Measure the resistance between terminals DSL and E1 of the ECM connector.05–898 1 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(DSL) (a) DSL (b) C54864 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20_C (68_F) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20_C (68_F) NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 DSL C95812 OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.

OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. Measure the resistance between terminal DSL of shift solenoid valve DSL and the solenoid body.DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–899 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) (a) (b) (c) (–) (+)   D03728 Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) .

05–902 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM. The ECM receives signals (REVERSE and DRIVE) from the park/neutral position switch. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05C90–01 .

4 B–G ALT 1 4D 2 1 1 4B FL MAIN B–G Battery IJ *1: LHD *2: RHD D30747 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – 05–903 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) WIRING DIAGRAM N1 Park/neutral Position SW ECM W–L 20 IK2 R–Y 5 IK1 PL 1 RL 2 J/C D D D D W–L J18 J29 J18 J29 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) J/C A C R–Y (*2) R–Y (*2) J22 J23 W–L 21 E10 P 11 E10 R J5 J/C R–W 3 R–Y (*1) R–Y(*1) RB C R NL 5 LG–B DL 7 9 IK2 A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2) R C J/C A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2) 22 E10 N R J14 J/C 10 IK2 LG–B (*1) 10 E10 D LG–B (*1) C C LG–B (*2) Center J/B R–W 1 IK1 8 CA 1 CD R–W R–W Driver Side J/B IG1 Relay 1 DN B–G G–Y 5 5 DH GAUGE2 3 R–W 9 DA 2 1 27 DA AM1 1 DH W–B I13 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.

Turn the ignition switch to ON. Disconnect the ECM connector.5 to 14 N N – E1 7. to continuity P 1–3 6–9 R 2–3 – N 3–5 6–9 D 3–7 – OK: There is continuity.5 to 14 R R – E1 7. NG REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) E1 R N D Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. N as well as D of the ECM connector when the shift lever is shifted to the following position. R. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that P.5 to 14 D D – E1 7.05–904 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Check the continuity between each terminal shown below when the shift lever is moved to each position.5 to 14 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Shift Position C91579 Terminal No. OK: P C96192 NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Shift range Terminal Voltage (V) P P – E1 7.

and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. technicians can cause the CHK ENG (MIL) to light up for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 2). (2) Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the Check Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)/CHK ENG (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system/components or in the driving system components which affect vehicle emissions. connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection. In addition to CHK ENG (MIL) illuminating when a malfunction is detected. The OBD scan tool or hand– held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data (For operating instructions. It also has a check mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. or a malfunction in the computer. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip. (5) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. (4) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–863 05C8R–02 PRE–CHECK 1. the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO15031–6 are recorded in the ECM memory.). (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description for Euro–OBD (1) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles. the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester. (3) To check the DTCs. By switching the ECM to check mode when troubleshooting. while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–876). the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. and ensure thorough malfunction detection.

the applicable DTCs are recorded in the ECM memory. the technician can cause the MIL to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily. the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the hand–held tester to the vehicle. *2–trip detection logic: When a logic malfunction is first detected. and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM.05–864 DIAGNOSTICS (6) – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) *2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is first detected. If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test. The hand–held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and activate the several actuators and check freeze frame data and various forms of engine data (For instruction book). By switching the ECM to check (test) mode using the hand–held tester when troubleshooting. the malfunction is temporarily stored in the ECM memory. (3) To check the DTCs. and also has a check (test) mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and perform troubleshooting. In addition to the MIL illuminating when a malfunction is detected. Most DTCs use 2–trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection and ensure thorough malfunction detection. (2) The vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the MIL on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the computer itself or in driving system components.). If the same malfunction is detected again during the 2nd test drive. (b) Description M–OBD (1) When troubleshooting Multiplex (M–OBD) vehicles. this second detection causes the CHK ENG (MIL) to illumenate (2nd trip) (However. the malfunction code is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). (4) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip. connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 on the vehicle or read the number of blinks of the MIL when TC and CG terminals on the DLC3 are connected. this 2nd detection causes the MIL to illuminate.

 If communication is still not possible when the tool is connected to another vehicle.DIAGNOSTICS (c) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 – 05–865 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) Inspect the DLC3.  If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle. there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. DLC3 D25148 Terminal No. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode. HINT: If the MIL does not come on. always check the DTCs and freeze frame data. . it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. (2) When the engine is started. and note them down. the problem is probably in the tool itself. turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand– held tester. troubleshoot the combination meter. the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. the MIL should go off. 2. using the hand–held tester. Connection Voltage or Resistance Condition 7 Bus  Line Pulse generation During communication 4 Chassis Ground  Body Ground / 1  or less Always 16 Battery Positive  Body Ground / 9 – 14 V Always HINT: If your display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of hand–held tester to DLC3. So before switching modes. inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle. (1) The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro– OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. (a) FI2547 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE) Check the MIL. If the light remains on. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ISO 14230 format. (1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. so consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual. (b) Check the DTC.

HINT: If the system is operating normally. but do not start the engine.05–866 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) (1) (c) CG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 DLC3 Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions.52 Seconds 2. the light will blink 2 times per second. ON OFF 0.5 Seconds The malfunction code is indicated. the lower–numbered code is displayed first. (1) Turn the ignition switch ON.26 Seconds AT0716 Malfunction Code ”42” For Next Code 0.0 Seconds (4) 1. Check the DTC (Not using the hand–held tester).26 Seconds Read the DTC indicated by the number of times of the MIL blinks. ON OFF 4. (2) Using SST. (2) See page 05–876 to confirm the details of the DTCs.5 Seconds Repeat AT0713 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . SST 09843–18040 TC D25148 (3) Normal Code 0. see the hand–held tester instruction book.5 Seconds 4. connect terminals 13 (TC) and 4 (CG) of DLC3. HINT: When 2 or more malfunction codes are stored in memory. as shown in the chart on the left (DTC ”42” is shown as an example).

Start the engine (MIL goes out after the engine starts). the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. . (a) Check the DTC. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. (1) When using hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions. the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 10 seconds or more. (6) 0. (10) After checking the DTC. etc.13 sec.  Battery voltage 11 V or more  Throttle valve fully closed  Shift lever in P range  Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. Furthermore. inspect the applicable circuit. (7) 0. as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs.13 sec. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. (b) Clear the DTC. use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data. which all DTCs etc. etc. are erased. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. ON (8) OFF BR3904 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Switch the hand–held tester from Normal mode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes). Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–867 3. (1) Check the initial conditions. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. Operate a hand–held tester to erase the codes.

(c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. there are failures of the PNP switch or shift cableadjustment cable adjustment. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. Same as input shaft speed u S Lock Up: ON S Except Lock Up: OFF u S Accelerator Pedal is depressed: ON S Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF u The shift lever range and these values are different. read the ”DATA LIST”. 2nd. P or N: ON Except P or N: OFF REVERSE PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. R: ON Except R: OFF DRIVE PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is.4th (O/D). 2nd. . actuator and so on without parts removal.05–868 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 4. (e) According to the display on tester. ATF temp. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. you can read the value of the switch. (a) Warm up the engine.: 215_C (419_F) 80_C (176_F) (After Stall Test) If the value is ”–40_C (–40_F)” or ”215_C (419_F)”. D and 3: ON Except D and 3: OFF SOLENOID (SLT) Shift Solenoid SLT Status/ ON or OFF IG SW ON: ON u AT FLUID TEMP ATF Temp. sensor. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note S Brake Pedal is depressed: ON S Brake Pedal is released: OFF u Shift lever Range is. 4th (O/D) SPD (NC) Counter Gear Speed display: 50 r/min LOCK UP SOL Lock Up Solenoid Status/ ON or OFF KICKDOWN SW Kick down SW Status/ ON or OFF PNP SW [NSW] PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. sensor circuit is opened or shorted.: –40_C (–40_F) max. 3rd or 4th (O/D) u D Range is warmed up. Sensor Value/ min. 3rd. S D: 1st. Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) STOP LIGHT SW Stop light SW Status/ ON or OFF SHIFT Actual Gear Position/ 1st. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester.

ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay. 6. SHIFT [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid valve and set the each shift range by yourself. Item LINE PRESS UP Test Details [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid SLT and raise the line pressure. (a) PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis. shift down. HINT:  O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control (1. OFF: No action (normal operation) Diagnostic Note – LOCK UP [Test Details] Control the shift solenoid DSL to set the ATM to the lock–up condition. actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). is 60C (140F) or lower) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (a) Warm up the engine. [Vehicle Condition] Less than 50 km/h (31 mph) [Others]  Press " button: Shift up  Press u button: Shift down Possible to check the operation of the shift solenoid values. Water temp. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. VSV. conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms. (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten the labor time. 7. or the shift point is too high or too low. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. If the problem is that the transaxle does not shift up. 2. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F).  IDL: ON [Others] ON: Line pressure up. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Check to see that 1 " 2. [Vehicle Condition]  Vehicle Stopped. perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–869 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 5. Brake pedal is depressed. try to reproduce the symptoms of the trouble. is 60C (140F) or less. 2. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST.)  O/D Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control (1. (e) According to the display on tester. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Speed: 60 km/h (37 mph) or more Possible to check the DSL operation. 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place. Water temp. If there is a 10 km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed.

3rd and O/D gears. (4) Check kick–down operation. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when:  Down–shifting causes engine overrun. etc. 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. While running in the D range. ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  Drive in D range O/D gear. (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. Check for abnormal noise and vibration. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential.05–870 (2) (3) DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) Check for shift shock and slip. (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2.  Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place.  Down–shifting is required continuously. at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph). CAUTION: Before conducting this test. (b) S range test Shift to the S range. 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). release the parking brake. torque converter. depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. there is no lock–up. down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed. check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1. Then. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range. 2nd.  Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration. If there is a big jump in engine speed.

550 " 150 rpm Evaluation: Problem Possible cause (a) Stall speed low in D and R ranges  Engine output may be insufficient  Stator one–way clutch not operating properly HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value. Stall speed: 2.  The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. 2 one–way clutch not operating properly  U/D clutch slipping (c) Stall speed high in R range  Line pressure too low  Direct clutch slipping  1st & reverse brake slipping  U/D clutch slipping (d) Stall speed high in D and R ranges  Line pressure too low  Improper fluid level  U/D one–way clutch not operating properly AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (b) Stall speed high in D range  Line pressure too low  Forward clutch slipping  No.  To ensure safety. (7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time. The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuring the stall speeds in the D and R ranges. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (1) Chock the 4 wheels.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–871 8. DLC3 TAC (5) Start the engine. Press all the way down on the D25148 accelerator pedal with your right foot. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (3) Fully apply the parking brake. the torque converter could be faulty. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.  Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds. Stall speed: 2. do this test in a wide. (a) MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS Measure the stall speed. clear level area which provides good traction. 9 10111213141516 (4) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal. (6) Shift into the D range.550 " 150 rpm (8) Do the same test in the R range.

This is used for checking the condition of the direct clutch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (4) Start engine and check idle speed. D25148 Time lag: N " D less than 1. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. (2) (3) Chock the 4 wheels.  Take 3 measurements and take the average value. forward clutch. Using a stop TAC watch. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F).5 seconds Evaluation (If N " D or N " R time lag is longer than the specified): Problem Possible cause N " D time lag is longer  Line pressure too low  Forward clutch worn  U/D one–way clutch not operating properly N " R time lag is longer  Line pressure too low  Direct clutch worn  1st and reverse brake worn  U/D one–way clutch not operating properly AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests. there will be a certain time lapse or lag before the shock can be felt.2 seconds (6) In the same way. measure the time lag for N " R. and 1st and reverse brake. Time lag: N " R less than 1. (1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling.05–872 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) (b) Measure the time lag. measure the time from when the lever is shifted until the shock is felt. 9 10111213141516 Idle speed: 650 ± 50 rpm (In N range and A/C OFF) (5) Shift the lever from N to D range.

54 to 60) 672 to 742 (6.968 (18. Specified line pressure: Condition D range kPa (kgf / cm2. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). (1) Warm up the ATF. psi) Idling 372 to 412 (3. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. 09992–00271) (3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.  Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe. SST SST (6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedC81121 D25472 al and shift into D range.9 to 7. 256 to 285) Evaluation: Problem Possible cause If the measured values at all ranges are higher  Line pressure control solenoid (SLT) defective  Regulator valve detective If the measured values at all ranges are lower  Line pressure control solenoid (SLT) defective  Regulator valve detective  Oil pump defective If pressure is low in the D range only  D range circuit fluid leak  Forward clutch defective If pressure is low in the R range only  R range circuit fluid leak  Direct clutch defective  1st & reverse brake defective AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .6.768 to 1.  The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. psi) R range kPa (kgf / cm2. 135 to 150) 1.2. (8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. HYDRAULIC TEST (a) Measure the line pressure. Quickly read the highest line pressure when engine speed reaches stall speed.1. (7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling. SST 09992–00095 (09992– 00231. (5) Start the engine and check idling speed.0 to 20.031 (9. 98 to 108) Stall 931 to 1.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–873 9. do the test in R range.5. (9) In the same way.8 to 4. (2) Remove the test plug on the rear side of the transaxle case and connect SST.5 to 10.

Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. (c) Connect the solenoid wire. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. (a) Disconnect the solenoid wire. Shift range Gear position D 3rd R Reverse P Pawl Lock HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish. the problem is in the transaxle itself. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test. it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (d) Cancel out the DTC. While driving. If any abnormality is found in the above test. do the above road test.05–874 DIAGNOSTICS D09299 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 10. shift through the D range.

be sure to perform the ROAD TEST described earlier. RESET MEMORY CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–875 11. (c) Turn the ignition switch to ON. CAUTION: After performing the RESET MEMORY. (d) Perform the reset memory procedure from the ENGINE menu. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only (a) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. engine assy or ECM. Tester menu flow: G23367 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.

engine assy or ECM. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–861 05CBX–01 PRECAUTION CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy. HINT: Initialization can not be completed by only removing the battery.

ECM 05–910 01–32 Up–shift to O/D from 3rd while engine is cold 1. ECM 05–908 01–32 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Stop light switch circuit Engine coolant temp. from 1st to O/D gear. ECM 05–161 05–882 01–32 Harsh engagement (N  D) ECM 01–32 Harsh engagement (Lock–up) ECM 01–32 Harsh engagement (Any driving range) ECM 01–32 Poor acceleration ECM 01–32 Engine stalls when starting off or stopping ECM 01–32 No kick–down 1. sensor circuit 3. proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART Symptom Suspect Area See page No up–shift (A particular gear. 5. 7. 05–905 05–161 05–161 01–32 Shift point too high or too low ECM 01–32 No gear change by shifting into ”+” or ”–” while the shift lever is in the Sposition 1. Transmission control switch circuit 2. Engine coolant temp. Kick–down switch circuit 2. sensor circuit 2. check the circuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for troubleshooting. then check and replace the ECM. ATF temp. from O/D to 1st gear.  If the instruction ”Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart” is given in the flow chart for each circuit.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–879 0567W–11 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE HINT: If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs. is not down–shifted) ECM 01–32 No lock–up or No lock–up off 4. 6.  If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits. sensor circuit Throttle position sensor circuit ECM . The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters. is not up– shifted) ECM 01–32 No down–shift (A particular gear.

Off–vehicle repair matrix chart 3. Valve body assy 2. Valve body assy L – L Harsh engagement (N  R) 1. RM840U) Symptom Suspect Area See page Vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse range 1. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart No kick–down Valve body assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 40–47 – L . No. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No down–shift (O/D  3rd) Valve body assy L No down–shift (3rd  2nd) Valve body assy L No down–shift (2nd  1st) Valve body assy L No lock–up or No lock–up off 1. Valve body assy 2. Valve body assy 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (3rd  O/D) 1. Oil strainer 2. C1 accumulator 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – Harsh engagement (Lock–up) 1. Valve body assy 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (2nd  3rd) 1. Valve body assy 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L – Vehicle does not move in R range Off–vehicle repair matrix chart – No up–shift (1st  2nd) 1. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – Harsh engagement (N  D) 1. Manual valve 2. Valve body assy 2.05–880 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) Chapter 2: On–vehicle Repair (L: U241E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. Primary regulator valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – Harsh engagement (2nd  3rd) Valve body assy L Harsh engagement (3rd  O/D) Valve body assy L Harsh engagement (O/D  3rd) Valve body assy L Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse) 1.

1st & reverse brake (B2) L L Harsh engagement (Lock–up) Torque converter clutch 40–37 Slip or shudder (Forward position: After warm–up) 1. No. Forward clutch (C1) 2. 5. 40–37 L L L L L Slip or shudder (R range) 1. 2. 3. 2. U/D planetary gear Poor acceleration (O/D) 1. Front and rear planetary gear unit U/D planetary gear Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) 1st & reverse brake (B2) L L L L L No up–shift (1st  2nd) 1. U/D one–way clutch (F2) 2.1 one–way clutch (F1) L L L Harsh engagement (N  R) 1. RM840U) Symptom Suspect Area See page Vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse range 1. Torque converter clutch 2. U/D planetary gear Large shift shock or engine stalls when starting off or stopping Torque converter clutch AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Torque converter clutch Forward clutch (C1) Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) No. 5. 4. 2. 1st & reverse brake (B2) L L Slip or shudder (1st) No. 5.1 one–way clutch (F1) U/D one–way clutch (F2) L 40–37 40–37 L L L 40–37 .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–881 Chapter 3: Off–vehicle Repair (L: U241E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. 2nd brake (B1) L L No up–shift (2nd  3rd) Direct clutch (C2) L No up–shift (3rd  O/D) U/D clutch (C3) No lock–up or No lock–up off Torque converter clutch Harsh engagement (N  D) 1. Front and rear planetary gear U/D planetary gear U/D one–way clutch (F2) Forward clutch (C1) U/D brake (B3) L L L L L Vehicle does not move in R range 1. 3.1 one–way clutch (F1) 2. Direct clutch (C2) 2.1 one–way clutch (F1) L Slip or shudder (2nd) 1. U/D one–way clutch (F2) 3. 2nd brake (B1) L L Slip or shudder (3rd) Direct clutch (C2) L Slip or shudder (O/D) U/D clutch (C3) L No engine braking (1st – 3rd: D range) U/D brake (B3) L Poor acceleration (All range) 1. U/D clutch (C3) 2. 4. Direct clutch (C2) 2. No. 4. No. 6. 3.

this switch sends a signals to the ECM. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–905 05C91–01 STOP LIGHT SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition. When the brake pedal is depressed. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . when brakes are suddenly applied.

*5) 1 R–W (*1) 11 IE3 R–W (*2) G–W (*3) 2 IR1 2 R–W (*1) R–W (*2) DA 22 STOP Driver Side J/B DN 1 H20 High Mounted Stop Light 1 1 4 6 W–B (*3) C C J32 Junction Connector N8 Noise Filter B J31 Junction B J31 Connector G–W 1 BD1 (*4) 3 BF1 (*5) G–W (*3) 7 (*4) 4 R13 (*5) 1 Rear Combination 6 2 (*3)Light LH 3 5 (*4) 3 4 (*5) L (*4) (*3) (*4) (*5) R14 1 BE1 Rear G–W Combination (*4) (*3) Light RH (*4) H20 1 (*5) High Mounted 2 Stop Light B–G W–B (*3) 1 4D 2 1 1 4B Engine ALT Room B J30 Junction J/B No.4 Connector C J31 W–B (*4. *5) C J30 G–W (*4.05–906 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) WIRING DIAGRAM Driver Side J/B 6 IE3 G–W (*1) G–W (*1) 1 IR1 G–W (*2) G–W (*2) 1 2 DA ECM 10 DC 19 E10 STP G–W 1 DM G–W S13 Stop Light Switch G–W (*4. *5) W–B Battery *1: LHD *2: RHD *3: SEDAN *4: LIFT BACK *5: WAGON AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) BS BT BX A79094 . *5) C J30 C J30 2 G–W (*4. *5) W–B 3 BG1 B–G FL MAIN W–B (*5) W–B (*3) W–B (*5) L (*5) 4 BG1 W–B (*4) W–B (*5) 2 BD1 (*4) 4 BF1 (*5) W–B G–W (*5) W–B (*4) A J33 2 BE1 W–B (*4) Junction Connector A J34 W–B (*4.

DIAGNOSTICS – 05–907 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY NG REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY – ECM) NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

) Wiring Color SLT+ (E13–17) – SLT– (E13–16) P–L – P IG switch ON 10 to 14 THO (E13–30) – E2 (E13–28) V – BR IG switch ON and ATF temperature 110C (230F) Below 1 IG switch ON Below 1 Vehicle driving under lock–up range 10 to 14 IG switch ON Below 1 O/D gear 10 to 14 Except O/D gear Below 1 IG switch ON Below 1 1st or 2nd gear 10 to 14 3rd or O/D gear Below 1 IG switch ON 10 to 14 1st gear 10 to 14 Except 1st gear Below 1 DSL (E12–11) (E12 11) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) L B – BR L–B S4 ((E12–13)) – E1 ((E12–7)) L – BR Condition STD Voltage (V) SL2+ (E12–17) (E12 17) – SL2 (E12 SL2– (E12–16) 16) R – R–B SL1+ (E12–19) (E12 19) – SL1 (E12 SL1– (E12–18) 18) Y – Y–B NC+ (E12–26) – NC– (E12–34) LG – LG–B Engine is running Below 1 and 4 to 5 NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35) B–O – B Engine is running Below 1 and 4 to 5 D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) LG B – BR LG–B R (E10 (E10–11) 11) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) R Y – BR R–Y SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7) V–W – BR SPT1 (E10–20) (E10 20) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) L – BR SFTD (E9–21) (E9 21) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) B – BR SFTU (E9–22) (E9 22) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) R – BR KD*1 (E9 (E9–27) 27) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) W – BR *1: Europe AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) IG switch ON Shift lever D range 10 to 14 IG switch ON Shift lever other than D range Below 1 IG switch ON Shift lever R range 10 to 14 IG switch ON Shift lever other than R range Below 1 IG switch ON 4.05–878 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8S–01 TERMINALS OF ECM E13 E12 E10 E9 C95801 Symbols (Terminal No.5 to 14 IG switch ON and shift lever ”+” position (Up shift) Below 1.5 IG switch ON and shift lever S position 7.5 to 14 IG switch ON and shift lever except for S position Below 1 IG switch ON and shift lever S position 7.5 IG switch ON and shift lever S position 7.5 to 5.5 IG switch ON and kick–down switch ON Below 1 IG switch ON and kick–down switch OFF 10 to 14 .5 to 14 IG switch ON and shift lever ”–” position (Down shift) Below 1.

Shifting ”+” once changes up 1 shift range position. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . it is possible to shift in 1 to 4 positions.05–910 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C93–01 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When shifting the shift lever into S range using the transmission control switch. ”–” once changes down 1 shift range position respectively.

4 B–G 1 4D ALT 2 FL MAIN W–B 1 4B 1 B–G A J15 J/C Battery IJ IK IP *1: LHD *2 RHD D30750 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – 05–911 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) WIRING DIAGRAM T7 Transmission Control SW ECM 20 E10 SPT1 21 E9 SFTD 22 E9 SFTU L R–W 3 SCT S 7 B SFTD 1 R SFTU 2 J17 J/C W–B (*1) W–B E A 5 A W–B (*2) Center J/B R–W 1 CG 7 CA R–W 7 DB R–W Driver Side J/B B–G G–Y IG1 Relay GAUGE1 1 DN 5 5 DH 3 1 9 DA 2 AM1 1 DH W–B I13 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.

5 to 14 V Go to step 6 H42584 OK 2 CHECK ECM (a) SFTU E1 SFTD Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the ECM.5 V S position SFTU – E1 7. OK: Shift position Tester connection Specified condition Shift to ”+” (Up shift) SFTU – E Continuity S position SFTU – E No continuity Shift to ”–” (Down shift) SFTD – E Continuity S position SFTD – E No continuity E (–) H42585 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY .5 to 14 V Shift to ”–” (Down shift) SFTD – E1 Below 1.05–912 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK ECM (a) (b) E1 Turn the ignition switch to ON. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT1 and E1 of the ECM.5 V S position SFTD – E1 7. OK: NG SPT1 Shift position Specified condition Except S position Below 1 V S position 7. OK: Shift position Tester connection Specified condition Shift to ”+” (Up shift) SFTU – E1 Below 1.5 to 14 V H42584 OK NORMAL NG 3 INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) SFTU (+) (a) (b) (c) SFTD (+) Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. Check the continuity between terminals E and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector.

DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05–913 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) E6 Tester connection Specified condition SFTU (E6–22) – SFTU (A–2) Continuity SFTD (E6–28) – SFTD (A–1) Continuity SFTD SFTU SFTU Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: Continuity NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND . Check the continuity between ECM and transmission control switch. OK: SFTD A NG H42586 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND OK 5 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION COTROL SWITCH – BODY GROUND) Check the continuity between body ground and E of the transmission control switch connector (wire harness side).

5 to 14 V H42587 NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE Specified condition HARNESS AND .05–914 6 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) (c) IG S H42585 Turn the ignition switch to LOCK. OK: Shift position Tester connection Specified condition Except S position IG – S No continuity S position IG – S Continuity NG REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY OK 7 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) (c) (d) E5 E1 (–) SPT1  Connect the transmission control switch connector. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. Check the continuity between terminal IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift position Tester connection Except S position SPT1 – E1 Below 1 V S position SPT1 – E1 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the voltage between terminal SPT1 and E1 of the ECM connector.

05–900 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) 05C8Z–01 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NO.4 110 (230) 0.2 CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM. WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–882. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols THO – Body ground E2 – Body ground NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Specified condition No continuity REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE .2 Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Temperature: C (F) Resistance: k 10 (50) 6. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO (a) (b) E2 C54864 (c) Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle.

Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: Temperature: C (F) Resistance: k 10 (50) 6.DIAGNOSTICS 2 – 05–901 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FE)) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E2 THO (d) C95813 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.4 110 (230) 0.2 Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors.

DIAGNOSTICS – 05–919 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 0567O–11 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK Transmission Control System Check Sheet Inspector’s Name : Registration No. Customer’s Name Registration Year / / Frame No. Date Vehicle Brought In / Date Problem Occurred How Often Does Problem Occur? / /  Continuous /  Intermittent (  Vehicle does not move (  Any range Symptoms km mile Odometer Reading  No up–shift (  1st  2nd  No down–shift (  O/D  3rd  No up–shift (S range)  No down–shift (S range) times a day)  Particular range)  2nd  3rd  3rd  O/D )  3rd  2nd  2nd  1st )  Lock–up malfunction  Shift point too high or too low  Harsh engagement (  N  D  Lock–up  Any drive range)  Slip or shudder  No kick–down  Others Check Item MIL Normal Remains ON 1st Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC ) 2nd Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC ) DTC Check AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the page given...DIAGNOSTICS – 05–931 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 0567Q–09 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check... MIL does not light / . MIL light up DTC No. *1 : – . (See Page) Detection Item Trouble Area MIL * Memory             P0500 (05–453 ) Vehicle Speed Sensor ”A”  Combination meter  Open or short in vehicle speed sensor circuit  Vehicle speed sensor  ECM P0705 (05–938) Transmission Range Sensor Circuit Malfunction (PRNDL Input)  Short in park/neutral position switch circuit  Park/neutral position switch  ECM P0710 (05–941) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit P0711 (05–943) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Performance P0712 (05–941) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit Low Input P0713 (05–941) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor ”A” Circuit High Input P0717 (05–945) Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit No Signal  Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit  Speed sensor (NT)  ECM  Automatic transaxle assembly   P0724 (05–947) Brake Switch ”B” Circuit High  Short in stop light switch circuit  Stop light switch  ECM   P0741 (05–948) Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Perfomance (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)  Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Shift solenoid valve DSL  ECM   P0743 (05–951) Torque Converter Clutch Circuit Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve DSL)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit  Shift solenoid valve DSL  ECM   P0746 (05–954) Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)  Shift solenoid valve SL1 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Shift solenoid valve SL1  ECM   P0748 (05–956) Pressure Control Solenoid ”A” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL1)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL1  ECM   P0766 (05–962) Shift Solenoid ”D” Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)  Shift solenoid valve S4 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Shift solenoid valve S4  ECM   P0776 (05–963) Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Performance (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)  Shift solenoid valve SL2 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Shift solenoid valve SL2  ECM   AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit  ATF temperature t t sensor  ECM .

05–932 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) P0778 (05–956) Pressure Control Solenoid ”B” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL2)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL2  ECM   P0793 (05–965) Intermediate Shaft Speed Sensor ”A”  Open or short in speed sensor (NC) circuit  Speed sensor (NC)  ECM   P0982 (05–956) Shift Solenoid ”B” Control Circuit Low (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)   P0983 (05–956) Shift Solenoid ”B” Control Circuit High (Shift Solenoid Valve S4)   P2716 (05–967) Pressure Contorl Solenoid ”D” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)   AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit  Shift solenoid l id valve l S4  ECM  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit  Shift solenoid valve SLT  ECM .

Therefore. make sure to check that there is no trouble in the multiplex communication system. 1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–919) 3 Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 4 Check and Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–920) 5 Visual Inspection 6 Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis (See page 05–920) 7 Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 8 Symptom occur: Go to step 9 8 Symptom Simulation (See page 01–22) 9 DTC Check (See page 05–920) DTC is not output: Go to step 10 DTC is output: Go to step 17 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–915 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 0567N–12 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: The ECM of this system is connected to the multiplex communication system. before starting troubleshooting.

40–8 and 40–69) NG Go to step 19 OK 11 Mechanical System Test (See page 05–920) NG Go to step 16 OK 12 Manual Shifting Test (See page 05–920) NG Go to step 14 OK 13 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 1 (See page 05–935) NG Go to step 18 OK 14 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 2 (See page 05–935) NG Go to step 16 OK 15 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 3 (See page 05–935) NG 16 Part Inspection Go to step 19 17 DTC Chart (See page 05–931) 18 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–938) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–916 10 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) Basic Inspection (See page 40–2.

DIAGNOSTICS 19 Identification of Problem 20 Repair 21 Confirmation Test End AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–917 .

the ECM disregards the kick–down signals and controls shifting at the normal shift points. When the kick–down switch is turned ON. If a short circuit develops in the kick–down switch.05–970 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9J–01 KICK DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The kick–down switch is turned ON when the accelerator pedal is depressed to the full throttle and sends signals to ECM. WIRING DIAGRAM Center J/B 6 CA 6 CJ W–B 4 IG2 K2 Kick Down SW W–B 1 W 2 ECM 8 IG2 W 30 E10 KD W–B IP G25416 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the ECM controls gear shifting according to the programmed shift diagrams.

Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2 of the kick–down switch when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. OK: Kick–down switch NG Continuity ON Continuity OFF No continuity REPLACE KICK DOWN SWITCH D02350 OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND . Measure the voltage between terminal KD of ECM and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or not. OK: Accelerator pedal Voltage Fully depressed (Kick–down switch is ON) Below 1 V Released (Kick–down switch is OFF) 10 to 14 V KD D30684 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT KICK DOWN SWITCH (a) (b) Disconnect the kick–down switch connector.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–971 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (a) (b) Turn the ignition switch to ON.

DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–933 0567R–12 LOCATION Combination Meter (MIL) ECM DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Assy Europe spec: Kick–down Switch Shift Lock Control Unit (Transmission Control Switch) Shift Solenoid Valve SLT Speed Sensor (NT) Speed Sensor (NC) Shift Solenoid Valve SL1 Park/neutral Position Switch Assy Shift Solenoid Valve S4 Shift Solenoid Valve SL2 Shift Solenoid Valve DSL Transmission Wire (ATF Temperature Sensor) D30682 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

(a) P position input signal is ON. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05C96–01 Trouble Area  Short Sh t in i park/neutral k/ t l position iti switch it h circuit i it  Park/neutral position switch assy  ECM . (c) R position input signal is ON. DTC No. N and D position. P0705 When any of following conditions for 500 msec. DTC Detecting Condition DTC is detected for 500 msec.05–938 DTC DIAGNOSTICS P0705 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (PRNDL INPUT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends signals to the ECM. or more (2–trip detection logic). R.  2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for P. or more in the S position (2–trip detection logic). (b) N position input signal is ON.

DIAGNOSTICS – 05–939 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) WIRING DIAGRAM N1 Park/neutral Position SW ECM W–L 20 IK2 R–Y 5 IK1 PL 1 RL 2 C NL 5 LG–B DL 7 C A J/C C J22 J23 R–Y (*2) R–Y(*2) 9 IK2 10 IK2 7 E9 R LG–B P 11 E10 R R–Y(*1) R–Y(*1) R–W 3 RB R 6 E9 W–L J15 J/C C D J14 J19 (*1) (*2) J/C N C D 10 LG–B J14 J19 E10 D (*1) (*2) Center J/B 1 IK1 R–W 8 CA 1 CD R–W R–W Driver Side J/B IG1 Relay 1 B–G DN 5 5 DH G–Y GAUGE2 3 2 1 AM1 27 DA R–W 9 DA W–B 1 DH I12 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.4 B–G 1 4D ALT 2 1 FL MAIN 1 4B B–G IJ Battery *1: LHD *2: RHD D30749 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

to continuity P 1–3 6–9 R 2–3 – N 3–5 6–9 D 3–7 – OK: There is continuity.5 to 14 N N – E1 7. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that P.05–940 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. N as well as D of the ECM connector when the shift lever is shifted to the following range. R.5 to 14 R R – E1 7. NG REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) E1 R D Connect the park/neutral position switch connector.5 to 14 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: N P D30683 NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Shift range Terminal Voltage (V) P P – E1 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Shift Position C91579 Terminal No.5 to 14 D D – E1 7. Check the continuity between each terminal shown below when the shift lever is moved to each position.

5 sec.5 sec. or more (1–trip detection logic) ATF temperature sensor resistance is more than 156 k after started engine for 15 minutes or more Trouble Area  Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit  ATF temperature sensor  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM E1 ECT Solenoid ECM 28 O O E2 6 BR THO 1 V E13 E2 32 E12 THO D26545 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . when neither P0712 or P0713 is not detected (1–trip detection logic) (a) ATF temperature sensor resistance is less than 79  (b) ATF temperature sensor resistance is more than 156 k HINT: Wthin 0. DTC No.5 sec. or more (1–trip detection logic) P0713 DTC is detected for 0.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) DTC P0710 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DTC P0712 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT LOW INPUT DTC P0713 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT 05–941 05C97–01 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM. the malfunction switches from (a) to (b) or from (b) to (a) P0712 ATF temperature sensor resistance is less than 79  for 0. DTC Detection Condition P0710 (a) and (b) is detected momentary within 0.5 sec.

OK: Resistance: 79  to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Resistance: 79  to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E2 (d) THO  C91565 Connect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle.05–942 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO (a) (b) (c) E2 C54864 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector.

OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK Temperature: C (F) REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE . Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2.2 Measure the resistance between body ground and that THO as well as E2 of the transmission wire connector. temp. DTC No. of atmosphere and that of engine coolant is more than –10C (b) After normal driving for over 20 min. of engine start.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0711 – 05–943 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C98–01 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ”A” PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM. OK: AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Resistance: k 10 (50) 6. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO (a) (b) E2 C54864 (c) Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. is less than 10C  Open or short in ATF temperature sensor circuit  ATF temperature sensor  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–941. and 10 km. ATF temp. P0711 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Both (a) and (b) are detected: (2–trip detection logic) (a) After 12 sec.4 110 (230) 0.

OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK Temperature: C (F) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–944 2 DIAGNOSTICS ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E2 C82158 – (d) THO C91565 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Resistance: k 10 (50) 6. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2.2 Measure the resistance between body ground and that THO as well as E2 of the ECM connector.4 110 (230) 0.

the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd. 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NT < 300 rpm  Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit  Speed sensor (NT)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM T4 Turbine Speed Sensor 1 B–O 27 E12 NT+ B 35 E12 NT– 2 D26540 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT) with the counter gear speed sensor signal (NC). (b). DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0717 ECM detects conditions (a). DTC No.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0717 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–945 05C99–01 TURBINE SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT NO SIGNAL CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine.

Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NT) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) NT+ NT–  (d) C91565 Connect the speed sensor connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between body ground and that NT+ as well as NT– of the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals NT+ and NT–.05–946 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NT) (a) (b) C58536 Disconnect the speed sensor connector from the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector.

Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0724 – 05–947 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9A–01 BRAKE SWITCH ”B” CIRCUIT HIGH CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition. When the brake pedal is depressed. DTC No. when brakes are suddenly applied.  Short in stop light switch signal circuit  Stop light switch  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–475. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area P0724 The stop light switch does not turn off even once the vehicle is driven (2–trip detection logic). INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY NG REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY – ECM) NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . this switch sends signals to the ECM.

OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20C (68F) DSL  C91565 OK Go to step 3 NG REPAIR OR REPLACE HARNESS OR CONNECTOR AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0741 Lock–up does not occur when driving in lock–up range (normal driving at 80 km/h 50 mph). DTC No. or lock–up remains ON in lock– up OFF range (2 trip detection logic)  Shift solenoid valve DSL is stuck open or closed  Valve body blocked or stuck  Shift solenoid valve DSL  Lock–up clutch INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(DSL) (a) DSL (b) Disconnect the transmission wire connector connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20C (68F) C54864 NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSIONWIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch with the lock–up schedule in the ECM memory to detect a mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve DSL. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between the terminal 3 and the body ground. Air–flow meter and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch. valve body and torque converter clutch. Measure the resistance between terminals DSL and E1.05–948 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0741 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9B–01 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor.

Applying 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2. OK: Solenoid valve opens. Measure the resistance between the terminal DSL of shift solenoid valve DSL and the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes operation noise. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body. D30707 (–) (+) D03420 D03419 D03728 NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE OK 4 CHECK TRANSMISSION WIRE OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . OK: Solenoid valve does not leak air.DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–949 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) (–) (a) (b) (+) (c) (–) (d) (+) (e) D03447 D03448 Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL. 71 psi) of compressed air. check that the solenoid valve does not leak the air. When battery voltage is supplied to the shift solenoid valve. check that the valve opens.

05–950 5 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY OK 6 INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY NG OK REPAIR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY .

DTC No. P0743 DTC Detection Condition Either (a) or (b) is detected at 1 time: (2 trip detection logic) (a) Solenoid resistance is 8  or less short circuit when solenoid is energized (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or more open circuit when solenoid is not energized Trouble Area  Open or short in shift solenoid valve DSL circuit  Shift solenoid valve DSL  ECM Fail safe function: If the ECM detects a malfunction.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0743 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–951 05C9C–01 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CIRCUIT ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE DSL) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The shift solenoid valve DSL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM in order to control the hydraulic pressure operation the lock–up relay valve. WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid L–B G DSL 3 11 E12 DSL D26539 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . it turns the shift solenoid valve DSL OFF. which then the controls operation of the lock–up clutch.

05–952 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(DSL) (a) (b) DSL C54864 Disconnect the solenoid connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between the terminal 3 and the body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20_C (68_F) NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 NG DSL  OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Connect the transmission wire connector. OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20_C (68_F) C91565 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure the resistance between terminal DSL and E1. Disconnect the ECM connector.

NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) . OK: Resistance: 11 to 13  at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. Measure the resistance between the terminals DSL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK: The solenoid valve makes operation noise.DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–953 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(DSL) (a) (b) (–) (c) (+) D03420 D03419 D03728 Remove the shift solenoid valve DSL.

3rd or O/D gear). DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area P0746 The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic)  Shift solenoid valve SL1 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch. DTC No. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. OK: Resistance: 5.0 to 5. 2nd.6  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. brake or gear etc. Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical troubles of the shift solenoid valves and valve body.05–954 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0746 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9D–01 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor to detect the actual gear position (1st. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SL1. then check the movement of the solenoid valve. (+) D25466 NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1) OK 2 INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY .) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1.

DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–955 INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY NG REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY OK REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

duty ratio is less than 3%  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL1 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL1  ECM P0778 ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valves SL2 (1–trip detection logic) (a) When solenoid is energized. duty ratio exceeds 75% (b) When solenoid is not energized. duty ratio is less than 3%  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL2 circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL2  ECM P0982 ECM detects short in solenoid valve No. 4 is operated (1–trip detection logic)  Short in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S4  ECM P0983 ECM detects open in solenoid valve No.05–956 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9E–01 DTC P0748 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL1) DTC P0778 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2) DTC P0982 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4) DTC P0983 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shifting from 1st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF operation of the shift solenoid valves SL1 and SL2 which are controlled by the ECM. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the shift solenoid valves. 4 is not operated (1–trip detection logic)  Open in shift solenoid valve S4 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S4  ECM HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve SL1 when DTC P0748 is output. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0748 ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valves SL1 (1–trip detection logic) (a) When solenoid is energized. 4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve No. the ECM controls the remaining normal shift solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function). check the shift solenoid valve SL2 when DTC P0778 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S4 when DTC P0982 and P0983 is output. duty ratio exceeds 75% (b) When solenoid is not energized. 4 circuit 4 times when solenoid valve No.

SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 MALFUNCTIONING NORMAL Solenoid Valve Gear Solenoid Valve SL1 SL2 S4 ON ON OFF 1st X ON OFF 2nd OFF ON OFF 2nd X ON OFF 2nd OFF X OFF OFF OFF OFF 3rd X 3rd OFF X 3rd OFF X SL1 SL2 S4 Gear SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 ON OFF 3rd X OFF OFF OFF ON O/D X ON ON ON SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND SL2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 SHIFT SOLENOID SL1 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 X 1st 3rd OFF ON X 2nd OFF 3rd OFF OFF X 3rd ON O/D OFF OFF X 3rd SHIFT SOLENOID SL2 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 ON X 3rd X OFF X OFF 3rd X ON X 2nd X X OFF 3rd X ON X 2nd OFF X X X X OFF 3rd X X 2nd OFF X X 2nd OFF X ON OFF X X ON O/D X ON AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Gear ON X OFF Solenoid Valve SL1 SL2 S4 ON OFF OFF ON OFF SHIFT SOLENOID S4 MALFUNCTIONING SHIFT SOLENOID SL1. SL2 AND S4 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid Valve Gear SL1 SL2 S4 X X X 3rd 3rd X X X 3rd X 3rd X X X 3rd X 3rd X X X 3rd . and so it must be done manually. hydraulic control cannot be performed electronically. Manual shifting as shown in the following table must be done (In case of a short circuit. The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF at the same time.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–957 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) Fail safe function: If either of the shift solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short. the ECM stops sending the current to the short circuit solenoid). the ECM turns the other shift solenoid ON and OFF in order to shift into the gear positions shown in the table below. If both solenoids malfunction.

05–958 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) WIRING DIAGRAM E1 ECT Solenoid ECM Y R 17 E12 SL2+ R–B 16 E12 SL2– Y 19 E12 SL1+ Y–B 18 E12 SL1– SL2+ 4 BR SL2– 9 W SL1+ 5 B SL1– 10 L R S4 8 10 E12 S4 D26538 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

OK: Resistance: 5. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) NG OK Go to step 3 Go to step 5 .6  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals 5 and 10 of the transmission wire connector and body ground. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG (d) (e) Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 9.0 to 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG (f) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 4 Measure the resistance between terminal 8 and body ground.5  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals 4 and 9 of the transmission wire connector and body ground.1 to 5. Measure the resistance between terminals 5 and 10.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–959 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SL1/SL2/S4) (a) SL1+ SL2+ (b) (c) SL1– SL2– S4 D25234 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 5.

(+) D25466 NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1) .0 to 5. Measure the resistance between terminals of the ECM connector. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. OK: Resistance: SL1+ – SL1–: 5.0 to 5.6  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. OK: Resistance: 5.6  at 20_C (68_F) SL2+ – SL2–: 5. Disconnect the connector from the ECM.5  at 20_C (68_F) S4 – E1: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals SL1+. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SL1. then check the movement of the solenoid valve.1 to 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM 3 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL1) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL1. SL2+ and SL2– of the ECM connector and body ground. SL1–.05–960 2 DIAGNOSTICS ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 SL1+ S4 SL1–  – SL2+ SL2– C91565 (d) Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.

Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SL2.5  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) . OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. (+) D25466 NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL2) OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE 5 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) (+) (a) (b) (–) (c) D25467 Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. then check the movement of the solenoid valve. OK: Resistance: 5.1 to 5. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body.DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–961 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL2) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2.

NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) OK 2 INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY OK 3 INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY NG REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY OK REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area P0766 The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic)  Shift solenoid valve S4 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch.) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S4) (+) (a) (b) (–) (c) D25467 Remove the shift solenoid valve S4. brake or gear etc. DTC No. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid body.05–962 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0766 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9F–01 SHIFT SOLENOID ”D” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S4) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor to detect the actual gear position (1st. 3rd or O/D gear). Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical troubles of the shift solenoid valves and valve body. OK: The solenoid makes an operating noise. 2nd. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body.

1 to 5. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. 2nd.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0776 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–963 05C9G–01 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”B” PERFORMANCE (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL2) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor to detect the actual gear position (1st. 2 (–) (+) D25466 NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL2) OK 2 INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY . Measure the resistance between terminals. brake or gear etc. 3rd or O/D gear). OK: Resistance: 5. then check the movement of the solenoid valve. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area P0776 The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic)  Shift solenoid valve SL2 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch. Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical troubles of the shift solenoid valves and valve body.) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL2) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 Remove the shift solenoid valve SL2.5  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. DTC No.

05–964 3 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY NG REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY OK REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

(c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. DTC No. the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. By comparing the counter gear speed signal (NC) with the direct clutch speed sensor signal (NT). Thus smooth gear shifting is performed.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0793 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–965 05C9H–01 INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SPEED SENSOR ”A” CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the counter gear. (b). DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P0793 ECM detects conditions (a). 3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NC < 300 rpm  Open or short in speed sensor (NC) circuit  Speed sensor (NC)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM C3 Counter Gear Speed Sensor 1 LG 26 E12 NC+ LG–B 34 E12 NC– 2 D26541 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . or more: (1 trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd.

Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC–. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals of the speed sensor. OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NC) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR – ECM) (a) (b) (c) NC+ NC–  C91565 (d) Connect the speed sensor (NC) connector. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: Resistance: TOYOTA made: 500 to 620  at 20_C (68_F) AISIN made: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) Measure the resistance between terminals NC+ and NC– of the ECM connector and body ground.05–966 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NC) (a) (b) C58536 Disconnect the speed sensor (NC) connector from the transaxle.

if A is the period of continuity in one cycle. and B is the period of non–continuity. or more: (1–trip detection logic) (a) SLT– terminal: 0V (b) SLT– terminal: 12V Trouble Area  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit  Shift solenoid valve SLT  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid O P–L 13 E12 SLT+ P 12 E12 SLT– SLT+ 2 G SLT– 7 D26542 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Upon receiving a signal of the throttle valve opening angle. For example. to precisely and minutely modulate and generate the line pressure according to the extent of the accelerator pedal depressed or the output of engine power. under electronic control. modulating the line pressure and generating throttle pressure. the ECM controls the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve. then Duty Ratio=A/(A+B) x 100 (%) BE4056 DTC No. P2716 DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec. This controls the line pressure and provides smooth shifting.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P2716 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–967 05C9I–01 PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID ”D” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID SLT) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Line Pressure Control Pressure Current Flow to Solenoid D02290 ON OFF 1 cycle The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator valve (which modulates the line pressure) causes the solenoid valve SLT. (*): Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle.

OK: Resistance: 5.05–968 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SLT) (a) SLT+ (b) (c) SLT– D25234 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .0 to 5. OK: Resistance: 1M or higher NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) SLT+ SLT–  C91565 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.6  at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the ECM connector and body ground. Disconnect the ECM connector.0 to 5. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT–.6  at 20C (68F) Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of the transmission wire connector and body ground. Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 5.

6  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector.0 to 5. Measure the resistance between terminals of the shift solenoid valve SLT. OK: Resistance: 5.DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–969 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 2 (–) Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT. (+) D25466 NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT) . OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. then check the movement of the solenoid valve.

push the ECT SNOW switch once again. driving straightness and turning stability. the switch contact is made and the ECT SNOW mode is selected. D30688 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . guarantee takeoff acceleration. WIRING DIAGRAM I14 Integration Relay E8 *3 ECT Pattern Select SW W–B B 1 8 CH *1 11 CF *2 4 14 DA 11 8 SNOW MPX1 B8 ECM 29 E10 MPX2 Driver Side J/B 22 MPX2 B8 18 E10 MPX1 6 CA W–B IP *1: RHD *2: LHD (*3) Pattern Select Switch (ECT SNOW Switch) When the ECT SNOW switch is pushed.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–977 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9L–01 PATTERN SELECT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ECT SNOW is the system that operates the throttle motor to control engine output to reduce skidding of the driving wheels. To cancel the ECT SNOW mode. The ECT SNOW mode is automatically cancelledout when the ignition switch is turned ”OFF”.

NG Go to step 2 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page xx–xxx) 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) Wire Harness Side: (b) Disconnect the connector of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Standard: Switch condition Tester connection Specified condition Press continuously Pattern select switch 1–4 Continuity Release Pattern select switch 1–4 No continuity NG REPLACE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY .05–978 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) DRIVING TEST Start the engine. HINT:   Driving test should be done on a paved road (a nonskid road). Turn the ECT SNOW switch ”OFF”. Turn the ECT SNOW switch on and perform the same check as (c). Confirm that there is a difference between ECT SNOW switch ”ON” and ”OFF”. Confirm vehicle response by driving from a parked position to fully depressing the accelerator pedal. Measure the resistance between 4 of the wire harness connector and body ground. Standard: NG B59192 Tester connection Specified condition 4 – Body ground Below 1  REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND OK 3 INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY (a) Switch Side: D30685 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Measure the resistance between terminals 1 and 4 of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Standard: There is a difference in acceleration between ”ON” and ”OFF”. Make sure not to use the TRAC system when testing a vehicle equipped with one.

DIAGNOSTICS 4 – 05–979 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY – INTEGRATION RELAY) (a) Instrument Panel J/B Assy Vehicle Front Side: (b) (c) DA Connect the connector of pattern select switch (ECT SNOW switch). Standard: Switch condition Tester connection Specified condition Press continuously Pattern select switch DA–14 (SNOW) – Body ground Below 1  Release Pattern select switch DA–14 (SNOW) – Body ground 10 k or higher DA SNOW D30751 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page xx–xxx) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) AND . Measure the resistance between terminal SNOW of instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) and body ground. Disconnect the instrument panel J/B assy (integration relay) connector.

05–920 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C94–02 PRE–CHECK 1. The OBD scan tool or hand– held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data (For operating instructions. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book. It also has a check mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip. (4) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. In addition to CHK ENG (MIL) illuminating when a malfunction is detected. connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–931). (3) To check the DTCs.). and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. and ensure thorough malfunction detection. By switching the ECM to check mode when troubleshooting. the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester. the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection. (2) Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the Check Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)/CHK ENG (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system/components or in the driving system components which affect vehicle emissions. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO. (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description (1) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles. technicians can cause the CHK ENG (MIL) to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 2). the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO15031–6 are recorded in the ECM memory. or a malfunction in the computer. (5) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use.

the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. DLC3 D25148 Terminal No. the malfunction code is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip).  If communication is still not possible when the tool is connected to another vehicle. inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle. there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand– held tester. If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test.). Connection Voltage or Resistance Condition 7 Bus  Line Pulse generation During communication 4 Chassis Ground  Body Ground / 1  or less Always 16 Battery Positive  Body Ground / 9 to 14 V Always HINT: If your display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of hand–held tester to DLC3. 2. (1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running. the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip. (2) When the engine is started.DIAGNOSTICS – (6) (b) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 05–921 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) *2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is first detected.  If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle. this second detection causes the CHK ENG (MIL) to illumenate (2nd trip) (However. HINT: If the MIL does not come on. so consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual. If the light remains on. (1) The vehicle’s ECM uses ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD) communication protocol. the MIL should go off. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2 format. (a) FI2547 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE) Check the MIL. . the problem is probably in the tool itself. Inspect the DLC3. troubleshoot the combination meter.

(1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode. and note them down. (a) Check the DTC. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. always check the DTCs and freeze frame data. (2) See page 05–931 to confirm the details of the DTCs. using the hand–held tester. (7) Start the engine (MIL goes out after the engine starts). Furthermore. see the hand–held tester instruction book. or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. So before switching modes.05–922 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) (b) Check the DTC.  Battery voltage 11 V or more  Throttle valve fully closed  Shift lever in P range  Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. ON OFF BR3904 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Switch the hand–held tester from Normal mode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes). (6) 0. (1) Check the initial conditions. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3.13 sec. the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode. NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa. (c) Clear the DTC.13 sec. 3. (1) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions. . the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. 0.

(10) After checking the DTC. 4th (O/D) SPD (NC) Counter Gear Speed display: 50 r/min LOCK UP SOL Lock Up Solenoid Status/ ON or OFF KICKDOWN SW Kick down SW Status/ ON or OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note  Brake Pedal is depressed: ON  Brake Pedal is released: OFF u Shift lever Range is.DIAGNOSTICS – (8) 05–923 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. actuator and so on without parts removal. 2nd. 3rd or 4th (O/D) u D Range is warmed up. Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) STOP LIGHT SW Stop light SW Status/ ON or OFF SHIFT Actual Gear Position/ 1st. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. read the ”DATA LIST”. sensor. (a) Warm up the engine. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time. which all DTCs etc. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (b) Clear the DTC. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. Same as input shaft speed u  Lock Up: ON  Except Lock Up: OFF u  Accelerator Pedal is depressed: ON  Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF u . When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 10 seconds or more. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs. inspect the applicable circuit. are erased. 2nd. you can read the value of the switch.4th (O/D).  D: 1st. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions. as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode. (e) According to the display on tester. use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data. 4. etc. 3rd. etc. (c) Clear the DTC.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . R: ON Except R: OFF DRIVE PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST.: 215_C (419_F) 80_C (176_F) (After Stall Test) If the value is ”–40_C (–40_F)” or ”215_C (419_F)”. Normal Condition Diagnostic Note The shift lever range and these values are different. SHIFT [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid valve and set the each shift range by yourself. 5. (a) Test Details [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid SLT and raise the line pressure. OFF: No action (normal operation) Diagnostic Note – LOCK UP [Test Details] Control the shift solenoid DSL to set the ATM to the lock–up condition. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Speed: 60 km/h (37 mph) or more Possible to check the DSL operation. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis. S IDL: ON [Others] ON: Line pressure up. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time.: –40_C (–40_F) max. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. (e) According to the display on tester. D and 3: ON Except D and 3: OFF SOLENOID (SLT) Shift Solenoid SLT Status/ ON or OFF IG SW ON: ON u AT FLUID TEMP ATF Temp. conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms. try to reproduce the symptoms of the trouble. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. there are failures of the PNP switch or shift cableadjustment cable adjustment. perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. P or N: ON Except P or N: OFF REVERSE PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. [Vehicle Condition] Less than 50 km/h (31 mph) [Others] S Press " button: Shift up S Press u button: Shift down Possible to check the operation of the shift solenoid values. (a) Warm up the engine. shift down. Sensor Value/ min. [Vehicle Condition] S Vehicle Stopped.05–924 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) PNP SW [NSW] PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. ATF temp. or the shift point is too high or too low. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor circuit is opened or shorted. Item LINE PRESS UP 6. VSV. If the problem is that the transaxle does not shift up.

is 60C (140F) or lower) (2) Check for shift shock and slip. etc. check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1. 2. 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place. (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. If there is a big jump in engine speed. CAUTION: Before conducting this test. 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift.)  O/D Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control (1. Water temp. Water temp. is 60C (140F) or less. 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). If there is a 10 km/h (6 mph) difference between the set cruise control speed and vehicle speed. (Down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed. Brake pedal is depressed. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range. there is no lock–up. While running in the D range.  Down–shifting causes engine overrun. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential. 2. depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. 3rd and O/D gears. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . HINT:  O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control (1. (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction.  Drive in D range O/D gear. (3) Check for abnormal noise and vibration. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2. Then. torque converter. and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 60 km/h (37 mph). (b) S range test Shift to the S range.) (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration.  Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when:  The ATF temperature is low. release the parking brake. Check to see that 1 " 2. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism. (4) Check kick–down operation.  Down–shifting is required continuously.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–925 7. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). 2nd.  Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly.

do this test in a wide. clear level area which provides good traction. (a) MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS Measure the stall speed. The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuring the stall speeds in the D and R ranges.  The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. 9 10111213141516 (4) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal.  To ensure safety. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (3) Fully apply the parking brake. (b) Stall speed high in D range  Line pressure too low  Forward clutch slipping  No. (7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time. 2 one–way clutch not operating properly  U/D clutch slipping (c) Stall speed high in R range  Line pressure too low  Direct clutch slipping  1st and reverse brake slipping  U/D clutch slipping (d) Stall speed high in D and R ranges  Line pressure too low  Improper fluid level  U/D one–way clutch not operating properly AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. Stall speed: 2. Stall speed: 2.550 " 150 rpm Evaluation: Problem Possible cause (a) Stall speed low in D and R ranges  Engine output may be insufficient  Stator one–way clutch not operating properly HINT: If more than 600 rpm below the specified value. (1) Chock the 4 wheels. the torque converter could be faulty.05–926 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 8. DLC3 TAC (5) Start the engine.  Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds. Press all the way down on the D25148 accelerator pedal with your right foot. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F).550 " 150 rpm (8) Do the same test in the R range. (6) Shift into the D range.

NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). This is used for checking the condition of the direct clutch. measure the time lag for N " R. there will be a certain time lapse or lag before the shock can be felt. 9 10111213141516 Idle speed: 650 ± 50 rpm (In N range and A/C OFF) (5) Shift the lever from N to D range. Using a stop TAC watch. forward clutch. measure the time from when the lever is shifted until the shock is felt. Time lag: N " R less than 1. and 1st and reverse brake. D25148 Time lag: N " D less than 1. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–927 (b) Measure the time lag. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (4) Start engine and check idle speed. (2) (3) Chock the 4 wheels.  Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests.  Take 3 measurements and take the average value.2 seconds (6) In the same way.5 seconds Evaluation (If N " D or N " R time lag is longer than the specified): Problem Possible cause N " D time lag is longer  Line pressure too low  Forward clutch worn  U/D one–way clutch not operating properly N " R time lag is longer  Line pressure too low  Direct clutch worn  1st and reverse brake worn  U/D one–way clutch not operating properly AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling.

 The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs.968 (18. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F).2.031 (9. psi) Idling 372 to 412 (3. HYDRAULIC TEST (a) Measure the line pressure.5 to 10.1.0 to 20. (8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. (5) Start the engine and check idling speed.9 to 7. (1) Warm up the ATF.05–928 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 9. (9) In the same way.8 to 4.5. do the test in R range. 135 to 150) 1. Quickly read the highest line pressure when engine speed reaches stall speed. (7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling. 256 to 285) Evaluation: Problem Possible cause If the measured values at all ranges are higher  Shift solenoid valve SLT defective  Regulator valve detective If the measured values at all ranges are lower  Shift solenoid valve SLT defective  Regulator valve detective  Oil pump defective If pressure is low in the D range only  D range circuit fluid leak  Forward clutch defective If pressure is low in the R range only  R range circuit fluid leak  Direct clutch defective  1st and reverse brake defective AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .768 to 1. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. 09992–00271) (3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels. (2) Remove the test plug on the rear side of the transaxle case and connect SST.6. 54 to 60) 672 to 742 (6. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test.  Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe. SST SST (6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedC81121 D25472 al and shift into D range. 98 to 108) Stall 931 to 1. SST 09992–00095 (09992– 00231. psi) R range kPa (kgf / cm2. Specified line pressure: Condition D range kPa (kgf / cm2.

(a) Disconnect the transmission wire. While driving. Shift range Gear position D 3rd R Reverse P Pawl Lock HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish. the problem is in the transaxle itself. If any abnormality is found in the above test. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below. shift through the D range. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test. (d) Cancel out the DTC.DIAGNOSTICS D09299 – 05–929 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 10. (c) Connect the transmission wire. it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. do the above road test.

(b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.05–930 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 11. Tester menu flow: G23367 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . be sure to perform the ROAD TEST described earlier. RESET MEMORY CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy. engine assy or ECM. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only (a) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. CAUTION: After performing the RESET MEMORY. (d) Perform the reset memory procedure from the ENGINE menu. (c) Turn the ignition switch to ON.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–918 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05CBY–01 PRECAUTION CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy. HINT: Initialization can not be completed by only removing the battery. engine assy or ECM.

proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check. ATF temp.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–935 0567W–12 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE HINT: If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs. 2. ECM 05–970 01–32 Up–shift to O/D from 3rd while engine is cold AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Stop light switch circuit Engine coolant temp. ECM 05–309 05–941 05–943 01–32 Harsh engagement (N  D) ECM 01–32 Harsh engagement (Lock–up) ECM 01–32 Harsh engagement (Any driving range) ECM 01–32 Poor acceleration ECM 01–32 Engine stalls when starting off or stopping ECM 01–32 No kick–down 1. sensor circuit 2. from O/D to 1st gear. The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters. ECM 05–972 01–32 1. sensor circuit 3. is not up– shifted) ECM 01–32 No down–shift (A particular gear. is not down–shifted) ECM 01–32 No lock–up or No lock–up off 1. Transmission control switch circuit 2. 05–947 05–309 05–309 01–32 Shift point too high or too low ECM 01–32 No gear change by shifting into ”+” or ”–” while the shift lever is in the Sposition 1.  If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits. Kick–down switch circuit 2. check the circuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for troubleshooting. Engine coolant temp.  If the instruction ”Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart” is given in the flow chart for each circuit. 4. sensor circuit Throttle position sensor circuit ECM . from 1st to O/D gear. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART Symptom Suspect Area See page No up–shift (A particular gear. 3. then check and replace the ECM.

Oil strainer 2. C1 accumulator 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No down–shift (O/D  3rd) Valve body assy L No down–shift (3rd  2nd) Valve body assy L No down–shift (2nd  1st) Valve body assy L No lock–up or No lock–up off 1. Lock–up relay valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – Harsh engagement (N  D) 1. No. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L – Vehicle does not move in R range Off–vehicle repair matrix chart – No up–shift (1st  2nd) 1. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart No kick–down Valve body assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 40–47 – L . Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – Harsh engagement (2nd  3rd) Valve body assy L Harsh engagement (3rd  O/D) Valve body assy L Harsh engagement (O/D  3rd) Valve body assy L Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse) 1. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (2nd  3rd) 1. Valve body assy 2. Valve body assy 2. Valve body assy 2. Valve body assy L – L Harsh engagement (N  R) 1. Manual valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – Harsh engagement (Lock–up) 1. Valve body assy 2. Valve body assy 2. RM840U) Symptom Suspect Area See page Vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse range 1. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (3rd  O/D) 1. Primary regulator valve 3.05–936 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) Chapter 2: On–vehicle Repair (L: U241E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub.

4. U/D one–way clutch (F2) 2. 2nd brake (B1) L L Slip or shudder (3rd) Direct clutch (C2) L Slip or shudder (O/D) U/D clutch (C3) L No engine braking (1st – 3rd: D range) U/D brake (B3) L No engine braking (1st: L range) 1st and reverse brake (B2) L No engine braking (2nd: 2 range) 2nd brake (B1) Poor acceleration (All range) 1. No. 40–37 L L L L L Slip or shudder (R range) 1. U/D planetary gear Large shift shock or engine stalls when starting off or stopping Torque converter clutch AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Torque converter clutch Forward clutch (C1) Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) No.1 one–way clutch (F1) U/D one–way clutch (F2) L 40–37 L 40–37 L L L 40–37 . RM840U) Symptom Suspect Area See page Vehicle does not move in any forward range or reverse range 1. 6. 5. 2nd brake (B1) L L No up–shift (2nd  3rd) Direct clutch (C2) L No up–shift (3rd  O/D) U/D clutch (C3) No lock–up or No lock–up off Torque converter clutch Harsh engagement (N  D) 1. 3. Direct clutch (C2) 2. U/D clutch (C3) 2. 4. 3. U/D planetary gear Poor acceleration (O/D) 1. Direct clutch (C2) 2. Torque converter clutch 2. Front and rear planetary gear unit U/D planetary gear Direct clutch (C2) U/D brake (C3) 1st and reverse brake (B2) L L L L L No up–shift (1st  2nd) 1. No. No.1 one–way clutch (F1) L L L Harsh engagement (N  R) 1. Front and rear planetary gear U/D planetary gear U/D one–way clutch (F2) Forward clutch (C1) U/D brake (B3) L L L L L Vehicle does not move in R range 1. 5.1 one–way clutch (F1) 2. 2. 1st and reverse brake (B2) L L Harsh engagement (Lock–up) Torque converter clutch 40–37 Slip or shudder (Forward position: After warm–up) 1.1 one–way clutch (F1) L Slip or shudder (2nd) 1. Forward clutch (C1) 2.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–937 Chapter 3: Off–vehicle Repair (L: U241E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. 5. U/D one–way clutch (F2) 3. 2. 3. 4. 2. 1st and reverse brake (B2) L L Slip or shudder (1st) No.

5 – 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever except for S position Below 1 IG switch ON and Shift lever S position 7.5 – 5.05–934 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C95–01 TERMINALS OF ECM E13 E12 E10 E11 E9 I34746 Symbols (Terminal No.5 R Y – BR R–Y SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E11–1) SFTD (E10–21) (E10 21) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1) ATF temperature: 115 C (239 F) or more W*1  BR *1: LHD AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Below 1.5 7.5 IG switch ON and Shift lever S position 7.5 IG switch ON and kick–down switch ON Below 1 IG switch ON and kick–down switch OFF 10 – 14 .) S4 ((E12–10)) – E1 ((E11–1)) DSL (E12–11) (E12 11) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1) Wiring Color L – BR STD Voltage (V) Below 1 O/D gear 10 – 14 Except O/D gear Below 1 IG switch ON Below 1 Vehicle driving under lock–up range 10 – 14 IG switch ON 10 – 14 IG switch ON Below 1 1st or 2nd gear 10 – 14 3rd or O/D gear Below 1 IG switch ON 10 – 14 1st gear 10 – 14 Except 1st gear Below 1 L B – BR L–B SLT+ (E12–13) – SLT– (E12–12) P–L – P SL2+ (E12–17) – SL2 (E12 SL2– (E12–16) 16) R – R–B SL1+ (E12–19) – SL1 (E12 SL1– (E12–18) 18) Condition IG switch ON Y – Y–B NC+ (E12–26) – NC– (E12–34) LG – LG–B Engine is running Below 1 and 4 – 5 NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35) B–O – B Engine is running Below 1 and 4 – 5 THO (E12–32) – E2 (E13–28) V – BR D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1) LG B – BR LG–B R (E10–11) (E10 11) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1) V–W – BR SPT1 (E10–20) (E10 20) – E1 (E11–1) (E11 1) L – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever D range 10 – 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever other than D range Below 1 IG switch ON and Shift lever R range 10 – 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever other than R range Below 1 IG switch ON 4.5 – 14 B – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever ”–” position (Down shift) IG switch ON and Shift lever S position SFTU (E10–22) (E10 22) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1) Below 1.5 – 14 R – BR IG switch ON and Shift lever ”+” position (Up shift) KD*1 (E10 (E10–30) 30) – E1 (E11 (E11–1) 1) Below 1.

it is possible to shift in 1 to 4 positions. Shifting ”+” once changes up 1 shift range position. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–972 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05C9K–01 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When shifting the shift lever into S position using the transmission control switch. ”–” once changes down 1 shift range position respectively.

4 B–G 1 4D ALT 2 FL MAIN W–B 1 4B 1 B–G A J15 J/C Battery IJ IK IP *1: LHD *2 RHD D30750 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – 05–973 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) WIRING DIAGRAM T7 Transmission Control SW ECM 20 E10 SPT1 21 E10 SFTD 22 E10 SFTU L R–W 3 SCT S 7 B SFTD 1 R SFTU 2 J17 J/C W–B (*1) W–B E A 5 A W–B (*2) Center J/B R–W 1 CG 7 CA R–W 7 DB R–W Driver Side J/B B–G G–Y IG1 Relay GAUGE1 1 DN 5 5 DH 3 1 9 DA 2 AM1 1 DH W–B I13 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.

Measure the voltage between terminals SPT1 and E1 of the ECM.5 to 14 V SFTD D30684 OK NORMAL NG 3 INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) SFTU (+) (a) (b) (c) SFTD (+) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift range Tester connection Specified condition Shift to ”+” (Up shift) SFTU – E1 Below 1.5 V S position SFTU – E1 7.05–974 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK ECM (a) (b) E1 Turn the ignition switch to ON.5 V S position SFTD – E1 7. OK: Shift range Tester connection Specified condition Shift to ”+” (Up shift) SFTU – E Continuity S position SFTU – E No continuity Shift to ”–” (Down shift) SFTD – E Continuity S position SFTD – E No continuity E (–) H42585 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY .5 to 14 V Shift to ”–” (Down shift) SFTD – E1 Below 1. OK: Shift range Specified condition Except S position Below 1 V S position 7. Measure the resistance between terminals E and SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector.5 to 14 V SPT1 NG Go to step 6 D30684 OK 2 CHECK ECM E1 (a) SFTU Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the ECM.

Check the continuity between ECM and transmission control switch. OK: SFTD A   NG H42967 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND OK 5 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION COTROL SWITCH – BODY GROUND) Check the continuity between body ground and E of the transmission control switch connector (wire harness side). OK: Continuity NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) 05–975 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) E11 Tester connection Specified condition SFTU (E11–22) – SFTU (A–2) Continuity SFTD (E11–21) – SFTD (A–1) Continuity SFTD SFTU SFTU Disconnect the ECM connector.

Measure the voltage between terminal SPT1 and E1 of the ECM connector. Turn the ignition switch to ON. Check the continuity between terminal IG and S of the transmission control switch. Disconnect the ECM connector.05–976 6 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U241E(1AZ–FSE)) INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) (c) IG S H42585 Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift range Tester connection Specified condition Except S position IG – S No continuity S position IG – S Continuity NG REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY OK 7 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) (c) (d) E1 (–)  SPT1 (+) Connect the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift range Tester connection Except S position SPT1 – E1 Below 1 V S position SPT1 – E1 7.5 to 14 V C91567 NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE Specified condition HARNESS AND .

Customer’s Name Registration Year / / Frame No.05–984 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567O–09 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK Transmission Control System Check Sheet Inspector’s Name : Registration No. Date Vehicle Brought In / Date Problem Occurred How Often Does Problem Occur? / km mile Odometer Reading /  Continuous /  Intermittent (  Vehicle does not move (  Any range  No up–shift (  1st  2nd  No down–shift (  O/D  3rd times a day)  Particular range)  2nd  3rd  3rd  O/D )  3rd  2nd  2nd  1st )  No up–shift (S range)  No down–shift (S range) Symptoms  Lock–up malfunction  Shift point too high or too low  Harsh engagement (  N  D  Lock–up  Any drive range)  Slip or shudder  No kick–down  Others Check Item MIL Normal Remains ON 1st Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC ) 2nd Time Normal code Malfunction code (DTC ) DTC Check AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

. check the circuit listed in the table below and proceed to the page given. (See Page) Detection Item Trouble Area  Combination meter  Open or short in speed sensor circuit  Speed sensor  ECM MIL *1 Memory       P0500 (05–98) Vehicle Speed Sensor Malfunction P0710 (05–1003) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction (ATF Temperature Sensor) P0711 (05–1005) Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (ATF Temperature Sensor) P0750 (05–1007) Shift Solenoid ”A” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)  Shift solenoid valve S1 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch. brake or gear etc..05–996 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567Q–07 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART If a DTC is displayed during the DTC check.)   P0758 (05–1010) Shift Solenoid ”B” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve S2 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S2  ECM   P0770 (05–1013) Shift Solenoid ”E” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)  Shift solenoid valve SL is stuck open or closed  Valve body blocked or stuck  Shift solenoid valve SL  Torque converter clutch  Automatic transaxle (clutch. brake or gear etc.)   P0753 (05–1010) Shift Solenoid ”A” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve S1)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve S1 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S1  ECM   P0755 (05–1007) Shift Solenoid ”B” Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve S2)  Shift solenoid valve S2 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch.)   P0773 (05–1015) Shift Solenoid ”E” Electrical (Shift Solenoid Valve SL)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL  ECM   P1520 (05–1018) Stop Light Switch Circuit  Open or short in stop light switch circuit  Stop lamp switch assy  ECM   P1725 (05–1019) NT Revolution Sensor Circuit Malfunction (Input Turbine Speed Sensor)  Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit  Speed sensor (NT)  ECM   P1760 (05–1021) Linear Solenoid for Line Pressure Control Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SLT)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit  Shift solenoid valve SLT  ECM   P1780 (05–1024) Park/Neutral Position Switch Malfunction  Short in park/neutral position switch circuit  Park/Neutral position switch assy  ECM   P1790 (05–1027) ST Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve ST)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve ST circuit  Shift solenoid valve ST  ECM   P1798 (05–1030) SB Solenoid Circuit Malfunction (Shift Solenoid Valve SB)  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SB circuit  Shift solenoid valve SB  ECM   AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) O Open en or short in ATF tem temp. *1 :  .. brake or gear etc. MIL light up DTC No. sensor circuit  Transmission wire (ATF temperature sensor)  ECM .

etc. brake and gear components. inside the automatic transmission are damaged. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–997 HINT: This DTC may be output when the clutch.

before starting troubleshooting. 1 Vehicle Brought to Workshop 2 Customer Problem Analysis (See page 05–984) 3 Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 4 Check and Clear DTC and Freeze Frame Data (See page 05–985) 5 Visual Inspection 6 Setting the Check Mode Diagnosis (See page 05–985) 7 Problem Symptom Confirmation Symptom does not occur: Go to step 8 Symptom occur: Go to step 9 8 Symptom Simulation (See page 01–22) 9 DTC Check (See page 05–996) DTC is not output: Go to step 10 DTC is output: Go to step 17 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . make sure to check that there is no trouble in the multiplex communication system.05–980 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567N–10 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT: The ECM of this system is connected to the multiplex communication system. Therefore.

DIAGNOSTICS 10 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) Basic Inspection (See page 40–2. 40–8 and 40–69) NG Go to step 19 OK 11 Mechanical System Test (See page 05–985) NG Go to step 16 OK 12 Manual Shifting Test (See page 05–985) NG Go to step 14 OK 13 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 1 (See page 05–1000) NG Go to step 18 OK 14 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 2 (See page 05–1000) NG Go to step 16 OK 15 Problem Symptoms Table Chapter 3 (See page 05–1000) NG 16 Part Inspection Go to step 19 17 DTC Chart (See page 05–996) 18 Circuit Inspection (See page 05–1003) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05–981 .

05–982 DIAGNOSTICS 19 Identification of Problem 20 Repair 21 Confirmation Test End AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) .

DIAGNOSTICS – 05–1033 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05C8O–01 KICK DOWN SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The kick–down switch is turned ON when the accelerator pedal is depressed to the full throttle and sends signals to ECM. When the kick–down switch is turned ON. the ECM disregards the kick–down signals and controls shifting at the normal shift points. the ECM controls gear shifting according to the programmed shift diagrams. If a short circuit develops in the kick–down switch. WIRING DIAGRAM Center J/B 6 CA 6 CJ W–B 1 IG1 K2 Kick Down SW W W–B 1 ECM 12 2 W 1 E10 KD * IG1 2 W–B IP *1: LHD G25416 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1034 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TERMINAL VOLTAGE (a) (b) KD Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: Accelerator pedal Voltage Fully depressed (Kick–down switch is ON) Below 1 V Released (Kick–down switch is OFF) 10 to 14 V H42584 OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE NG 2 INSPECT KICK DOWN SWITCH (a) (b) Disconnect the kick–down switch connector. Check continuity between terminals of the kick–down switch connector when kick–down switch is ON and OFF. Measure voltage between terminal KD of ECM and body ground when accelerator pedal is fully depressed or not. OK: Kick–down switch D02350 NG Continuity ON Continuity OFF No continuity REPLACE KICK DOWN SWITCH OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .

05–998 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567R–10 LOCATION Combination Meter (MIL) ECM DLC3 Stop Lamp Switch Assy LHD: Kick–down Switch Shift Lock Control Unit (Transmission Control Switch) Speed Sensor (NT) Transmission Wire (ATF Temperature Sensor) Shift Solenoid Valve SL Park/neutral Position Switch Assy Shift Solenoid Valve S2 Shift Solenoid Valve SB Shift Solenoid Valve S1 Shift Solenoid Valve ST Shift Solenoid Valve SLT D30681 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0710 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1003 0567Z–06 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM. DTC No. P0710 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Either (a) or (b) is detected for 0.5 sec. sensor resistance is less than 79  (d) After engine has been operating for 15 min. sensor is more than 156 k  Open or short in ATF temp. or more: (1 trip detection logic) (c) Temp. resistance at temp. or more. sensor circuit  Transmission wire (ATF temperature sensor)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM E1 ECT Solenoid ECM BR O E2 6 V O THO 1 28 E13 E2 30 E13 THO D26545 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1004 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO (a) (b) (c) E2 C54864 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: Resistance: 79  to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) E2 THO C95813 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Resistance: 79  to 156 k Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors.

4 110 (230) 0.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0711 – 05–1005 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05C8G–01 TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The ATF temperature sensor converts the fluid temperature into a resistance value which is input into the ECM. ATF temp. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2.2 Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. sensor circuit  Transmission wire (ATF temperature sensor)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–1003. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols THO – Body ground E2 – Body ground NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Specified condition No continuity REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE . OK: Temperature: C (F) Resistance: k 10 (50) 6. of engine start. and 10 km. temp. of atmosphere and that of engine coolant is more than –10C (b) After normal driving for over 20 min. is less than 10C  Open or short in ATF temp. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR) THO (a) (b) E2 C54864 (c) Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. P0711 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Both (a) and (b) are detected: (2–trip detection logic) (a) After 12 sec. DTC No.

Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: Temperature: C (F) Resistance: k 10 (50) 6.4 110 (230) 0.05–1006 2 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E2 THO (d) C95813 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.2 Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Measure the resistance between terminals THO and E2. OK: Standard (Check for a short): Symbols Specified condition THO – Body ground No continuity E2 – Body ground NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

3rd or O/D gear). 2nd. brake or gear etc. DTC No. brake or gear etc. the valve body or automatic transaxle (clutch. brake or gear etc.)  Shift solenoid valve S2 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch.). Then the ECM compares the actual gear with the shift schedule in the ECM memory to detect the mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valves. DTC Detecting Condition P0750 The gear required by the ECM does not match the actual gear when driving (2–trip detection logic) P0755 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Shift solenoid valve S1 is stuck open or closed  Valve body is blocked up or stuck  Automatic transaxle (clutch.) .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID ”A” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1) DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID ”B” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2) 05–1007 05C8H–01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses signals from the vehicle speed sensor and speed sensor NT to detect the actual gear position (1st.

OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body. S2 S1 S2 D30679 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S1/S2) .05–1008 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S1/S2) (a) (b) S1 (c) Remove the shift solenoid valve S1/S2.

DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1009 INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY(See chapter 2 in the problem symptoms table) NG REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY OK REPAIR OR REPLACE AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Manual shifting as shown in the above table must be done (In the case of a short circuit. solenoid resistance is 100 k or more and it is counted Trouble Area  Open or short in shift solenoid valve S1/S2 circuit  Shift solenoid valve S1/S2  ECM HINT: Check the shift solenoid valve S1 when DTC P0753 is output and check the shift solenoid valve S2 when DTC P0758 is output. If an open or short circuit occurs in either of the solenoid valves. NORMAL Range D 2 (S range) 1 (S range) Solenoid valve S1 S2 ON ON Gear 1st ON OFF 2nd OFF OFF OFF 3rd ON ON ON ON OFF SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1 MALFUNCTIONING SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2 MALFUNCTIONING Solenoid valve S1 S2 OFF X Solenoid valve S1 S2 X ON Gear 3rd Gear BOTH SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES MALFUNCTIONING Gear when shift selector is manually operated 2nd 3rd X 2nd 3rd X 3rd 3rd X 3rd 3rd X 2nd 3rd ON X 2nd 3rd OFF X 3rd 3rd ON X 2nd 3rd ON X 2nd 3rd X OFF 3rd ON X OFF 3rd OFF O/D X ON O/D OFF 1st X OFF 3rd ON OFF 2nd X OFF 3rd OFF 3rd X OFF 3rd ON ON 1st X OFF O/D ON OFF 2nd X OFF 3rd X: Malfunctions DTC No. The ECM also turns the shift solenoid valve ST OFF at the same time. hydraulic control cannot be performed electronically and must be done manually. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the ECM turns the other solenoid valve ON and OFF to shift to the gear positions shown in the table below. the ECM stops sending current to the short circuited solenoid). P0753 P0758 DTC Detection Condition ECM checks for an open or short circuit in shift solenoid valve S1 or S2 circuit when it changes ECM records DTC P0753 or P0758 if condition (a) or (b) is detected: (a) When solenoid is energized. the ECM controls the remaining normal solenoid valve to allow the vehicle to be operated smoothly (Fail safe function).05–1010 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05C8I–01 DTC P0753 SHIFT SOLENOID ”A” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S1) DTC P0758 SHIFT SOLENOID ”B” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE S2) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shifting from 1st to O/D is performed in combination with ON and OFF operation of the shift solenoid valves S1 and S2 controlled by ECM. If both solenoids malfunction. solenoid resistance is 8  or less and it is counted (b) When solenoid is not energized. Fail safe function: If either of the solenoid valve circuits develops an open or short.

Measure the resistance between terminal S1/S2 of transmission wire connector and body ground. Measure the resistance between terminals. Disconnect the ECM connector.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–1011 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid W S1 15 E12 S1 P 14 E12 S2 5 B S2 P–L 10 G22782 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(S1/S2) (a) S1 (b) S2 D25234 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: S1 – E1: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) S2 – E1: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK: Resistance: 11 to 15 W at 20C (68F) NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 S1 NG S2 C95812 OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.

OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. Measure the resistance between the solenoid valve connector and the solenoid valve body. S2 S1 S2 D30679 NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S1/S2) .05–1012 3 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(S1/S2) (a) (b) S1 (c) Remove the shift solenoid valve S1/S2. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body.

OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. clutch or brake slips or gear is broken. (2–trip detection logic)  Shift solenoid valve SL is stuck open or closed  Valve body blocked or stuck  Shift solenoid valve SL  Torque converter clutch  Automatic transaxle (clutch.). brake or gear etc. or lock–up remains ON in the lock–up OFF range. brake or gear etc. Then the ECM compares the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch with the lock–up schedule in the ECM memory to detect mechanical trouble of the shift solenoid valve SL. DTC No.) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL) (a) (b) (c) D30680 Remove the shift solenoid valve SL. valve body and torque converter clutch or automatic transaxle (clutch. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area P0770  Lock–up does not occur when driving in the lock–up range (normal driving at 80 km/h 50 mph). OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. Measure the resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL) OK 2 INSPECT TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY(See chapter 2 in the problem symptoms table) NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION VALVE BODY ASSY .DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0770 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1013 05C8J–01 SHIFT SOLENOID ”E” MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ECM uses the signals from the throttle position sensor. (2–trip detection logic)  When lock–up is ON. air–flow meter and crankshaft position sensor to monitor the engagement condition of the lock–up clutch.

05–1014 3 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECT TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY NG OK REPAIR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH ASSY .

(2–trip detection logic) (a) Solenoid resistance is 8  or less when solenoid is energized. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area P0773 Either (a) or (b) is detected for 1 time. Fail safe function: If the ECM detects a malfunction.  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SL circuit  Shift solenoid valve SL  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid R LG SL 4 13 E12 SL D26539 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . it turns the shift solenoid valve SL OFF. DTC No. (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or more when solenoid is not energized. which then controls operation of the lock–up clutch.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P0773 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1015 05687–06 SHIFT SOLENOID ”E” ELECTRICAL (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SL) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The shift solenoid valve SL is turned ON and OFF by signals from the ECM to control the hydraulic pressure acting on the lock–up relay valve.

Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE–ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 SL C95812 OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal SL and the body ground. Measure the resistance between terminals SL and E1. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–1016 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SL) (a) SL (b) C54864 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle.

DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1017 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL) (a) (b) (c) D30680 NG REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SL) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Remove the shift solenoid valve SL. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. Measure the resistance between terminal SL of shift solenoid valve and the solenoid valve body. OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE . OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body.

05–1018 DIAGNOSTICS DTC P1520 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05C8K–01 STOP LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The purpose of this circuit is to prevent the engine from stalling while driving in lock–up condition. this switch sends signals to the ECM. When the brake pedal is depressed. DTC No. Then the ECM cancels the operation of the lock–up clutch while braking is in progress. P1520 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Stop light switch remains ON while vehicle running (1–trip detection logic)  Short in stop lamp switch signal circuit  Stop lamp switch  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM See page 05–115. when brakes are suddenly applied. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY NG REPLACE STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(STOP LAMP SWITCH ASSY – ECM) NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

3rd or O/D gear (c) Solenoid valves and Park/neutral position switch are normal (d) NT < 300 rpm  Open or short in speed sensor (NT) circuit  Speed sensor (NT)  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM T4 Turbine Speed Sensor B–O 1 2 B 27 E12 NT+ 35 E12 NT– D26540 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No. (c) and (d) continuity for 5 sec. By comparing the input turbine speed signal (NT) with the vehicle speed sensor signal. the ECM detects the shift timing of the gears and appropriately controls the engine torque and hydraulic pressure according to various conditions. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P1725 ECM detects conditions (a). Thus smooth gear shifting is performed. (b).DIAGNOSTICS DTC P1725 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1019 057ZG–05 NT REVOLUTION SENSOR CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This sensor detects the rotation speed of the input turbine. or more: (1 – trip detection logic) (a) Vehicle speed: 50 km/h (20 mph) or more (b) 2nd.

05–1020 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT SPEED SENSOR(NT) (a) (b) C58536 Disconnect the sensor connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols Specified condition NT+ – Body ground No continuity NT– – Body ground NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure the resistance between terminals NT+ and NT–. Disconnect the ECM connector. Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor (NT). OK: Resistance: 560 to 680  at 20_C (68_F) NG REPLACE SPEED SENSOR(NT) OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(SPEED SENSOR–ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) NT+ NT– C95812 Connect the speed sensor (NT) connector.

modulating the line pressure and generating throttle pressure. if A is the period of continuity in one cycle. This reduces the function of the line pressure and provides smooth shifting. under electronic control. or more: (a) SLT– terminal: 0 V (b) SLT– terminal: 12 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SLT circuit  Shift solenoid valve SLT  ECM . the ECM controls the line pressure by sending a predetermined (*) duty ratio to the solenoid valve. (*): Duty Ratio The duty ratio is the ratio of the period of continuity in one cycle. Upon receiving a signal of the throttle valve opening angle. then Duty Ratio=A/(A+B) x 100 (%) BE4056 DTC No. to precisely and minutely modulate and generate the line pressure according the extent of the accelerator pedal depressed or the output of engine power. and B is the period of non–continuity. For example.DIAGNOSTICS DTC P1760 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1021 05C8L–01 LINEAR SOLENOID FOR LINE PRESSURE CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Line Pressure Control Pressure Current Flow to Solenoid D02290 ON OFF 1 cycle The throttle pressure that is applied to the primary regulator valve (which modulates the line pressure) causes the solenoid valve SLT. P1760 DTC Detection Condition Condition (a) or (b) below is detected 1 sec.

0 to 5.05–1022 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid 17 P–L G SLT+ E13 SLT+ 3 GR 16 E13 SLT– P SLT– 8 D26542 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SLT) (a) SLT+ (b) (c) SLT– D25234 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 5. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols SLT+ – Body ground SLT– – Body ground NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to step 3 Specified condition No continuity .6  at 20C (68F) Check continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Measure resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT–.

Measure the resistance between terminals SLT+ and SLT– of ECM connector.0 to 5. OK: Resistance: 5. Measure the resistance between terminals.6  at 20C (68F) Connect the positive (+) lead with a 21 W bulb to terminal 2 and the negative (–) lead to terminal 1 of the solenoid valve connector. OK: Resistance: 5. OK: Standard (Check for short): Symbols Specified condition SLT+ – Body ground No continuity SLT– – Body ground NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM 3 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT) 1 (a) (b) 2 (c) 1 Remove the shift solenoid valve SLT. 2 (–) (+) D25466 NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SLT) .DIAGNOSTICS 2 – 05–1023 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE–ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) SLT+ SLT– C95813 Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle.6  at 20C (68F) Check the continuity between the wire harness side connectors. Disconnect the ECM connector. then check the movement of the solenoid valve.0 to 5. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

or more in the S position (2–trip detection logic).  2 or more switches are ON simultaneously for P. DTC No. R. P1780 When any of following conditions for 500 msec. or more (2–trip detection logic). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Short Sh t in i park/neutral k/ t l position iti switch it h circuit i it  Park/neutral position switch assy  ECM 0568L–06 . (a) P position input signal is ON.05–1024 DTC DIAGNOSTICS P1780 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The park/neutral position switch detects the shift lever position and sends the signals to the ECM. (b) N position input signal is ON. DTC Detecting Condition DTC is detected for 500 msec. N and D position. (c) R position input signal is ON.

DIAGNOSTICS – 05–1025 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) WIRING DIAGRAM N1 Park/neutral Position SW ECM W–L 20 IK2 R–Y 5 IK1 PL 1 RL 2 J/C D D D D W–L J18 J29 J18 J29 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) J/C A C R–Y (*2) R–Y(*2) J22 J23 W–L 21 E10 P 11 E10 R J5 J/C R–W 3 R–Y(*1) RB R–Y(*1) C 9 IK2 R NL 5 LG–B DL 7 A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2) R 10 IK2 C J/C A A J18 J29 (*1) (*2) 22 E10 N R 10 E10 D LG–B Center J/B R–W 1 IK1 8 CA 1 CD R–W R–W Driver Side J/B IG1 Relay 1 DN B–G G–Y 3 5 5 DH GAUGE2 R–W 9 DA 2 1 27 DA AM1 1 DH W–B I13 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.4 B–G 1 4D ALT 2 1 1 4B FL MAIN B–G Battery IJ *1: LHD *2: RHD D30748 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

OK: C96192 NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Shift Range Terminal Voltage (V) P P – E1 10 to 14 R R – E1 10 to 14 N N – E1 10 to 14 D D – E1 10 to 14 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Turn the ignition switch to ON. Check the continuity between each terminals shown below when the shift lever is moved to each range.  Shift Range  C53270 Terminal No. NG REPLACE PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH – ECM) (a) (b) (c) (d) E1 R D N P Connect the park/neutral position switch connector. Disconnect the ECM connector.05–1026 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH ASSY (a) (b)       Disconnect the park/neutral position switch connector. to continuity P 1–3 6–9 R 2–3 – N 3–5 6–9 D 3–7 – OK: There is continuity. P and N of the ECM when the shift lever is shifted to the following range. Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that R as well as D.

DIAGNOSTICS DTC P1790 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1027 05C8M–01 ST SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shift solenoid valve ST is switched ON–OFF by a signal from ECM so that let in or out timing of O/D and 2nd brake is adjusted by operating orifice control valve. DTC No. the shift shock becomes big. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area P1790 ECM memorizes DTC P1790 if (a) or (b) condition below is detected once or more. Therefore.  Open or short in shift solenoid valve ST circuit  Shift solenoid valve ST  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid Y ST R–B 2 12 E12 ST D26539 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . If it is broken. (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or higher (open circuit) when solenoid is not energized. shift solenoid valve ST operates when letting in or out reverse clutch. (a) Solenoid resistance is 30  or lower (short circuit) when solenoid is energized.

Disconnect the ECM connector.05–1028 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(ST) (a) ST (b) C54864 Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure the resistance between terminal ST and body ground. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 ST Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) NG C95812 OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure the resistance between terminals ST and E1.

OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise. NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(ST) . OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body.DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1029 INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(ST) (a) (b) (c) D09034 Remove the shift solenoid valve ST. Measure the resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid valve body.

Fail safe function:  S shift control prohibition. (b) Solenoid resistance is 100 k or higher (open circuit) when solenoid is not energized. the driving mode turns to the ordinal D range. DTC No.  On activating the fail–safe function during S shift. Trouble Area  Open or short in shift solenoid valve SB circuit  Shift solenoid valve SB  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM ECM E1 ECT Solenoid V SB L 7 19 E12 SB D26539 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (a) Solenoid resistance is 30  or lower (short circuit) when solenoid is energized.05–1030 DTC DIAGNOSTICS P1798 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05C8N–01 SB SOLENOID CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE SB) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION Shift solenoid valve SB controls the 2nd brake (B1) and 1st and reverse brake pressures and performs the 1st and 2nd engine brake control. DTC Detection Condition P1798 ECM memorizes DTC P1798 if (a) or (b) condition below is detected once or more.

OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) SB C54864 NG Go to step 3 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION WIRE – ECM) (a) (b) (c) E1 SB NG C95812 OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Connect the transmission wire connector to the transaxle. OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . Measure resistance between terminal 7 and body ground.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–1031 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT TRANSMISSION WIRE(SB) (a) (b) Disconnect the transmission wire connector from the transaxle. Measure resistance between terminals SB and E1. Disconnect the ECM connector.

05–1032 3 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SB) (a) (b) (c) D09034 Remove the shift solenoid valve SB. NG OK REPAIR OR REPLACE TRANSMISSION WIRE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE(SB) . OK: Resistance: 11 to 15  at 20_C (68_F) Connect the positive (+) lead to the terminal of solenoid valve connector and the negative (–) lead to the solenoid valve body. Measure resistance between the solenoid connector and the solenoid body. OK: The solenoid valve makes an operating noise.

05–1040 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05C8Q–01 PATTERN SELECT SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When SNOW mode is selected with the pattern select switch. WIRING DIAGRAM I14 Integration Relay E8 ECT Pattern Select SW W–B 1 8 CH *1 11 CF *2 14 DA B 4 11 8 SNOW I14 MPX1 ECM 29 E10 MPX2 Driver Side J/B 22 I14 MPX2 23 E10 MPX1 6 CA W–B IP *1: RHD *2: LHD D30688 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the transmission automatically shifts up through 3rd to O/D as usual. the ECM controls the solenoid valves and the transmission starts from 2nd gear. In D range.

Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 4 of the pattern select switch. OK: Pattern select switch Specified condition Press continuously Pattern select switch Continuity Release Pattern select switch No continuity NG REPLACE PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY D30685 OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(PATTERN SELECT SWITCH – INTEGRATION RELAY.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1041 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT PATTERN SELECT SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) Disconnect the connector of pattern select switch. PATTERN SELECT SWITCH – BODY GROUND) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OK PROCEED TO NEXT CIRCUIT INSPECTION SHOWN ON PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) AND .

and ensure thorough malfunction detection. the only difference from the usual troubleshooting procedure is that you connect the vehicle to the OBD scan tool complying with ISO 15031–4 or hand– held tester. (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description (1) When troubleshooting Euro–OBD vehicles. the applicable Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) prescribed by ISO15031–6 are recorded in the ECM memory. and read off various data output from the vehicle’s ECM. It also has a check mode for technicians to simulate malfunction symptoms and troubleshoot. (3) To check the DTCs. If the malfunction does not occur in 3–trip. (4) DTCs include ISO controlled codes and manufacturer controlled codes. or a malfunction in the computer. (5) The diagnosis system operates in normal mode during normal vehicle use. the CHK ENG (MIL) goes off but the DTCs remain recorded in the ECM memory. connect the OBD scan tool or hand–held tester to the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) on the vehicle. The OBD scan tool or hand– held tester also enables you to erase the DTCs and check freezed frame data and various forms of engine data (For operating instructions. ISO controlled codes must be set as prescribed by the ISO. while manufacturer controlled codes can be set freely by the manufacturer within the prescribed limits (See DTC chart on page 05–996). (2) Euro–OBD regulations require that the vehicle’s on–board computer illuminates the Check Engine Warning Light (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)/CHK ENG (MIL) on the instrument panel when the computer detects a malfunction in the emission control system/components or in the driving system components which affect vehicle emissions. technicians can cause the CHK ENG (MIL) to illuminate for a malfunction that is only detected once or momentarily (Hand–held tester only) (See step 2). AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . In addition to CHK ENG (MIL) illuminating when a malfunction is detected. By switching the ECM to check mode when troubleshooting. see the OBD scan tool’s instruction book.).DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–985 05C8E–01 PRE–CHECK 1. Most DTCs use 2 trip detection logic (*) to prevent erroneous detection.

the malfunction code is temporarily stored in the ECM memory (1st trip). HINT: If the MIL does not come on. so consult the Service Department listed in the tool’s instruction manual.05–986 DIAGNOSTICS – (6) (b) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) *2 trip detection logic: When a malfunction is first detected.). . (2) When the engine is started. Inspect the DLC3. (1) The MIL comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and the engine is not running.  If communication is normal when the tool is connected to another vehicle. inspect DLC3 on the original vehicle.  If communication is still not possible when the tool is connected to another vehicle. If the light remains on. the MIL should go off. (a) FI2547 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (NORMAL MODE) Check the MIL. turned the ignition switch ON and operated the hand– held tester. the ignition switch must be turned OFF between the 1st trip and the 2nd trip. this second detection causes the CHK ENG (MIL) to illumenate (2nd trip) (However. Connection Voltage or Resistance Condition 7 Bus  Line Pulse generation During communication 4 Chassis Ground  Body Ground / 1  or less Always 16 Battery Positive  Body Ground / 9 to 14 V Always HINT: If your display shows ”UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE” when you have connected the cable of hand–held tester to DLC3. If the same malfunction is detected again during the second drive test. the problem is probably in the tool itself. DLC3 D25148 Terminal No. (1) The vehicle’s ECM uses ISO 9141–2 (Euro–OBD) communication protocol. there is a problem on the vehicle side or tool side. troubleshoot the combination meter. the diagnosis system has detected a malfunction or abnormality in the system. 2. The terminal arrangement of DLC3 complies with ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2 format.

(1) Check the initial conditions. see the hand–held tester instruction book. it erases all DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode. always check the DTCs and freeze frame data. (6) 0. (c) Clear the DTC. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnostic system is switched from normal mode to check (test) mode. (2) See page 05–996 to confirm the details of the DTCs. or if the ignition switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF during the check mode. (5) Turn the ignition switch ON and switch the hand– held tester ON. So before switching modes. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. (3) Prepare the hand–held tester.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–987 (b) Check the DTC. NOTICE: If the hand–held tester switches the ECM from the normal mode to the check mode or vice–versa. (7) Start the engine (MIL goes off after the engine starts).  Battery voltage 11 V or more  Throttle valve fully closed  Shift lever in P or N range  Air conditioning switched OFF (2) Turn the ignition switch OFF. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes.13 sec. the DTC and freeze frame data will be erased. Furthermore.13 sec. 0. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. . the same diagnostic items which are detected in Normal mode can also be detected in Check mode. ON OFF BR3904 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Switch the hand–held tester from Normal mode to Check mode (Check that the MIL flashes). (a) Check the DTC. Using the hand–held tester. 3. (1) Use the hand–held tester to check the DTCs and instructions. the check mode has high sensing ability to detect malfunctions. INSPECT DIAGNOSIS (CHECK MODE) HINT: Hand–held tester only: Compared to the normal mode. and note them down.

(e) According to the display on tester.05–988 DIAGNOSTICS (8) – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) Simulate the conditions of the malfunction described by the customer. 2nd. use the hand–held tester diagnosis selector to check the DTCs and freeze frame data. 3rd. DATA LIST HINT: According to the DATA LIST displayed by the hand–held tester. actuator and so on without parts removal. 3rd or 4th (O/D) u  Lock Up: ON  Except Lock Up: OFF u  Accelerator Pedal is depressed all the way down: ON  Accelerator Pedal is released: OFF u  IG SW ON: OFF O  Pattern SW (2nd) Push: ON O  Pattern SW (2nd) Push: OFF u . 4. (9) After simulating the malfunction conditions. inspect the applicable circuit. (10) After checking the DTC. 2nd. as turning it off switches the diagnosis system from Check mode to Normal mode. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. etc. 4th (O/D) LOCK UP SOL Lock Up Solenoid Status/ ON or OFF KICKDOWN SW Kick down SW Status/ ON or OFF SNOW SW Pattern SW (2nd) Status/ ON or OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note  Brake Pedal is depressed: ON  Brake Pedal is released: OFF u Shift lever Range is. etc. you can read the value of the switch. which all DTCs etc. HINT: Take care not to turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor. Operate the hand–held tester to erase the codes. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the methods to shorten the work time.  D: 1st. are erased. (1) When using the hand–held tester: The following operation will erase the DTC and freeze frame data. read the ”DATA LIST”. Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) STOP LIGHT SW Stop light SW Status/ ON or OFF SHIFT Actual Gear Position/ 1st. (a) Warm up the engine. (b) Clear the DTC. (2) When not using the hand–held tester: Remove the EFI fuse from engine room J/B for 60 seconds or more. NOTICE: Leave the ignition switch ON until you have checked the DTCs.

D and S: ON Except D and S: OFF SOLENOID (SLT) Shift Solenoid SLT Status/ ON or OFF IG SW ON: ON u AT FLUID TEMP ATF Temp. Normal Condition Diagnostic Note The shift lever range and these values are different. actuator and so on to operate without parts removal. (d) Turn the ignition switch ON. OFF: No action (normal operation) Diagnostic Note – LOCK UP [Test Details] Control the shift solenoid SL to set the ATM to the lock–up condition. Item LINE PRESS UP 6. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows the relay.: 215_C (419_F) 80_C (176_F) (After Stall Test) If the value is ”–40_C (–40_F)” or ”215_C (419_F)”. PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION Taking into consideration the results of the customer problem analysis. 5. conduct the following road test referring to the automatic shift schedule and simulate the problem symptoms. If the problem is that the transaxle does not shift up. (a) Warm up the engine. P or N: ON Except P or N: OFF REVERSE PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. perform the ”ACTIVE TEST”. S IDL: ON [Others] ON: Line pressure up. (c) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (a) Test Details [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid SLT and raise the line pressure. Sensor Value/ min. [Vehicle Condition] Less than 50 km/h (31 mph) [Others] S Press " button: Shift up S Press u button: Shift down Possible to check the operation of the shift solenoid values. or the shift point is too high or too low. there are failures of the PNP switch or shift cableadjustment cable adjustment. try to reproduce the symptoms of the trouble. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . (e) According to the display on tester. R: ON Except R: OFF DRIVE PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is. sensor circuit is opened or shorted. It is possible to display the DATA LIST during the ACTIVE TEST. SHIFT [Test Details] Operate the shift solenoid valve and set the each shift range by yourself. [Vehicle Condition] Vehicle Speed: 60 km/h (37 mph) or more Possible to check the SL operation. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one of the method to shorten the work time. ATF temp. VSV. (b) Turn the ignition switch OFF. [Vehicle Condition] S Vehicle Stopped. shift down.: –40_C (–40_F) max.DIAGNOSTICS – 05–989 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) PNP SW [NSW] PNP SW Status/ ON or OFF Shift lever range is.

 Coolant temp. 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift. Check for shock and slip at the 1 " 2. HINT: The check for the cause of abnormal noise and vibration must be done very thoroughly as it could also be sure to loss of balance in the differential. (d) P range test Stop the vehicle on a grade (more than 5) and after shifting into the P range. (4) Check kick–down operation. at a steady speed (lock–up ON) of about 70 km/h (43 mph). is 60C (140F) or less. is 10C (50) or less. 2 " 3 and 3 " O/D up–shift take place.  Drive in D range O/D gear. ensure that the test area is free from people and obstruction. and that the shift points conform to the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). HINT: Manual shift prohibition control is performed when:  Down–shifting causes engine overrun.  ATF temp. 3rd and O/D gears. CAUTION: Before conducting this test. there is no 1 " 2 up–shift and 2 " 1 down–shift.  Down–shifting is required continuously.) (c) R range test Shift into the R range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check for slipping. (2) Check for shift shock and slip. 3 " 2 and O/D " 3 kick–downs conform to those indicated in the automatic shift schedule (See page 03–45). etc. HINT: O/D Gear Up–shift Prohibition Control  Coolant temp. Run in D range lock–up or O/D gear and check for abnormal noise and vibration. check to see that the parking lock pawl holds the vehicle in place. Check that 1 " 2. (b) S range test Shift to the S range. While running in the D range. (5) Check for abnormal shock and slip at kick–down. (6) Check the lock–up mechanism.  Accelerator pedal is released. is 10C (50) or less. 2nd. O/D and 3rd Gear Lock–up Prohibition Control  Brake pedal is depressed.  Shifting the shift lever to ”+” or ”–” changes the shift range on the combination meter. check to see that the possible kick–down vehicle speed limits for 2 " 1. (a) D range test Shift into the D range and fully depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: (1) Check up–shift operation. release the parking brake. there is no lock–up. (Down–shifting to 1st gear may not be performed. ROAD TEST NOTICE: Conduct the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). is 60C (140F) or less and vehicle speed is 70 km/h (43 mph) or less. (3) Check for abnormal noises and vibration.  Lightly depress the accelerator pedal and check that the engine speed does not change abruptly.  ATF temp. When the 2nd start switch is on. If there is a big jump in engine speed. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Then.05–990 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 7. depress the accelerator pedal and check the following points: Shift operations. torque converter.

(a) MECHANICAL SYSTEM TESTS Measure the stall speed. (7) Quickly read the stall speed at this time. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F). One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stoppers outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. SST 09843–18030 (3) Fully apply the parking brake. (1) (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516 TAC DLC3 D25148 Chock the 4 wheels. Stall speed: 2.400 " 150 rpm (8) Do the same test in the R range.  The stall test should always be carried out in pairs. clear level area which provides good traction. Stall speed: 2. (4) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedal. (b) Stall speed high in D range  Line pressure too low  Forward clutch slipping  One–way clutch No.  Do not continuously run this test for longer than 5 seconds. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST.  To ensure safety.2 not operating properly (c) Stall speed high in R range  Line pressure too low  Reverse clutch slipping  1st and reverse brake slipping (d) Stall speed high in D and R ranges  Line pressure too low  Improper fluid level AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–991 8. (5) Start the engine. the torque converter could be faulty.400 " 150 rpm Evaluation: Problem Possible cause (a) Stall speed low in D and R ranges  Engine output may be insufficient  Stator one–way clutch not operating properly HINT: If the value is larger or smaller than the specified value by 600 rpm or more. The object of this test is to check the overall performance of the transaxle and engine by measuring the stall speeds in the D and R ranges. (6) Shift into the D range. do this test in a wide. Press all the way down on the accelerator pedal with your right foot.

measure the time lag for N " R.2 not operating properly N " R time lag is longer  Line pressure too low  Reverse clutch worn  1st and reverse brake worn AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . forward clutch. Using a stop TAC watch.5 seconds Evaluation (If N " D or N " R time lag is longer than the specified): Problem Possible cause N " D time lag is longer  Line pressure too low  Forward clutch worn  One–way clutch No. there will be a certain time lapse or lag before the shock can be felt. Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3 or tachometer to terminal TAC of DLC3 with SST. Time lag: N " R less than 1. This is used for checking the condition of the reverse clutch.  Take 3 measurements and take the average value. measure the time from when the lever is shifted until the shock is felt.2 seconds (6) In the same way. (1) When the shift lever is shifted while the engine is idling. D25148 Time lag: N " D less than 1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SST 09843–18030 (4) Start engine and check idle speed. 9 10111213141516 Idle speed: 650 ± 50 rpm (In N range and A/C OFF) (5) Shift the lever from N to D range. (2) (3) Chock the 4 wheels.05–992 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) (b) Measure the time lag. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operating ATF temperature 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F).  Be sure to allow 1 minute interval between tests. and 1st and reverse brake.

5 to 6.8 to 4.5. 54 to 60) 540 to 640 (5.5.  The line pressure test should always be carried out in pairs. (1) Warm up the ATF.3 to 12.5. (7) Measure the line pressure when the engine is idling. psi) Idling 370 to 410 (3. SST 09992–00095 (09992– 00231.  Be careful to prevent SST’s hose from interfering with the exhaust pipe. psi) R range kPa (kgf / cm2. Specified line pressure: Condition D range kPa (kgf / cm2. 78 to 92) Stall 1.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–993 9.3 to 18. Quickly read the highest line pressure when engine speed reaches stall speed. 09992–00271) SST (3) Fully apply the parking brake and chock the 4 wheels.700 to 1. One technician should observe the conditions of wheels or wheel stopper outside the vehicle while the other is doing the test. do the test in R range. SST (6) Keep your left foot pressing firmly on the brake pedG24063 al and shift into D range. (9) In the same way. (4) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3.810 (17. (8) Depress the accelerator pedal all the way down. HYDRAULIC TEST (a) Measure the line pressure. NOTICE:  Do the test at normal operation ATF temperature 50 to 80C (122 to 176F).230 (11.110 to 1. 161 to 178) 1.2. (2) Remove the test plug on the left side of the transaxle case and connect SST. (5) Start the engine and check idling speed. 246 to 263) Evaluation: Problem Possible cause If the measured values at all ranges are higher  Shift solenoid valve SLT defective  Regulator valve detective If the measured values at all ranges are lower  Shift solenoid valve SLT defective  Regulator valve detective  Oil pump defective If pressure is low in the D range only  D range circuit fluid leak  Forward clutch defective If pressure is low in the R range only  R range circuit fluid leak  Reverse clutch defective  1st and reverse brake defective AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Check that the shift and gear ranges correspond to the table below.05–994 DIAGNOSTICS G24064 – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 10. (c) Connect the transmission wire connector. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . it can be determined whether the trouble is within the electrical circuit or is a mechanical problem in the transaxle. (b) Inspect the manual driving operation. the problem is in the transaxle itself. While driving. (a) Disconnect the transmission wire connector. If any abnormality is found in the above test. Check that the gear change corresponds to the shift range. Shift range Gear position D 3rd R Reverse P Pawl Lock HINT: If the gear positions of the D are difficult to distinguish. do the above road test. shift through the D range. (d) Clear the DTC. MANUAL SHIFTING TEST HINT: By this test.

Tester menu flow: G23367 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . RESET MEMORY CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only (a) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. (b) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. CAUTION: After performing the RESET MEMORY. be sure to perform the ROAD TEST described earlier. (c) Turn the ignition switch to ON.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–995 11. (d) Perform the reset memory procedure from the ENGINE menu. engine assy or ECM.

AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . HINT: Initialization can not be completed by only removing the battery.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–983 05CBZ–01 PRECAUTION CAUTION: Perform the RESET MEMORY (AT initialization) when replacing the automatic transaxle assy. engine assy or ECM.

The Matrix Chart is divided into 3 chapters.05–1000 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 0567W–10 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE HINT: If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the trouble still occurs. ATF temp. Throttle position sensor circuit 3. proceed to the circuit with the next highest number in the table to continue the check. CHAPTER 1: ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT MATRIX CHART Symptom Suspect Area See page No up–shift (A particular gear. Shift point too high or too low 1. ECM 05–1035 01–32 1. is not down–shifted) ECM 01–32 No lock–up or No lock–up off 3. 5. Engine coolant temp. Pattern select switch circuit (ECT SNOW switch) 2. Kick–down switch circuit 2. 2.  If the instruction ”Proceed to next circuit inspection shown on matrix chart” is given in the flow chart for each circuit.  If the trouble still occurs even though there are no abnormalities in any of the other circuits. 3. sensor circuit 05–16 05–1003 05–1005 01–32 Up–shift to O/D from 3rd while engine is cold Stop light switch circuit Engine coolant temp. ECM 05–1033 01–32 No 2nd start 1. then check and replace the ECM. ECM 05–1018 05–16 05–16 01–32 Harsh engagement (N  D) ECM 01–32 Harsh engagement (Lock–up) ECM 01–32 Harsh engagement (Any driving range) ECM 01–32 Poor acceleration 1. 05–1040 05–1035 05–1024 05–1040 01–32 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Pattern select switch circuit (ECT SNOW switch) Transmission control switch circuit Park/neutral position switch circuit Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) ECM 05–1040 01–32 01–32 . Transmission control switch circuit 2. is not up– shifted) ECM 01–32 No down–shift (A particular gear. 4. from 1st to O/D gear. 4. check the circuits for each symptom in the order given in the charts on the following pages and proceed to the page given for troubleshooting. from O/D to 1st gear. ECM 05–16 05–16 01–32 No gear change by shifting into ”+” or ”–” while the shift lever is in the Sposition 1. 6. Engine coolant temp. Instrument panel J/B assy (Integration relay) 3. 5. sensor circuit Throttle position sensor circuit ECM 3. sensor circuit 2. sensor circuit 2. ECM Engine stalls when starting off or stopping ECM No kick–down 1.

Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L – Harsh engagement (1st  2nd) 1. 3. No. 4. Valve body assy 2. 3. 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart No kick–down Valve body assy L Poor acceleration SLT damper L AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 40–42 – . B2 accumulator 2. Manual valve 2. 3–4 shift timing valve L L L Harsh engagement (O/D  3rd) Valve body assy L Harsh engagement (D. C1 accumulator 2. Oil strainer 2. 2. Accumulator control valve L L Harsh engagement (3rd  O/D) 1. B1 accumulator 2. 4. L) Coat relay valve L Slip or shudder (Forward and reverse) 1. 3. Lock–up relay valve Solenoid relay valve Solenoid modulator valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L L – Harsh engagement (N  D) 1. U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No down–shift (O/D  3rd) Valve body assy L No down–shift (3rd  2nd) Valve body assy L No down–shift (2nd  1st) Valve body assy L No lock–up or No lock–up off 1. Manual valve Primary regulator valve Secondary regulator valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L L – Vehicle does not move in R range 1. Valve body assy 2. C2 accumulator 2. 2. C3 accumulator Accumulator control valve Reverse control valve Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L L – Harsh engagement (Lock–up) 1. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (1st  2nd) 1. Accumulator control valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (3rd  O/D) 1. Valve body assy 2. Accumulator control valve L L Harsh engagement (2nd  3rd) 1. 2. RM824E) Symptom Suspect Area See page Vehicle does not move in any forward range and reverse range 1. Accumulator control valve 3. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L L – Harsh engagement (N  R) 1. Lock–up relay valve 2. Off–vehicle repair matrix chart L – No up–shift (2nd  3rd) 1. Accumulator control valve 3.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1001 Chapter 2: On–vehicle Repair (L: U340E. 4.

One–way clutch No. 7. 3.2 L Slip or shudder (2nd) 1. One–way clutch No. 2nd brake 2. Reverse clutch 2.2 L L Harsh engagement (N  R) 1.1 One–way clutch No.2 Reverse Clutch 1st and reverse brake L L L L L Vehicle does not move in R range 1. Slip or shudder (Reverse range) 1. 4. 1st and reverse brake L L Harsh engagement (Lock–up) Torque converter clutch 40–37 Harsh engagement (1st  2nd) 1. One–way clutch No. One–way clutch No. 4. Reverse clutch 2. U341E AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE Repair Manual Pub. Forward clutch 2. 2. No. 5. 2nd brake 2. Planetary gear unit Forward clutch One–way clutch No.05–1002 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) Chapter 3: Off–vehicle Repair (L: U340E. RM824E) Symptom Suspect Area See page Vehicle does not move in any forward range and reverse range 1. 2nd brake 2. 5. 1st and reverse brake L L Slip or shudder (1st) One–way clutch No. 1st and reverse brake L L L No up–shift (1st  2nd) 1.1 L L Slip or shudder (3rd) Direct clutch L Slip or shudder (O/D) O/D and 2nd brake L No engine braking (1st) 1st and reverse brake L No engine braking (2nd) O/D and 2nd brake L Poor acceleration (All range) Torque converter clutch 40–37 Large shift shock or engine stalls when starting off or stopping Torque converter clutch 40–37 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Torque converter clutch Forward clutch Direct clutch O/D and 2nd brake 2nd brake One–way clutch No.1 L L No up–shift (2nd  3rd) Direct clutch L No up–shift (3rd  O/D) O/D and 2nd brake No lock–up or No lock–up off Torque converter clutch 40–37 Harsh engagement (N  D) 1. 2. 6. 3. Reverse Clutch 3. Planetary gear unit 2.1 L L Harsh engagement (2nd  3rd) Direct clutch L Harsh engagement (3rd  O/D) O/D and 2nd brake L Slip or shudder (Forward range) 1.2 L 40–37 L L L L L L .

5 to 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever ”–” position (Down shift) Below 1.5 to 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever ”+” position (Up shift) Below 1.DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–999 05C8F–01 TERMINALS OF ECM E13 E12 E10 E9 C95801 Symbols (Terminals No.5 IG switch ON and Shift lever S position 7.5 B – BR *1: LHD AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .5 to 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever except for S position Below 1 IG switch ON and Shift lever D position 10 to 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever other than D position Below 1 IG switch ON and Shift lever R position 10 to 14 IG switch ON and Shift lever other than R position Below 1 IG switch ON and Kick–down switch ON Below 1 IG switch ON and Kick–down switch OFF 10 to 14 LG B – BR LG–B R Y – BR R–Y W*1 – BR SPD (E10–17) – E1 (E12–7) V–W – BR SFTU (E10–23) (E10 23) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) R – BR SFTD (E10–30) (E10 30) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) Engine is running IG switch ON and rotate driving wheel slowly Pulse signal is output IG switch ON and Shift lever S position 7.) SLT+ (E13–17) – Wiring Color Condition STD Voltage (V) P–L – P IG switch ON 10 to 14 THO (E13–30) – E2 (E13–28) V – BR IG switch ON and ATF temperature 110 C (230 F) Below 1 IG switch ON Below 1 ST (E12–12) (E12 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) R B – BR R–B IG switch ON and R gear 10 to 14 IG switch ON Below 1 Vehicle driving under lock–up position 10 to 14 IG switch ON Below 1 1st or O/D gear 10 to 14 2nd or 3rd gear Below 1 IG switch ON 10 to 14 1st or 2nd gear 10 to 14 3rd or O/D gear Below 1 IG switch ON Below 1 SLT– (E13–16) SL (E12–13) (E12 13) – E1 (E12 – 7) S2 ((E12–14)) – E1 ((E12–7)) S1 ((E12–15)) – E1 ((E12–7)) R – BR P – BR P–L – BR SB (E12–19) – E1 (E12–7) L – BR NT+ (E12–27) – NT– (E12–35) B–O – B SPT (E10–8) (E10 8) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) L – BR D (E10–10) (E10 10) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) R (E10 (E10–11) 11) – E1 (E12 (E12–7) 7) KD*1 (E10–12) (E10 12) – E1 (E12–7) (E12 7) Pulse signal is output Below 1  4 to 5 IG switch ON and Shift lever S position 7.

it is possible to shift in 1 to 4 positions. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) 05–1035 05C8P–01 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When shifting the shift lever into S range using the transmission control switch. Shifting ”+” once changes up 1 shift range position. ”–” once changes down 1 shift range position respectively.

4 B–G 1 4D ALT 2 FL MAIN W–B 1 4B 1 B–G A J15 J/C Battery IJ IK IP *1: LHD *2 RHD D30750 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1036 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) WIRING DIAGRAM T7 Transmission Control SW ECM 8 E10 SPT1 30 E10 SFTD 23 E10 SFTU L R–W 3 IG S 7 B SFTD 1 R SFTU 2 J17 J/C W–B (*1) W–B E A 5 A W–B (*2) Center J/B R–W 1 CG 7 CA R–W 7 DB R–W Driver Side J/B B–G G–Y IG1 Relay GAUGE1 1 DN 5 5 DH 3 1 9 DA 2 AM1 1 DH W–B I13 Ignition SW G–R 3 AM1 IG1 1 G–Y Engine Room J/B No.

Measure the resistance between terminals E and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the transmission control switch connector. OK: Shift position Tester connection Specified condition Shift to ”+” (Up shift) SFTU – E Continuity S position SFTU – E No continuity Shift to ”–” (Down shift) SFTD – E Continuity S position SFTD – E No continuity E (–) H42585 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY .DIAGNOSTICS – 05–1037 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK ECM (a) (b) E1 SPT Turn the ignition switch to ON. OK: NG Shift position Specified condition Except S position Below 1 V S position 7. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector.5 to 14 V H42584 OK NORMAL NG 3 INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) SFTU (+) (a) (b) (c) SFTD (+) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.5 V S position SFTU – E1 7. OK: Shift position Tester connection Specified condition Shift to ”+” (Up shift) SFTU – E1 Below 1.5 to 14 V Go to step 6 H42584 OK 2 CHECK ECM (a) E1 SFTU SFTD Measure the voltage between terminals E1 and that SFTU as well as SFTD of the ECM.5 to 14 V Shift to ”–” (Down shift) SFTD – E1 Below 1.5 V S position SFTD – E1 7. Measure the voltage between terminals SPT and E1 of the ECM.

OK: Continuity NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .05–1038 4 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(ECM – TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) E10 SFTU SFTU Disconnect the ECM connector. OK: Tester connection Specified condition SFTU (E10–23) – SFTU (A–2) Continuity SFTD (E10–30) – SFTD (A–1) Continuity SFTD SFTD A  NG G25441 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND OK 5 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(TRANSMISSION COTROL SWITCH – BODY GROUND) Check the continuity between body ground and E of the transmission control switch connector (wire harness side). Check the continuity between ECM and transmission control switch.

Turn the ignition switch to ON. OK: Shift position Tester connection Specified condition Except S position IG – S No continuity S position IG – S Continuity NG REPLACE SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY OK 7 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR (a) (b) (c) (d) E10 E1 (–) SPT (+) C94728 Connect the transmission control switch connector.DIAGNOSTICS 6 – 05–1039 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE [ECT] (U341E) INSPECT SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT ASSY(TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH) (a) (b) (c) IG S H42585 Turn the ignition switch to OFF.5 to 14 V H42587 NG OK CHECK AND REPLACE ECM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE Specified condition HARNESS AND . Measure the voltage between terminals SPT and E1 of the ECM connector. Disconnect the ECM connector. Check the continuity between terminals IG and S of the transmission control switch. OK: Shift position Tester connection Except S position SPT – E1 Below 1 V S position SPT – E1 7. Disconnect the transmission control switch connector.

DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C1511/11 C1512/12 Torque q sensor circuit malfunction  Steering column assy  Power steering ECU assy C1513/13 C1514/14 Torque sensor power source circuit malfunction C1517/17 Torque sensor hold malfunction WIRING DIAGRAM Torque Sensor Power Steering ECU Assy 6 5 7 8 TRQV TRQ1 TRQ2 TRQG F44868 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1059 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM DTC C1511/11 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC C1512/12 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC C1513/13 Torque Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTC C1514/14 Torque Sensor Power Source Circuit Malfunction DTC C1517/17 Torque Sensor Hold Malfunction 05C5H–01 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The torque sensor converts the power input in the steering wheel into electric signals. DTC No. and sends them to the ECU.

1 (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Start from step 2 without using hand–held tester. and check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor.3 to 2. (1) Turn the steering wheel to the right end from the center value position. Turn the ignition switch to ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. Check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor with the steering wheel being in the center value position (no load).3 V or less Check the values of the torque sensor on the data monitor when turning steering wheel. Standard: 0. HINT: Start the inspection from the step 1 with using hand–held tester.3 to 2.7 V (2) Turn the steering wheel to the left end from the center value position.3 V or less NG Go to step 3 OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Standard: 2.5 V (3) Check the difference of the values between ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2”.7 V Check the difference of the values between ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” with the steering wheel being in the center value position (no load).5 to 4.05–1060 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. Standard: Voltage: 0. Standard: 2. and check the values on the ”TRQ1” and ”TRQ2” of the data monitor. Standard: Voltage: 0.

3 to 2. Standard: Steering position Connector B F44304 TRQ1 TRQ2 Center position 2.5 V OK REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSY (See page 50–9) NG REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . TRQ2 and TRQG of power steering ECU assy connector.7 V Right turned 2.7 V 2.3 to 2.3 to 2.5 to 4.5 to 8.5 V 0.7 V 2.05–1061 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSY(TORQUE SENSOR) TRQG (–) TRQ2 (+) TRQ1 (+) (a) Measure the voltage between terminals TRQ1 and TRQG.5 V OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20) NG 3 INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY TRQG (–) (a) TRQV (+) Connector B F44304 Measure the voltage between terminals TRQV and TRQG of power steering ECU assy connector.3 to 2.5 to 4. Standard: 7.7 V Left turned 0.

Perform calibration of torque sensor zero point to delete DTC. Is DTC C1516/16 outputed? NO END YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY DTC C1516/16(See page 05–1063) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). this DTC is detected. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C1515/15 When torque sensor zero point calibration is not performed. Sensor zero point calibration is not performed. Is DTC excepted for C1515/15 outputed? YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE NO (a) (b) 2 PERFORM CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT(See page 05–1045) 3 RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTC (See page 05–1045).05–1062 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050YA–04 C1515/15 Torque Sensor Zero Point Calbration Not Performed CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC does not indicate trouble.

Sensor zero point calibration failure. (A) (B) END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSY . C1516/16 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area The torque sensor zero point calibration is not completed normally. This is detected when the torque sensor zero point calibration is not completed normally. DTC No. (A): DTC C1516/16 output after attempted 3 time or more. replace the steering column assy. INSPECTION PROCEDURE (a) 1 CLEAR DTC(See page 05–1045) 2 PERFORM CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT(See page 05–1045) 3 RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045).05–1063 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 0579K–02 C1516/16 Calibration of Sensor Zero Point Not Completed CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC does not indicate trouble. (B): Normal code output. HINT: If the DTC code is output in spite of conducting the steering zero point calibration.

DTC Detecting Condition C1523/23 Short circuit of motor terminal or abnormal voltage or current in motor circuit. C1524/24 Trouble Area  Steering column assy  Power steering ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy 1 M1 Power Steering Motor 2 M2 F40038 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1064 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM DTC C1523/23 Motor Circuit Malfunction DTC C1524/24 Motor Circuit Malfunction 050WR–04 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.

ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. Measure the resistance between terminals M1 and M2 of power steering motor connector. Turn the steering wheel to the left and right and measure the voltage between terminals M1 and M2 of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Voltage changes when steering wheel is turned. F44304 NG REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) OK 2 INSPECT STEERING COLUMN ASSY(POWER STEERING MOTOR) (a) (b) M1 Disconnect the connector from the power steering motor.05–1065 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. 1 INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY M1 (a) (b) M2 Connector A Turn the ignition switch ON. Standard: Resistance: 0.07 to 1  M2 F44858 NG REPLACE STEERING COLUMN ASSY (See page 50–9) OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

C1534/34 and/or C1581/81 output? YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE NO REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . C1533/33. C1532/32.05–1066 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM DTC C1531/31 EMPS ECU Circuit Malfunction DTC C1532/32 EMPS ECU Circuit Malfunction DTC C1533/33 EMPS ECU Circuit Malfunction DTC C1534/34 EMPS ECU Circuit Malfunction DTC C1581/81 Assist Map Un–written 050WS–04 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. Is DTC except for C1531/31. DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C1531/31 C1532/32 Po er steering ECU assy Power ass malfunction malf nction C1533/33 Power steering g ECU assy y C1534/34 C1581/81 Assist map un–written INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045).

DTC Detecting Condition  Speed sensor  Speed sensor circuit  Skid control ECU assy  Combination C bi ti meter t assy  Power steering ECU assy C1541/41 Speed sensor malfunction C1542/42 C1571/71 Trouble Area Speed sensor malfunction (Test mode) WIRING DIAGRAM Combination Meter 18 C11 Power Steering ECU V–W H H J/C H H J10 J20 J10 J20 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) V–W 5 E15 SPD *1: LHD *2: RHD F44865 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1067 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM DTC C1541/41 Speed Sensor Malfunction DTC C1542/42 Speed Sensor Malfunction DTC C1571/71 Speed Sensor Malfunction (Test mode) 0579L–02 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No.

and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) NG 2 (a) CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODE OUTPUT Check that DTC for brake system output the normal code. ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. Turn the ignition switch to ON.05–1068 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. HINT: Start the inspection from the step 1 with using hand–held tester. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed speed values. 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE . Check that there is no difference between the speed value output from the speedometer displayed by the hand–held tester and the speed value displayed by the speedometer when driving the vehicle. Start from step 2 without using hand–held tester. Select the item ”SPD” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the speedometer indication.

the waveform cycle narrows. Connect an oscilloscope to terminals SPD and PGND of the power steering ECU assy connector. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK GO TO COMBINATION METER SYSTEM(See page 05–1510) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) NG 4 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – COMBINATION METER ASSY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between power steering ECU assy and combination meter assy (See page 01–32). check the signal waveform. Standard: Signal waveform as shown in the illustration. F44304 5 V/ Division  20 ms/Division (a) (b) A05135 HINT: As the vehicle speed becomes high. (c) Driving at about 20 km/h (12 mph).05–1069 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(METER SPEED SIGNAL) SPD PGND E14 E15 Turn the ignition switch ON.

05–1070 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 0579M–02 DTC C1544/44 Engine Revolution Signal Malfunction DTC C1545/45 Engine Revolution Signal Malfunction DTC C1573/73 Engine Revolution Signal Malfunction (Test Mode) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition C1544/44 Engine revolution signal malfunction C1545/45 C1573/73 Engine revolution signal malfunction (Test mode) Trouble Area  Engine revolution signal circuit  ECM  Power steering ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU ECM 5 TACH E9 GR–R A B J/C A B J9 J27 J9 J27 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) GR–R 12 E15 TACH *1: LHD *2: RHD F44865 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Turn the ignition switch to ON. OK: There is almost no difference in the displayed engine revolution values. and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. 1 (a) (b) (c) (d) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.05–1071 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. Start from step 2 without using hand–held tester. HINT: Start the inspection from the step 1 with using hand–held tester. HINT: There is tolerance of 10 % in the tachometer indication. NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE . Select the item ”ENGINE REV” in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) NG 2 (a) CHECK DIAGNOSTIC CODE OUTPUT Check that the DTC for engine output the normal code. Check that there is no difference between the engine revolution value output from the tachometer displayed by the hand–held tester and the engine revolution value displayed by the tachometer when engine is idle.

Connect an oscilloscope to terminals TACH and PGND of the power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Signal waveform as shown in the illustration. (c) With the engine idling. the waveform cycle narrows.05–1072 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL) PGND E14 TACH E15 Turn the ignition switch ON. F44304 5 V/ Division  10 ms / Division (a) (b) HINT: As the engine revolution becomes high. check the signal waveform. A05138 OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) NG 4 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – ECM) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between power steering ECU assy and ECM (See page 01–32). NG OK GO TO ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .

C1551/51 DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area Unusual IG voltage value which exceeds the specification is inputed to power steering ECU assy.05–1073 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 0579N–02 C1551/51 IG Power Source Circuit Malfunction CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The power steering ECU assy identifies ON or OFF status of the ignition switch by this circuit. 4 B–G ALT 1 4B 1 1 4D B–G 2 FL MAIN W–B Battery IJ IM *1: LHD *2: RHD F44867 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .  ECU–IG fuse  IG power source circuit  Charging system  Power steering ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy G C J/C G C J10 J20 J11 J21 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) R–W 6 E15 IG R–W Driver Side J/B I13 Ignition SW 3 AM1 G–R 3 5 DH G–Y IG1 1 IG1 Relay ECU–IG 18 DB R–W 5 1 2 AM1 1 DH 9 DA W–B 1 DN W–B 2 E14 PGND Engine Room R/B No. DTC No.

ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. Standard: Resistance: 1  or less PGND (–) E14 F44851 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR . 1 INSPECT FUSE(ECU–IG) (a) (b) Driver Side J/B: Remove the ECU–IG fuse from the driver side J/B. Check the continuity of the ECU–IG fuse. Standard: Continuity ECU–IG Fuse F44856 NG INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN ALL HARNESS AND COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO ECU–IG FUSE OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Measure the resistance between terminal PGND of E14 connector and body ground.05–1074 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU.

Measure the voltage between terminals IG and PGND of the E14 and E15 connectors.05–1075 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – DRIVER SIDE J/B) (a) (b) (c) PGND E14 IG Disconnect the E14 and E15 connectors from the power steering ECU assy. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V E15 F44855 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR . Turn the ignition switch ON.

 EMPS fuse  EMPS relay  PIG power source circuit  Power steering ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy Engine Room R/B No.05–1076 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM DTC C1552/52 PIG Power Source Circuit DTC C1554/54 EMPS Relay Circuit 0579O–02 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When turning the ignition switch to ON. battery voltage is supplied to terminal PIG of the power steering ECU assy by EMPS relay operations. If a malfunction occurs in the system.4 B–G 1 4B 1 4A B–G FL MAIN Battery IM F44862 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC No. C1554/54 Open or short circuit of EMPS relay circuit is detected.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 R EMPS Relay 1 R R 1 3 5 1 2 EMPS 1 2 1 1 1 W–R 5 IE1 L 1 E14 W–R 3 E15 RLY 1 1A W–B PIG 2 E14 PGND Engine Room R/B No. the system prohibits the steering assist by interrupting the circuits of the EMPS relay and the motor relay (built in the power steering ECU assy). DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C1552/52 Unusual motor power source voltage value which is not within the specification is input to power steering ECU assy.

1 INSPECT FUSE(EMPS) (a) Engine Room R/B No.1: (b) Remove the EMPS fuse from the engine room R/B No. Check the continuity of the EMPS fuse.1.1 and Engine Room J/B No. Standard: Continuity EMPS Fuse EMPS Relay F44852 NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN HARNESS AND ALL COMPONENTS CONNECTED TO EMPS FUSE . ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed.05–1077 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU.1 and J/B No.

1. Specified condition 3–5 10 k or higher 3–5 Below 1  When battery voltage is applied to terminals 1 and 2) 2 F45794 NG REPLACE EMPS RELAY OK 3 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) E14 Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Check operation of the EMPS relay. Standard: Resistance: 1  or less PGND F44851 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–1078 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECT EMPS RELAY (a) 1 3 (b) 2 1 5 3 5 Remove the EMPS relay from the engine room R/B No. Measure the resistance between the terminal PGND of the E14 connector and body ground. 1 and J/B No. Standard: Terminal No.

Turn the ignition switch ON.05–1079 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – ENGINE ROOM R/B AND J/B) (a) (b) (c) E14 PIG (+) PGND (–) Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. Measure the voltage between the terminals PIG and PGND of the E14 connector. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V F44851 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .

the system prohibits the steering assist by interrupting the circuits of the EMPS relay and the motor relay (built in the power steering ECU assy).1 and Engine Room J/B No.05–1080 DIAGNOSTICS DTC – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 0579Q–02 C1555/55 EMPS Motor Relay Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If a malfunction occurs in the system.1 Power Steering ECU Assy R EMPS Relay 1 R R 1 3 5 1 2 2 1 W–R 5 IE1 1 E14 PIG W–R 3 E15 RLY 1 EMPS 1 1 L 1 1A W–B 2 E14 PGND Engine Room R/B No. Power steering ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM Engine Room R/B No. DTC No.4 B–G 1 4B 1 4A B–G FL MAIN Battery IM F44862 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . DTC Detecting Condition Trouble Area C1555/55 Open or short circuit of EMPS motor relay in the ECU circuit is detected.

Select the item ”PIG SUPPLY” in the FREEZE FRAME DATA and read its value displayed on the hand– held tester. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Measure the voltage between terminals PIG and PGND of power steering ECU assy connector. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V NG GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART (See page 05–1076) YES REPAIR CIRCUIT INDICATED BY OUTPUT CODE F44304 OK 3 (a) (b) RECONFIRM DTC Check the DTCs (See page 05–1045). Is DTC except for C1552/52 output? NO REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Check that the power supply voltage value of the drive motor displayed by the hand–held tester. Standard: Voltage: 10 to 16 V (d) OK Go to step 3 NG GO TO RELEVANT DTC CHART 2 INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(PIG TERMINAL VOLTGE) PIG (+) (a) (b) PGND (–) E14 Turn the ignition switch ON. Start from step 2 without using hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch to ON and turn the hand–held tester main switch to ON. HINT: Start the inspection from the step 1 with using hand–held tester.05–1081 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed.

record the freeze frame data as well (as the DTCs). or steering force is uneven. Vehicle Model Date Vehicle Brought In / Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs km miles Odometer Reading / / / Continuous ( Engine Cooled Intermittent ( Warmed up ) times a day) Steering operation is heavy. Vibration or strange sound comes from the steering column assy. Symptoms While running. The steering returns unwell. When a trouble happens ( During turning During vehicle stop Always ) Others PS Warning Light Abnormal Remains ON Does not come on 1st Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) 2nd Time Normal Code Malfunction Code (Code ) DTC Check Freeze Frame Data A malfunction code is outputed at the first time. the steering force does not alter corresponding the vehicle speed. Steering force to the right and left differs. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .05–1044 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050Y7–04 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK Inspector’s : Name EMPS Check Sheet VIN Customer’s Name Production Date / / Licence No.

check the circuit listed for the code. DTC No. proceed the page referred to under the ”See page” for respective ”DTC No. C1517/17 (05–1059) Torque sensor hold malfunction  Steering column assy  Power steering ECU assy Motor circuit malfunction  Steering column assy  Power steering ECU assy Power steering ECU assy malfunction Power steering ECU assy Speed sensor malfunction  Speed sensor  Speed sensor circuit  Skid control ECU  Combination meter assy  Power steering ECU assy Engine revolution signal malfunction  Engine revolution signal circuit  ECM  Power steering ECU assy C1551/51 (05–1073) IG power source circuit malfunction  ECU–IG fuse  Power steering relay  IG power source circuit  Charging system  Power steering ECU assy C1552/52 (05–1076) PIG power source circuit malfunction C1554/54 (05–1076) EMPS relay circuit malfunction C1523/23 (05–1064) C1524/24 (05–1064) C1531/31 (05–1066) C1532/32 (05–1066) C1533/33 (05–1066) C1534/34 (05–1066) C1541/41 (05–1067) C1542/42 (05–1067) C1544/44 (05–1070) C1545/45 (05–1070) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E)  EMPS fuse  EMPS relay  PIG power source circuit  Power steering ECU assy .05–1054 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WM–04 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART HINT:   Using SST 09843–18040. connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. If a malfunction code is displayed during the DTC check.” in the DTC chart. For details of each code. C1516/16 (05–1063) Calibration of torque sensor zero point is not completed Sensor zero point calibration failure. (See page) Detection Item Trouble Area C1511/11 (05–1059) C1512/12 (05–1059) Torque sensor circuit malfunction C1513/13 (05–1059)  Steering column assy  Power steering ECU assy C1514/14 (05–1059) Torque sensor power source circuit malfunction C1515/15 (05–1062) Calibration of torque sensor zero point is not performed Sensor zero point calibration is not preformed.

05–1055 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM C1555/55 (05–1080) EMPS motor relay circuit malfunction Power steering ECU assy C1581/81 (05–1066) Assist map un–written Power steering ECU assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

the PS warning lights up. At this time.1 and Engine Room J/B No. the power steering ECU assy records a DTC in memory.4 B–G 1 1 4A A J17 J/C A 1 B–G 4B W–B (*2) B–G A FL MAIN J15 J/C Battery *1: LHD IK A J16 J/C W–B A (*1) IO *2: RHD F44861 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .1 AM2 B–R 1 1A 1 2 IG2 B–R 6 Engine Room R/B No.05–1082 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 05C5I–01 EMPS Warning Light Circuit CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION If the power steering ECU assy detects a trouble. WIRING DIAGRAM Power Steering ECU Assy Combination Meter B–W 22 C11 P/S 6 C11 B–W 17 C10 W–B (*1) 9 E15 WL W–B (*2) Driver Side J/B A J/C C A B–W C J8 J26 J8 J26 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) B–W IGN 18 DA 2 DH B–R I13 Ignition SW 1 1 IE4 IP1 (*1) (*2) B–R B–R 4 AM2 Engine Room R/B No.

and check the P/S warning light comes on. Standard: P/S warning light comes on and then goes off NG F44869 OK CHECK GO TO COMBINATION METER SYSTEM AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (See page 50–20) . Disconnect the E15 connector from the power steering ECU assy. ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 2 CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) Disconnect the E14 connector from the power steering ECU assy. ground the terminal WL of the E15 connector. Standard: Continuity PGND E14 F44851 NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 INSPECT POWER STEERING ECU ASSY (a) (b) (c) E15 WL Turn the ignition switch ON. and check the P/S warning light goes off.05–1083 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. Using a service wire. 1 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – COMBINATION METER ASSY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between power steering ECU assy and combination meter assy (See page 01–32). Check the continuity between the terminal PGND of the E14 connector and body ground.

4 PROBLEM SYMPTOM CONFIRMATION SYMPTOM DOES NOT OCCUR(Go to step 5) SYMPTOM OCCURS(Go to step 6) 5 SYMPTOM SIMULATION(See page 01–22) 6 DTC CHECK(See page 05–1045) NORMAL CODE(Go to step 7) MALFUNCTION CODE(Go to step 8) 7 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE(See page 05–1058) 8 DTC CHART(See page 05–1054) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 12. 6. 9. HINT:  See the indicated pages for detailed explanation.  The hand–held tester can be used at step 3.05–1042 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050Y2–04 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING Perform troubleshooting in accordance with the procedure on the following pages. 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS(See page 05–1044) 3 CHECK AND CLEAR DTCS AND FREEZE FRAME DATA (a) After the completion of the DTC and freeze frame data check. clear the DTCs (See page 05–1045).

05–1043 DIAGNOSTICS 9 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM CIRCUIT INSPECTION(See page 05–1059 to 05–1086) 10 IDENTIFYING PROBLEMS 11 REPAIR 12 CONFIRMATION TEST END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

05–1056 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WN–04 LOCATION Steering Column Assy EMPS Fuse EMPS Relay Engine Room R/B No.1 and Engine Room J/B No.1 Power Steering ECU assy Combination Meter Assy (P/S Warning Light) ECU–IG Fuse DLC3 Driver Side J/B F45950 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

5 sec. ON Code 21 Code 22 F40045 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05–1084 P/S Warning Light Circuit 05–1082  4 sec.5 sec. (a) Tc DTC CHECK (USING SST CHECK WIRE) Checking DTCs using a SST check wire. Read and record any DTCs from the P/S warning light on the combination meter. 2. 1. F15799 DLC3: 2. DTC will be displayed in the ascending order.05–1045 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 05C5F–01 PRE–CHECK 1. HINT: If the indicator check result is not normal. CG C52361 (3) Normal Code 0. Refer to the chart on the left for examples of a normal code and codes 21 and 22. OFF Tc Terminal Circuit If 2 or more malfunctions are detected at the same time. (1) When the ignition switch is turned ON. connect terminals Tc and CG of the DLC3. .5 sec. check that the PS warning light goes on for 2 seconds. (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Check the PS warning light. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (4) Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart (See page 05–1054) for DTC information. inspect the circuit shown in the charts below.5 sec.5 sec.25 sec. HINT:  ON OFF If the P/S warning light does not blink any DTC codes or the normal code. 0. Trouble Area Codes 21 and 22 0.25 sec. proceed to troubleshooting for the PS warning light circuit (See page 05–1082). SST 09843–18040 (1) Using SST. 0. 0.

(a) – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM Clearing the DTCs using the SST check wire. (3) Disconnect and connect the SST check wire from the CG terminal 4 times or more in 8 seconds ending with it connected.3 to 2. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details.05–1046 DIAGNOSTICS DLC3: (b) Ts CG C52361 3. SST 09843–18040 (1) Using SST. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. SST 09843–18040 DTC CHECK (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) Checking DTCs using the hand–held tester. DATA LIST AND FREEZE FRAME DATA 4. Max. HINT: Ignition switch must be turned ON.5 V – Show the output states in the torque sensor / Min. connect terminals Ts and CG of the DLC3. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.3 to 2.3 to 2. (3) Clear the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. (5) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.7 V Steering wheel left turned: 0. Data List (*: with freeze frame data): Item TRQ1 (*) TRQ2 (*) Measurement Item / Range (Display) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note Show the output states in the torque sensor / Min. Max.: 0 V.5 V – AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .: 5 V Steering wheel center position: 2.3 to 2.5 to 4. (4) Check that the P/S warning light blinks a normal code. (6) Remove the SST from the DLC3.7 V Steering wheel right turned: 2.: 5 V Steering wheel center position: 2.: 0 V.5 to 4. (3) Read the DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. and the vehicle should be placed on a leveled ground to observe data by using a hand–held tester. (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON.7 V Steering wheel right turned: 2. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.7 V Steering wheel left turned: 0. (b) Clearing the DTCs using the hand–held tester.

: 0 V.3 to 2. 03. 04 or 05 – – TEST MODE STAT Test mode status / NORMAL or TEST AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) – – Vehicle speed indicated on speedometer – While power steering operated NORMAL: Normal mode TEST: During test mode – – . 03.: 5 V Steering wheel center position: 2.: 5 V Steering wheel center position: 2.: –128 A.3 to 2.: 5 V Steering wheel center position: 2.7 V – TRQ2 ZERO VAL (*) Show the torque sensor/ Min.3 to 2. Max.: 0. Max. Max.: 205 _C PIG SUPPLY (*) Show the power supply voltage for driving motor / Min. Max.: 5 V Steering wheel center position: 2.: XX ASSIST MAP Show the selected condition of the assist map / 01.: 8. 11 or 12 – – ECU ID Show the identified information of ECU / 01. Max.3 to 2.05–1047 DIAGNOSTICS Item Measurement Item / Range (Display) – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM Normal Condition Diagnostic Note TRQ3 (*) Show the output states in the torque sensor / Min. Max. Max.: 25 V 10 to 16 V IG SUPPLY (*) Show the power supply condition / Min.: 0 V.7 V Steering wheel right turned: 2.: 128 A 0 to 65 A – COMMAND VALUE (*) Show the specified current value / Min.: 128 A 0 to 65 A – THERMISTOR TEMP (*) Show the temperature of the thermistor / Min. 02. Max.: 0. 02.: 0 V.: 0 rpm Max.5 to 4. Max.: 255 km/h (158 mph) Actual vehicle speed ENGINE REV (*) Show the engine revolution / Min.: 255 Min.5 V SPD (*) Show the vehicle speed on the speedometer / Min.: 25 V 10 to 16 V – TRQ1 ZERO VAL (*) Show the torque sensor/ Min.7 V Steering wheel left turned: 0.: 0 V.: 0 V. Max.: –128 A.: –50 _C.192 rpm Actual engine speed – MOTOR ACTUAL (*) Show the current flowing motor / Min. Max.7 V – TRQ3 ZERO VAL (*) Show the torque sensor/ Min.: 0 km/h (0 mph).3 to 2.: 0 V.7 V – MTR OVERHEAT Record of continuous overheat preventive control / record or un–record Un–record – MTR LOW POWER Record of low motor power supply voltage / record or un–record Un–record – MTR HIGH POWER Record of high motor power supply voltage / record or un–record Un–record #CODES Number of DTC recorded / Min. Max.

 Even if a sensor is normal.5 sec. connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. (6) Using SST. Repeat F42646 DTC of input signal check function: Code No. (5) Stop the vehicle. HINT: If the PS warning light goes off during driving. 0. (See page) Diagnosis Trouble Area C1571/71 (05–1067) Speed sensor signal check 1 (Test mode)  Speed sensor  Speed sensor circuit  Skid control ECU assy  Combination meter assy  Power steering ECU assy C1573/73 (05–1070) Engine revolution signal check (Test mode)  Engine revolution signal circuit  ECM  Power steering ECU assy (8) After checking. (1) Using SST. SST 09843–18040 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .25 sec.5 sec.25 sec. Tc and CG of DLC3. 0. it output codes 71 and 73 during test mode. and turn the ignition switch to OFF. 0.5 sec. the sensor is judged to be normal. 1. 0.05–1048 DIAGNOSTICS DLC3: 5. Malfunction Code (Example Code 73) Normal Code 3 7 ON ON OFF OFF 0. SST 09843–18040 (2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. 0. connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. HINT:  See the list of DTC shown in the table below. SST 09843–18040 (7) Read the number of blinks of the PS warning light. disconnect the SST from the terminal Ts and CG.5 sec. A Cycle 4 sec. (4) Check that the PS warning light goes off while driving the vehicle more than 10 km/h (6 mph) and the engine speed more than 300 rpm. (3) Check that the PS warning light shows the normal code. Tc Ts (a) CG C52361 – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INPUT SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) (USING SST CHECK WIRE) Check the input signal using a SST check wire.5 sec.

 When removing and installing ”steering wheel assembly”. DLC3: Tc Ts CG C52361 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) (b) Perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. (a) Place front wheels and steering wheel facing straight ahead.  When replacing power steering ECU assy. CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT (USING SST CHECK WIRE) HINT: Perform this operation in the following cases. . initialization is not necessary. connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. SST 09843–18040 (3) Using SST. HINT: If the power steering ECU assy is replaced. (1) Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch OFF. HINT:    Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. See the list of DTC shown in the table below. (2) Using SST. (3) Read the DTC by following the prompts on the tester screen. it outputs codes C1571/71 and C1573/73 during test mode. (See page) Diagnosis Trouble Area C1571/71 (05–1067) Speed sensor signal check 1 (Test mode)  Speed sensor  Speed sensor circuit  Skid control ECU assy  Combination meter assy  Power steering ECU assy C1573/73 (05–1070) Engine revolution signal check (Test mode)  Engine revolution signal circuit  ECM  Power steering ECU assy 7. Even if a sensor is normal.05–1049 DIAGNOSTICS 6. (2) Check that the warning light goes off with driving the vehicle more than 10 km/h (6 mph) and engine speed more than 300 rpm. (a) – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INPUT SIGNAL CHECK (TEST MODE) (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) Check the input signal using the hand–held tester. ”tilt steering column assembly” and ”steering gear assembly”. SST 09843–18040 (4) Turn the ignition switch ON. connect terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. DTC of input signal check function: Code No.

 When removing and installing ”steering wheel assembly”. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. initialization is not necessary. Check that the DTC for except C1515/15 is not output. (b) Perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. (2) Ts 8. Using SST. connect terminals Ts and CG of DLC3 and turn the ignition switch to ON. Perform the torque sensor zero point calibration. SST 09843–18040 (4) Check the DTC is not output. . (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (4) Select the ”ZERO POINT INITIALIZE”. CALIBRATION OF TORQUE SENSOR ZERO POINT (USING HAND–HELD TESTER) HINT: Perform this operation in the following cases. (3) Select the ”TRQ SENS ADJUST” mode on the hand–held tester. (5) Following the screen instructions. (3) Select the ”TRQ SENS ADJUST” mode on the hand–held tester. CG C52361 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Disconnect and connect the terminal Tc of DLC3 20 times within 20 seconds. (1) Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition switch to OFF. (5) Following the screen instructions.  When replacing power steering ECU assy. (1) Stop the vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. HINT: Do not touch the steering wheel. (c) Perform the torque sensor zero point calibration. (6) Check the DTC C1515/15 output. (4) Select the ”ZERO POINT ADJUST”. SST 09843–18040 (3) Disconnect the SST.05–1050 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM (5) (c) HINT:   DLC3: Do not touch the steering wheel. perform the torque sensor zero point initialization. ”tilt steering column assembly” and ”steering gear assembly”. perform the torque sensor zero point calibration. (a) Place front wheels and steering wheel facing straight ahead. HINT: If the power steering ECU assy is replaced.

screw and power steering ECU assy. (a) Remove the power steering ECU assy (See page 50–20). (2) Disconnect the torque sensor wire harness from the clamp. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . pay attention so as not to damage it. NOTICE: In case the clamp will be reused. (5) RHD: Remove the 2 bolts. (3) Disconnect the connectors. (1) Mark the clamp position on the torque sensor wire harness in order to reinstall the wire harness as shown in the illustration. Do the same operation or procedure for the removing and installing the steering column assy.05–1051 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 9. 2 screws and power steering ECU assy. REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY NOTICE: Thoroughly check the procedures for removing and installing the power steering ECU assy when replacing it. (4) LHD: Remove the 2 bolts.

0 Nm (82 kgfcm. .0 Nm (82 kgfcm. (1) LHD: Install the power steering ECU assy with the 2 bolts and screw. 71 in. Torque: Bolt A: 8. 71 in. 11 ftlbf) (2) RHD: Install the power steering ECU assy with the 2 bolts and 2 screws.lbf) Bolt B: 15.5 Nm (158 kgfcm.5 Nm (158 kgfcm.lbf) Bolt B: 15. 11 ftlbf) (3) Connect the connectors. Torque: Bolt A: 8.05–1052 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM RHD: LHD: Torque Sensor Wire Harness Clamp Torque Sensor Wire Harness Clamp Marks Marks Power Steering ECU Assy Bolt A Power Steering ECU Assy Front Front Bolt B Bolt B Bolt A Screw Screw Motor Wire Harness Torque Sensor Wire Harness Motor Wire Harness Torque Sensor Wire Harness F44857 (b) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Install the power steering ECU assy (See page 50–20).

make sure there is no twist in the harness or with other wire harness. 10. check that there is no damage on it.05–1053 DIAGNOSTICS – (4) ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM Align the marks on the torque sensor wire harness with the clamp.  When reinstalling the wire harness. NOTICE:  When reusing the clamp. not operating the steering for about 10 minutes with engine idle will lead the fail safe function to return the normal state. HINT: Repeating the steering operation when stopping or driving at low speed. FAIL SAFE FUNCTION (a) If the power steering ECU assy detects a trouble. or leaving the steering wheel turn fully for long hours will lower the amount of power assist in order to prevent power steering ECU assy from heating up. the ECU assy halt. as shown in the illustration. In this case. fix or lower the steering power assist in order to protect the system. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Front tire (Worn or improperly inflated) 4. P/S warning light circuit 2.05–1058 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WP–04 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE If a normal code is displayed during the DTC check but the problem still occurs. 1. Steering column assy 4. 1. Combination meter assy 05–1086 01–32 71–21 Unusual noise. Steering column assy 2. 2. 1. Power steering ECU assy 3. Steering column assy 6. Power steering ECU assy 05–1082 01–32 DTC check cannot be done. Ts terminal circuit 2. Power steering ECU assy 3. check the circuits for each problem symptom in the order given in the table below and proceed to the relevant troubleshooting page. Power steering ECU assy P/S warning light faulty. Combination meter assy 3. 1. Symptom Suspected Area See page 05–1045 At the time of idling. Power steering ECU assy 05–1045 Even if the vehicle speed is increased. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. Steering gear assy 50–9 01–32 51–28 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) 05–1073 28–1 26–6 50–9 01–32 71–21 50–9 01–32 . Front wheel alignment (Incorrect) 5. 2. P/S warning light circuit 2. appropriate steering resistance cannot be felt. Check the DTC reconfirming that the normal code is output. 1. 1. Tc terminal circuit 3. IG Power source circuit 3. steering control force is great. Power steering ECU assy 05–1082 05–1084 01–32 Input signal check cannot be done.

WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 TC Power Steering ECU Assy 13 W–L B D J/C D B J8 J21 J9 J20 (*1) (*2) (*1) (*2) W–L 4 E15 TC Center J/B CG 4 3 CB W–B (*2) 6 CA W–B (*2) W–B (*1) A J16 J/C W–B (*1) A *1: LHD *2: RHD IO IP F44864 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the power steering ECU assy displays the DTC.05–1084 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050X7–04 TC TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When the terminals Tc and CG of DLC3 are connected.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–1085 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Tc TERMINAL) DLC3: (a) (b) Tc CG Turn the ignition switch ON. OK: Voltage: 5 to 16 V C52361 OK Go to step 3 NG 2 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminals CG of DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). Measure the voltage between terminals Tc and CG of DLC3. NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – POWER STEERING ECU ASSY) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminals Tc of DLC3 and power steering ECU assy (See page 01–32).

0 V SPD (E15–5) – PGND (E14–2) V–W – W–B IG switch ON Pulse generation IG (E15–6) – PGND (E14–2) R–W – W–B IG switch ON 10 to 16 V GR – W–B IG switch ON 5 to 16 V IG switch ON. turn the steering wheel to left 10 to 16 V IG switch ON.0 V Pulse generation TRQ1 (B–5) – PGND (E14–2) – – W–B IG switch ON.) Wiring Color PIG (E14–1) – PGND (E14–2) L – W–B PGND (E14–2) – Body Ground W–B – Body Ground M1 (A–1) (A 1) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2) M2 (A–2) (A 2) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2) Condition IG switch ON Specified condition 10 to 16 V Always Below 1.0 V 5 to 16 V Below 1.05–1057 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050WO–04 TERMINALS OF ECU POWER STEERING ECU ASSY E14 Connector A E15 Connector B F44303 NOTICE: When performing the inspection of power steering ECU. P/S warning light comes on IG switch ON Ts (E15–11) (E15 11) – PGND (E14 (E14–2) 2) 5 to 16 V W–W W–B B IG switch ON.3 to 4. short circuit Ts and CG terminals of DLC3 TACH (E15–12) – PGND (E14–2) Below 1.5 to 8. turn the steering wheel to right 10 to 16 V ––W W–B B IG switch ON. after 1 sec. ECU must be installed to the vehicle or fully fixed. short circuit Tc and CG terminals of DLC3 10 to 16 V Below 2. turn the steering wheel to right Below 1. turn the steering wheel to left and right 0. Symbols (Terminal No. or more Tc (E15–4) (E15 4) – PGND (E14–2) (E14 2) W L–W W–L W–B B IG switch ON IG switch ON.0 V IG switch ON. P/S warning light goes off 10 to 16 V IDUP (E15–8) – PGND (E14–2) WL (E15–9) (E15 9) – PGND (E14–2) (E14 2) B W–W B–W W–B B IG switch ON.0 V IG switch ON.0 V GR–R – W–B IG switch ON Below 1.7 V TRQV (B–6) – PGND (E14–2) – – W–B IG switch ON 7.5 V TRQ2 (B–7) – PGND (E14–2) – – W–B IG switch ON.7 V TRQG (B–8) – PGND (E14–2) – – W–B IG switch ON Below 1. turn the steering wheel to left and right 0.0 V AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .0 V ––W W–B B SIL (E15–2) – PGND (E14–2) W–G – W–B IG switch ON RLY (E15–3) PGND (E14–2) W–R – W–B IG switch ON. turn the steering wheel to left Below 1.3 to 4.

WIRING DIAGRAM D5 DLC3 TS (*1) (*2) J/C B D D J8 J20 J9 (*1) D W 12 J20 (*2) Power Steering ECU Assy W (*1) 11 E15 TS W (*2) Center J/B CG W–B (*2) 4 3 CB 6 CA W–B (*2) W–B (*1) A J16 J/C W–B (*1) A *1: LHD *2 RHD IO IP F44863 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the mode will change from the normal mode to test mode when the ignition switch is turned ON.05–1086 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM 050XA–04 TS TERMINAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION After making short circuit between terminal Ts and CG of DLC3 with turning the ignition switch OFF. After the ignition switch is turned ON. there will be DTC output from Tc terminal of DLC3.

NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS OR OK 3 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(POWER STEERING ECU ASSY – DLC3) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal Ts of DLC3 and power steering ECU assy (See page 01–32). Measure the voltage between terminals Ts and CG of DLC3. OK: Voltage: 5 to 16 V C52361 OK Go to step 3 NG 2 (a) CHECK HARNESS AND CONNECTOR(DLC3 – BODY GROUND) Check for an open or short circuit in harness and connector between terminal CG of DLC3 and body ground (See page 01–32). NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR OK REPLACE POWER STEERING ECU ASSY(See page 50–20) AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPLACE HARNESS OR .05–1087 DIAGNOSTICS – ELECTRONIC MOTOR POWER STEERING SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 INSPECT DLC3 TERMINAL VOLTAGE(Ts TERMINAL) (Ts – CG) DLC3: (a) (b) Ts CG Turn the ignition switch ON.

05–1613 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2780 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0C–03 PUSH SWITCH/KEY UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC will be output if the transponder key ECU does not detect that the unlock warning switch is ON even when the ignition switch is ON (Under normal conditions. DTC No. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Unlock warning switch ON is not detected when ignition switch is ON B2780  Unlock warning switch assy  Wire harness  Transponder key ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy U1 Un–lock Warning Switch Assy W–B*2 W–B 1 Y Y*2 2 D J22 J/C F J23 Y*2 Y 10 KSW Driver Side J/B*1 Passenger Side R/B Assy*2 13 CF W–B*1 Y*1 8 DA 6 Y*1 DA Center J/B 6 CA A J16 J/C W–B W–B IP A IO: Gasoline IL: 1CD–FTV *1: LHD *2: RHD B66226 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . the unlock warning switch is ON when the ignition switch is ON).

Select the item KEY SW on the hand–held tester. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.05–1614 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 when not using the hand–held tester. OK: OFF  Key is in ignition key cylinder ON  No key is in ignition key cylinder OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY NG 2 INSPECT UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY (a) (b) Free Remove the unlock warning switch. Standard: Tester Connection Pushed 1–2 B51903 OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NG Switch Position Specified Condition Switch pushed (Key set) Below 1  Switch free (Key removed) 10 k or higher REPLACE UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY . Inspect the unlock warning switch resistance. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine.

Check the resistance between the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Tester Connection Specified Condition T8–10 (KSW) – U1–2 Below 1  U1–1 – Body ground Below 1  U1 Unlock Warning Switch Assy   B65751 NG OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .05–1615 DIAGNOSTICS 3 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY) (UNLOCK WARNING SWITCH ASSY – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) Wire Harness Side T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy Disconnect the T8 ECU and U1 switch connectors.

05–1616 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2784 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0D–03 ANTENNA COIL OPEN/SHORT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION The transponder key coil is built into the transponder key amplifier and receives a key code signal from the transponder chip in the key. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. This signal is amplified by the amplifier and then output to the transponder key ECU. DTC No. OK: NORMAL NG: FAIL OK NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK AND REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY . 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. B2784 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  Wire harness  Transponder key amplifier  Transponder key ECU assy Antenna coil is open/short WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy I12 Transponder Key Amplifier Amplifier ANT1 1 Y–B 8 CODE 4 Y–G 11 TXCT 5 L–R 12 GND GR–R 13 VC5 VC5 CODE Coil 7 ANT2 TXCT AGND B62676 INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 when not using the hand–held tester. Select the item ANTENNA COIL on the hand–held tester.

Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors.05–1617 DIAGNOSTICS 2 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER) (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY OR TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) Wire Harness Side Disconnect the T8 ECU and I12 amplifier connectors. Standard: Tester Connection T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy Specified Condition T8–8 (VC5) – I12–1 (VC5) T8–11 (CODE) – I12–4 (CODE) Below 1  T8–12 (TXCT) – I12–5 (TXCT) T8–13 (AGND) – I12–7 (GND) T8–8 (VC5) or I12–1 (VC5) – Body ground T8–11 (CODE) or I12–4 (CODE) – Body ground I12 Transponder Key Amplifier T8–12 (TXCT) or I12–5 (TXCT) – Body ground 10 k or higher T8–13 (AGND) or I12–7 (GND) – Body ground ̱̲̳ ̴̵ ̶ ̷ NG   B64974 OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND .

Replace the key when the key code registration is not performed normally and this DTC is detected. DTC No. OK NG REPLACE KEY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NORMAL . B2793 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  Key Transponder chip malfunction INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) (b) (c) CHECK DTC Delete the DTC (See page 05–1602). Re–register the key and check that the engine starts with the key.05–1618 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2793 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0E–03 TRANSPONDER CHIP MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a malfunction is found in a key during the key code registration or the key code is not registered normally. Insert the key into the ignition key cylinder. Check that no code is output. OK NO PROBLEM NG 2 (a) (b) RE–REGISTER KEY Delete the DTC (See page 05–1602).

DTC No. B2794 DTC Detection Condition Key with incomplete key code is inserted INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 REPLACE KEY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Key .05–1619 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2794 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0F–03 UNMATCHED ENCRYPTION CODE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a key with an incomplete key code is inserted into the ignition key cylinder.

DTC No. B2795 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  Key Key with unregistered key code is inserted INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 DELETE DTC AND INSERT ALL PRESENTLY AVAILABLE KEYS TO CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS OR NOT OK NG REPLACE KEY THAT WILL NOT START ENGINE AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NO PROBLEM (BECAUSE OF KEY RE–REGISTRATION) .05–1620 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2795 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0G–03 UNMATCHED KEY CODE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when a key with a key code that has not been registered in the ECU is inserted into the ignition key cylinder.

05–1621 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0H–03 DTC B2796 NO COMMUNICATION IN IMMOBILISER SYSTEM DTC B2798 COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION NO. DTC No.2 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This code is stored in the memory when a key that does not have a transponder chip is inserted or if communication between the key and transponder key ECU is impossible. DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area B2796 No communication  Key  Wire harness  Transponder key amplifier (Transponder key coil)  Transponder key ECU assy B2798 Communication error  Key WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy I12 Transponder Key Amplifier Amplifier ANT1 1 Y–B 8 CODE 4 Y–G 11 TXCT 5 L–R 12 GND GR–R 13 VC5 VC5 CODE Coil ANT2 7 TXCT AGND B62676 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will not start the engine. OK: NORMAL NG: FAIL NG OK AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) CHECK AND REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY . OK RE–REGISTER OR REPLACE KEY THAT WILL NOT START ENGINE NG HINT: Start the inspection from step 3 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 4 when not using the hand–held tester. Turn the ignition switch ON with the key that will does not start the engine. 1 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Select the item ANTENNA COIL on the hand–held tester. OK: SET  Ignition switch ON UNSET  Without key OK NORMAL NG 2 (a) CHECK WHETHER ENGINE STARTS WITH OTHER KEYS Check whether the engine starts with the other keys for the vehicle.05–1622 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE HINT: Start the inspection from step 1 when using the hand–held tester and start from step 2 when not using the hand–held tester. Select IMMOBILISER on the hand–held tester. 3 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3.

Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. check that the engine starts.05–1623 DIAGNOSTICS 4 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER) (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY OR TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) Wire Harness Side Disconnect the T8 ECU and I12 amplifier connectors. NG OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NORMAL (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER DEFECTIVE) . Standard: Tester Connection T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy Specified Condition T8–8 (VC5) – I12–1 (VC5) T8–11 (CODE) – I12–4 (CODE) Below 1  T8–12 (TXCT) – I12–5 (TXCT) T8–13 (AGND) – I12–7 (GND) T8–8 (VC5) or I12–1 (VC5) – Body ground T8–11 (CODE) or I12–4 (CODE) – Body ground I12 Transponder Key Amplifier T8–12 (TXCT) or I12–5 (TXCT) – Body ground 10 k or higher T8–13 (AGND) or I12–7 (GND) – Body ground ̱̲̳ ̴̵ ̶ ̷ NG   B64974 REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE HARNESS AND OK 5 (a) CHECK OPERATION OF TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER After replacing the transponder key amplifier.

B2797 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area Keys are positioned too close to each other or noise occurred in communication line  Key  Wire harness  Transponder key amplifier  Transponder key ECU assy WIRING DIAGRAM I12 Transponder Key Amplifier CODE T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy Y–G 4 11 CODE B52550 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 (a) CHECK OPERATION OF TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER After replacing the transponder key amplifier. OK NG REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NORMAL (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER DEFECTIVE) . DTC No.05–1624 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2797 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0I–03 COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION NO. HINT: Some noise is found in the communication line.1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when an error occurs in normal communication. check that the engine starts.

05–1625 DIAGNOSTICS DTC B2799 – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0J–03 ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION This DTC is output when the ECM detects errors in communication between the transponder key ECU assy and the ECM or in the communication lines. DTC No. B2799 DTC Detection Condition Trouble Area  Error in communication between ECM and transponder key ECU. repair it first. This DTC is also output when an engine start is attempted while the ECU communication ID between the transponder key ECU and the ECM are different. If there is a key code–related DTC detected in the transponder key ECU. and in communication line  Communication ID is different during communication with transponder key ECU  Wire harness  Transponder key ECU assy  Transponder key amplifier  ECM WIRING DIAGRAM T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy E10 ECM IMI IMO 30*1 27*2 GR 29*1 26*2 W 6 7 EFIO EFII *1: 1CD–FTV *2: Gasoline B66227 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . Before troubleshooting for this DTC. make sure that there is no DTC detected in the transponder key ECU.

Check the resistance of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: 1CD–FTV Terminal No.05–1626 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1 CHECK WIRE HARNESS (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY – ECM) (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY OR ECM – BODY GROUND) (a) (b) Wire Harness Side T8 Transponder Key ECU Assy Disconnect the T8 ECU and E10 ECM connectors. Specified Condition T8–6 (EFIO) – E10–27 (IMI) Below 1  T8–7 (EFII) – E10–26 (IMO) EFIO (T8–6) or IMI (E10–27) – Body ground EFII (T8–7) or IMO (E10–26) – Body ground  B66229  10 k or higher NG REPAIR OR CONNECTOR REPLACE 10 k or higher HARNESS AND OK 2 (a) CHECK OPERATION OF TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER After replacing the transponder key amplifier. NG OK REPLACE TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) NORMAL (TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER DEFECTIVE) . Specified Condition T8–6 (EFIO) – E10–30 (IMI) Below 1  T8–7 (EFII) – E10–29 (IMO) T8–6 (EFIO) or E10–30 (IMI) – Body ground T8–7 (EFII) or E10–29 (IMO) – Body ground Gasoline E10 ECM Terminal No. check that the engine starts.

05–1601 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CG–07 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM Check Sheet Inspector’s : Name VIN Production Date Customer’s Name / / Licence No. Date Vehicle Brought In / / Date Problem First Occurred Frequency Problem Occurs Weather Conditions When Problem Occurred Symptoms Weather km miles Odometer Reading / / Constant Intermittent ( times a day) Only once Fine Cloudy Rainy Snowy Various/Others Outdoor Temperature Hot Cold (Approx. Warm C ( Cool F) Immobiliser is not set (Engine starts with key codes other than registered key code) Engine does not start 1st Time Normal code Malfunction code (Code ) 2nd Time Normal code Malfunction code (Code ) DTC Check AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

ECM DTC CHART NOTICE: The DTC for the immobiliser system is specified. 2  Key B2796 (05–1621) HINT: *: Except for 1AZ–FE engine 2. DTC No. check the DTC chart of the engine control system. 1  Key  Wire harness  Transponder key amplifier  Transponder key ECU assy B2798 (05–1621) Communication Malfunction No. (See Page) Detection Item Trouble Area *B2780 (05–1613) Push Switch/Key Unlock Warning Switch Malfunction  Unlock warning switch  Wire harness  Transponder key ECU assy B2784 (05–1616) Antenna Coil Open/Short  Wire harness  Transponder key amplifier  Transponder key ECU assy B2793 (05–1618) Transponder Chip Malfunction  Key B2794 (05–1619) Unmatched Encryption Code  Key B2795 (05–1620) Unmatched Key Code  Key No Communication in Immobiliser System  Key  Transponder key amplifier  Wire harness  Transponder key ECU assy B2797 (05–1624) Communication Malfunction No.05–1605 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CI–07 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CHART 1. TRANSPONDER KEY ECU DTC CHART DTC No. (See Page) B2799 (05–1625) Detection Item Engine Immobiliser System Malfunction AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Trouble Area  Wire harness  Key  Transponder key ECU assy  Transponder key amplifier  ECM . If the other codes are output.

05–1599 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CF–07 HOW TO PROCEED WITH TROUBLESHOOTING HINT:   Use this procedure to troubleshoot the engine immobiliser system. 5 and 7. proceed to C. (3) If the DTC (engine immobiliser system) reoccurs. proceed to B. Delete the DTC. Recheck for DTCs. (1) If the DTC does not reoccur. B Go to SFI or ECD SYSTEM (See page 05–290 or 05–517) C Go to step 8 A 5 (a) (b) (c) READ VALUE OF HAND–HELD TESTER (IMMOBILISER ECU (TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY) (SWITCH CONDITION)) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. 1 VEHICLE BROUGHT TO WORKSHOP 2 CUSTOMER PROBLEM ANALYSIS CHECK AND SYMPTOM CHECK (See page 05–1601) 3 CRANK ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 10 SECONDS 4 CHECK FOR DTC (a) (b) (c) Check for DTCs and note any codes that are output. Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester main switch ON. Select the item KEY SW in the DATA LIST and read its value displayed on the hand–held tester. Try to prompt the DTC (SFI system and engine immobiliser system) by simulating the original activity that the DTC suggested. (2) If the DTC (SFI system) reoccurs. Transponder key ECU: Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) Normal Condition Diagnostic Note KEY SW Un–lock warning switch signal /ON or OFF ON: Key is in ignition key cylinder OFF: No key is in ignition key cylinder – NG AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Go to DTC B2780 (See page 05–1613) . proceed to A. The hand–held tester should be used in step 4.

When problem is listed on problem symptoms table. proceed to B. REPAIR OR REPLACE 9 CONFIRMATION TEST END AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . B Go to step 8 A 7 (a) PERFORM TROUBLESHOOTING ACCORDING TO MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM Pre–check (See page 05–1602) (1) Inspect with the hand–held tester (ECU data monitor). (2) Inspect with the hand–held tester (ACTIVE TEST). proceed to A.05–1600 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM OK 6 (a) (b) PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE (See page 05–1612) When problem is not listed on problem symptoms table. Terminals of ECU (See page 05–1607) (b) 8 ADJUST.

05–1606 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CM–07 LOCATION LHD Models Transponder Key Amplifier (Transponder Key Coil) Transponder Key ECU Assy Security Indicator Driver Side R/B Assy ECM Unlock Warning Switch Assy Transponder Key ECU Assy Passenger Side R/B Assy RHD Models Transponder Key Amplifier (Transponder Key Coil) ECM Center J/B Unlock Warning Switch Assy B65753 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

(1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. even though the security indicator lamp does not come on. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. HINT: Refer to the hand–held tester operator’s manual for further details. The terminal arrangement of the DLC3 complies with the ISO 15031–3 and matches the ISO 9141–2/ISO 14230 format. When trouble occurs in the immobiliser system. Data of the immobiliser system and the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be read in the Data Link Connector 3 (DLC3) of the vehicle. the problem may be in the tester itself. turned the ignition switch ON and used the hand–held tester. The vehicle’s ECM uses the ISO 9141–2 (Euro– OBD)/ISO 14230 (M–OBD) communication protocol. (1) Connect the hand–held tester to DLC3. (b) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Inspect the DLC3. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . 2.05–1602 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0A–03 PRE–CHECK 1. the immobiliser system seems to be malfunctioning. (3) Erase DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. Using hand–held tester: CHECK DTC (a) Checking DTCs. Therefore. DTCs can be checked. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON. DLC3 B50154 Standard: Tester Connection Condition Specified Condition 7 (Bus + line) – 5 (Signal ground) During communication Pulse generation 4 (Chassis ground) – Body ground Always Below 1  5 (Signal ground) – Body ground Always Below 1  16 (B+) – Body ground Always 10 to 14 V HINT: If the screen displays UNABLE TO CONNECT TO VEHICLE after you have connected the cable of the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (a) DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM Description (1) The ECM controls the function of the immobiliser system on the vehicle. the problem may be on the vehicle side or the tester side. inspect the DLC3 of the original vehicle. (2) Turn the ignition switch ON.  If communication is normal when the tester is connected to other vehicle. (3) Read DTCs by following the prompts on the tester screen. (b) Clear the DTCs from memory. use the hand–held tester to check for a malfunction and repair it. so consult the Service Department listed in the tester’s instruction manual.  If communication is still impossible when the tester is connected to another vehicle.

etc. (1) Operating the hand–held tester to erase the codes (See the hand–held tester instruction book for operating instructions). (c) Read the DATA LIST. 15 Number of registered sub–key REGIST MAS CODE Number of registered master key/ min. (1) Prepare the hand–held tester. actuator. (3) Turn the ignition switch ON and push the hand–held tester switch ON. (4) Use the hand–held tester to check for DTCs and freeze frame data. all the DTCs and freeze frame data recorded in normal mode are erased. 0. So before switching modes. 0. Transponder key ECU: Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) Normal Condition KEY SW Un–lock warning switch signal/ ON or OFF OFF: Key is in Ignition key cylinder ON: No key is in Ignition key cylinder IG SW Ignition switch signal/ ON or OFF OFF: Ignition switch is ON or START position ON: Ignition switch is OFF or ON position IMMOBILISER Immobiliser system status/ SET or UNSET UNSET: Without key SET: Ignition switch ON RESPONSE Transponder chip data/ NG or OK NG: Data error OK: Data OK FRAME Transponder chip data/ NG or OK NG: Data error OK: Data OK SERIAL NUMBER Transponder chip data/ NG or OK NG: Data error OK: Data OK ENCRYPT CODE Transponder chip data/ NG or OK NG: Data error OK: Data OK STATUS Transponder chip data/ NG or OK NG: Data error OK: Data OK BCC Transponder chip signal/ NG or OK NG: Incorrect data sending OK: Correct data sending SUB KEY Sub key code signal/ NOMATCH or MATCH NOMATCH: Nomatch sub–key code is sent MATCH: Sub key code is sent MASTER KEY Master key code signal/ NOMATCH or MATCH NOMATCH: Nomatch Master key code is sent MATCH: Master key code is sent REGIST SUB CODE Number of registered sub–key/ min.05–1603 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 3. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. and make a note of them. (5) Confirm the details of the DTCs. 4. without parts removal. (b) Either of the following procedures will erase the DTCs and freeze frame data. max. according to the display on the tester. Reading the DATA LIST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. NOTICE: Hand–held tester only: When the diagnosis system is switched from normal mode to check mode. max. and make a note of them (For operating instructions. CHECK DIAGNOSIS (a) Using the hand–held tester. DATA LIST HINT: Using the DATA LIST displayed on the hand–held tester. see the hand–held tester instruction book). (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. (2) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3 under the instrument panel lower pad. 15 Number of registered master key AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) . sensor. always check the DTCs and freeze frame data. check for DTCs. you can read the value of the switch. (2) Disconnecting the battery terminals or ECU–B fuse.

05–1604 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM Item Measurement Item/ Display (Range) Normal Condition REG CODE SPACE Memory space for key codes registration/ NOT FUL or FULL NOT FUL: Possible to resister more key code FULL: Impossible to register key code any more ANTENNA COIL Antenna coil condition/ NORMAL or FAIL Normal: Antenna coil is normal FAIL: Antenna coil is abnormal 5. etc. (b) Turn the ignition switch ON. according to the display on the tester. without parts removal. (a) Connect the hand–held tester to the DLC3. Performing the ACTIVE TEST as the first step of troubleshooting is one way to shorten the labor time. VSV. ACTIVE TEST HINT: Performing the ACTIVE TEST using the hand–held tester allows you to operate the relay. actuator. (c) Perform the ACTIVE TEST. Transponder key ECU: Item Test Details SECURITY INDIC Turn security indicator ON/OFF AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) .

Transponder key amplifier Engine does not start 3. Key 2.05–1612 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 054CK–07 PROBLEM SYMPTOMS TABLE Symptom Suspected Area 1. Transponder key ECU assy AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) See Page 05–1618 05–1619 05–1620 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 05–1616 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 05–1613 05–1616 05–1621 05–1624 05–1625 .

05–1607 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 05B0B–02 TERMINALS OF ECU 1. the amplifier may have a malfunction. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. 10 ms/DIV.) Wiring Color Condition GND (I12–7) – Body ground GR–R – Body ground Specified Condition Below 1  Constant If the result is not as specified. there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY AMPLIFIER (COIL) I12 B65593 (a) Disconnect the I12 amplifier connector and check the resistance between the terminal of the wire harness side connector and body ground. Waveform 1 (Reference): Terminal CODE – GND Tool Setting 10 V/DIV. (b) Reconnect the I12 amplifier connector and check the resistance or voltage of each terminal of the connector. Condition Ignition switch ON .) Wiring Color Condition Specified Condition VC5 (I12–1) – GND (I12–7) Y–B – GR–R No key in ignition key cylinder  With key 0 V  10 to 14 V CODE(I12–4) – GND (I12–7) Y–G – GR–R No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 1 TXCT (I12–5) – GND (I12–7) L–R – GR–R No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 2 GND (I12–7) – Body ground GR–R – Body ground Below 1  Constant If the result is not as specified. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. (c) GND B55023 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Inspect using an oscilloscope..

4 V TXCT (T8–12) – AGND (T8–13) L–R – GR–R Ignition switch OFF  ON Waveform 1 CODE (T8–11) – AGND (T8–13) Y–G – GR–R Ignition switch OFF  ON Waveform 2 EFIO (T8–6) – AGND (T8–13) GR – GR–R Ignition switch OFF  ON Waveform 3 EFII (T8–7) – AGND (T8–13) W – GR–R Ignition switch OFF  ON Waveform 4 If the result is not as specified.05–1608 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM Waveform 2 (Reference): Terminal TXCT – GND Tool Setting 10 V/DIV. 10 ms/DIV. CHECK TRANSPONDER KEY ECU ASSY T8 B50659 (a) Disconnect the T8 ECU connector and check the voltage and resistance between each terminal of the wire harness side connector.) Wiring Color AGND (T8–13) – Body ground GR–R – Body ground Constant Below 1  W–R – W–B Constant 10 to 14 V IG (T8–2) – AGND (T8–13) B–W – GR–R Ignition switch OFF  ON KSW (T8–10) – AGND (T8–13) Y – GR–R +B (T8–1) – GND (T8–14) Condition No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Specified Condition 0 V  10 to 14 V 10 k or higher  Below 1  If the result is not as specified. the ECU may have a malfunction.) Wiring Color KSW (T8–10) – AGND (T8–13) Y – GR–R VC5 (T8–8) – AGND (T8–13) Condition Specified Condition No key in ignition key cylinder  With key 10 to 14 V  0 V Y–B – GR–R Ignition switch OFF  ON 0 V  4. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) ..6 to 5. Condition Ignition switch ON GND B55024 2. (b) Reconnect the T8 ECU connector and check the voltage between each terminal of the connector. there may be a malfunction on the wire harness side. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.

. 50 ms/DIV. Condition Ignition switch ON B69239 Waveform 2 (Reference): Terminal CODE – GND Tool Setting 10 V/DIV.. 50 ms/DIV. Condition Ignition switch ON GND B69241 Waveform 4 (Reference): GND B69242 AVENSIS REPAIR MANUAL (RM1018E) Terminal EFII – GND Tool Setting 5 V/DIV.05–1609 DIAGNOSTICS (c) GND – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM Inspect using an oscilloscope. Condition Ignition switch ON GND B69240 Waveform 3 (Reference): Terminal EFIO – GND Tool Setting 5 V/DIV... 20 ms/DIV. Condition Constant . 20 ms/DIV. Waveform 1 (Reference): Terminal TXCT – GND Tool Setting 5 V/DIV.

Standard: Symbols (Terminal No.05–1610 DIAGNOSTICS – ENGINE IMMOBILISER SYSTEM 3.) Wiring Color Condition Specified Condition IMI (E10–27) – E1 (E12–7) GR–R – BR No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 1 IMO (E10–26) – E1 (E12–7) W – BR No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 2 E1 (E12–1) – Body ground BR – Body ground Below 1  Constant 1CD–FTV. 1AZ–FE engine: E12 E13 E9 E10 B66228 (a) Disconnect the E10 and E12 ECM connectors and check the voltage or resistance between each terminal of the wire harness side connectors. Standard: Symbols (Terminal No. 1ZZ–FE .) Wiring Color *1 IMI (E10–30) – E1 (E12–7) GR – BR No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 1 *2 IMI (E10–27) – E1 (E11–1) GR – BR No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 1 *1 IMO (E10–29) – E1 (E12–7) W – BR No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 2 *2 IMO (E10–26) – E1 (E11–1) W– BR No key in ignition key cylinder  With key Waveform 2